JP7429068B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, the symbols displayed on a display device are displayed in a variable manner based on winnings in the starting slot, and when the symbol displayed on the display device becomes a jackpot symbol, a jackpot game state advantageous to the player is generated, and this jackpot game There is a gaming machine in which it is possible to win a large amount of prize balls by placing game balls into a prize opening that is controlled to open and close under certain conditions (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-064527

However, in conventional gaming machines, sufficient measures against malfunctions and the like have not been taken, and there is a risk that the reliability of the gaming machines may deteriorate.

The present invention has been made in view of these circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a highly reliable gaming machine.

Effective solutions to achieve the above objectives are presented below. In addition, the effects, etc. will be explained as necessary. Further, for ease of understanding, corresponding configurations and the like in the embodiments of the invention will be shown as appropriate, but the invention is not limited in any way.

In the invention according to claim 1,
In a gaming machine where a game is played by drawing a lottery that can be executed by hitting a game ball,
a first game area where a game ball is hit; a second game area where a game ball is hit in a game state different from the game state where the game ball is hit into the first game area;
a center accessory attached from the front to the front surface of the game panel in which the first game area and the second game area are formed, and a display that visually performs a display performance according to the result of the lottery through an opening. a device;
Equipped with
The center accessory has a first partition wall portion on the upper side when viewed from the front, which prevents the game balls from entering, and has a second partition wall portion and a warp entrance capable of receiving the game balls flowing down on the left side when viewed from the front. , a sorting unit that can roll game balls at a position in front of the display device that can be seen through the opening and behind the front surface of the game panel is provided on the lower side when viewed from the front;
The game ball received from the warp entrance is configured to be discharged from the warp exit communicating with the warp entrance to a first rollable part in which the game ball can roll,
The sorting unit is capable of accepting only the game balls hit into the second game area, and also distributes the game balls from the second rollable part that can roll the received game balls and the second rollable part. and a fall prevention wall that prevents the game balls from falling, and the second transfer unit is configured such that the game balls received in the distribution unit are received into either a specific reception port or a first loss port provided on the player side. A fallable part in which the fall prevention wall of the movable part is not provided and the game ball can fall is provided on the player side of the second rollable part,
When a game ball is received into the specific receiving port, a specific detection that can give an advantageous state to the player is performed and the game ball is ejected to the rear side of the gaming machine, whereas a game ball is received into the first losing port. When the game ball is accepted into the first losing port, unlike when the game ball is received into the specific receiving port, the specific detection is not performed and the player is not given any of the advantageous conditions, and the game ball is received into the first losing port. It is discharged to the rear side of the machine,
The second game area where a game ball is hit in a game state different from the game state where a game ball is hit into the first game area is located between the first game area and the center accessory attached from the front to the front surface of the game panel. Located on the opposite side of the gaming area in the left and right direction,
The second rollable part is the fallable part from which the game ball can fall from the second rollable part , and is capable of unfavorable falling so that when the game ball falls, it can be received into the first loss opening. We have multiple departments on the player side.
When the game ball hit into the second game area is received by the distribution unit and rolls on the second rollable part, the game ball that is to roll on the second rollable part is transferred to the distribution unit. The game ball is configured to be able to pass through a special cylindrical passage provided on the upstream side of the unit , and the game balls passing through the special cylindrical passage are configured to be visible from the front .

According to the invention according to claim 1, a highly reliable gaming machine can be provided.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of the pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind, with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, as seen from the front; FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as seen from the top front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the bottom front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front with the ball feeding unit disassembled, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and tamper prevention member removed. (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish unit seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the back. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit seen from the front. It is a perspective view of a dish base unit in a dish unit seen from the back. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a front perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a top view of the production operation unit in the dish unit as seen from the advancing and retreating direction of the production operation button unit. (a) is a perspective view of the production operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the production operation unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main members and viewed from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the production operation ring of the production operation unit seen from the front from above, and (b) is a perspective view of the production operation ring seen from the bottom and front. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the bottom front. (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit seen from the back. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the front right. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the front left. It is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit of the production operation unit as seen from the front and above. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation button unit as seen from the lower front. (a) is a sectional view of the production operation button unit when the press operation part is in the lowered position, and (b) is a sectional view of the production operation button unit when the press operation part is in the raised position. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between a performance operation ring and a rotational drive unit in a left side view of the performance operation unit. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the performance operation ring and the performance operation ring decoration board in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the press operation section. (a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the press operation section is in the raised position, and (c) is a central press operation section of the press operation section. It is a front view of the dish unit when pressed. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the back, and (c) is a state with the top lower cover removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front and above. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decorative board. It is a front view of the main body frame of a pachinko machine. It is a back view of the main body frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from behind. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the front in the main body frame, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit viewed from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from below. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit seen from the back. (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the spherical tank with tank rails and the like assembled as seen from the front top, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front bottom. FIG. 101(a) is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 101(a); It is an explanatory view showing an area where game balls overflowing from a ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side. FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 107 viewed from the front right. FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 107 viewed from the front left. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from behind. FIG. 3 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from a function display unit on the main control board. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory etc. are made transparent. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. 108 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 107. FIG. 108 is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 107. FIG. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. It is an explanatory diagram showing a channel of game balls on the right side in the front unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls circulating through the first guide passage in the guide passage group, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls circulating through the second guide passage in the guide passage group. be. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls accepted into the accessory prize opening, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the third sorting device in (a) from a plane, and (c) FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the parts of the second sorting device in FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing the timing of the operation of the accessory prize opening, the first sorting device, and the second sorting device according to the type of “small win”. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the attacker unit, and is a sectional view taken along the line EE in (a). (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams showing embodiments of guide passage groups different from those in FIG. 117. (e) and (f) are explanatory views showing further different embodiments of guide passage groups. (a) is a front view of the out ball detection unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out ball detection unit, (c) is a rear view of the out ball detection unit, and (d) is a back view of the out ball detection unit. (e) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit seen from the back; (f) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit as seen from a lower right front position; (g) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit viewed from the lower right rear. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the out-ball detection unit disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the out-ball detection unit disassembled and seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the game panel and the out ball detection unit, and (b) is a perspective view showing the out ball detection unit in contact with the game panel. It is an enlarged sectional view taken from the right side when assembled to a game board and cut vertically at the center of the right sensor at the exit. It is a perspective view showing the vicinity of the exit from the front in a state where the game board is assembled. (a) is a perspective view of the light guide plate production unit of the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the light guide plate production unit seen from the back. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the pattern board in the light guide plate production unit from the front. (a) is an explanatory view showing a state where the first pattern of the light guide plate is emitted, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the second pattern of the light guide plate is emitted. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the second picture is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate performance unit of the back unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the first picture is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate of the light guide plate performance unit of the back unit. 1 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. (a) is an enlarged view of a part of the area where SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and (b) is a view of this enlarged view from the right side of the main control board. This is a schematic diagram (a) of the surface (mounting surface) of a board in which SMD type electronic components, which are substitutes for lead type electronic components, are concentrated in a predetermined area. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram (b) showing the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of a board that has been miniaturized. 138(a) is an enlarged view showing the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board; FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a main control board box of the main control unit. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side power-on processing. 143 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 142. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of error display processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting value confirmation display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. 149 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the processing at power-on of the payout control unit in FIG. 148. 149 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the processing when the payout control unit is powered on after FIG. 149. It is a flowchart showing an example of payout control unit timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electric accessory control process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the first starting port passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the preliminary determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the second starting port passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table used for lottery processing regarding jackpots, (B) is a jackpot symbol determination table used for lottery processing regarding types of jackpots, and (C) is a hit determination table used for lottery processing regarding jackpot types. It is a small winning symbol design determination table used for lottery processing regarding types. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the first fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol stop process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot control process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit start process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. This is an example of an error notification mode. FIG. 3 is a timing chart showing the timing of volume adjustment and sound output suppression in a predetermined frequency band. FIG. 3 is a timing chart showing the timing of volume adjustment and sound output suppression in a predetermined frequency band. FIG. 3 is a timing chart showing the timing of volume adjustment and sound output suppression in a predetermined frequency band. This is a table showing the winning probability etc. according to the setting values of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a procedure for changing a setting value. This is a variation pattern table used for determining variation patterns. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a right detection sensor is provided in the first guide passage. This is a specific example of a warning performance using the right detection sensor. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which detection sensors are provided in a first guide passage and a second guide passage. This is a specific example of a warning effect when a warning effect is executed using a right detection sensor and a left detection sensor. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a ball clogging elimination hole is provided in a first guide passage and a second guide passage. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a ball clogging elimination hole is provided in a first guide passage and a second guide passage. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second outlet is provided near the entrances of the first guide passage and the second guide passage. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a second outlet is provided near the exit inside the first guide passage. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of execution of calculations when an abnormality occurs. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of execution of calculations when an abnormality occurs. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a second outlet and a third outlet are provided separately from the outlet. It is an explanatory view showing the execution state of arithmetic operation when a second outlet and a third outlet are provided separately from the outlet. This is an emission color pattern table in which emission color patterns of a light guide plate are set. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a plurality of decorations are provided around the display area of the effect display device. This is a specific example of a performance using a light guide plate and a plurality of decorations when performing a light emission performance. This is a pattern displayed on the light guide plate and the performance display device when the imitation performance is executed. This is a specific example of the performance on the light guide plate and the performance display device when performing the imitation performance. 3 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from a main control board to a peripheral control board. 3 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from a main control board to a peripheral control board. 3 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from a main control board to a peripheral control board. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure for setting information determination processing executed by the main control MPU. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting value suspension suggestion performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of image data that combines a display mode of a suspension notice effect and a display mode of a setting value suspension suggestion effect. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting value continuous suggestion performance. This is a table showing the winning probability etc. according to the setting values of the gaming machine. This is a table showing the winning probability etc. according to the setting values of the gaming machine. 7 is a time chart illustrating a monitoring state for fraudulent acts during a setting change of setting values. 12 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent acts when fraudulent acts are not monitored during confirmation display of set values. 11 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity when a part of the screen is partially monitored for fraudulent activity while setting value confirmation display is being performed. 12 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity when a part of the display is partially monitored for fraudulent activity while changing settings of setting values. It is a front view of a game board of a modification. This is an example of a table used in lottery processing. This is a modification of the setting value suggestion effect. FIG. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the Pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the Pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the Pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the back. Figure 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position, and Figure 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. be. Moreover, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Figure 11 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame disassembled, and Figure 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine showing the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed from the front of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven. In addition, what is composed of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is referred to as a front frame.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right and extend vertically, and the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20. the outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the outer frame upper member 30 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and is connected to the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side as viewed from the front.

Further, when the door frame 3 closes the main body frame 4, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4, and a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is closed. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, allowing the player to hear deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game balls. It is equipped with a handle 182 that is operated by the player to drive the ball B into the gaming area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and when a player participation type performance is executed, the player can operate the performance operation section 301. The player can now participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the performance operation section 301.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main body frame base unit 500 that is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed; a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game ball received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 that includes a payout control board 633 in addition to a power board 630 that includes a payout unit 560 for paying out balls B to the player and a power switch 630a that can power on the pachinko machine 1. , a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. We are prepared.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. This is for discharging or discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed into a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is removably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall in an openable and closable manner at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side, and a door frame 3 is attached so that the open front side can be closed. is installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311, a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) is provided, an effect display device 1600 which is placed in the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and an effect display device 1600 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100. A front unit 2000 is provided, and a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is equipped with various performance units that can perform movable performances and light-emitting performances depending on the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined benefit ( For example, it includes a general winning hole 2001, a first starting hole 2002, a normal winning hole 2003, a second starting hole 2004, and a big winning hole 2005 for giving a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front side of the game panel 1100. A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

A game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted into or passes through the general winning hole 2001, first starting hole 2002, normal winning hole 2003, second starting hole 2004, big winning hole 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. Thus, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600, and displays a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600, a back performance on the light guide plate performance unit 3100, etc. The players can be entertained by having the unit 3200 perform a light emitting effect.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Moreover, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 has a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other left and right and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. The upper outer frame member 30 whose upper ends are connected to each other, the lower outer frame assembly 40 which connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, and the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30. It includes an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 on the same axis. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side as viewed from the front.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, when viewed from the front. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 on the same axis, and are attached to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper end of the right side of the left outer frame member 11. and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side of the outer frame left member 11.

The left outer frame member 11 has a constant cross-sectional shape and extends vertically, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flat and recessed to the right in the rear part of the left side surface divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess part 11a that is recessed flat to the right on the right side surface from the part opposite to the recess part 11a. It includes a bulged portion 11b that bulges out in the direction, and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulged portion 11b. The outer frame left member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the recessed portion 11a and the bulged portion 11b, and is reduced in weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The left outer frame member 11 is formed in a shape that is bilaterally symmetrical to a right outer frame member 21 of a right outer frame assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal fixing part 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing part 12a, and a horizontal fixing part A pair of flat-shaped lower lateral fixing parts 12c extend downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing part 12b on the left side of the upper lateral fixing part 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 has the lower horizontal fixing part 12c on the rear side inserted into the hollow part 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing part 12a abutting the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw from the outside of the left side of the outer frame left member 11 into the lower side fixing portion 12c with the rear lower side fixing portion 12c in contact with the right side of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing part 12a abut against the lower surface of the left end side of the upper outer frame member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing part 12b into the notch 30a on the left side of the upper outer frame member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 12a and the upper horizontal fixing part 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the left outer frame member 11 and the left end of the lower outer frame assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 13a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal part that extends upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing part 13a and extends backward from the horizontal fixing part 13a. The fixing part 13b, the flat lower horizontal fixing part 13c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing part 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing part, and the lower horizontal fixing part 13c extending downward from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing part 13b. The contact portion 13d is a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends briefly to the contact portion 13d. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 13d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the left outer frame member 11, and also brings the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b into contact with the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 13a aligned with the lower end of the left outer frame member 11, screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing part 13b from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. It is attached to the left frame member 11. In addition, the lower left connecting member 13 allows the horizontal fixing part 13a to come into contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing part 13c into the notch part 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing part 13a and the lower horizontal fixing part 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. A lower hook member 25 is attached to the lower left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 has a constant cross-sectional shape and extends vertically, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed to the left in the rear part of the right side which is divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 21a that is recessed flatly to the left on the left side from a part opposite to the recess 21a. It includes a bulged portion 21b that bulges out in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulged portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the recessed portion 21a and the bulged portion 21b, and its weight is reduced due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The right outer frame member 21 is formed to have a left-right symmetrical shape with the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 22a extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-lateral fixing part 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing part 22a, and a horizontal fixing part A pair of flat-shaped lower lateral fixing parts 22c extend downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing part 22b on the right side of the upper lateral fixing part 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 has a lower horizontal fixing part 22c on the rear side inserted into the hollow part 21c of the outer frame right member 21, a horizontal fixing part 22a in contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and a front side and by screwing a screw from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21 into the lower side fixing portion 22c with the rear lower side fixing portion 22c in contact with the left side of the outer frame right member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21. In addition, the upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing part 22a abut against the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 22a and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 23a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped upper part that extends upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing part 23a and extends backward from the horizontal fixing part 23a. The horizontal fixing part 23b, the flat lower horizontal fixing part 23c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing part, and the left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b. The contact portion 23d is a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends in a short direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and also brings the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b into the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing the screw into the upper horizontal fixing part 23b from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 23a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. In addition, the lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut against the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch 41a on the right side of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing part 23a and the lower horizontal fixing part 23c.

The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are hooked to an outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hooking member 24 includes a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21, and a flat mounting portion 24a that extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. It includes a flat plate-shaped hook portion 24b on which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hooking member 25 includes a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. There is a flat plate-shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion hole that passes through the hooking piece 25b back and forth and allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted therethrough. The opening 25c is provided.

[2-2. Upper outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame upper member 30 has approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21, has a constant thickness in the vertical direction, extends in the left-right direction, and is made of wood. is formed by. The upper outer frame member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of a lower outer frame member 41 of a lower outer frame assembly 40, which will be described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted and attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends, respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed relative to the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to this mounting step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The lower outer frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right directions, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 than the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a lower outer frame member 41 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain front member 42 is disposed in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain front member 42. There is also a box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that extends left and right and is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the front. A mechanism 44 is provided.

The outer frame lower member 41 has approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21, has a constant thickness in the vertical direction, extends in the left-right direction, and is made of wood. is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted and attached to the notches 41a at both left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear of the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end. This recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain interior space 40a formed by the curtain front member 42 and the curtain rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to its height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 with the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 to form a part of the curtain plate interior that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain front member 42 is provided with an elongated opening 42a on the front surface near the right end, penetrating back and forth and extending left and right.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front curtain member 42 to its front surface, the rear curtain member 43 cooperates with the front curtain member 42 to form a curtain inner space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right, projects upward, and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a, in the left-right center portion of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end thereof is positioned upwardly toward the rear from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting tube portion 43a in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 of the length of the entire rear curtain plate member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire rear curtain plate member 43. It is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of this connecting cylinder portion 43a, and the speaker unit It is in communication with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B stays between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent them from being pinched.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting section 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward at the right side of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting section 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d extends upward from the rear side and right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projects forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and slopes so that its upper surface is positioned upward as it goes rearward. A portion 44e is provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position that coincides with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game balls B that have entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

This ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from being inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. The vertical wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized tools from entering. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool were to come into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bend upward, it would come into contact with the forwardly protruding upper end protrusion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from occurring through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60.

By the way, when the rear end of the placing part 44a is provided with the standing wall part 44d, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen onto the placing part 44a for some reason may be removed from the standing wall part. 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving backward, making it easier for the game balls B to stay on the placing portion 44a. If the game balls B remain on the mounting portion 44a, the game balls B may be caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is removed between the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first one. Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (to the rear of the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions on the upper surfaces of the front curtain member 42 and the rear curtain member 43, and closes the opening 42a of the front curtain member 42 from the rear side. A port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth is attached to the inside of the curtain front member 42 so as to sandwich the grill member 46 and close the opening 42a. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 come into contact with the lower ends of the door frame 3 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punched metal with numerous small holes. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders, and communicates the interior space 40a (enclosure 624) of the curtain plate with the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. As a result, rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (towards the player). That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The sealing member 48 is compressed by being sandwiched between the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This prevents the sound inside the speaker enclosure from leaking between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2, viewed from the front and above, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 21(a), viewed from the front and below. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge member 51 that is attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and an outer frame upper hinge member 51 that is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided with a lock member 52 and a mounting screw 53 that attaches the lock member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing part 51a that is horizontally extended, is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing part 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extension part 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the front extension part 51b toward the left and right center of the front extension part 51b toward the front and passes through it vertically, and an upper fixing part. A flat horizontal fixing part 51d extends downward from the left side of the front extension part 51a, and a flat horizontal fixing part 51d extends downward from the left edge of the front extension part 51b to the area where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. It includes a flat plate-shaped end wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 within the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and a rear end extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock body 52a includes a rod-shaped elastic portion 52c that is elastically deformable and extends obliquely to the left front, and an attachment hole 52d that penetrates vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 at a portion on the rear side of the bearing groove 51c using an attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock main body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is at the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The front end of the locking member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction to rotate leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame hinge pin 512 of the main body frame hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operating piece 52b. Then, by operating the operating piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retreated from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state where it is completely passed through. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 18. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal part 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped raised part 60b that rises upward from a part on the left side of the horizontal part 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal part 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating the horizontal part 60a vertically and having a size that allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed into a trapezoid with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed into a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the center in the vertical direction. This outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a left-side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the upright portion 60b in the front-rear direction, and to extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U-shape. This discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear part of the horizontal part 60a is placed on the mounting part 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screws (not shown) are installed. It is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43 by. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with screws (not shown). This outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d is aligned with the first discharge port 44b of the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. To be more specific, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that fell between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually becomes narrower, it rolls toward the rear where the gap is wider, and it can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a surface view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

The door frame 3 is approximately the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed into a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front via the main body frame 4. It is being The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game balls. It is equipped with a handle 182 that is operated by the player to drive the ball B into the gaming area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 with a rectangular outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 that is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visually closes the gaming area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 a handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100; a pan unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100; the door frame left side unit 400, which is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 which has a square (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and has a door window 101a penetrating the front and back, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle attachment member 102 attached below, the speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear, and the speaker duct 103 attached near the right end of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 is attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 is attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 105 when viewed from the rear. A door frame relay board cover 107 covers the handle rear relay board 106, which covers the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side. It includes a handle rear relay board cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101. A lower frame hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side in rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 and is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5. This is for guiding the game balls B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is launched into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. This is for playing a game where you type.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 31(b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main parts and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main parts and seen from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hingedly attached to the main body frame 4 on the left side when viewed from the front, and closes the front side of the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The gaming area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 which has a rectangular flat shape and whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 which is attached to the lower right front side of the door frame base 101 and to which a handle unit 180 is attached. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay board 104 installed at the rear lower part of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 when viewed from the rear, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the rear lower part of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side and covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. We are prepared.

Furthermore, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A lower frame hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side in rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a plate unit 200 at the lower front of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 400 at the front left outside of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Furthermore, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 has a square (rectangular) shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates the door frame base 101 in the front and back, and has a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. In the door window 101a, the upper side forming the inner periphery and both left and right sides are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is located above and below the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 of the height in the direction. In this way, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed into a frame shape with the door window 101a penetrating back and forth. This door frame base 101 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and slanted so that the left end side projects slightly further forward than the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. There is an insertion recess 101c that is recessed from the rear to the front near the right end in front view, into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and an insertion recess 101c that passes through the cylinder lock 130 in the front and back directions. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated back and forth on the left side when viewed from the front, and the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are inserted forward. A ball feeding opening 101e for facing the ball is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is located to the left of the center in the lateral direction and penetrates in the front and back at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball for the lower tray faces forward. A passage opening 101f, an upper plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in a front view and allow the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward, and the door. The window 101a includes a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner periphery of the window 101a, and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage hole 101g) when viewed from the front and that penetrate through the door frame base 101 in the front and back. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the plurality of slits 101i are arranged so that the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Furthermore, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j that penetrates from the front to the rear below the door window 101a and above the handle attachment seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the pan unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later, is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting parts]
The handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching a handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle attachment member 102 includes a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a from the rear end of the tube portion 102a, and a tube portion 102b. A plurality of (three in this example) protrusions 102c protrude into the portion 102a, extend over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a, and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a. , a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d connecting the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and arranged in plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment surface 101b with screws, with the rear surface of the flange portion 102b in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment surface 101b on the door frame base 101.

The cylindrical portion 102a has an inner diameter slightly larger than an outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided at the top of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided at the bottom of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three protrusions 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c on the handle base 181. Therefore, in the handle attachment member 102, the base 181a of the handle base 181 can be inserted into the cylindrical part 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

In addition, since the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle attachment member 102 can be attached to the slanted handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is in an inclined state extending to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused. Through the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211, it is possible to guide the player to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the player).

Further, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is disposed to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so that it extends to the left end.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 32, 33, and the like. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and connects the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (Fig. and FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an inverted L-shape in which a rectangle extending left and right is combined on the right side of the upper part of the rectangle extending up and down, when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame sub-relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying connections between the window interior decoration part decorative board 413, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4, The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are assembled, the vertically extending parts of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear side of the remaining portion of the door frame sub relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 with the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle rear relay board 106 is covered with the handle rear relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover/handle rear relay board cover/cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (the portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the sides. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed into a box shape with an open front and left side in front view. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 that cover the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and cannot be opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the interior from the left side where it is located, and connected to these terminals.

The handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and carries a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the pan unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and has an opening for passing a wiring cable through near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the bottom surface in the left and right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, thereby reinforcing the flat door frame base 101 and imparting rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other, and a left and right reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 to each other. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end side is attached to a position above the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 that are vertically spaced apart from each other on the back side of the right reinforcing frame 112 are engaged with the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4. The hook member 116 is provided with a hook member 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. A plurality of insertion holes are formed in the right reinforcing frame 112, which are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-back direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted through these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends left and right with a vertical width that is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetration part 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position that corresponds to the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetration portion 114b is formed at a position that corresponds to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear pieces that are spaced apart from each other laterally and are formed in the shape of a rectangular flat plate that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and each of the pair of rear pieces facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extension parts. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed into a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. In the cylinder mounting frame 115, the left rear piece is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of this cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating back and forth. A door frame hook 652 of a locking unit 650 is hooked to these hook members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, right reinforcing frame 112, upper reinforcing frame 113, intermediate reinforcing frame 114, cylinder mounting frame 115, and hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left, right, and upper sides of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 using a plurality of screws (not shown). When this door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch part 114a and the penetrating part 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper plate ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1g. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a collar attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123, and a lock spring 124 that biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a that is rectangular in front view, and flat protruding pieces 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. A mounting piece 121a of the hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a cylindrical metal rod bent into an L-shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends from the upper side. A horizontally extending portion that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape and is placed around a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the collar member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending lower end portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. By coming into contact with the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protrusion piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

In the door frame hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 cannot be inserted into or pulled out from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510. can. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the upper door frame hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be hingedly rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. Thereby, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 allow the door frame 3 to be hinge-rotated relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a that is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and is square in front view, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protrudes downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is located at a portion of the protruding piece 125b that is coaxial with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. installed.

This door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 in a hinge-rotatable manner relative to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can be done.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 to be described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening, closing and locking. The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 that extends back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 that is attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates when the key is rotated.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and its rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed into a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical tube shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is formed from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. It has a pair of notches. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and when the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches, the rotation is transmitted. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is approximately aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the dish unit body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22, etc.).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and FIG. 34(b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and tamper prevention member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can feed the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4, and can also feed the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball extraction button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which the game balls B are fed from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens on the lower side of the inlet 141a. A game ball enters through the entry opening 141a of the box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover 141 and the box-shaped front cover 141 with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extracting member 143 having a partition part 143a that partitions between an entry port 141a and a ball extracting port 141b on the rear side of the ball extracting member 141, and a rear cover 142 for each game ball B on the partition part 143a of the ball extracting member 143. A ball feeding member 144 rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, in this ball feeding unit 140, when viewed from the front, a ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance port 141a, and a ball extracting member 143 is arranged on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 143 on the left side of the ball extraction port 141b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. Further, the front cover 141 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 The ball removal guiding path 241c is formed so as to close a portion opened to the rear on the upstream end side from the rear side.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b below the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144; Around a shaft that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball extraction port 141b, and has a lower end extending in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b that is rotatably supported by the rotating rod portion 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b located below the operating rod portion 143c. A weight portion 143d protrudes from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34(a)). The actuating rod 143c is located at the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, which is moved downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball extracting button 222 of the plate unit 200 via the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. (upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking part 144a which is fan-shaped in plan view and is centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, facing toward the entry port 141a and the partition part 143a of the ball extracting member 143, and a blocking part 144a that is fan-shaped in plan view. It includes a ball holding part 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod part 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding part 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is sized to be able to hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is located eccentrically from the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

This ball feeding member 144 has a supply position where the blocking part 144a faces the partition part 143a and at the same time the ball holding part 144b faces the direction in which it communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding part 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the batted ball supply port 142a and enters onto the partition part 143a from the entrance port 141a. The game ball B is stopped from moving toward the ball holding part 144b (hitting ball supply port 142a) by the blocking part 144a, and remains on the partition part 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a, and the end of the ball holding part 144b on the rod part 144c side closes the batted ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

The ball feeding unit 140 also includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (energized), and a tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that swings in the vertical direction. The ball feeding crank 147 rotates around an axis extending in the front-back direction by the movement of the ball feeding member 144, and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operating rod 146 includes an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feed operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feed crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth. It is being In the ball feeding operation rod 146, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is drawn toward (upward) the ball feeding solenoid 145 by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation rod 146 starts feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, causing the left end near the ball feed crank 147 to move downward, centering on the right end. It rotates and returns to its initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146, which is close to the ball feeding crank 147, swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 is capable of engaging with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a shaft portion 147b that extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35(b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball feeding member 144.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding actuating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normally), the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip thereof is positioned downward. Now, the ball feeding member 144 is in the feeding position. Furthermore, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and its tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is deactivated (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball firing device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the shooting solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 137) of the dispensing control board 633.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is subjected to a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, either by the ball extracting member 143 which is rotatably supported by a shaft, or by the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, which is operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball extracting button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since its rotation is restricted, in a normal state, the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction opening 141b, and the ball extraction opening 141b side is separated from the entrance 141a. The game ball B will not enter the ball.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball extraction button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate ball extraction slider slides downward together with the operation transmission section, and as the operation transmission section moves downward, the operation rod 143c will also move relatively downward. When the actuating rod 143c moves downward together with the actuation transmitting part, the ball extraction member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition part 143a moves from between the entry port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to form a partition. is canceled. As a result, the game ball B that entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the tray unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 in which the operation transmitting part 242b with which the operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 contacts is formed is biased upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if the ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, preventing damage to the ball extraction member 143, etc. 143a can prevent it from rebounding.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35(b) etc.) formed in the upper right corner of the batted ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142 and recessed forward. A tamper-proofing member 148 is mounted within the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proofing member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right when viewed from the front, and has an upper piece part 148a and an upper piece part 148a that are vertically separated approximately at the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It includes a lower piece part 148b and an inclined part 148c formed in a C-chamfer shape at the tip sides (right end side in front view) of the opposing sides of the upper piece part 148a and the lower piece part 148b. . The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148 so that its right end in front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-evident member 148. Thereby, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The tamper prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the batted ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this fraud prevention member 148, an illegal game ball B with a string attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball firing device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illegal game ball B. The force of the illegal game ball B fired (hitted) by the ball launcher 540 when a fraudulent act is performed in which the illegal game ball B is moved in and out of the first starting port etc. by manipulating the attached string. After inserting the string attached to the illegal game ball B between the upper piece part 148a and the lower piece part 148b, The ball can be cut at the narrowed part, and it is possible to prevent illegal acts using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1k. Foal cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36(a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36(b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5. This is for guiding the game balls B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152.

The foul cover unit 150 has a penetrating ball passage 150a that penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in front view and communicates the normal guiding path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 with the upper tray ball supply port of the tray unit; A full-ball socket 150b is provided that opens rearward at the lower right side of the penetrating ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can communicate with the full-ball guide path of the lower full-ball path unit of the main body frame 4. .

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and although it is fired by the ball firing device of the main body frame 4, it does not reach the inside of the game area 5a. A foul ball socket 150c that receives game balls B (foul balls), a full ball socket 150b that opens toward the front near the lower right corner in front view, and a foul ball socket 150c that receives game balls B. It is provided with a ball discharge port 150d that discharges the ball forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full ball socket 150b, the foul ball socket 150c, and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. A full ball socket 150b and a foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by a unit body 151 and a lid member 152.

The foul cover unit 150 also includes a flat movable piece 153 that forms part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit body 151 and the lid member 152; A full-fill detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the inside of the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls B and the game balls B are no longer ejected from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower tray 202 side, this foul cover unit 150 remains in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates in this manner, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to inform the players, game hall attendants, etc. of this fact and urge them to relieve the lower tray 202 from being full.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening/closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (described later) of the main body frame 4. The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is provided with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can contact (see FIG. 91). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as it goes downward. By abutting the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 with this door opening/closing contact part 150f, the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit attachment part 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. This glass unit 160 allows the playing area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be visible from the player side (front) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and also allows the player to view the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. This closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner circumferential shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment part 101h, and a glass frame 161 whose outer periphery is a glass frame that closes the inside of the frame of the glass frame 161. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. A mounting member 163 is provided.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a that extend outward in a flat plate form from positions below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band that protrudes downward from the lower end and extends along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with the protrusion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end and the rear end of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and back so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 includes a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped base 163a that protrudes from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protrusion 163b. The glass unit attachment members 163 are rotatably attached to the outer sides of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, rotate the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 so that the protrusion 163b is located above the base 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. At the top, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit attachment member 163 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by reversing the procedure described above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, when the protruding part 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base 163a, the protruding part 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protrusion 163b will not rotate to a position higher than the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction on rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat main body part 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body part 171, and is spaced apart from side to side. A pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 are provided.

The main body portion 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when it is attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 has an upper end formed in a shape along the lower end of the gaming area 5a on the gaming board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the upper end of the main body part 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so that it does not protrude into the gaming area 5a when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed into a shallow box shape opened to the rear by the main body portion 171 and the rear projection piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 171 is formed so as to align with a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (game ball B fired by the ball firing device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projection piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game ball B passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. This does not impede the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is now inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a from the lower front side of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is something.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 that is attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 that is rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a handle that covers the front end side of the handle 182. A disc-shaped cover pedestal 183 is attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration board 184 is attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and a handle decoration board 184 is mounted to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184. and a handle cover 185 attached to a cover pedestal 183.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, a handle 182 attached to the front end, and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181, and attached to the outer periphery. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 that meshes with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 is sandwiched between the base 186 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189.

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the sensing shaft 189a of the steering wheel rotation detection sensor 189 is connected to the inner base 186 at one end and the transmission gear 188 through the transmission gear 188. An auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction is provided.

The handle unit 180 also includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a handle touch sensor 192 whose distal end protrudes outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. An operation sensor 194 is provided.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a recessed part from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. There are three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are placed in each of the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle attachment member 102.

The handle 182 has four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d that are spaced apart from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction and protrude outward, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extend in an arc shape as a center and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 protrudes rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slits 182e and is locked. A locking protrusion 182f is provided.

The four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. To be more specific, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front, which is the part that most protrudes from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, and bulges outward. The side surface in the direction of is concave (gouged) so as to curve inward. The second protrusion 182b has a part that most protrudes from the general outer circumferential surface of the handle 182 and is separated from the most protruding part of the first protrusion 182a by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees in the clockwise direction. protrudes slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in a clockwise direction at the most protruding portion that bulges outward, and an opposite side surface in a counterclockwise direction curves inward. The first protrusion 182a is recessed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

The third protrusion 182c has a portion that most protrudes from the general outer circumferential surface of the handle 182, which is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b by a rotation angle of approximately 70 degrees in the clockwise direction. It stands out at about half the height. The third protrusion 182c has side surfaces on both sides inclined in a substantially straight line, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is sloped more gently than the opposite side surface in the counterclockwise direction. The fourth protrusion 182d is such that the most protruding part from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding part of the third protrusion 182c by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees in the clockwise direction, and is further away from the first protrusion 182a. It stands out somewhat high. This fourth protrusion 182d has side surfaces on both sides inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed into a substantially isosceles triangle.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed into a disk shape and includes three attachment bosses 183a that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The three attachment bosses 183a pass through the slits 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the attachment boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the attachment boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby regulating the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges out roundly forward and is transparent. The handle cover 185 is provided with a three-dimensional lens member made of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is decorated with light by appropriately lighting the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

This handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located further back than the left end side in plan view, and faces outward (opening side). The handle unit 180 attached through the handle unit 180 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip thereof is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and can perform rotational operations without feeling uncomfortable.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball firing device 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 180, and when a player touches the handle 182, etc., it detects the static electricity that acts on the player, and prevents the player from touching the handle 182, etc. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the player's contact, the detection by the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the solenoid fires with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. In other words, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from playing a game by rotating the handle 182 in a way different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, and the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 Firing solenoid 542 is deactivated. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning to the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is rotated most clockwise when viewed from the front. When the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a with the greatest force (so-called "right-handed hitting"), the fourth protrusion 182d is the same as the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is approximately the same as that of the first protrusion 182a, the player can comfortably maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position by changing the handle 182 by using the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a. It is possible to reduce the player's sense of fatigue and suppress a decline in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the dish unit seen from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into its main parts and seen from the back. The plate unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front side of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 that stores game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and a tray unit 200 that is arranged below the upper tray 201 and stores game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a. A lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and a plate base unit 210 attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 attached to the front of the plate base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper plate body 212 that is attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has an upper plate 201, and a plate unit base 212 on the right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base 213 that is attached to and protrudes forward, a dish unit relay board 214 that is attached to the right side of the attachment base 213, and a ball rental operation unit 220 that is attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213. It includes an upper plate ball extraction pre-unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213 and an upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 attached to the rear of the upper plate ball extraction pre-unit 230.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate main body 251 which is attached to the lower front of the plate unit base 211 and has the lower plate 202, and the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. a lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251; a plate upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit body 252 spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions; It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 which are attached below the plate left upper decoration unit 270 and the plate right upper decoration unit 275, respectively.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotary operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The presentation operation unit 300 includes a presentation operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed inside the presentation operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 attached to the upper surface of the operation section base 320. an annular production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation section 302; a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation section 302; and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation section 302. It includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 to which the operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached.

In addition, the production operation unit 300 includes a production operation ring decoration board 352 that emits light to decorate the production operation ring 330, a decoration board cover 353 that covers the upper side of the production operation ring decoration board 352, and a display operation ring decoration board 353 that is attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. a vibration speaker 354, a production operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the production operation ring 330, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. It is equipped with.

The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction so that the top surface of the production operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward. An upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the production operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower plate 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is formed into a container shape that bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center on the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and is open upward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion that bulges out most forwardly from the left end to the right at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes from the most swollen part to the right side in front view, and has a guide passage section 201a (FIG. 46) whose depth in the front and back direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201, including the guide passage section 201a, is inclined such that the right end side is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage section 201a in front view is sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper tray 201 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper tray 201 moves the game ball from a position below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper tray ball feed port 211e. It is inclined so as to become lower toward a position slightly below the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game balls B can be transferred from the right end side of the guide passage section 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage section 201a is equipped with a metal grounding fitting 201b that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball The static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower tray 202 is disposed below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing game balls B, and is provided with a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a that vertically penetrates through the bottom wall and allows the game balls B to be discharged. The lower plate ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed by a lower plate ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially rectangular shape extending laterally in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that passes through the lower plate 202 vertically and is arranged near the front end near the right end. This lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located below the performance operation unit 300 in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c when assembled to the plate unit 200.

The lower tray 202 can store the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c with the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a closed, and can open the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The game balls B stored in the tray unit 200 can be discharged below the tray unit 200 (for example, to a dollar box). In addition, when the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, it is possible to move forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit seen from the back. Moreover, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into its main parts and seen from the back. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the performance operation unit 300 are attached to the front side.

The pan base unit 210 includes a flat plate unit base 211 that is attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 and extends from side to side, and an upper plate that is attached to the upper front of the tray unit base 211 and has an upper plate 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 attached to the right side of the upper plate body 212 at the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and protruding forward, and a mounting base 213 attached to the right side of the mounting base 213 at the front surface of the plate unit base 211. A tray unit relay board 214 is provided.

The pan base unit 210 also includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper tray ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front surface of the pan unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , and an upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball extraction pre-unit 230.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends from side to side over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is shaped like a box.

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a penetrating back and forth near the upper left corner in front view and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a top plate ball supply port 211a penetrating back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating back and forth at the lower part on the left side with respect to the left and right center in front view and extending cylindrically rearward, and a lower plate. A notch 211d, which is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, on the right side wall of the portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and a cutout 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and a cutout 211d that is cut out in the upper right side of the lower ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front. The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port 211e that penetrates through the upper plate body 212, extends vertically, and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the tray unit base 211 has a mounting protrusion 211f that protrudes forward to the right of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and on which the mounting base is placed, and a mounting projection 211f that projects forward on the right side of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e, and A slider insertion hole 211g passes through the lower part of the plate body in the front and back, and through which the operation transmission section 242b of the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is inserted, and a slider insertion hole 211g passes through the lower right corner of the plate body in the front and back. A handle insertion hole 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion hole through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates back and forth near the right corner in front view. The opening 211i is provided.

When the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end opens to the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B put out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 are supplied (payed out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

When the lower plate ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202, and its cylindrical rear end opens the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are transferred to the upper tray ball feeding port 211e, the entrance port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140, the ball extraction port 141b, and the The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removing guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the tray ball, and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball socket 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240 when assembled to the tray base unit 210, and the upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball socket 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240. B is supplied from the ball socket 241a of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45, 46, and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate main body 212 is formed into a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and the left side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front. The upper plate main body 212 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes from the most forwardly bulging part to the right side in front view, and the depth in the front and back direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above near the right end.

When the upper tray body 212 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the upper tray main body 212 is attached so that the upper closed portion near the right end is inserted under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 has a production operation unit attachment part 212a formed in the middle part in the left-right direction at the upper part, and a part of production operation unit 300 is attached to this production operation unit attachment part 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 while being placed on the upper surface of the mounting projection 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed into a shallow box shape with an open top. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion hole 213a that penetrates vertically near the left end, and a through hole 213b that penetrates vertically at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 is inserted through the insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213. Further, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 is connected to the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, a plate upper left decorative board 273, a plate upper right decorative board 278, a plate lower left decorative board 283, and a plate lower right decorative board 288. , and for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the plate unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball rental operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and pays cash to a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a game ball or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be lent out into the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200, and the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine can be displayed. This is for returning the cash or prepaid card that was put into the game after deducting the amount of the game ball B that was lent out.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base part 221, and an upper plate ball removal button 222 on the upper surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 with translucent properties is arranged to the right of the pull button 222, a ball lending button 224 is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation base 223 is arranged to the right of the pull button 222. It includes a return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged at the lower rear of the ball lending operation base 223.

The upper ball release button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward when pressed by the player. The ball rental button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display section is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222. Further, when the player presses the ball lending button 224 after inserting cash or a prepaid card with a balance into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the lent game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display section displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball rental display section when the ball rental machine is out of order.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 before upper plate ball extraction and the unit 240 after upper plate ball removal in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45, 46, and the like. The upper plate ball removal pre-unit 230 and the upper plate ball post-removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to remove the upper plate 201 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. This is for discharging the game balls B stored therein to the lower tray 202.

The upper plate ball pre-extraction unit 230 is attached below the ball rental operation unit 220 on the left side of the placement protrusion 211f on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 that is behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230.

The upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 includes a cylindrical front base 231 that is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and extends vertically, and a front plate that is inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. A slider 232 is provided. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the tray unit base 211 near the front of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper plate ball extraction button 222, and its lower end is in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240. It is in contact with the top surface.

The upper plate ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 that is attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a rear base 241 that is attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 in the vertical direction. an upper plate ball extracting slider 242 that is attached to be slidable toward the upper plate ball extracting slider 242; a spring 243 that urges the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 upward; and a rear cover 244 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 241; It is equipped with

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is open toward the front, and has a ball socket 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball socket 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then to the rear, and a ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the accepted game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241, and a game is played from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. A ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view is provided.

The ball socket 241a extends forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201 when assembled to the plate base unit 210. It is formed at the position where it opens. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part of the ball feeding guide path 241b when assembled to the door frame 3. Thereby, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball socket 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending left and right protrudes to the right in rear view than the portion to which the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The rear side of the portion extending left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. When the ball extraction guideway 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion that extends vertically below the ball feed guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end in rear view of the portion extending left and right is connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game balls B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball extraction slider 242 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an actuation receiving part 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner and protruding backward from the rear surface which is the rear side of the actuation receiving part 242a. An operation transmission section 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface inclined so as to be positioned downward toward the rear, and a lower surface extending horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving part 242a penetrates the slider insertion opening 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving part 242a The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface. Further, when the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an operation transmitting portion 242b protruding to the rear of the rear base 241, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241. The rod 143c is in contact with it.

The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, and biases the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 is located at the end of upward movement due to the urging force of the spring 243, and can be moved downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

The upper plate ball removal pre-unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal post unit 240 are such that the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper movement end. The upper plate ball removal button 222 is positioned at the upper end of the movement via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving part 242a. In addition, since the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the end of its upward movement due to the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the actuating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the actuating transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball extraction button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 has a partition between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball socket 241a. The game balls B can be sent from the batted ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball ejecting button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper plate ball ejecting slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper plate ball ejecting slider 242 is activated. The operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmitting portion 242b can now move downward, and the ball extracting member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball extracting member 143 to open the partition portion 143a. is retreated from between the entrance port 141a and the ball exit port 141b. As a result, the game balls B that have entered the entry port 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball socket 241a and the ball feed guide path 241b are discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that is open below the entry port 141a. It will be done. The game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b passes through the ball outlet guiding path 241c and is guided from the notch 211d into the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and then is lowered from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The game balls B in the upper tray 201 are discharged into the lower tray 202.

When the downward pressure on the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper plate is removed via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the operation receiver 242a. As the ball removal button 222 rises, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c in contact with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entry port 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to its original state.

In this way, the upper tray before ball extraction unit 230 and the upper tray after ball extraction unit 240 feed the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball firing device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140, It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit seen from the back. Moreover, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into its main parts and seen from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit taken apart into its main parts and seen from the back. be. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and a production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the left and right direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 includes a lower plate body 251 that is attached to the lower front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202, and a plate unit base that covers the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. A tray unit body 252 attached to the front surface of the tray unit body 211, a lower tray ball extraction unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and a tray attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 spaced apart from each other to the left and right. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, and the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit which are attached below the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively, on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower plate main body 251 extends from side to side and is formed into a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially rectangular shape extending left and right in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left and right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically is formed near the right front end when viewed from above. The lower plate main body 251 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by a lower plate ball removal cover 265 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled into the plate decoration unit 250, the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, when the lower plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is located at the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 has a bulge such that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and a left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Moreover, the top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction at the top and extends downward and is spaced apart from the left and right, and an upper side bulge portion 252a that extends to the left from the center in the left-right direction at the bottom. includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward in a flat plate shape from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b. .

The left and right upper side bulges 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear open, and have a plate upper left decorative unit 270, a plate lower left decorative unit 280, a plate upper right decorative unit 275, and a plate lower right decorative unit on the front of each. 285 is installed. The right end of the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decoration portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decoration portion 252b.

The dish unit main body 252 has a lower dish opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the left upper side bulge 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower tray opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that it becomes wider at the top and bottom as it goes to the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed into a cylindrical shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

The plate unit main body 252 also has a front notch 252e that is cut upward from the front lower end of a portion that covers the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decoration part 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate part 252c. A bottom cutout portion 252f is provided at a portion below the bottom face cutout portion 252f. The lower plate ball extraction unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Furthermore, the dish unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g that penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the lower front decoration part 252b and into which the cylindrical part 102a of the handle attachment member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. A production operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion port 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front and back and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulges 252a at the center in the left-right direction. 300 is attached. The production operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width that is approximately ⅓ of the width of the dish unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The pan unit main body 252 is formed to completely cover the front surface of the pan base unit 210 when assembled to the pan unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower pan opening 252d. . In addition, when the plate decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward. The bottom cutout 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are on the same plane.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and stores game balls B in the lower tray 202 or discharges game balls B from the lower tray 202 by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. It is intended for the purpose of

The lower plate ball extractor unit 260 includes a flat plate-shaped lower plate ball extractor base 261 that is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a vertically penetrating through hole in the front right corner in plan view, and a lower plate ball extractor base 261 that is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a through hole penetrating vertically in the front right corner in plan view. A slider 262 that is attached to the upper surface of the base 261 so as to be slidable back and forth, a lower plate ball release button 263 that is attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that biases the slider 262 forward. It includes a lower plate ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-back direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower plate ball removal cover 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom cutout 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically positioned to match the lower plate ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A through hole is formed therethrough. The through hole of the lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending back and forth, and is attached to a portion of the lower plate ball removal base 261 to the left of the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable back and forth. The slider 262 includes a projecting pin that projects upward in a cylindrical shape.

The left end of the lower plate ball removal cover 265 is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 at a position to the left of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending up and down, and the right end side is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 at a position to the left of the slider 262. It extends to the right beyond the hole, and the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. A slit extending left and right is formed in the lower plate ball removal cover 265, into which a projecting pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower plate ball removing unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removing base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removing base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate part 252c. Further, the lower plate ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the plate unit main body 252. In the normal state of the lower plate ball removal unit 260, the slider 262 is located at the forward moving end due to the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower plate ball removal cover 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball removal hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower plate ball eject button 263 is pushed backward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower plate ball eject button 263. becomes. As this slider 262 moves backward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 presses the lower plate ball removal cover 265 backward through the slit, and the lower plate ball removal cover 265 moves backward with the left end side as the center and the right end side. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal cover 265, which was located directly above the through hole, moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is in an open state. The game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged below the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

Note that when the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressure on the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower tray ball extraction lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game balls B in the lower tray 202 are continuously rotated. It can be discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball removal button 263, which is set back from the front surface of the lower front decorative part 252b, backward, and the holding mechanism 266 releases the slider 262. Ru. Then, when the pressure on the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b. At the same time, the lower plate ball removal cover 265 rotates so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball removal cover 265. Thereby, game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit main body 252. The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both left and right sides of the performance operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The upper left plate decoration unit 270 includes an upper left plate decoration body 271 that is semi-cylindrical and extends from side to side and has translucency, and an upper left plate reflector 272 that is attached to the rear side of the upper left plate decoration body 271. It includes a plate upper left decorative board 273 attached to the rear side of the plate upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate upper left decoration body 271 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulge 252a. The plate upper left decoration body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and the center axis extends obliquely upward and to the left at the left end, and the center axis extends left and right at the right end, so that it has a twisted semicylindrical shape. It is formed. This plate upper left decoration body 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and has a through hole formed in a portion of the upper left decorative board 273 that corresponds to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper left plate decoration board 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the upper left plate decoration body 271 can be decorated with light.

When the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. It is continuous. Since the upper left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the upper left plate decoration body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the upper left plate decoration board 273 emit light, the entire front surface of the upper left plate decoration body 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The upper right plate decoration unit 275 includes an upper right plate decoration body 276 that is semi-cylindrical and extends from side to side and has translucency, and an upper right plate reflector 277 that is attached to the rear side of the upper right plate decoration body 276. An upper right decorative board 278 is attached to the rear side of the upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate upper right decoration body 276 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The plate upper right decoration body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and has a central axis extending diagonally upward to the right at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that it has a twisted semicylindrical shape. It is formed. This plate upper right decoration body 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and has a through hole formed in a portion of the upper right decorative board 278 that corresponds to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper right plate decoration board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the upper right plate decoration body 276 can be decorated with light.

When the plate upper right decoration unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, its right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and its left end is the right end of the plate center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. It is continuous. Since the upper right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the upper right plate decoration 276 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the upper right plate decoration board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the upper right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

When the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 are assembled to the door frame 3, a portion thereof protrudes upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250. , and the upper side bulging portion 252a can form a step in which the upper left side of the plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right side of the plate decoration unit 275 are higher. As a result, the player can hook his or her finger using the level difference between the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulge 252a, and the game balls B in the upper tray 201 can be evenly distributed. It can also be used as a finger rest when operating the performance operation section 301, which will be described later. Furthermore, the difference in level between the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5d-5. Plate bottom left decoration unit and plate bottom right decoration unit]
The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively. It will be done. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 cooperate with the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and both left and right sides of the performance operation unit 300. .

The lower left plate decoration unit 280 includes a lower left plate decoration body 281 that is semi-cylindrical and extends from side to side and has translucency, and a lower left plate reflector 282 that is attached to the rear side of the lower left plate decoration body 281. A plate lower left decorative board 283 is attached to the rear side of the plate lower left reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate lower left decoration body 281 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape with the center at the rear in plan view. is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge part 252a. The plate lower left decoration body 281 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the plate upper left decoration body 271 and the plate right upper decoration body 276, and the center axis extends slightly obliquely to the upper left rear at the left end, and the center axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left rear at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and it is shaped like a bent semi-cylindrical cylinder. The left end of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is formed into a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the plate lower left decorative body 281 changes so that it becomes thinner toward the left end side. This plate lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a milky white color.

The lower left plate reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left plate decorative body 281 from the rear, and has a through hole formed in a portion of the lower left plate decorative board 283 that corresponds to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decorative board 283 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated with light.

When the plate lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left edge of the plate upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is located below the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. Continuous with the left edge. The left end of the lower left plate decorative unit 280 appears to have sunk into the door frame 3 because the left end of the lower left decorative body 281 is formed into a spherical shape. Since the lower left plate decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left plate decoration body 281 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the lower left plate decoration board 283 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left plate decoration body 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The lower right plate decoration unit 285 includes a lower right plate decoration body 286 that is semi-cylindrical and extends from side to side and has translucency, and a lower right plate decoration unit 285 that is attached to the rear side of the lower right plate decoration body 286. It includes a reflector 287 and a lower right plate decorative board 288 that is attached to the rear side of the lower right reflector 287 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate lower right decoration body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape with the center at the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The plate lower right decoration body 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the plate upper left decoration body 271 and the plate right upper decoration body 276, and the center axis extends slightly obliquely to the upper right rear at the right end, and at the left end, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right rear. The central axis extends left and right, and it is shaped like a bent semi-cylindrical cylinder. The right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 is formed into a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the plate lower right decoration body 286 changes so that it becomes thinner toward the right end side. This plate lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a milky white color.

The lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and has a through hole formed in a portion of the lower right decorative board 288 that corresponds to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower right decorative board 288 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower right decorative body 286 can be decorated with light.

When the plate lower right decoration unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, its right end is located below the right edge of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, and its left end is located below the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right edge of . The right end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285 appears to have sunk into the door frame 3 because the right end of the lower right plate decoration body 286 is formed into a spherical shape. Since the lower right plate decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right plate decoration body 286 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the lower right plate decoration board 288 are made to emit light, the lower right plate decoration body 286 The entire front surface of the device can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, making it look like a fluorescent light is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the performance operation unit in the dish unit as seen from the forward and backward direction of the performance operation button. FIG. 52(a) is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52(b) is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the back. The performance operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, and decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by a player to participate in the performance when a player participation type performance is executed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by a player. The production operation section 301 is composed of a rotary operation section 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a press operation section 303 that can be operated by pressing the player. This allows the player to participate not only in the driving operation of the game ball but also in the performance during the game. In the production operation section 301, a rotation operation section 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter that is about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and a pressure operation section 303 is arranged within the ring. . The press operation section 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation section 302, and includes a central press operation section 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation section 302, and a center press operation section 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation section 302; It is composed of an annular outer periphery pressing operation part 303b disposed between the inner periphery and the inner periphery.

The presentation operation unit 300 includes a presentation operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed inside the presentation operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 attached to the upper surface of the operation section base 320. an annular production operation ring 330 that has a rotation operation section 302; a rotation drive unit 340 that rotates the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330; and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 includes an operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the operation section 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation section base 320.

The production operation unit 300 also includes a production operation ring decoration board 352 which is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the production operation ring 330 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and a production operation ring decoration board 352. The decorative board cover 353 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit is placed so as to face the inside of the production operation ring 330. It includes a performance operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation section relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation section base 320.

[3-5e-1. Production operation section cover unit]
The performance operation section cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53, 54, and the like. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the performance operation unit 300 at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction. The performance operation section cover unit 310 is formed into a container shape with the upper and rear sides open.

The production operation section cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 recessed downward, a semicircular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, and a unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward. A plate center upper reflector 313 attached from the rear inside the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs attached to the plate center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light toward the front are mounted. The center upper decorative board 314 of the dish, the lower center reflector 315 attached from the rear inside the lower center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the lower reflector 315 attached to the center lower reflector 315, which directs light toward the front. A decorative board 316 under the center of the dish is provided with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed into a hemispherical shape with the front side bulging downward from the rear center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side thereof is the production operation unit attachment part of the dish unit main body 252. 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is installed in an inclined state so that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on the upper edge extending in a semicircular arc shape at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the unit lower cover 311 is assembled to the dish unit 200, a plurality of drainage holes 311a are formed at the lowest portion.

The unit front cover 312 has a semi-circular shape in plan view that bulges forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. installed. The unit front cover 312 has a plate center upper decoration body 312a whose semicircular arc bulges forward extends in a semicircular arc shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a plate center upper decoration body 312a that extends forward below the plate center upper decoration body 312a. The plate center lower decoration body 312b is provided with a bulging semicircular arc extending in a semicircular arc shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the plate center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The plate center upper decorative body 312a and plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are made by cutting a cylinder of approximately the same thickness (radius) in half and extending in a semicircular arc shape with the cut surface facing the center side. It is formed in a bent shape. The plate center lower decoration body 312b extends in a semicircular arc shape with a large curvature compared to the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b has a slightly thinner thickness than the plate center upper decoration body 312a. It is formed into a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the upper plate center decorative body 312a projects further forward than the front end of the lower plate center decorative body 312b. In addition, when assembled into the plate unit 200, both left and right ends of the plate center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the plate right upper decorative unit 275, and the plate center lower decorative body Both left and right ends of the plate 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed in a milky white color.

Furthermore, when the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the same as the door frame. The distance is approximately 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left and right direction.

The plate center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into and attached to the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear. The plate center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LED mounted on the plate center upper decorative board 314 from leaking to the rear (inward). The plate center upper decoration board 314 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the plate center upper decoration board 314 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center upper decoration body 312a can be decorated with light.

The lower plate center reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the lower plate center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The plate center lower reflector 315 blocks light from the LED mounted on the plate center lower decorative board 316 from leaking to the rear (inward). The plate center lower decorative board 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the plate center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the plate center lower decorative board 316 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center lower decorative body 312b can be decorated with light.

The production operation section cover unit 310 does not have reinforcing ribs in the middle of the plate center upper decorative body 312a and plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semicircular arc shape. When the LEDs on the upper center decorative board 314 and the LEDs on the lower center decorative board 316 are made to emit light, the entire area can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, making it appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

When the production operation section cover unit 310 is assembled to the tray unit 200, its front end protrudes more forward than the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202. In addition, in the production operation section cover unit 310, the plate center upper decoration 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate right upper decoration 276, and the plate center lower decoration 312b is connected to the plate lower left decoration 281 and the plate right It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. This makes the performance operation unit 300 stand out, and the integrated decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53, 54, and the like. The operation unit base 320 is inserted from above into the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the lower end is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the production operation unit mounting of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the section 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 320 includes a main body part 321 which has a substantially cubic box-like outer shape and is open at the top, and a main body part 321 which extends outward from the upper end of the main body part 321 and has a circular outer periphery. a flange portion 322 that is attached to the main body portion 321; a plurality of (four in this case) leg portions 323 that protrude downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321; portion 324, and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opens upward, and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

The operation unit base 320 has a main body 321 formed in a size that can accommodate the production operation button unit 360 therein. A vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 from below, and a portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed as a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body part 321 is formed to easily resonate with the vibrations from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibrations can be amplified and the vibrations can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 of the production operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body portion 321 has a through hole formed at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall to discharge liquid that has entered the main body portion 321 . In the main body 321, a rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall, and an operation section relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The outer periphery of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter that substantially matches the inner periphery of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. A production operation ring decorative board 352 and a decoration board cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring attachment base 331 of the production operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 of the production operation section cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the operating ring transmission gear rotatably around an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing part 325, the upper part of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear part 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the flange part. 322 and is exposed to the outside.

When the operating unit base 320 is assembled to the performance operating unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Furthermore, when assembled into the production operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in contact with it.

[3-5e-3. Performance operation ring]
The performance operation ring 330 of the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation ring of the performance operation unit viewed from the front from above, and FIG. 55(b) is a perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from the front from below. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, and has a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player. The production operation ring 330 (rotary operation section 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) that is approximately twice as large as the longitudinal dimension of the upper plate 201, and an inner diameter that is approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in a circular ring. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is approximately 13 cm.

The production operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably placed on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 are in contact with the outer circumferential surface of the ring mounting base 332 and are rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically. A ring removal prevention member 334 is provided.

In addition, the production operation ring 330 is attached to a ring outer upper cover 335 that is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and constitutes a part of the rotation operation section 302, and to the lower side of the outer ring upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 is attached to the upper surface of the rotary base 332 on the inner circumferential side of the ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring outer upper cover 335 is a part of the rotary operation section 302. A ring inner cover 337 is provided. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape with translucency.

The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320 and an inner diameter that is approximately the same size as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322 . The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotating base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and a mounting portion 331a on the upper surface that is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside of the mounting portion 331a. A boss portion 331b protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a plurality of (four in this case) portions and is used to rotatably attach the bush 333, and a boss portion 331b is provided at intervals in the circumferential direction on the outside of the mounting portion 331a on the top surface. It is provided with through holes 331c that penetrate vertically in a plurality of parts. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the performance operation ring decoration board 352.

The rotating base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331, and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotating base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed into a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331, and when assembled to the performance operation ring 330, faces downward from the inner circumference of the ring attachment base 331. This ring gear 332a meshes with the ring side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the performance operation unit 300.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface part 335a and an outer upper surface part 335a in which an arc constituting the outer and upper part of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. a decorative portion 335b, and a plurality of outer cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner circumferential end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending toward the center and arranged in plurality in the circumferential direction. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a range of 1/4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface part 336a in which an arc constituting the outer and lower part of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a outer lower surface part 336a that protrudes upward and toward the center from the inside of the outer lower surface part 336a, and extends in the circumferential direction. A plurality of outer and lower cover attachment portions 336b are provided. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The inner ring cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming the inside and upper part of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel to the central axis. The cylinder surface portion 337b has a shaped cylinder surface portion 337b, and a plurality of inner cover attachment portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylinder surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylinder surface portion 337b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same size as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the performance operation ring 330, the outer upper surface part 335a, the outer lower surface part 336a, and the inner surface part 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a region that is 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole has a donut shape. The performance operation ring 330 can be decorated with light by means of a performance operation ring decoration board 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotary drive unit]
The rotational drive unit 340 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57(a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit seen from the front, and FIG. 57(b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit seen from the back. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the front right side, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the front left side. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotationally driving the rotation operation section 302 of the performance operation ring 330 and detecting rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft protrudes leftward. , a drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. 345, and a gear cover to which the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and which covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. 346.

The rotational drive unit 340 also includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 that are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotational position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a first rotation detection sensor 347. and a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotation drive base 341 is formed into a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-back direction, and is open to the left. The operating ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a first gear 344a in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the drive gear, and a second gear 344b in the form of a spur gear that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and is formed to have a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 includes a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter than the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b), and a gear portion 345a that protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a and extends in the circumferential direction. It includes a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344, and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The circumferential length of the plurality of detection pieces 345b is the same as the interval at which they are spaced apart in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction at an interval that is different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It looks like this. Thereby, the rotational direction and rotational speed of the rotational operation section 302 in the production operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper part of the gear part 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed part of the gear part 345a is connected to the drive side gear part 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located within the performance operation section cover unit 310 in a state where it is assembled to the performance operation unit 300.

The rotational drive unit 340 is driven by the operation ring drive motor 342 to arbitrarily control the rotational operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. It can be rotated in the direction of Furthermore, the rotary drive unit 340 allows the rotary operation section 302 to reciprocate and vibrate by repeatedly rotating the drive gear 343 in the forward and reverse directions within a predetermined rotation angle range using the operation ring drive motor 342. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type performance can be changed depending on the rotation direction of the rotation operation section 302.

In addition, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation direction in which the rotation operation was performed. By driving the motor 342, it is possible to assist the player's rotation operation. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation section 302, a load can be applied to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to provide the rotary operation section 302 with an operational feeling or a click feeling that corresponds to the content of the player participation type performance.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is for transmitting rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330, and is a gear for the operation section base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 includes a bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a on the rotation base 332 of the performance operation ring 330, and rotates integrally with the ring side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotational drive unit 340. It includes a drive side gear part 350b in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the gear part 345a of the gear member 345. The ring side gear section 350a and the drive side gear section 350b have pitch circles formed to have the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a narrows in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the performance operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and then attaching the gear attachment member 351 to the operation unit base 320. It will be done.

When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the production operation unit 300, the ring side gear part 350a is meshed with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the production operation ring 330, and the drive side gear part 350b is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the production operation ring 330. It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotational drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 of the performance operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and also transmit the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Performance operation ring decoration board]
The performance operation ring decoration board 352 in the performance operation unit 300 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 53, 54, and the like. The performance operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The performance operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the performance operation ring 330, and can decorate the performance operation ring 330 (rotary operation section 302) with light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The performance operation ring decorative board 352 is formed in the form of a circular ring divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decorative board 352a on the front side and a rear decorative board 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in rows along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative board 352a and the rear decorative board 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the performance operation ring decoration board 352 are full-color LEDs.

The performance operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the performance operation ring 330 in a state where it is assembled to the performance operation unit 300. The upper side of the performance operation ring decorative board 352 is covered with a transparent decorative board cover 353. The decorative board cover 353 is formed into a front and rear divided form, similar to the production operation ring decorative board 352, and is a front board cover that covers the front decorative board 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320. 353a, and a rear board cover 353b that covers the rear decorative board 352b from above and is attached to the flange part 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The production operation ring decoration board 352 allows the ring outside the rotation operation part 302 to be inserted through the through hole 331c of the decoration board cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the top surface. The cover 335, the outer and lower ring cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 can be decorated with light from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting decoration in which an LED is provided in the rotary operation section 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and is capable of outputting vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. It is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds such as voices and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operating unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. This vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies compared to a vibration device in which an eccentric weight is rotated by a motor, and can present a more variety of performances to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The performance operation button unit 360 in the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation button unit of the performance operation unit as seen from the top front, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 62(a) is a sectional view of the performance operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62(b) is a sectional view of the performance operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position. The performance operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the performance operation ring 330, and has a press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing the player. The press operation section 303 of the production operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central press operation section 303a and a cylindrical outer circumferential press operation section 303b formed to cover the outer periphery of the center press operation section 303a. ing.

The production operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery and is arranged symmetrically with a button unit base 361 that is attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the center axis of the button unit base 361 as a border. A pair of guide shafts 362 extend upward in a cylindrical shape, and a disc-shaped disc-shaped member that connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and has a circular outer circumference smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is attached to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362 between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361, and has a circular outer circumference approximately the same size as the button unit base 361. A pair of lift springs 365 each having a pair of guide shafts 362 inserted therethrough and biasing the lift base 364 upward are provided.

The production operation button unit 360 also includes a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a cylindrical shape and whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the bottom surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lift drive motor 367 that is attached to protrude upwards, the spur gear-like lift drive gear 368 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the operation button lift drive motor 367, and the lift drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A driven gear 369 in the form of a spur gear is rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member is rotated by the driven gear 369 and has a central shaft 366 inserted therethrough, and is rotatably attached. 370, an elevator cam member 371 whose lower end is connected to the elevator cam drive gear member 370, and through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, and which raises and lowers the elevator base 364 by rotating; and an elevator drive gear. 368, a driven gear 369, and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevation cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Furthermore, the production operation button unit 360 is formed into a cylinder shape with a bottom that extends vertically and has an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base, and is mounted so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362 above the elevating base 364. A pair of button springs 374 disposed between the center button body 373 and the lift base 364 and urging the center button body 373 upward are substantially the same as the center button body 373. A center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape with the upper end closed at the diameter and is attached to the upper end of the center button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363. The central button decoration board 376 is equipped with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward. The production operation button unit 360 includes a center button main body 373 and a center button cover 375, which constitute a center press operation section 303a.

The production operation button unit 360 also includes an annular outer button decoration board 377 that is attached to the upper surface of the lift base 364 outside the center button body 373 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and An outer peripheral board cover 378 is attached to the lifting base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and the outer periphery of the center button main body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer periphery of the center button main body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 having three-dimensional decoration and having translucent properties is placed above the outer button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side, and is raised and lowered to cover the outer periphery and upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379. A transparent peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the base 364 and has a central button cover 375 facing upward at the center. The performance operation button unit 360 includes an outer substrate cover 378, an outer decorative lens 379, and an outer button cover 380, and constitutes an outer pressing operation section 303b.

The production operation button unit 360 also includes a press detection sensor 381 that is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the press operation of the press operation section 303, and a press detection sensor 381 that is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the press operation of the press operation section 303. It includes an elevation detection sensor 382 that detects the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disc shape and a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than an inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 321 in the operation unit base 320. The base main body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 to the lower surface. is installed. In the button unit base 361, the lower end of the leg portion 361b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and rearward, respectively. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is approximately 1/2 the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of lift springs 365 are coil springs, and their lower ends are in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and their upper ends are in contact with the lift base 364. The lifting spring 365 has a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed to have an outer diameter that is approximately the same size as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a center hole 364b that is vertically penetrated through the center hole with a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. It includes a standing wall portion 364c projecting upward in a cylindrical shape from the periphery of the central hole 364b, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other near the lower end of the standing wall portion 364c. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d are opposed to each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided to be movable up and down in the vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into a pair of guide holes 364a. The vertical movement of the lift base 364 is restricted by the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and a space is created between the upper base 363 and the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373. is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the elevating cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape and is cut out at two opposing locations and is detected by an elevation detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by having the central shaft 366 inserted through its center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart from each other by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer circumferential surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from an end parallel to the axis; a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from an end opposite to the second cam 371d of the first cam 371b; (See Figure 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371a are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed like this. By rotating, the elevating cam member 371 can guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 using the cam portion 371a, thereby elevating the elevating base 364.

The center button body 373 has a cylindrical tube portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tube portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. 362 is slidably inserted thereinto, a central opening 373d penetrating through the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364; It includes a press detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom portion 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted through the button spring 374.

The center button body 373 is formed into a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. The center opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends briefly downward, and its lower end abuts the upper surface of the lift base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the center button body 373. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button body 373.

The center button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that their lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and screws with washers inserted therein are attached to the lower ends. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, thereby restricting upward movement of the center button main body 373.

The press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 detects when the bottom 373b (lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 contacts the upper surface of the vertical base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 and protrudes downward. This central button body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs with a weaker urging force than the lifting spring 365.

The center button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having approximately the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed into a cylindrical shape with a bottom by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In this central button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373.

The plurality of LEDs mounted on the top surface of the center button decoration board 376 are full-color LEDs. The center button decoration board 376 can decorate the center button cover 375 with light emission by causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light as appropriate. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer button decoration board 377 are full-color LEDs. The outer circumference button decoration board 377 can decorate the outer circumference decorative lens 379 and the outer circumference button cover 380 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 includes an annular board part 378a that covers the upper side of the outer button decorative board 377 and is attached to the lift base 364, and extends upward in a cylindrical shape from the inner periphery of the board part 378a, and covers the center button body 373. It includes a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral board cover 378 is formed transparent.

The outer periphery decorative lens 379 has twisted portions arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction and extend so as to move upward in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer button cover 380 includes a cylindrical portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer decorative lens 379, and an annular portion 380b extending toward the center from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a. In the outer button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380b has an inner diameter that is approximately the same size as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the production operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62(a), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is biased upward by the pair of lift springs 365, and the lift base 364 is biased upward by the pair of lift springs 365. The locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371 is inserted from below. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position, having moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. In this state, the center button body 373 is located at the end of its upward movement due to the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the top surface of the center button cover 375 protrudes upward more than the top surface of the outer button cover 380. It becomes.

Therefore, when assembled to the production operation unit 300, the top surface of the outer button cover 380 protrudes slightly upwards from the top surface of the production operation ring 330, and the top surface of the center button cover 375 is higher than the top surface of the outer button cover 380. It also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63, etc.).

In this state (the state shown in FIG. 62(a)), when the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation section 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the center button main body 373 The press detection piece 373e is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press operation of the central press operation section 303a is detected. When the center press operation section 303a is pressed, the top surface of the center button cover 375 is at a height that substantially matches the top surface of the outer button cover 380 (see FIG. 65(c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer button cover 380 (outer press operation section 303b) is pressed downward, the outer button cover 380 does not move downward, and the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. It is also not detected by the detection sensor 381. In other words, the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303 is not detected.

When the operation button lift drive motor 367 rotates the lift drive gear 368 counterclockwise in plan view in this lowered position, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 that meshes with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When this elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a that is visible in the front in FIG. As the cam 371b rolls to the left side of the locking portion 371c, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, as the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the guide pin 364d, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side. Since the second cam 371d extends upward perpendicularly to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. Further, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the center button cover 375 (center press operation section 303a) and the outer circumference button cover 380 (outer circumference press operation section 303b) at the lower position is maintained, and the center button cover 375 The entire pressing operation section 303 including the outer button cover 380 has moved upward, and the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is protruding upward than the upper surface of the outer button cover 380.

When assembled to the production operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 will be in a state that protrudes more than the top surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65(b) etc.) reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation part 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 are pressed against the button spring 374. The center button main body 373 moves downward against the force and comes into contact with the lifting base 364. When the center button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protrudes below the lift base 364, but the lift base 364 is in contact with the button unit base 361. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is separated from the pressure detection sensor 381, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation part 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the lift spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the central button body 373 contacts the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the lift base 364, the outer periphery button cover 380 (outer periphery pressing operation part 303b) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 while the center button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protruding downward from the lift base 364 is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (center press operation section 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer periphery button cover 380 (the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b) is pressed downward with a force greater than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the raised position, the lifting base 364 is moved through the outer button cover 380 by the lifting spring. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 as it moves downward against the urging force of the elevating base 365 . In this state, the outer button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the lift base 364, but since the center button cover 375 (center press operation section 303a) protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the button spring 374, the center button main body Since the pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lifting base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 (press operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button raising/lowering drive motor 367 rotates the raising/lowering cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in plan view. 62(b), the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the guide pin 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d moves toward the first cam 371b. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking part 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking part 371c recessed upward by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and is operated. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, it returns to its original lowered position.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 390 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53, 54, and the like. The operation section relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation section base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body section 321 in the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 installed inside the board box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled to the production operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a plate center upper decorative board 314, a plate center lower decorative board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, by relaying the connection between the operation button lift drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, the lift detection sensor 382, and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210. There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the production operation ring and the rotation drive unit in a left side view of the production operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the performance operation ring and the performance operation ring decoration board in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the press operation section. 65(a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation section is in the raised position, and (c) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation section is pressed at the center. FIG. 7 is a front view of the dish unit when the operating section is pressed.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 on the top surface that can be operated by a player. The performance operation section 301 is composed of a large annular rotary operation section 302 and a press operation section 303 disposed within the ring of the rotation operation section 302. The press operation section 303 includes a cylindrical central press operation section 303a located at the center of the rotation operation section 302, and an annular outer circumferential press operation section disposed between the center press operation section 303a and the rotation operation section 302. 303b.

The rotation operation section 302 is formed by an outer ring upper cover 335, an outer lower cover 336, and an inner ring cover 337 of the performance operation ring 330. The central pressing operation section 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the performance operation button unit 360, and the outer pressing operation section 303b is formed by the outer button cover 380 and the outer substrate cover 378.

The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotary operation section 302 (production operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation section 303 disposed within the ring of the rotation operation section 302 is inclined so that it moves backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). .

In the normal state, the production operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation section 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation section 302. Specifically, the top surface of the outer button cover 380 projects slightly upwards from the top surface of the production operation ring 330, and the top surface of the center button cover 375 projects upwards from the top surface of the outer button cover 380. (See Figure 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotational drive unit 340, the performance operation ring 330 is rotated through the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in a clockwise direction in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in a left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotary operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view. .

The operating ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotary operating section 302 can be rotated back and forth and vibrated. This vibration differs from the vibration caused by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation section 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation section 302 of the performance operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates clockwise in a left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350. When the operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in a left side view. This transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation using two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

Rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. To be more specific, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart in the circumferential direction, is larger than the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , an interval that is not an integral multiple. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected depending on the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b of the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type performance can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation section 302. Further, when a rotational operation of the rotational operation section 302 is detected, the rotational operation section 302 is rotationally driven in the same direction as the rotational operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby making the rotational operation lighter and assisting. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotary operation section 302 in a direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavier or a click feeling can be imparted.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the performance operation ring 330 is formed by an outer ring upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and an inner ring cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation section 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotary operation section 302 is installed with the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a portion of the inner peripheral surface exposed, so that it is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. .

As a result, the player can touch the rotary operation section 302 from various directions, so that the player can rotate the rotary operation section 302 in a way that is easy for the player to do. sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation section 302 can be rotated even when the push operation section 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. Note that since the rotary operation section 302 is attached to the operation section base 320 on the lower surface side, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation ring decoration board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular manner below the performance operation ring 330. Thereby, by causing the LED of the performance operation ring decoration board 352 to emit light, the rotation operation section 302 of the performance operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, in the performance operation ring decoration board 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation section 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in the row are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation section 302. By emitting light, only a specific portion of the rotating rotary operation unit 302 can be decorated with light. Thereby, the player can be given the illusion that an LED (decorative board) is provided inside the rotating rotary operation section 302.

In the normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. It is in the lowered position, protruding slightly upward. In this state, the rotary operation section 302 can be rotated, and the central press operation section 303a of the press operation section 303 can be pressed. When the center press operation section 303a is pressed downward, the top surface of the center press operation section 303a (center button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the top surface of the outer circumferential press operation section 303b (outer circumference button cover 380), and the press is detected. The sensor 381 detects the pressure.

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b of the pressing operation part 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) does not move downward, and the press is detected. Pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the lift cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 comes off from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the biasing force of the pair of lifting springs 365, the pressing operation part 303 is vigorously protruded upward together with the lifting base 364 to be in the raised position (see FIG. 65(b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation section 303 is positioned higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation section 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 protrude upward to a greater extent than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330.

When the center push operation section 303a is pressed downward with the push operation section 303 in the raised position, the center push operation section 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the center push operation section 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation section 303b are at approximately the same height. In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press. Furthermore, the central pressing operation section 303a moves downward together with the outer circumferential pressing operation section 303b against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation section 303a and the outer circumferential pressing operation section 303b are moved downwardly from the rotating operation section 302. The height is approximately the same as the top surface (see FIG. 65(c)). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

Furthermore, when the outer circumference press operation section 303b is pressed downward with the press operation section 303 in the raised position, the upper surface of the central press operation section 303a remains in a state protruding upwardly than the upper surface of the outer circumference press operation section 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation section 303b and the central pressing operation section 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation section 303b becomes approximately at the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation section 302 (see FIG. 65(a)). . In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press.

In this way, regardless of whether the pressing operation section 303 of the present embodiment is in the lowered position or the raised position, unless the central pressing operation section 303a is pressed to the downward movement end, it will not be detected by the pressing detection sensor 381. ing. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to firmly press and operate the central press operation section 303a, so that attention can be drawn to the operation of the performance operation section 301 in a player participation type performance. , it is possible to make the player participatory performance more enjoyable.

Note that even when the pressing operation section 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation section 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the push operation section 303 is in the raised position, some players may use the push operation section 303 as a cue to make the rotation operation easier, or the push operation section 303 may get in the way and make it difficult to perform the rotation operation. As a result, the operability of the rotary operation section 302 can be changed, and more diverse operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. 66(a) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 66(b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame left side base 401 attached to the front side of the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage; a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402; The door frame left side decoration body 404 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

The door frame left side base 401 is formed into a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side decorative board 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative board 402a and a left side lower decorative board 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 402 are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative board 402 can decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by emitting light by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a that penetrates back and forth at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the left side decorative board 402 of the door frame. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed into a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is connected to the left edge of the plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 in the plate unit 200. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left edge of.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are approximately the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3, making it appear as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded therein.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69(a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 69(b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit exploded and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to approximately the same position as the upper plate 201 and lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction. and a plurality of side window internal decoration parts 410b that can emit light and are arranged in a plurality of side windows 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 is designed to make it difficult for players who are playing with the pachinko machine on the right side to see inside the gaming area of the pachinko machine located on the right side in a game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the gaming area 5a of the pachinko machine 1, thereby creating a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the player.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically; A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b attached to the front surface, extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 is mounted on the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted in a part corresponding to the window interior decoration part 410b, and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 Internal reflectors 414 are inserted into the interiors of the side window interior decoration parts 410b, respectively.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to a right side reflector 415 that is arranged forward of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and a right side base 411 of the door frame. A door that extends flatly in the vertical and front-back directions so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is formed with a through hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and forms the side window 410a. A flat plate is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and extends vertically and longitudinally so as to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 411 and right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed with a through hole 417a extending in the left-right direction and forming a side window 410a.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 410 covers the door frame right side decorative board 418 which is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the front side of the right side reflector 415. A door frame right side decoration body 419 attached to a right side reflector 415 is provided.

The door frame right side base 411 is formed into a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the rear. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (in this case, three) of side window interior decoration parts 410b arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration part 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated conical cylinder whose front end side has a slightly smaller outer diameter than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed into a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the right side outer panel 416 of the door frame. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a lower position to an upper part with respect to the center in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed in a translucent milky white color.

The side window interior decoration portion decoration board 413 is attached to a portion of the side window interior decoration member 412 that is behind the connection base 412a on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window interior decoration part decorative board 413 are full-color LEDs. The side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 has four LEDs arranged in a cross shape in the upper, lower, left and right directions around the axis of the side window interior decoration part 410b at the rear of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b. has been done.

The internal reflector 414 has an X-shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration part 410b into which it is inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the inside of the side window interior decoration part 410b into four parts: top, bottom, left and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and has a wave-like shape in the front-rear direction that moves forward and then backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. has been done. The right side reflector 415 is formed with a plurality of through holes 415a that pass through the right side reflector 415 in the front and back, and through which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and front and rear, with a rear side extending vertically in a straight line and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The right side outer panel 416 of the door frame has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed ellipse shape extending vertically, and also connects the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. It is formed to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be non-transparent.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and front and rear, with a rear side extending vertically in a straight line and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The right side inner panel 417 of the door frame has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed ellipse shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. It is formed to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The right side inner panel 417 of the door frame is formed to be non-transparent.

The door frame right side decorative board 418 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip, and is composed of an upper right side decorative board 418a and a lower right side decorative board 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decoration board 418 can decorate the door frame right side decoration body 419 by emitting light by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The door frame right side decoration body 419 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame right side decoration body 419 is formed into a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically in a wavy manner along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decoration body 419 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration body 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is connected to the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the door frame right side decoration body 419 has a cylindrical fluorescent light. Looks like it's embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending forward in a wavy manner so that a 1/4 portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed in a screen shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be viewed through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (column-shaped) side window inner decoration part 410b extending back and forth in the side window 410a, and allows the LED of the side window inner decoration part decoration board 413 to emit light. In this way, the side window interior decoration portion 410b can be decorated with light emission. By decorating the side window interior decoration portion 410b with light emitting decoration, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of this embodiment, in a normal state, since the LED of the side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 that emits light and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b is off, the side window The inside of the gaming area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island equipment) through between the three side window interior decoration parts 410b in 410a. Therefore, a player who is looking for this pachinko machine 1 (this game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing games can easily play this pachinko machine 1 without having to move along the island equipment to the front of this pachinko machine 1. It is possible to increase expectations for the game with the pachinko machine 1 and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration part 410b can block the line of sight of players located nearby. By making it difficult for players to see the entire gaming area 5a and making it difficult for other players to feel like they are being watched, it is possible to let other players play games without hesitation. .

Further, when the three side window interior decoration parts 410b are made to emit light using the LEDs of the side window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a can be changed. let At this time, since the three side window interior decoration parts 410b are columnar, the light is emitted in a band-like and radial manner. It can be made difficult to see, and it can be made difficult for other players, such as those next to them, to look into the gaming area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for other players to look into the gaming area 5a, it is possible to avoid other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. This can prevent players from feeling uncomfortable because they are unable to concentrate on the game, or from feeling like a loss due to being induced to make mistakes. This can prevent a decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. Figure 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the back, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit with the top lower cover removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the closed state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the top front, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the bottom front. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers a door frame top base 451 that is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the left and right sides and the upper front surface of the door frame top base 451. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decoration body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, and the lower end of the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top base 451. A door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the door frame is attached.

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a door frame top center decorative board 455 that is attached to the front center of the top cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 is attached to the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the door A door frame top right decorative board 457 is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 at the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. We are prepared.

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a top center reflector 458 that is disposed between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top center decoration board 455 and is attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. The top left reflector 459 is arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and is attached to the front of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. and a top right reflector 460 that is disposed at and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 includes a center speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top center speakers 462 attached downward to the center speaker box 461, and a pair of top center speakers 462 attached to the center speaker box 461 downward. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near both left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top It includes a door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451. There is.

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat main body part 451a extending left and right with the same length as the width in the left and right direction of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a main body part 451a extending from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body part 451a. A front protrusion 451b protrudes forward. The main body part 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the lower side thereof is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101, and the center in the left-right direction is located upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so that their front ends move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape open to the rear. The front protrusion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top cover 452 has substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 when viewed from the front. The top cover 452 covers the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is shaped to connect the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top cover 452 protrudes most forwardly at the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved manner so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top cover 452 has an opening 452a on its upper surface that is largely cut out from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by a door frame top plate 468.

The door frame top decoration body 453 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame top decoration body 453 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and the curvature decreases as it goes from both left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and extends in the left and right direction along the front edge of the top upper cover 452. It is formed. As a result, the door frame top decoration body 453 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame top decoration 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left and right direction extend downward, and is formed to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. It extends from left to right. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is bent so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 has a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape. It has a pair of center speaker ports 454b, which the top center speaker 462 faces, and a pair of side speaker ports 454c, which vertically penetrate through the left and right outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a, and which the top side speakers 464 face. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top center decorative board 455 can decorate the central portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is formed into a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top left decorative board 456 can decorate the left portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top right decorative board 457 can decorate the right portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The top center reflector 458, top left reflector 459, and top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and are attached to the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

The center speaker box 461 is formed into a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top center speakers 462 face downward and forward. This central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker that outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs high-frequency sounds such as voices and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punched metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speakers 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top central speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, both left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration body 404 and the door frame right side decoration body 419, respectively, and form an integral decoration. There is. Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side through a pair of top center speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center when viewed from the front. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decoration 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate center upper decoration 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decoration 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

The upper left side decoration 271, the upper right side decoration 276, the upper middle side decoration 312a, the left side decoration 404 of the door frame, the right side decoration 419 of the door frame, and the top decoration 419 of the door frame surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. 453 is formed in a half-tube shape, so that the player can see the decoration as if the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the upper left plate decoration 271, the upper right plate decoration 276, the upper center plate decoration 312a, the left side decoration 404 of the door frame, the right side decoration 419 of the door frame, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind the door frame top decoration body 453 are a plate upper left decorative board 273, a plate upper right decorative board 278, a plate center upper decorative board 314, a door frame left side decorative board 402, a door frame right side decorative board 418, and a door frame top center decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the LEDs of these decorative substrates can be made to emit light as appropriate, so that the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light. A light emission effect can be shown to the player so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

The tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 has an annular, donut-shaped rotary operation section 302 on the top surface that is larger in diameter than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201, and a rotary operation section 302 arranged coaxially within the ring of the rotation operation section 302. A press operation section 303 consisting of a cylindrical outer peripheral press operation section 303b and a cylindrical central press operation section 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation section 302 is attached below the rotation operation section 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) large-diameter plate center upper decoration bodies 312a and plate center lower decoration bodies 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and The door frame left side decoration body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side decoration body of the door frame right side unit 410 have the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration body 312a and the lower center plate decoration body 312b. 419 and the door frame top decoration body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a.

As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged in the rotation operation part 302, the two plate center upper decoration bodies 312a and the two plate center lower decoration bodies 312b, and the rotation operation part 302, the outer periphery Since the pressing operation section 303b and the central pressing operation section 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be increased, and the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 can be made to stand out.

In addition, the plate lower left decorative body 281, the plate lower right decorative body 286, and the lower plate center decorative body 312b, which are arranged below the plate left upper decorative body 271, the plate right upper decorative body 276, and the plate center upper decorative body 312a, are The thickness of the tubular tube is made slightly thinner, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the plate center lower decoration body 312b. As a result, since the performance operation unit 300 becomes larger from the bottom end toward the top, it is possible to emphasize the sense of perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotary operation unit 302 that is placed on the upper side and can be operated by the player. The press operation section 303 can be made to look larger, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 in the production operation unit 300 on the top surface of the dish unit 200, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. can.

Further, a donut-shaped rotary operating section 302 is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis that extends upwardly toward the front. Since the upper surfaces of the rotating operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 face the head (face) of the player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1, the rotating operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 face toward the head (face) of the player seated at the front of the pachinko machine 1. The entire operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since the entire structure of the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 can be easily seen, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation section 302 is donut-shaped. Therefore, since the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation section 302 is used for rotation operation, when the player participation type performance is executed, the player can immediately recognize that the rotation operation section 302 is rotated. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and by operating the rotation operation unit 302, it is possible to entertain the player's participatory performance and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front and back direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b are made larger than the diameter of the rotation operation part 302. Therefore, in the tray unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation part 302, the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b are in a state that protrudes more forward than the upper plate 201, and the upper plate center Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotation operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made to stand out. At the same time, the appearance of the area around the rotation operation portion 302 can be improved by the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the players recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the players, and it is possible to make the game more appealing to the players. This makes it easier for players to select this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine they want to play.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. This is for discharging or discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed into a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is removably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall so that it can be opened and closed at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; Main body frame lower hinge assembly is attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 when viewed from the front, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid body 520 is provided.

Further, the main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, so that the game area 5a of the game board 5 can be A ball firing device 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 installed along the upper and left sides of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a ball launcher 540 for shooting the ball B; A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for dispensing game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear side of the main frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 is attached to the main body frame base unit 501 so as to be openable and closable and covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base unit 501, and an outer frame 2, a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in the shape of a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a spherical tank that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box shape extending from side to side and is open upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in the shape of an upwardly opened groove, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a second rail cover 555 is attached to the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game balls B guided by the ball guide unit 570 in a single direction based on instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full bulb path unit 610 that guides the ball to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be engaged with the door frame 3, and a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A transmission cylinder 654 moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hooks 652 are attached downward. It includes a lock spring 655 that is biased and urges the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlock lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connecting cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in the shape of a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base unit 501 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503. and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5, which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a base main body 501a that extends approximately 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion port 501b that penetrates from front to back within the height range of It includes a placing part 501c and a game board regulating part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left and right direction of the game board placing part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

The main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the game board mounting section 501c in front of the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, and includes a firing device mounting section 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540, and a firing device mounting section 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540. A cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates back and forth on the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front and into which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c when viewed from the front and connect the board unit. A circular speaker opening 501g that allows the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a to face forward and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend left and right. It includes a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that is rotatably attached is formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used to attach the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l are provided.

The main body frame base 501 also has a door for detecting opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame release switch 4a is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 4a is released from its pressure and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. A detection signal from the door frame release switch 4a is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 has a main body frame release switch 4b for detecting the release of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 attached to the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame release switch 4a is installed. It is being When the main body frame 4 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 4b is released from being pressed and can detect the opening of the main body frame 4. The detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

A game board locking member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board locking member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b, thereby making it possible to attach and detach the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b.

The cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l to a position below the area where the game board locking member 505 is attached to the right side of the speaker opening 501g. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a, and extends to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of band-shaped frame pieces 502b that extend out, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that passes through the guide body 502a in the front and back at both upper and lower ends, and also extends from the left and right sides. A plurality of through holes 502d are arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that the attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 consists of a plurality of wiring cords, and one end is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to relay board 105.

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 84, etc., the connection cable guide member 502 is located at an end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably mounted with respect to the main body frame base 501 in the left-right direction. ) is attached rotatably around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has the side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502, the guide body 502a is brought into contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 assembled in the pachinko machine 1 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 84(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably α/3≧β). (See FIG. 84(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees), the increase stops. It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward than the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When closing the open door frame 3, the part of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively backward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the attachment shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not obstruct the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction. Can be closed smoothly. In addition, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 It is possible to prevent problems from occurring.

In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded back at the folded part. You can develop a habit. As a result, when the 180-degree folded portion of the connection cable 503 changes to open by opening the door frame 3, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding tendency, and also to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a connects the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a. It can be drawn toward the central axis (axis) of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

Further, in this embodiment, the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the rearward protruding part (pressing part) on the center axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since the connecting cable guide member 502 can be pressed in the direction, the connecting cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) as the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81, 82, and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached to the door frame.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward into an L-shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. The main body frame upper hinge pin 512 is pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a that penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion in front view, and for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. We are prepared.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner. 3 can be mounted rotatably on a hinge.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81, 82, and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2. A door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above a lower hinge first main body 521, which is a horizontally extending flat plate whose rear part is bent upward into an L-shape, and the upper side of the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate material upward into an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 arranged at a distance upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, and a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521 that extends horizontally. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first body 521 is an outer frame lower part that penetrates vertically near the front end of a horizontally extending portion, and into which the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second body 522 is a lower door frame lower body that penetrates vertically near the front end of a horizontally extending portion and into which the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a regulating piece 522b extending upward from a position on the left side of the horizontally extending portion behind the door frame lower hinge hole 522a and regulating the rotation range of the door frame 3. , is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l on the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It will be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner, and also allows the door frame 3 to be attached to the main body frame 4 in a hinged manner. The hinge can be mounted rotatably.

[4-4. Main body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81, 82, and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a portion on the rear side extending rightward from the front end that restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically apart from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a on the front side, which is formed in a U-shape with an open right side in plan view, and is open to the right and extends vertically. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into this groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing flail 111 becomes meandering in plan view, and an unauthorized tool can be seen from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. can be prevented from being inserted inside. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and also strengthens the inside of the body frame 4 from the left side (passed between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4). This prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the front in the main body frame, and FIG. 85(b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, and the ball launching device 540 is attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 is sent to the game board attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of No. 5. The ball firing device 540 can drive the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to a flat launcher base 541 that is attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and to the rear surface of the right side of the launcher base 541 when viewed from the front, and is rotatable. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a ball mallet 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and a ball from near the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is provided with a firing rail 544 attached to the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the firing rail 544; When the handle 182 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hammer 543 passes through the launch rail 544, is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and is driven into the game area 5a.

In addition, if the hit game ball B does not reach the gaming area 5a due to the driving force of the game ball B, etc., the firing rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From there, the ball falls into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged into the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 86(b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit viewed from the back. The dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a that has a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction and extends left and right, and a top plate portion 551a that extends downwardly from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front and has a width that is substantially the same as the top plate portion in the front-rear direction. the left side plate part 551b that extends downward from the right side of the top plate part 551a in the front view, the right side plate part 551c having approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the top plate part 551a, and the rear side of the top plate part 551a. The upper back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side to the same position as the lower edge of the right side plate 551c, and the upper back plate 551d extends to the right with a substantially constant width from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate 551b to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner side plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the front part of the lower side of the left side plate 551b to the right. It includes a bottom plate part 551g extending to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e, and a connecting plate part 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate part 551g and the lower side of the inner plate part 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open toward the front and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a that extends left and right with approximately the same length as the horizontal width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b that extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, the front ends of the top plate part 551a, the left side plate part 551b, and the right side plate part 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the dispensing base 551 includes a shallow concave portion that is open to the rear and extends vertically by a left side plate portion 551b, a left back plate portion 551e, and an inner side plate portion 551f. Unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a ball tank 552 that is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 and is open upward in a box shape extending from side to side, and a portion of the dispensing base 551 extending from side to side. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in the shape of an upwardly open groove.

Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is attached to a first rail cover 554 attached halfway in the left-right direction at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and to the upper end of the tank rail 553 spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view. A second rail cover 555 is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length approximately half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and a length shorter in the front-rear direction than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with a tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 has a shape in a plan view that is diagonal to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front and rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the same depth, it is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is opened downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

In addition, the tank rail 553 is arranged such that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left is steeper with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is slanted at an angle so that the left end side is lower. The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are designed to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553. It is something.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and has an end on the first rail cover 554 side with respect to an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By using this rectifier piece 556a to slow down the flow of game balls B on the upper stage side, which are distributed in two stages, upper and lower, and rectify the flow so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side, the flow in the tank rail 553 is This prevents balls from clogging even if the height is lower.

The ball stopper member 557 is attached so as to be slidable in the left-right direction near the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 when viewed from the front, and by sliding it to the left closes the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Further, the dispensing base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending left and right of the dispensing base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for electrically connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 87(b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit viewed from the back. FIG. 88(a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88(b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 570 that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 to guide the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out game balls B one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit. A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game balls B that have passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guide unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on instructions from the payout control board 633, game balls B are released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and from the ball removal path 580b where the ball removal lever 593 is operated, the upper full ball path unit is released. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball extraction passage 580b downward. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and guides the game balls B released from the ball extraction path 580b. This is to guide the game ball B that has been released toward the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for the purpose of

The ball guiding unit 570 includes a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that is open to the front and has a meandering guiding passage 570a through which game balls B can flow, and a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that has a closed front side of the guiding unit base 571. A movable piece member 573 that is movable by the game balls B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and a movable piece member 573 that moves by the game balls B flowing in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. (See FIG. 92).

In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front cover 572 have a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends to the right and guides the guide unit base 571. The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly being folded back and forth between the widths in the left and right direction of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front and rear right directions and the width in the left and right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. Can be guided in a single line.

In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the top so that it can move forward and backward into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 has an upper portion attached rotatably around an axis extending back and forth at a right outer portion of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do so. This movable piece member 573 is in a state in which when the game ball B comes into contact with the part that protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a, so that it does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and the part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When the movable piece member 573 is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games can be played in the guiding passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide path 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 via the guide path 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 580 in the dispensing unit 560 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the movable ball extraction piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 90(a). It is. The dispensing device 580 is detachably attached from behind to the lower side of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing device main body 581, which has a box-like shape open to the rear and has a dispensing passage 580a through which game balls B can flow, and a dispensing passage 580b branching from the middle of the dispensing passage 580a; It includes a flat plate-shaped dispensing device rear cover 582 that closes the dispensing device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front cover 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

The dispensing device 580 also includes a dispensing motor 584 that is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583, and an attached spur gear-shaped drive gear 585; a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; , a second transmission gear 587 in the shape of a spur gear is engaged with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; It has a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A dispensing gear member 588, a dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582, and has a plurality of blade pieces 589a protruding into the dispensing passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

Further, the dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing detection sensor 591 that is attached to a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a and detects game balls B, and a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear cover 582 that detect game balls B. A movable ball extracting piece 592 is attached to be able to open and close the ball extracting passage 580b at a portion where it branches from the dispensing passage 580a by the lid 582, and the ball extracting movable piece 592 can be held in a position where the ball extracting passage 580b is closed. It is equipped with a ball extraction lever 593 which is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 has a rectangular shape extending vertically in plan view. The width of the dispensing device 580 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the ball guiding unit 570 in the left-right direction in the right direction when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 89, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens upward at a position near the right end in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear. It opens downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top by about 1/3 of the total height so as to move little by little to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It is bent at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the delivery blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, there is a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the payout blade 589 and the outer periphery. It extends downward in an arc concentric with the dispensing blade 589 so as to form an arc, and also extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the dispensing blade 589 in rear view.

In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is arranged below the dispensing blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball removal passage 580b extends diagonally downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a, branches at a part where it bends to the right, and extends perpendicularly to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball extracting movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extracting passage 580b diverge, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is The main body side guide wall 581a projects backward and forward from each side so as to form a narrower gap than the main body side guide wall 581a, and is formed to be continuous with the left side wall of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b when viewed from the rear. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed on the left side. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed diagonally upward to the left when viewed from the rear, and are formed to mainly constitute a side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. A ball extracting movable piece 592 rotates passing between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side of the dispensing device main body 581 in a rear view of a portion where the dispensing passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the dispensing device front lid 583. The delivery gear member 588 includes three flat detection pieces 588b that extend outward and are spaced apart at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The delivery blade 589 includes three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape and spaced apart at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is arranged so that the space between the wing piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at a portion in the payout passage 580a that extends from above toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in rear view. It protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 is provided with a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed toward the center with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B between the three blade pieces 589a. This ball storage portion 589b can accommodate only one game ball B. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can prevent the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream from the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotate in the clockwise direction in rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially attached to the dispensing device rear cover 582 and dispensing device front cover 583 so as to be able to rotate together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

The ball extraction movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball ejecting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces into the dispensing passage 580a. The ball extraction movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat outside the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball extraction lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball discharging movable piece 592 to the left in rear view. A portion of the ball extraction lever 593 protrudes rearward through the rear lid 582 of the dispensing device, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extraction movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Moreover, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. 90).

When the ball extractor lever 593 is raised to make the ball extractor movable piece 592 rotatable, the game balls B, which were tied together like a string on the upstream side of the ball extractor movable piece 592, are removed from the ball extractor movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball ejecting passage 580b extends in a straight line from the upstream side of the dispensing passage 580a, the game balls B flowing down from the upstream side of the dispensing passage 580a flow straight down to the ball discharging passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no thing like the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game balls B, so that the game balls B are closer to the side of the payout passage 580a. It will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down inside the ball extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so the ball extracting movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extracting passage 580b The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side vigorously, but the ball ejecting movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear cover 582. Since the ball removal movable piece 592 can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of contact. It is not pinched between the wall surface of the ejection passage 580b and the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent strong force from being applied to the ball ejecting movable piece 592 by the game ball B, and the ball ejecting movement due to the collision of the game ball B. Deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 can be suppressed.

For this reason, since the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be made difficult to damage, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island equipment on the downstream side of the ball extraction passageway 580b, so the pachinko player can It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

In addition, when the ball extracting movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extracting movable piece 592 passes through the ball extracting passage 580b between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a which are narrower than the game ball B. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball extraction movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the distance between the game balls B and Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a.

Since the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable ball extracting piece 592 is based on inertia force, strong force does not act on the movable ball extracting piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball extracting piece 592, and also making it possible to prevent the movable ball extracting piece 592 from being damaged. Game balls B do not jump out from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the game balls B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full bulb path unit]
The upper full bulb path unit 600 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550. The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610. The upper full bulb path unit 600 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full bulb path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full fill base 601 and has an open front side. , and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and can press the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes to the right from the right side in front view, and includes a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

In addition, the upper full bulb path unit 600 has an upper payout that opens upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position approximately 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left side in front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface; An upper full discharge passage 600d extends downward from the right side in the front view from the left-right center of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and an upper full discharge passage 600d opens upward near the right end of the upper surface in the front view and extends downward substantially vertically. The upper bulb removal passage 600e extends downward near the right end of the lower surface and opens downward (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side when viewed from the front, an upper normal delivery passage 600c, an upper full delivery passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are lined up in this order and open downward. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580, and the upper dispensing ball path unit 600 is assembled into the dispensing unit 560. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball extraction passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the game balls B discharged (dispensed) from the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 pass through the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a and the upper sphere storage passage 600b, and then pass through the upper normal dispensing passage 600c or the upper full dispensing passage 600d. is emitted downward from either of the Further, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 are discharged downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full bulb path unit]
The lower full bulb path unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the board unit 620 side. The lower full bulb path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that its front end is lower, and its rear end extends upward.

The lower full bulb path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower bulb removal passage 610c, and has a lower full base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal discharge passage 610a and a lower full tank cover 612, which is attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth. A dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b, and a dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 that opens and closes the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b. A closing spring 614 is provided.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball extraction passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b extend forward in a state in which they are lined up left and right, and open toward the front at the front end of the lower full bulb path unit 610. The lower full tank dispensing passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower bulb removal passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b when viewed from the front, and opens toward the right midway in the front-rear direction.

The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b. This dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is biased clockwise in the front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a has a short circular arc shape when viewed from the front, centered on the center of rotation of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted so that it protrudes forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 on the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full bulb path unit 610 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the lower normal dispensing passage 610a, the lower full bulb dispensing passage 610b, and the lower bulb ejection passage 610c, which open upward at the upper end of the rear part, are connected to the upper full bulb passageway 610, respectively. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game balls B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game balls B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d flow through the lower full payout passage 610b. The game ball B released downward from the upper ball removal passage 600e flows through the lower ball removal passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full ball payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is open to face the ball removal guide portion 627 of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620, which is open to the left.

In the normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4) of the lower full ball path unit 610, the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are open, and are in communication with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact part 150f of the foul cover unit 150, so that the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in the payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejecting lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball ejecting passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a is closed at the branching portion. Further, in the lower full bulb path unit 610, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in an open state.

A ball tank 552 opened upward is filled with a predetermined number of balls from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, based on detection of ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guide unit 570. Game balls B are supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state where they are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B remain upstream of the payout blade 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. This shows that the game balls B are stored at least in the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the dispensing motor 584 rotates the dispensing blade 589 clockwise in the rear view, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves clockwise in the rear view, and the dispensing blade in the dispensing passage 580a moves. 589 is released downstream. Then, the game balls B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) are sent to the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

In a normal state, the game balls B sent to the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b and are placed directly below the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game balls B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c pass through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and then pass through the tray unit 200. The ball is discharged into the upper tray 201 from the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 at.

When many game balls B are put out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper tray 201 becomes full of game balls B, it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a. The game balls B put out from 580 come to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game balls B are paid out further, the game balls B are paid out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and on the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal dispensing passage 600c of the upper full bulb path unit 600 which is in communication with it. Then, when the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with game balls B, when more game balls B are paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side is filled with game balls B. As the game balls B begin to accumulate, the game balls B begin to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game balls B flowing down to the upper full-ball payout passage 600d side pass through the lower full-ball payout passage 610b of the lower full-ball route unit 610, and then pass through the full-ball socket 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be accepted. Thereafter, the game balls B received in the full ball socket 150b are discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with game balls B and more game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower tray 202.

Note that when the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B and it is no longer possible to eject the game balls B forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, if more game balls B are paid out, the lower tray The game balls B stay and are stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( In addition to informing the player that the tank is full (for example, "Please remove the ball!"), the system also controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 when the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detecting it. Temporarily stop it until the

When ejecting the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, move the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in rear view, and the ball extracting movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball passes through the gap and is pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal path 580b branched from the payout path 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal path 580b.

At this time, at the part of the ball extracting movable piece 592, since the game ball B flowing down contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extracting movable piece 592, the ball extracting movable piece 592 is less likely to be damaged.

The game balls B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 pass through the upper ball ejection passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball ejection path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c and ejected to the ball ejection guide part 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the ejected ball receiving part 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming hall is discharged to the island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 93(b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear side of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e is attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a speaker cover 621 that faces forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and the container-shaped speaker box 623 is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is open to the front. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of slits extending vertically and penetrating back and forth near the left end when viewed from the front, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. A front space recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side when viewed, and a front space recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction diagonally downward and backward. The connecting portion 621c is open.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Furthermore, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that its lower end coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear curtain member 43 in the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that is open to the front, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward, and as it goes to the right in front view, it extends rearward in a step-like manner. It is formed so that the protrusion is small. This makes it possible to secure a sufficient rear space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, in which the base unit 620b, power supply unit 620c, etc. can be placed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms part of an enclosure 624 that includes a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 to contain the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. This enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b formed in the speaker cover 621 to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front, and therefore protrudes rearward as the speaker box 623 moves to the right. Even if the space is formed in a step-like manner to reduce the amount, a sufficiently large space is secured to the right of the main body frame speaker 622.

In the speaker unit 620a, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connecting cylinder portion 43a with the sealing member 48 sandwiched therebetween, and The space is in communication with the interior space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2. Therefore, an enclosure 624 with a wide space can be formed behind the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

To be more specific, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side in front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection part 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connecting tube part 43a, the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear can be directly connected to the outer frame lower assembly 40 without attenuating the bass range in particular. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47, and can be radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42 is radiated with its phase inverted, so that it is output from the front of the main body frame speaker 622 and is emitted from the dish unit. The sound emitted from the speaker port 211b of the main body frame speaker 622 resonates to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound with deep bass.

That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

In addition, the speaker unit 620a has a through hole 621d formed in the speaker cover 621, which penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower part of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b, and the speaker box 623. A through tube 623a that communicates with the through hole 621d, extends in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent from the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. 620c is attached to the rear base 626.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. A ball removal guide part 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharged ball receiving part that opens upward in the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball removal guide part 627 and receives the game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game balls B that have passed through the ball extraction guiding part 627 and the discharged ball receiving part 628 downward.

The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens toward the left in the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and the downstream end opens toward the left end side of the discharged ball receiving section 628. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball eject guide part 627 faces so that the opening at the upstream end coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejecting passage 610c of the lower full bulb path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving section 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long from side to side. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving section 628 has a left end in front view that is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejecting guide section 627, and is inclined to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game balls B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right side in front view by the ball extraction guiding section 627 and the discharged ball receiving section 628, and then Since the liquid is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be made wider, allowing the player to hear sound with richer bass than in conventional pachinko machines.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped transparent payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 that is housed in the payout control board box 632. (See FIG. 97). The payout control board box 632 is composed of a transparent cover body and a transparent base body. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a press operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5, etc. This is for dispensing the designated number of game balls B to the player (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). Note that the payout control board 633 is housed in a payout control board box 632, and is configured as a crimped case.

Further, the payout control board 633 includes, in addition to an error LED display (not shown) that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an RWM clear button 633z having a press operation unit that serves multiple functions. In this embodiment, a lead type button is used as the RWM clear button 633z, and each lead of the RWM clear button 633z is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the payout control board 633. The press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is exposed from an opening formed in the transparent cover body, and the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is exposed when the payout control board 633 is housed in the payout control board box 632. can be operated by pressing.

The RWM clear button 633z is stored in the RAM built in the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor included in the payout control board 633, and the RAM built in the main control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the main control board 1310. Functions as a RAM clear switch to completely erase stored information, functions as a setting switch button to select and switch setting values, and functions as an error button to clear errors displayed on the error LED indicator. It also functions as a release switch. In other words, in this embodiment, the setting change function related to game specifications (function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching setting values) is mounted on the payout control board 633, which is a separate board from the main control board 1310. has been done. Further, the separate board does not have to be the payout control board 633, and may include a board that is not housed in the board case, a board that is housed in the board case, and a board that is housed in the board case that is configured as a caulking case. is possible. However, since the setting change function (function as a setting switch button to select and switch setting values) is an important function for a gaming machine, it is desirable to have higher security, and it is better to have a board that is not stored in a board case than a board that is not stored in a board case. A board that is housed has higher security, and a board that has even higher security is a board that is housed in a board case that is configured as a caulking case. Since the payout control board 633 is a board housed in a board case configured as a caulking case, it can be said that security is high. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 is attached to the game panel 1100, while the payout control board 633 is attached to the main body frame 4, which also contributes to improving security.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a substrate so as to cover the rear side of the interface substrate 635. an interface board cover 636 attached to a board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward, behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (on the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, etc., and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and is attached. The right side of the back cover 640 when viewed from the front is rotatably attached to the vertically extending rear end of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is attached to the dispensing base 551. and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full bulb path unit 600 so as to be pivotally supported so as to be freely openable and closable. A locking screw 642 is provided on the left side of the back cover 640 and in a portion corresponding to the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full bulb path unit 600. The left side of the back cover 640 is attached to the back cover attachment part 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the back cover attachment part 601a of the upper full-ball path unit 600, and the locking screw 642 is screwed to the back cover attachment part 601a. Cover 640 is fixed. The back cover 640 can be rotated approximately 180 degrees from a closed state that covers the back side of the game board 5 to an open state that opens the back side of the game board 5.

The back cover 640 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally, with the right side in front view bent forward, and when assembled on the main body frame 4, the rear surface is aligned with the upper back plate 551d of the dispensing base 551. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 passing through it from front to back and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and allows the inside of the main body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Note that the slit 641 is not formed at all in a region corresponding to the main control board box 1320, which will be described later.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 98(b) is a perspective view of the locking unit viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the outer frame 2, and a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude forward from the lower part of the front end of the unit base 651 and can be attached to the door frame depending on the rotation direction. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and moves the outer frame hook 653 downward by sliding downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front of the main body frame base 501. It stands out. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end of the transmission cylinder 654 controls the rotation of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. It engages with the transmission member 133 and rotates as the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are latched to the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the outside The frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and a corresponding key is inserted into the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 and rotated in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are sloped so as to be tapered. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are attached to the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the locking state is achieved by the biasing force of the locking spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Next, the detailed structure of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 99 to 106. FIG. 99(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99(b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 99(a). FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing the upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind. FIG. 101(a) is a perspective view of the ball tank with tank rails and the like assembled as seen from the front top, and FIG. 101(b) is a perspective view of FIG. 101(a) seen from the front bottom. FIG. 102 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 101(a). FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing an area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and can be attached to and removed from the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5; A dispensing base 551, a ball tank 552 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) extending left and right and is open upward; and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and is open upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball stopper 557; a dispensing device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the dispensing base 551 for dispensing the game ball B to the player; It is equipped with

The spherical tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a that is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above, and is inclined so that the left side is lower when viewed from the front, and a bottom wall 552a that has a bottom wall 552a that has a bottom wall 552a that is sloped so that the left side is lower when viewed from the front. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, and is formed into a container shape with an open upper side. has been done. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Moreover, the spherical tank 552 has an overflow part 552f cut out from above in the front wall 552b and formed lower than the remaining upper edge of the outer periphery. This overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the opposite end (right side wall 552e side), and has a length of approximately 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction. It is formed over a period of time.

When viewed from the front, the right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the spherical tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side in the left-right direction (left side) so as to move away from the spherical tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed in a width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B so that only one game ball B can flow therethrough. have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left when viewed from the front. In addition, in plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position approximately 1/10 of the total length in the left and right direction parallel to the axis extending in the left and right direction from the right end side, and then extends to the left. It is formed in the shape of a crank, extending diagonally from the right end to a position approximately 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as the direction advances, and from there extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction to the left end. . In the tank rail 553, in the main guide portion 553a, a portion extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right extends to the upper end with the same width, and a first rail is attached to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) in the part where the upper side is closed, and at the downstream end, the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end). The ball is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) that allows only one ball to flow through the ball.

Further, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end above the main guide portion 553a to the part where the upper side is closed, and is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are lined up in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging part 553b which bulges out wider than the width of the guide part 553a and which becomes narrower in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide part 553a. There is. By this bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B, which are spread out in the width direction on the upstream side, can be aligned so that the width in the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as you go downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so as to become narrower in the width direction from the upper end toward the lower main guide portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b in a line in the width direction toward the downstream side and the lower side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature located on the inside, and is formed into a three-dimensionally curved shape. The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, so in the tank rail 553, there is a slight curve at the border between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulge 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge 553b is applied depends on the position of the bulge 553b that comes into contact with it. This results in changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clumping within the bulged portion 553b. To be more specific, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force is always applied from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b in a constant direction to the game ball B circulating inside the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game balls B inside are always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game balls B to escape, and ball jamming (ball jamming) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging part 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging part 553b differs depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the inside can be circulated. By distributing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B are pushed, it is possible to make it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape, and it is possible to make ball jamming (ball jamming) less likely to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if balls become jammed inside the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B inside the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the balls are jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly resolved, so the interruption of the game due to ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in playing due to the interruption of the game can be reduced. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit, etc., the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gear, belt, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 remains attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the following effects.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the spherical tank 552, extends in the front-back direction, and has the same side in the left-right direction as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 (left side in front view) outside the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552. In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, it is inclined so that the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow part 552f and the front end side is higher. The overflow surface portion 501m extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulge portion 553b whose upper side is open in the tank rail 553, and the rear end side is low. The part of the game balls B that overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m is inclined so that the side (left side) that is away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is lower. and a detour passage 552g for guiding.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outside sides of the detour passage 552g, and the interval in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the bottom A discharge part 551j whose height is lower than the upper open part of the tank rail 553, and a discharge part 551j located at a position lower than the overflow surface part 501m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552g with the discharge part 551j in between. It covers an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558), and the upper surface is an overflow surface part. A terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is shaped like a flat plate extending rearward from a position 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It has extended to The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction that is approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and its left end when viewed from the front is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is approximately 1/2 of the outer diameter of the game ball B. A gap approximately twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface portion 501m and the outer frame upper member 30 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface section 501m, and has a flat left step section 501n and a right step section 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface section 501m. The upper ends of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both sides in the left and right direction, and extend in the front and rear direction like a strip, so that the outer side of the game ball B in the left and right direction is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o. It has a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in a row at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that its length in the left-right direction is shorter than its length in the front-back direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the right corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right step portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than in the front-back direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 The gap between them is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, when viewed from the front, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m matches the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501m The left end of the right step portion 501o matches the left end of the detour passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o matches the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. In addition, below, the container-shaped area|region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply called the spherical tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h that is inclined so that its front end is at the same height as the overflow part 552f and its rear end is lower. and a weir portion extending upward from the end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 on the left end side (weir section 552i side) when viewed from the front; It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes from the right end side. Note that the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined horizontally in the left-right direction.

When the detour passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear end of the tank rail 553 extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape, so that the detour passage 552g runs along the front end side of a portion extending diagonally with respect to the left-right direction. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour path 552g changes from the oblique rear end so that its distribution direction becomes perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (in the direction of flow of game balls B within the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, so that the wide part of the tank rail 553 is used as the detour passage 552g. You can receive the game ball B from. In addition, since the game balls B are supplied from the detour path 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game balls B, the game balls B from the detour path 552g are fed into the tank rail 553. It is possible to make it difficult for balls to become clogged in the 553.

The detour path 552g extends obliquely to the left and right direction so that the rear end moves backward as it goes downstream of the tank rail 553, so the game ball B moves from the detour path 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released toward the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. By discharging to a wide area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clumps inside the tank rail 553.

Further, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour path 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left side of the rear wall 552c in the front view in the tank rail 553. The game balls B that have passed from inside the ball tank 552 through the lower side of the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flow into this part. For this reason, in the part of the tank rail 553 that is behind the detour passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). (height) cannot be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received at the tank rail 553, and the game ball B will not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending lower to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow part 552f on the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, when viewed from the front, the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j extends from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position approximately 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left and right direction, and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left end of the front wall 552b in the left and right direction. After extending diagonally rearward from the front wall 552b to a position approximately 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends parallel to the left wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it is formed in a shape extending parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position approximately ⅓ of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

In the spherical tank 552, in plan view, there is a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above shape, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The region surrounded by has an opening 552k formed to penetrate in the vertical direction. In addition, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending outward in the left-right direction and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b, respectively, on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir part 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a section 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow part 552f and the upper end edge of the two flange parts 552l is the same as the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o) is formed higher than the upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o.

When the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are located rearward (protruding) from the spherical tank 552. )are doing. The rear end side of the left side detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The ejecting section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. When the discharge part 551j is assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge part 551j is installed in the spherical tank 552 so that it becomes lower in a stepwise manner toward the rear from a height lower than the detour passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the spherical tank 552. It extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, and then moves leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends towards the rear.

The external terminal board 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a attached to the rear surface thereof arranged in the left-right direction. This electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal whose grip part opens by operating a lever and can grip the tip of the electric wire. The external terminal board 558 is disposed in front of a portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 when assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at approximately the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the effects of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged so that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower, as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner of the rear end is lower, and the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner of the rear end is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are each inclined such that the left end side thereof is lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

When the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, they first cross the overflow part 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be allowed to flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, and the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface section 501m, and the game balls B can be caused to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface section 501m. The game balls B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the slope of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the number of game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing against each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). It is possible to prevent clogging (so-called ball jamming) caused by the game balls B interlocking with each other in the ball tank 552.

Moreover, since the detour passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to avoid a strong backward pressing force being applied to the game balls B in the ball tank 552 due to the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface portion 501m, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are prevented from clogging. can be prevented. In addition, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m are prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem in which the game ball B spilled outside the main body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side that is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) due to the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from being strongly pressed against each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from becoming jammed.

In addition, since the height of the remaining upper edge of the outer circumference of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow part 552f is higher than the overflow part 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is The upper end edge of the left wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the rear end of the overflow portion 552f, that is, the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 over the overflow part 552f to the overflow surface part 501m and are flowing from the overflow surface part 501m to the detour passage 552g are on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour path 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour path 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball It is possible to prevent the game balls B from clogging in the tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the ball is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing in from the side (ball tank 552) into the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game balls B in the detour passage 552g is controlled from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear. The flow can be made in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be in a fixed direction. Therefore, within the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other and jammed together due to the pressure applied to the game balls B being dispersed, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B. It can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guiding part 553a that extends to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding part 553a and are aligned in the left and right direction. Since they are lined up, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulge 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in the part where the upper side is open, the game balls released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is made to extend from the upstream end to the part where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. Since the game balls B are changed so as to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they move toward the downstream side within the bulge portion 553b. In addition, since the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the channel through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) By circulating the plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction downstream through the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and the game balls B are stacked in multiple stages in the height direction. can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (toward the payout device 580 side) in a state where they are aligned in a line.

Furthermore, since it is provided with the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, on the opposite side of the bulb tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge part 551j in between, there is an external terminal board 558 equipped with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558), the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment bounces or is supplied with force in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a, etc. , problems such as short circuits or electrical wiring coming off due to contact with the game ball B will not occur.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface 501m, the game balls B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 are transferred to the ball tank 552. Even if the ball B bounces on the overflow surface 501m, it can be made difficult to land on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. The occurrence of such problems can be easily avoided.

Furthermore, the game balls B returned from the overflow surface section 501m to the guide surface section 552j of the ball tank 552 are sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 104) due to the inclination of the guide surface section 552j. This can prevent the game balls B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game balls B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, thereby preventing the game balls B from clogging in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

In addition, the game balls B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounce on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface section 501m, and ride on the left step section 501n and right step section 501o on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface section 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B can be guided to the overflow surface 501m and the detour passage 552g due to their inclinations, and problems can occur due to the game balls B spilling outside the main body frame 4. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, since the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j, the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 due to the guide surface portion 552j The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , the game ball B guided by the detour path 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, it will not fall. The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 107 to 117. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in which the center accessory and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. 108 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 107 seen from the front right, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board shown in FIG. 107 seen from the front left, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. . FIG. 111 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 112 is a front view of the game board with the center accessory etc. made transparent. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. 115 is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 107, and FIG. 116 is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 107. FIG. 117 is a front view of the game board in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle nails.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven when a player operates a handle 182 of a handle unit 180. The gaming area 5a includes a general prize opening 2001 that grants a predetermined benefit to the player (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) by accepting or passing game balls B, a first starting opening 2002, and a regular prize opening. An opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and an accessory winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game balls B are placed in a general winning hole 2001, a first starting hole 2002, a normal winning hole 2003, a second starting hole 2004, a big winning hole 2005, a prize winning hole 2006, etc. in the gaming area 5a. This is for playing a game in which the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game balls B within the game area 5a are enjoyed so as to be accepted.

The game board 5 includes a front component 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is provided. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 117, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100. The game board 5 also includes a board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a game played by driving a game ball B into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 115, FIG. 137, etc.) for controlling the contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 placed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a performance display device 1600 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100. It also has the following.

A production display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the production display device 1600. A panel relay board 1710 is attached below the effect display device 1600 on the rear surface of the back unit 3000. The panel relay board 1710 includes a main control board 1310, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a big winning opening sensor 2403, and an accessory winning opening sensor 2513. , first V winning opening sensor 2514, first losing opening sensor 2515, second V winning opening sensor 3003, third losing opening sensor 3004, out opening left sensor 3032, and out opening right sensor 3033, starting opening solenoid 2412, attacker It is for relaying connections with the solenoid 2414, the accessory prize opening solenoid 2512, the first distribution solenoid 2532, the second distribution solenoid 2545, the third distribution drive motor 2555, etc.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to accept the game balls B hit in the gaming area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the gaming area. A first starting opening 2002 that is always open to accept game balls B at different positions within the gaming area 5a, and a normal winning opening 2003 that is always open so that game balls B can be accepted at further different positions within the gaming area 5a. , a second starting port 2004 that can accept the game ball B according to the normal lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the normal winning port 2003, and a first starting port 2002 or a second starting port. A grand prize opening 2005 that can accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to 2004, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening. Receiving the game ball B into the opening 2004 makes it possible to accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, and the game ball B is accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006. A first V winning hole 2007 and a second V winning hole 2008 that give an opportunity to accept the game balls B that have been received, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 that detect magnetic fields acting illegally within the gaming area 5a. It is equipped with

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002, and a front side of the starting port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is installed along the inner rail 1002 on the left side as viewed and has three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is installed slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, and an attacker which is attached to the right side in front view of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and has a normal winning port 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a special winning port 2005. The unit 2400 is installed above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a prize opening 2008 is provided.

The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, and a second starting opening sensor 2402 that detects the gaming ball B accepted in the second starting opening 2004. It is equipped with a big winning hole sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005. The center accessory 2500 includes an accessory winning hole sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B received in the accessory winning hole 2006, and a first V winning hole that detects the game ball B received in the first V winning hole 2007. It includes a sensor 2514 and a first loss port sensor 2515 that detects the game ball B received in the first loss port 2535.

The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A locking mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600 is provided. In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a general winning hole sensor 3001 provided in the starting hole unit 2100. The first starting hole sensor 3002 detects the game ball B received in the first starting hole 2002, and the second V winning hole sensor 3003 detects the game ball B received in the second V winning hole 2008 of the center accessory 2500. and a third loss port sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B received in the third loss port 2556 of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 137).

In addition, the back unit 3000 is driven into the gaming area 5a, and is inserted into the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. An out ball detection unit 3030 that detects a game ball B that is not accepted (a game ball B that is not given a benefit), a light guide plate production unit 3100 that is attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and a light guide plate production unit 3100. A rear effect unit 3200 is installed in a rear box 3010 at the rear of the rear display unit 3200.

The light guide plate production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 includes a first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200, and a second V of the third distribution device 2550 in the center accessory 2500. A back lower ball discharge unit 3120 that receives the accepted game ball B and discharges it downward into the winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2556, the first losing opening 2535 in the center accessory 2500, and the first V winning opening 2007 a back right ball ejection unit 3130 that receives the game ball B received by the player and ejects it downward; a magnetic sensor (not shown) that detects magnetism acting illegally on the warp entrance 2501 in the center accessory 2500; It is equipped with.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118(a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 118(b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel seen from the back.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from a lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passes the upper end of the center in the left-right direction as seen from the front, and extends to the diagonally upper right corner; The inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left side when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. An out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and slopes downwardly toward the rear.

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the bottom of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is urged by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the lower center of the frame in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008 and the out ball detection unit 3030 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later.

In addition, the front component 1000 is located on the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the vicinity of the lower end extending substantially perpendicularly, on the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and on the outside of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a from the lower front side of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1103 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it passes through the notch 1010 and the notch to the lower part of the lower full ball path unit 610. The front end openings of the normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a function display unit attachment part 1011 formed at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp pasting part 1012 formed at the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100 disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 118 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 117, etc.).

The game panel 1100 is made of a wood board such as plywood with a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has an outer shape that is approximately the same as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1100 has an out recess 1101 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a and at a position corresponding to the out opening 1008 of the front component 1000. In addition, a plurality of openings 1102 are formed in the game panel 1100, passing through the front and back to attach the front unit 2000.

The game panel 1100 also includes a cutout 1103 cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1103 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch to lower the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full bulb path unit 610 face forward. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, a decorative sheet with patterns and decorations in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is pasted on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

[5-3. Board holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 113, 114, and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with the upper and front sides open, and the bottom surface is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200, when assembled to the game board 5, covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 from below and from the rear side, and also covers the main control unit 1300 on the back side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the ejecting section 1201 is located directly above the ejecting ball receiving section 628 of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, game balls B are discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the out ball detection unit 3030 of the back unit 3000, and game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000. B, and can be discharged from the discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 110, 111, and 113 to 115. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses a main control board 1310 that controls game content and payout of game balls B, etc., a setting change board 1311 that can set gaming performance, and a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311. and a main control board box 1320 attached to the board holder 1200.

When the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, when looking at the game board 5 from behind, the rectangular main control board 1310 long in the left and right direction is on the left side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. It is formed and arranged in a size that occupies about four-fifths of the area from the left side to the right side of the area surrounded by the top side, right side, and bottom side, and the remaining one-fifth area. A square setting change board 1311 is arranged in a corner region where the upper and right sides of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected.

As described above, the outer frame 2 coaxially connects the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Since the main body frame 4 is rotatably supported and can be opened and closed forward centering on the left side in front view, the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 52 of the main body frame 4 are connected to each other. The left side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, where the main body frame 4 is arranged, is the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the opposite side, the right side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, is the open side of the main body frame 4. Be on the side. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, while the A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the closed side).

In addition, the back cover 640 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, as described above. It is something. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered by the back cover 640. Further, as described above, the right side of the back cover 640 when viewed from the front is attached to the vertically extending rear end of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around the vertically extending axis. , the left side is attached to the back cover attachment part 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the back cover attachment part 601a of the upper full bulb path unit 600, so the right side in front view is the pivot side of the back cover 640 ( The left side in front view, which is the opposite side, is the open side of the back cover 640. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640, while the back cover is opened. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side.

In this embodiment, green is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the main control board 1310 are painted solidly with green resist except for various land patterns. In contrast, the setting change board 1311's resist is white, which is a different color from the main control board 1310's resist, and the entire front (mounting surface) and back (soldering surface) of the setting board 1311 is white. It is painted solid with resist except for various land patterns.

Here, the point that a color different from that used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change board 1311 will be explained. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are both boards housed in the main control board box 1320. The main control board 1310 is a board of high importance for crime prevention because it controls the progress of the game (controls the game content and payout of game balls B, etc.) for game hall managers, game hall clerks, and other staff. There is a very high level of awareness about this. Therefore, there is no need to draw attention to the fact that this board is the main control board 1310, distinguishing it from other boards. On the other hand, the setting change board 1311 is a board that has a completely new function in the pachinko machine 1, that is, it can set the game performance, so although it is housed in the main control board box 1320, it is not important for crime prevention. Awareness of the fact that it is an expensive board is extremely low. Therefore, it is necessary to draw attention to the fact that this board is the setting change board 1311, distinguishing it from other boards.

Therefore, in this embodiment, green, which is generally used as a resist for boards, is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and a white color, which is different from the color used as the resist for the main control board 1310, is used as the resist for the setting change board 1311. Adopted. As a result, among the boards housed in the main control board box 1320, the setting change board 1311 stands out compared to the main control board 1310, and in addition to the main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311 also has high importance for crime prevention. This can contribute to raising awareness of the fact that it is a substrate.

Note that in the present embodiment described above, white, which is different from the green used as the resist of the main control board 1310, is used as the resist of the setting change board 1311, but it is not possible to distinguish between the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311. If possible, yellow, red, blue, transparent, etc. may be used.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, a white color different from the green color used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change board 1311, but instead of the resist of the setting change board 1311, It may be printed in white to cover almost the entire front surface (mounting surface) and/or back surface (solder surface), or it may be printed in one of black, blue, yellow, and red as silk printing. May be printed.

Next, the main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will be described. The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded from polycarbonate resin, it is possible to check the state of the front and back sides of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not any unauthorized modification has been made). or whether a fraudulent IC is mounted) can be confirmed from outside the main control board box 1320. Moreover, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311. Note that the cover body is formed with a plurality of vent holes for heat dissipation that can release the air inside the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to an interface board 635, a peripheral control board 1510, and a setting change board 1311. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a big winning opening sensor 2403, and an accessory winning opening sensor. 2513, first V winning opening sensor 2514, first losing opening sensor 2515, second V winning opening sensor 3003, third losing opening sensor 3004, out opening left sensor 3032, out opening right sensor 3033, starting opening solenoid 2412, attacker Solenoid 2414, accessory prize opening solenoid 2512, first distribution solenoid 2532, second distribution solenoid 2545, third distribution drive motor 2555, magnetic sensor 2010, left outlet sensor 3032, right sensor 3033, etc. It is connected.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a that can switch the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and confirm the setting values. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection). (electrical wiring).The harness (electrical wiring) absorbs (reduces) the force associated with the operation of the setting key switch 1311a, and connects the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1311. ). By making this connector connection (inter-board connection), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. Note that connector connections, which are inter-board connections, include connections that use normal connectors that do not have a floating mechanism, and connections that use special connectors that have a floating mechanism. A normal connector without a floating mechanism consists of a socket and a plug, and the socket and plug fit together by inserting the plug into the socket and pushing it in. When the socket and plug fit together, The structure is such that there is no movement in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the plug is inserted and pushed (for example, in the vertical direction). On the other hand, special connectors with a floating mechanism consist of a socket and a plug, and the socket and plug fit together by inserting and pushing the socket into the plug. When fitting, it is possible to absorb errors that occur during fitting (mating axis misalignment) by moving within a predetermined distance range in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the socket is inserted and pushed (e.g., up and down). It has a structure. In this embodiment, a normal connector without a floating mechanism is used as a connector connection between boards, but a special connector with a floating mechanism may be used.

The setting change board 1311 is formed into a square shape with the distance of one side being approximately one-fifth of the distance in the horizontal direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and the upper side of the board 1311 is shaped like a square. The main control board 1310 is disposed on the same straight line as the upper side thereof, and its lower side is disposed above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the vertical distance dimension, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311. It is located on the right side of , and at a position corresponding to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is arranged at the center point where the vertical and horizontal center lines of the square setting change board 1311 intersect. On the main control board 1310, a setting change permission lamp 1310z that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) is arranged above the center line in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 and closer to the connector MSCN. A setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN. Further below, a base monitor 1310h is arranged, which is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) connected in a row from the center toward the right side.

In this embodiment, the setting key is at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion port is along the vertical direction). In this case, the setting key switch 1311a is set to OFF as the initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion port, and the setting key can be removed from the insertion port. In this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 with the setting key inserted into the insertion slot, other The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so that the members of the pachinko machine (or the members of the island equipment of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation, and this setting key ON signal is set. It is input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and performing a second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on to the OK key, and the signal of this OK key ON can be turned on. is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Additionally, the setting key cylinder is moved so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can be returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned ON to the original position. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to its initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this embodiment, two completely different functions, the setting key ON function and the enter key ON function, can be realized with only the setting key switch 1311a, depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated. The operation of turning on the setting key and the operation of turning on the enter key can be performed together using only the setting key switch 1311a.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a corresponds to the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, although it is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. A wire intrusion prevention part is molded on the cover body for this opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter through the "gap" formed between the opening and modify the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. The structure is as follows. Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, the cover body is molded transparent as described above. Through the cover body, it is possible to visually confirm the setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of pitches displayed by the base monitor 1310h.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, the wiring pattern for transmitting the enter key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, The wiring pattern through which the OFF signal of 1311a is transmitted is formed on the setting change board 1311 so that they do not come close to each other (separated from each other), and the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 ( Connections to the terminals of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are also formed separately, and in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern (that is, the setting of the setting key switch 1311a The wiring pattern for transmitting the key ON signal, the wiring pattern for transmitting the enter key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and the wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal for the setting key switch 1311a) should also be routed close to each other. They are formed so that they do not come close to each other (separated from each other), and the wiring patterns that transmit signals from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 are formed so that they do not come close to each other (separated from each other). ) is formed.

Here, the procedure up to accessing (operating) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 will be briefly described. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, while the main control board 1310 is placed on the open side of the main body frame 4, as described above. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the support side (closed side). Further, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered by the back cover 640, as described above. In addition, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640, while the back cover is opened. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side. In other words, when opening the back cover 640, the back cover open side of the back cover 640 is the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, so the main body frame 4 is larger than the outer frame 2 (approximately If the opening side of the back cover 640 is not opened (approximately 90 degrees), the opening side of the back cover 640 will interfere with the outer frame 2 and the back cover 640 will not be able to open the state in which it covers the rear side of the game board 5. In other words, a person who accesses (operates) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 simply opens the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 by a gap that allows him to insert his arm, and then opens the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Even if an attempt is made to access (operate) the setting key switch 1311a, the back cover 640 cannot be opened. That is, a person who accesses (operates) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 must first check the outer frame in order to secure a space in which the back cover 640 can open the state where it covers the rear side of the game board 5. 2, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 widely (nearly 90 degrees).

In this way, since the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4. If an unauthorized person attempting to access (operate) the setting key switch 1311a uses an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or wire, the key switch 1311a may be used between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 Even if an incorrect tool is inserted and fed from the open side of the body frame 4, the path from the open side of the main body frame 4 to the setting key switch 1311a becomes long, so the incorrect tool must be fed deeply. As a result, the operation time during which an unauthorized tool is sent to the setting key switch 1311a becomes longer, so that it becomes easier for staff such as a clerk at the game hall to discover such fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, since the main control board box 1320 is covered by the back cover 640, the insertion port for the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is covered by the back cover 640. There is. As a result, an unauthorized person attempting to illegally access (operate) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 can use an illegal tool such as a piano wire or wire between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted and fed into the open side of the main body frame 4, the unauthorized tool will be blocked by the back cover 640 before it reaches the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. can be prevented from being inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a.

Further, the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is provided with an insertion port for inserting a setting key, and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder is covered by the back cover 640. In order to access (operate) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, it is necessary to open the back cover 640. In order to open the back cover 640, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 by a wide angle (approximately 90 degrees) relative to the outer frame 2. By involving such a plurality of operations, it is possible to improve the security of access (operation) to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, thereby increasing the deterrence against fraudulent acts using an unauthorized tool.

Note that, as described above, the back cover 640 is attached so that its left side in front view is pivotally supported by the back cover attachment portion 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full bulb path unit 600 so as to be freely openable and closable. The locking screw 642 is screwed into the back cover attachment part 601a to fix the back cover 640, and the locking screw 642 is also arranged on the open side of the back cover 640, so that the main body frame 4 It is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, which is the opposite side to the open side. Therefore, an unauthorized person attempting to illegally access (operate) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 may insert an unauthorized tool between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the open side of the main body frame 4. Even if the tool is inserted and fed, the path from the open side of the main body frame 4 to the locking screw 642 of the back cover 640 becomes long, making it necessary to feed the illegal tool deeply. In this respect as well, since the operation time for feeding the illegal tool into the locking screw 642 becomes longer, it is possible to make it easier for personnel such as game hall clerks to detect such fraudulent activities, and the setting change board By increasing the security of access (operation) to the setting key switch 1311a of 1311, it is possible to increase deterrence against fraudulent acts using unauthorized tools.

The setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged is housed in a main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310, and this main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5. ing. On the other hand, the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is arranged is housed in the payout control board box 632, and this payout control board box 632 is placed behind the power board cover 631 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. attached to the side. In this way, by arranging the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z on separate boards, and by making the boards attached to different objects, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z can be separated from each other. Can be done. If the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged together on one board, unauthorized modification only needs to be made to one board, which is not preferable in terms of crime prevention. Therefore, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on separate boards, and the boards are attached to different objects. The security against the clear button 633z is improved.

The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) controls the game preparation and the game (following the game preparation control, the game is controlled). Game preparation control is performed in the first step (step S14 in the main control side power-on processing to be described later) in which the setting value can be changed based on the signal from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. determination, processing of step S16A), and following this first step, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 (here, functions as a setting switching button for selecting and switching setting values). The process includes a second step (determination in step S216 and processing in step S218 in the setting change process, which will be described later), in which a setting value can be selected and switched based on the signal. Following the game preparation control, the game control consists of a main control side main process in a main control side power-on process, which will be described later, a main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

Although such security can be improved, by arranging the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z on separate boards, and by adopting a configuration in which the boards are attached to different objects, the setting key Since the switch 1311a is housed in the main control board box 1320, there is no need to tell where the setting key switch 1311a is located. It may be difficult for the game hall manager, game hall clerk, or other personnel to know where the game hall is located because they may be unfamiliar with the game hall.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a notation is attached to the main control board box 1320 that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. Specifically, a sticker is affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 that can tell the location of the RWM clear button 633z. This sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and on this rectangular sheet, for example, "The RWM clear button (setting switch button) is located on the payout control board" is printed in red translucent letters (height: 7 mm). ing. As a result, the location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switch button) can be communicated to the game hall manager, game hall clerk, and other personnel. When operating the RWM clear button 633z, it is possible to easily find the RWM clear button 633z, thereby avoiding dizziness. Therefore, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Note that even if this sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320, it does not hinder the visibility of the main control board 1310. Further, instead of the characters printed on the rectangular sheet of this sticker, symbols such as arrows may be used.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a sticker was attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When molding the cover body of the board box 1320, concave characters or convex characters may be molded together (that is, the cover body and the characters may be integrally molded). . Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a sticker is pasted on the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. You can print the text (height: 7 mm) "The RWM clear button (setting switch button) is on the payout control board" in white on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 1311, or print it on the payout control board 633. The text (height: 7 mm) "RWM clear button (setting switch button)" may be printed on the surface (mounting surface) in white as a silk screen. Note that the color of silk printing may be the same color or may be different colors. Further, symbols such as arrows may be used instead of silk-printed characters. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a sticker is pasted on the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. The text part may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 1311 and cutout text (height: 7 mm) "RWM clear button (setting switch button) is on the payout control board" may be formed with a resist, or the text may be formed using a resist. The text portion may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 633 and cut out (height: 7 mm) as "RWM clear button (setting switching button)" and formed using a resist. Note that although the resists may be of the same color, it is preferable that the resists be of different colors so that the substrates can be distinguished. Further, instead of a blank character, a blank symbol with a symbol such as an arrow masked may be used. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the embodiment described above, a sticker was attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. A similar seal is placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 1310 or the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 (this seal is a transparent rectangular sheet, and this rectangular sheet includes, for example, red translucent letters (high 7mm) with the words "RWM clear button (settings switching button) is located on the payout control board" printed on it, or you can paste a red translucent mark on the surface (mounting side) of the payout control board 633. You may also attach a transparent rectangular sheet with the words "RWM clear button (setting switch button)" written on it (height: 7 mm). Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a sticker was attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. An announcement voice may be played from various speakers to indicate where the button 633z is placed, or an announcement image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, with the power of the pachinko machine 1 turned on, an employee such as a manager of the game hall or a clerk of the game hall operates the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 to display the performance display device 1600. Various setting screens are displayed, and an item regarding the location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switching button) is selected. As a result, an announcement voice that tells where the RWM clear button 633z is located is heard from various speakers saying, "The RWM clear button is located on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also serves as a setting switch button." , an announcement image (which may be taken as a photograph) that conveys the location of the RWM clear button 633z is displayed on the effect display device 1600. After understanding the location of the RWM clear button 633z from the announcement voice and announcement image, the game hall manager, game hall clerk, and other personnel shut off the power to the pachinko machine 1 and change the setting values. It can be done smoothly. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a sticker was pasted on the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z, but instead of this, a sticker is attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320. When changing the settings, an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to let you know where the RWM clear button 633z, which also functions as a setting switch button, is located. Specifically, for example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in which the setting value can be changed and determined, a predetermined command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The RWM clear button that tells where the RWM clear button 633z is placed under the control of the control board 1510 is located on the payout control board.The RWM clear button also serves as a setting switch button.Set by operating the RWM clear button. Please change the value.'' is repeatedly heard from various speakers. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the setting change process, it sends a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, which causes the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the announcement voice and proceed with various processes based on the received predetermined command. I will do it. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known. In addition, following such an announcement sound, an announcement sound that tells how to operate the setting keys may be played from various speakers after the setting value is determined. Furthermore, while the announcement voice is being played, an image "setting in progress" may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When changing the settings, an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to let you know where the RWM clear button 633z, which also functions as a setting switch button, is located. Specifically, for example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in which the setting value can be changed and determined, a predetermined command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The RWM clear button that tells where the RWM clear button 633z is placed under the control of the control board 1510 is located on the payout control board.The RWM clear button also serves as a setting switch button.Set by operating the RWM clear button. Please change the value.'' announcement repeatedly plays from various speakers. This eliminates the need to search for the sticker affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320. Although such announcement voices are repeatedly played from various speakers, in case the content of the announcement voice is missed, a sticker affixed to the cover of the main control board box 1320 is placed before the next announcement voice starts playing. By visually observing the RWM clear button 633z, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be known. In addition to the announcement voice, "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also serves as a setting switch button. Please operate the RWM clear button to change the setting value." It may also be possible to provide information that indicates where a sticker indicating the location of the button is affixed. When the RWM clear button is operated, the main control MPU 1310a transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement sound. Even if the person who changes the setting value has become accustomed to changing the setting value due to the work and it is annoying, it is recommended to use this as an opportunity to operate the RWM clear button immediately after starting the work. , the announcement voice can be stopped immediately, and even if it is necessary to carry out the work after the game hall has started operating, the work can be started so as not to cause inconvenience to the players. If the RWM clear button is operated immediately, the announcement voice can be immediately stopped using this as a trigger. In addition, following such an announcement sound, an announcement sound that tells how to operate the setting keys may be played from various speakers after the setting value is determined. Furthermore, while the announcement voice is being played, an image "setting in progress" may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on separate boards, and the boards are attached to different objects. However, if security can be improved, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button (in this case, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button (in this case, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 to the setting switch button functions can be removed) can be aggregated and arranged. For example, the vertical distance between the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 is almost the same as the vertical distance between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the horizontal distance between the main control board 1310 A center line that is shorter than the distance dimension in the left and right direction of , have matching shapes. In other words, the setting change board 1311 has a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 so that the center of its vertical distance dimension is located on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311. Along the right side of the control board 1310, the center of the vertical distance is located on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a is disposed below the center line of the setting change board 1311 and has a setting key cylinder in which a setting key is inserted and rotated near the lower side of the setting change board 1311. A setting switching button having a press operation part is arranged above the center line and near the upper side of the setting change board 1311. That is, on the same board called the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a is arranged near the bottom side, whereas the setting change button is arranged near the top side, and they are spaced apart from each other. In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button are arranged separately and separated from each other on the same board, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button are arranged separately, although they are integrated on one board. The setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button are integrated into one board and arranged separately, since this makes it difficult to make unauthorized changes compared to the case where the keys are placed close to each other and arranged separately. In some cases, it may be possible to improve crime prevention even if the

Next, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, and the setting display 1310g of the main control board 1310 will be briefly described. First, a case in which setting values are changed will be briefly explained, and a case in which a confirmation display of the current setting values is displayed will be briefly explained. The setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current setting values in addition to changing the setting values, so only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, should possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting values, when turning on the power to the Pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame should be 4 is opened, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn the first ON. A "predetermined setting value change permission condition" must be satisfied that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by being operated. In other words, the person who actually changes the settings should first check that the power is not turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then change the settings to the outer frame 2. Open the main body frame 4, then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate it 60 degrees clockwise, and perform the first ON operation. The setting key of the key switch 1311a is turned ON to power on the pachinko machine 1. Note that the above-mentioned "predetermined setting value change permission condition" may further include a condition that the press operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated and an operation signal is input. In other words, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is opened. The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the first ON operation is performed to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON, and It may be possible to change the setting value when a "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is satisfied.

A person who changes the settings should first check that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then move the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Then, insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, turn the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and perform the first ON operation. The setting key of the key switch 1311a is turned ON. Subsequently, the power switch 630a in FIG. 7 is operated to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current setting values (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM. The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from off to on.

When the person who changes the setting value presses the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, a detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z is transmitted from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. is input to. Each time a person changing the settings of the set value presses the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, the main control MPU 1310a increases the value by 1 from the current set value based on the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z. However, when the maximum value, set value 6, is reached, control is performed to return to the initial value, set value 1, increase the value by 1 again, and display the set value on the setting display 1310g.

When determining the setting value, the person who changes the setting value should rotate the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, move the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key where the setting key is turned ON). Turn the cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from its rotational position to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it off. By rotating the setting key switch 1311a by 60 degrees counterclockwise and performing the second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the enter key. This enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the changed and determined setting values in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

Note that by rotating the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, moving the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned on) to the initial position that is the original position (that is, turning the setting key switch 1311a When the switch 1311a is returned to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF, the ON signal of the enter key may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, After displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g by pressing the push operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, the set value is determined by simply turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is removed from the setting key cylinder. This improves work efficiency.

The person who changes the setting value should return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the enter key was turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a was turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it OFF. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying it, and from lighting the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turning it off.

The person who changes the setting value takes out the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and then changes the setting value. complete.

When displaying confirmation of the currently set setting values, the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn on the first ON. A "predetermined setting value display permission condition" must be satisfied that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by being operated. In other words, the person who actually displays the currently set setting values must first confirm that the Pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which the power has been restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage has occurred), and then , open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to open the first By turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key is turned on.

The person who displays the currently set setting values must first check that the Pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which power has been restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage), and then Then, insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current setting values (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM. Among them, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1310z remains off, and even if the person who displays the currently set setting value presses the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633. , the set value is not changed at all in response to this pressing operation, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g is also not changed.

When the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting value completes the confirmation of the currently set setting value, the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting value moves the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned on to the original position (that is, Turn off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from a state in which setting values are displayed to a state in which they are not displayed.

The person who wishes to check and display the currently set setting values removes the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and then sets the current setting value. Complete the confirmation display of the set values that have been set.

As mentioned above, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are such that when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to switch to the first While it is necessary for the setting key to be turned ON by the ON operation, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is, as mentioned above, After the power is restored after a momentary power outage (when a power outage occurs), the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. It is necessary that the setting key is turned ON by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and performing the first ON operation. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition are such that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a is There is a common requirement that the setting key is turned on by inserting the setting key into the , turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and performing the first ON operation. The difference is that the predetermined setting value change permission condition requires "at the time of power restoration," whereas the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires "after power restoration."

Furthermore, there are two types of setting key switches: a lead type and a surface mount type (so-called SMD type). The setting key switch 1311a in this embodiment basically uses a lead type switch. The setting key switch 1311a has an operation in which a setting key is inserted into or removed from the insertion port. Therefore, the force associated with this operation acts on the board on which the setting key switch 1311a is provided, causing the board to bend. In the lead type, each lead of the setting key switch is placed inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the board. On the other hand, in the SMD type, each lead of the setting key switch is arranged so as to protrude outward from the outer shape of the setting key switch, and is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board.

As a result, with the lead type, if the setting key gets caught in the socket when removed from the socket, each lead of the setting key switch will be placed inside the outline of the setting key switch, and the back side of the board ( Compared to the SMD type, where the lead of the setting key switch protrudes toward the outside and is soldered to the surface of the board (mounting side), the setting key switch The load applied to the part where each lead is soldered to the back side (solder side) of the board increases, and this load acts strongly from the back side (solder side) to the front side (mounting side) of the board, causing the board itself to bend significantly. becomes. On the other hand, with the SMD type, even if the setting key gets caught in the socket when the setting key is removed from the socket, each lead of the setting key switch protrudes outward from the outside of the setting key switch. This is a lead type in which each lead of the setting key switch is placed inside the outline of the setting key switch and is soldered to the back side (soldering side) of the board. Compared to the previous version, the load applied to the part where each lead of the setting key switch is soldered to the front surface (mounting surface) of the board is smaller, and this load is transferred from the back surface (soldering surface) of the board to the front surface (mounting surface). The board itself does not bend easily even if you work towards it.

In addition, if the board itself bends significantly due to an external force being applied to the board, there is a risk that the solder part to which SMD type electronic components are soldered may peel off due to the large peeling load of the land pattern, so we recommend using a lead type as a setting key switch. When using one, it is desirable to mount it on a board on which SMD type electronic components are not mounted. In addition, the peeling load of the wiring pattern and land pattern at the solder part where each lead part of the setting key switch is soldered to the back side (solder side) of the board is smaller than that of the SMD type, and the solder part of the setting key switch is Considering the strength of the solder part, it is desirable to use a lead type setting key switch because it can be made resistant to peeling.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a lead type switch is basically used as the setting key switch 1311a. In this embodiment, since lead-type electronic components are mounted on the setting change board 1311 instead of SMD-type electronic parts, a lead-type one is mounted on the setting change board 1311 as the setting key switch 1311a. Even if the setting key gets caught in the insertion slot when the setting key is removed from the insertion slot and the board itself bends greatly as described above, the leads soldered to the back side (solder side) of the setting change board 1311 There is no risk that other electronic components of the type may be peeled off from the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. Note that, as described above, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection). may be electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a harness), signals from the setting key switch 1311a are electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

The rectangular main control board 1310, which is long in the left-right direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, extends from the left side to the right side of the area surrounded by the left side, top side, right side, and bottom side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 is connected to the top and right sides of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 in the remaining one-fifth of the area. A square setting change board 1311 is arranged in a corner area. The setting change board 1311 is formed into a square shape with the distance on one side being about one-fifth of the horizontal distance of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and is a rectangle long in the left-right direction. The shape is smaller than that of the main control board 1310. In this embodiment, a lead type setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the square setting change board 1311 having such a small shape, and if a setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and pressed The setting change board 1311 may be formed on a small board even if the board itself bends due to the setting key switch 1311a, or if the setting key gets caught in the socket when the setting key is removed from the socket of the setting key switch 1311a and the board itself bends. By doing so, the magnitude of deflection can be suppressed to be smaller than that of the main control board 1310. As a result, the cover body and base body of the main control board box 1320 at positions corresponding to the setting change board 1311 come into contact with the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 to prevent bending. Since there is no need to provide ribs for each setting key switch 1311a, screw holes can be provided in the setting change board 1311 around the position where the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, and the setting key switch 1311a can be housed in the transparent main control board box 1320. This can contribute to the visibility of the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311.

In this way, in this embodiment, a lead type is used as the setting key switch 1311a, and it is arranged on the setting change board 1311 which is separate from the main control board 1310, so that setting values can be changed. Even if the setting change board 1311 is bent due to the operation (operation) of inserting and removing the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, the main control board 1310 does not bend. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from being bent due to the operation of the lead type setting key switch 1311a.

On the other hand, there is a case where the setting key switch 1311a is placed on one of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, etc. instead of the setting change board 1311, and these If an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the board, use an SMD type instead of a lead type as the setting key switch 1311a, mount it on the surface of the board (mounting surface), and temporarily insert it. Even if the setting key gets caught in the insertion slot when the setting key is removed from the mouth, the board itself will not bend as described above, so other SMD type electronic components soldered to the surface (mounting side) of the board will There is no risk of it peeling off from the surface (mounting surface).

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" refers to the probability for determining whether it is a jackpot or not, the probability for determining whether it is a small hit or not, as well as the probability from when the probability changes to the normal It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when moving to the next time, the distribution rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc. The probability (degree of advantage) of being able to increase the number of game balls that can be played is preset. In this embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, and from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses various tables (for example, a jackpot judgment table in which the ratio of the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, A jackpot symbol determination table that specifies the percentage of the decision value for determination, a small hit determination table that specifies the percentage of the small win decision value that indicates winning the small hit, and a percentage of the decision value for the determination of the small win symbol. (such as a small winning symbol determination table, a normal time transition determination table that defines the ratio of determination values for transition from probability change to normal time, etc.), and is used in various distribution rates that are associated with set values. Various tables (for example, a distribution table that defines the distribution time, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations that are associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. In addition, the various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used for various allocation rates are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other. In some cases, the values may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to . In addition, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, but they may be in a smaller range than this, or they may be in a larger range. It may be something. For example, there may be four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4, or eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays setting values, but also allows the main control MPU 1310a to check the contents of its own internal RAM when power is restored to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, if the power-off processing on the main control side has not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the internal RAM (or if the (This is not possible) and displays an error message to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

Next, to briefly explain the base monitor 1310h, the base monitor 1310h collects game balls from the game balls fired into the game area 5a through the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. The number of game balls is displayed. Among the game balls fired into the game area 5a, the game balls collected by the out port 1008 are detected by either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033, and this detection signal is sent to the panel. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the relay board 1710.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a could be set from the initial position. The setting key switch 1311a' may be configured such that the setting key switch 1311a' can be rotated only within the range up to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on. In this case, move the setting key switch 1311a' counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). By turning the setting key switch 1311a' by 60 degrees toward the direction and turning it OFF, the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned on as a decision key, and the signal of this decision key ON is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. (The configuration of the setting key switch 1311a' may be referred to as "modification example (1) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the setting change board 1311 has a press operation section. A decision key button may also be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and the press operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding A wire intrusion prevention part is provided on the cover body for the opening to prevent wires from entering through the "gap" formed in the opening and modifying the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. It becomes a molded structure. When the press operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the OK key is ON when the press operation section of the OK key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the OK key button. When the press operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

Note that the position where the enter key button is arranged on the setting change board 1311 may be in the vicinity of the setting key switch 1311a. The cover body of the main control board box 1320 is provided with a set key button and other buttons so that the set key button and other buttons are not confused when other buttons are arranged on the main control board 1310 in addition to the set key button. A sticker on which the name of each button is printed is pasted at a position corresponding to each button (instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and other buttons, a button with a cover that covers the press operation part of either the enter key button or the other button (a cover is provided to cover the press operation part of the enter key button and other buttons) ), the color of the press operation part may be different, the external shape of the enter key button and other buttons, or the shape of the press operation part may be adopted. It is also possible to use different types of switches, or to use other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as a decision key button include toggle switches with a lever, slide switches with a slide part, rotary switches with a rotary operation part, rocker switches, touch switches, etc. One example is a switch. In addition, if the setting change board 1311 is provided with an enter key button and other buttons, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for other buttons should be routed. They are formed so as not to be close to each other on the change board 1311 (separated from each other), and the connections to the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (terminals of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) are also formed separately. Also, on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from other buttons should be routed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other). ) is formed. In addition, when a setting key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, it is possible to rotate the setting key switch 1311a only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on. (The aspect of the enter key button (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311 a') may be referred to as "Modified example (2) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether a finger is touching the ball, and a detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The signals may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and based on these detection signals, it may be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192; When it is not touched, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON, and/or when the launching of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194, the enter key is not ON. On the other hand, when the launching of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON (aspects of the handle touch sensor (including the aspect of a single button operation sensor) ) may be written as "Modified example (3) of decision key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. The signal of this enter key ON was inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, it was inputted to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633. Firing reference pulses are branched at the dispensing control board 633 from the dispensing timing control circuit provided and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the decision key is turned on based on these firing reference pulses. The presence or absence may be determined. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be fired toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the firing reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, while determining that the determination key is not ON when the firing reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as "determination key modification (4)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the motion of the player seated opposite the pachinko machine 1 is detected. If the game board 5 is provided with a distance measurement sensor capable of detecting The signal may be branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and based on this detection signal, it may be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on. The distance sensor detects light emitted by a light emitting part that passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected on the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving section, thereby making it possible to detect the player's actions. In this case, when the detection signal from the ranging sensor is input via the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is movement based on this detection signal, and when it determines that there is movement, it turns on the enter key. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON (the mode of the ranging sensor may be described as "modification of the enter key (5)") .

Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can also be changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information conveying the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as serial information. A serial output circuit capable of serial output may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved for signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit was provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or may be provided on the payout control board 633. . When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns the setting key ON, enter key ON, and It is possible to determine which of the OFF signals is being transmitted (an aspect of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be referred to as "modified example (6) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can also be changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information conveying the setting key ON, OK key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as a pulse signal. A pulse output circuit capable of outputting the pulse may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved for signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit was provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead of this, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or may be provided on the payout control board 633. . For example, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is set to 1 ms when the information conveys that the setting key is ON, and the pulse width is set to 3 ms when the information conveys that the enter key is ON. If the information conveys OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns on the setting key, turns on the enter key, and OFF (an aspect of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be referred to as "modified example (7) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can also be changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the voltage level of the enter key ON signal, and the OFF signal are The voltage level of the signal is set between the boards from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential from 2V to 3V from zero V to 5V), and at the main control board 1310. By providing a comparator circuit and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a can turn ON/OFF the setting key ON signal, ON/OFF the enter key ON signal, and OFF signal. It is also possible to determine whether it is ON or OFF. Thereby, security can be improved for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (an aspect of the setting key switch using an intermediate potential may be referred to as "modified example (8) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the dispensing control board 633 has a press operation section. A decision key button may also be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button, and the press operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention part is molded on the cover body for the opening so that wires etc. cannot enter through the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the dispensing control board 633. Become. When the press operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the OK key is ON when the press operation section of the OK key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the OK key button. When the press operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

In addition, the position where the decision key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near the RWM clear button 633z having a press operation part. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, there are stickers with the names of each button printed at positions corresponding to the enter key button and the RWM clear button 633z, so that the enter key button and the RWM clear button 633z are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the RWM clear button 633z, a button with a cover that covers the pressing operation section of either one of the enter key button and the RWM clear button 633z (for pressing the pressing operation section) is provided. ), the color of the press operation part may be different, or the external shape or press operation of the enter key button and the RWM clear button 633z may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be used, or a switch of another type that does not have a press operation part may be used as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as a decision key button include toggle switches with a lever, slide switches with a slide part, rotary switches with a rotary operation part, rocker switches, touch switches, etc. One example is a switch. In addition, when providing a decision key button and an RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the decision key button and the wiring pattern for the RWM clear button 633z must be routed. are formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other) on the payout control board 633, and the connections to the terminals of the connector of the payout control board 633 (terminals of the connector of the main control board 1310) are also formed separately. In addition, on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z are also routed so that they are not close to each other ( formed at a distance). In addition, when a determination key button is provided on the payout control board 633, it is possible to rotate the setting key switch 1311a only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on. (The mode of the enter key button (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modified example (9) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the RWM clear button 633z also serves three functions. Among the functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch), an error release switch with a press operation part is provided on the payout control board 633 separately from the RWM clear button 633z, and the error release switch from the error release switch is The signal may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and based on this signal, it may be determined whether or not the enter key is ON. As mentioned above, the error release switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633, and is used to complete startup of the system of the pachinko machine 1 after the power is restored (various controls If the board has completed the power-on processing and is in the state of interrupt processing), and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, it is not possible to operate the push operation part of the error release switch at all. do not have. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation part of the error release switch is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, When the press operation portion of the error release switch is not operated, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (the mode of the error release switch may be referred to as "modified example (10) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the RWM clear button 633z also serves three functions. Among the functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch), an error release switch with a press operation part is provided on the payout control board 633 separately from the RWM clear button 633z, and the error release switch from the error release switch is The payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the signal in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later, and creates a command, and the command is created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later. The command may be sent to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that received this command may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on. As mentioned above, the error release switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633, and is used to complete startup of the system of the pachinko machine 1 after the power is restored (various controls If the board has completed the power-on processing and is in the state of interrupt processing), and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, it is not possible to operate the push operation part of the error release switch at all. do not have. Therefore, in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process to be described later, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the push operation section is being operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and the payout control MPU 633aa notifies the user to that effect. When receiving the command, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, but the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the press operation part is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and receives a command to notify that fact. When this happens, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the enter key is turned on (aspect 2 of the error release switch may be referred to as "modified example (11) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch) is provided on the payout control board 633, and the setting key switch 1311a is set when the setting key is turned on. Turn the key cylinder OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it from the rotational position of the key cylinder to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF); Further, by turning the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees and performing a second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on as the enter key. It was supposed to be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310, but instead of this, the function of the RAM clear switch among the functions of the RWM clear button 633z is inputted to the payout control board 633 as a separate RAM clear switch. In preparation for this, a signal (RAM clear signal) informing that the press operation part of this RAM clear switch has been operated is input to the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, and is also branched at the payout control board 633. It may be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on the input operation signal. As will be described later, when the push operation part of the RAM clear switch is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the push operation part of the RAM clear switch is pressed), When performing a setting change that allows setting values to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a uses a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (all of the RAM). Be sure to clear the area (excluding specific areas). Therefore, in order to ensure that the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the press operation part of the RAM clear switch is pressed, the RAM clear switch was selected. The main control MPU 1310a controls the push operation section of the RAM clear switch based on a signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the push operation section of the RAM clear switch provided on the payout control board 633 has been operated. When the press operation is being performed, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, and the RAM is cleared based on a signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the press operation section of the RAM clear switch provided on the payout control board 633 has been operated. When the press operation part of the switch is not pressed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the enter key is turned on.

The push operation part of the RAM clear switch provided in the payout control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch, and the push operation part of the RAM clear switch and A wire intrusion prevention part is molded on the cover body for the opening to prevent wires from entering through the "gap" formed in the corresponding opening and modifying the dispensing control board 633. The structure is as follows.

Note that the RAM clear switch may be placed on the payout control board 633 in the vicinity of the RWM clear button 633z. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, there is a sticker with the name of each button printed at the position corresponding to the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button 633z, so that the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button 633z are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button 633z, a button with a cover that covers the press operation section of either one of the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button 633z (for pressing the press operation section) is provided. ), the color of the press operation part may be different, or the external shape or press operation of the RAM clear switch and RWM clear button 633z may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be adopted, or a switch of another type that does not have a press operation section may be adopted as the RAM clear switch. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a push operation section as a RAM clear switch include a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide section, a rotary switch with a rotary operation section, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. One example is a switch. In addition, when a RAM clear switch and an RWM clear button 633z are provided on the payout control board 633, the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch and the wiring pattern for the RWM clear button 633z should be routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. are formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other) on the payout control board 633, and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately. In addition, on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the operation signal from the RAM clear switch and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z are also routed so as not to be close to each other ( formed at a distance). In addition, when a RAM clear switch is provided on the payout control board 633, it is possible to rotate the setting key switch 1311a only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on. (The mode of the RAM clear switch (which may also include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modified example (12) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch) is provided on the payout control board 633, and the setting key switch 1311a is set when the setting key is turned on. Turn the key cylinder OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it from the rotational position of the key cylinder to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF); Further, by turning the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees and performing a second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on as the enter key. It was supposed to be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310, but instead of this, the function of the RAM clear switch among the functions of the RWM clear button 633z is inputted to the payout control board 633 as a separate RAM clear switch. The payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 outputs the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the push operation part of the RAM clear switch has been operated to the port for processing when the payout control unit power is turned on, which will be described later. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 monitors and creates a command in the input process, transmits the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to the main control board 1310, and receives this command. may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on. As will be described later, when the push operation part of the RAM clear switch is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the push operation part of the RAM clear switch is pressed), When performing a setting change that allows setting values to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a uses a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (all of the RAM). Be sure to clear the area (excluding specific areas). Therefore, in order to ensure that the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the press operation part of the RAM clear switch is pressed, the RAM clear switch was selected. The main control MPU 1310a sends a signal (RAM When the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch is operated based on the clear signal) and receives a command to that effect, it can determine that the enter key is ON. The payout control MPU 633aa determines that the press operation section of the RAM clear switch is not operated based on a signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the press operation section of the RAM clear switch provided on the board 633 has been operated, and sends a notification to that effect. When the command to transmit is received, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on. ).

Further, in the embodiment described above, the output left sensor 3032 and the output right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and the rotation of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. Turn the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it OFF. By turning the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees toward The input was to be input to the control MPU 1310a, but instead of this, the output port left sensor 3032 and the output port right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The presence or absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on detection signals from the exit left sensor 3032 and the exit right sensor 3033 that are input to the control MPU 1310a and input to the main control MPU 1310a. As described above, the game balls fired into the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 are collected through the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a. As described above, the game balls collected through the out port 1008 are detected by either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a detects the case where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame release switch 4a, and the out exit left sensor 3032 and the out exit left sensor 3032 Based on the detection signal from either one of the right sensors 3033, it can be determined that the enter key is ON when the out port 1008 collects the game ball. If it is not opened (that is, it is closed) and/or if neither of the exit ports 1008 collects game balls based on the detection signals of the exit exit left sensor 3032 and the exit exit right sensor 3033. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (outlet switch This aspect (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modified example (14) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the out port 1008 in order to turn on the enter key.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the output left sensor 3032 and the output right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and the rotation of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. Turn the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it OFF. By turning the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees toward The logic of the detection signals from the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 is input to the control MPU 1310a, but instead, the logic of the detection signals from the outlet left sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 is controlled by the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, which will be described later. The command is monitored and created in the port input process of the unit power-on process, and the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later is sent to the main control board 1310, and the main unit that receives this command The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 may determine whether the enter key is turned on. As described above, the game balls fired into the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 are collected through the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a. As described above, the game balls collected through the out port 1008 are detected by either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the game ball is collected by the outlet 1008 based on the detection signals from the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the decision key is ON and receives a command to that effect, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the game ball has not been collected by the out port 1008 and determines that the determination key is ON. When a command indicating this is received, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (outlet switch Aspect 2 (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modification of enter key (15)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the out port 1008 in order to turn on the enter key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the full tank detection sensor 154 and the out of bulb detection sensor 574, or the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 and sent to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON, or may determine the logic of the detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, out of ball detection sensor 574, or delivery detection sensor 591. The payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 monitors and creates a command in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, and the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later. The command may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON (the setting key switch 1311a' (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modified example (16) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The enter key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a inputs the main control MPU 1310a to the main control MPU 1310a using the main body frame release switch 4b. Based on the detection signal from When the state is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (when the main body frame is opened). The mode of the switch (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (17) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to close the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the OK key, and after turning on the OK key, close the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, remove the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 again.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a inputs the door frame release switch 4a. Based on the detection signal from When the state is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (when the door frame is opened). The mode of the switch (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (17) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a provided in the setting change board 1311 is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position (rotated position), and then turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the second ON operation. The enter key can be turned ON, and the signal of this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch may be referred to as "modified example (18) of enter key").

In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a provided in the setting change board 1311 is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position (rotated position), and then turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the second ON operation. The enter key can be turned ON, and the signal of this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to the initial position and then turning it OFF. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when an OFF signal is input, while determining that the enter key is ON when an OFF signal is input. If it is not present, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on. Aspect 2 (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modification of enter key (19)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control board 1310 has a press operation section. A decision key button may also be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and the press operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention part is molded on the cover body for the opening to prevent wires from entering through the "gap" formed in the opening and modifying the main control board 1310. Become. When the press operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the OK key is ON when the press operation section of the OK key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the OK key button. When the press operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

Note that the position where the enter key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be in the vicinity of the other button when other buttons are arranged on the main control board 1310 in addition to the enter key button. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, stickers with the names of each button printed are pasted at positions corresponding to the enter key button and other buttons, so that the enter key button and other buttons are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and other buttons, a button with a cover that covers the press operation part of either the enter key button or the other button (a cover is provided to cover the press operation part of the enter key button and other buttons) ), the color of the press operation part may be different, the external shape of the enter key button and other buttons, or the shape of the press operation part may be adopted. It is also possible to use different types of switches, or to use other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as a decision key button include toggle switches with a lever, slide switches with a slide part, rotary switches with a rotary operation part, rocker switches, touch switches, etc. One example is a switch. In addition, when providing the enter key button and other buttons on the main control board 1310, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the other buttons should be routed mainly. They are formed in the control board 1310 so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). In addition, when a decision key button is provided on the main control board 1310, it is possible to rotate the setting key switch 1311a only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON. (Aspect 2 of the enter key button (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311 a') may be referred to as a "modified example (20) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the RWM clear button is input to the main control MPU 1310a. 633z (the RWM clear button 633z is in a state where it operates as a RAM clear switch). good. As will be described later, the RWM clear button 633z is pressed when the press operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z). ), when performing a setting change that allows the setting value to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a uses a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (RAM Be sure to clear all areas except for specific areas. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the internal RAM, so the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. can be used as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a causes the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z to perform a press operation based on a signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated. On the other hand, when the push operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, and the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is When the press operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (RAM clear switch Aspect 3 (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modification of enter key (21)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the normal winning slot provided on the game board 5 2003 normal winning opening sensor 2401, various sensors of various winning openings (for example, second starting opening sensor 2402, big winning opening sensor 2403, first receiving opening sensor 2406, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002) , the main control MPU 1310a to which detection signals from the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033 of the outlet 1008 are input may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (various sensors, etc.). This aspect (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (22) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value may open the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 and feed the game ball B into the normal prize opening 2003 in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to feed the game ball B into the winning hole and feed the game ball B into the out hole 1008.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a controls the stepping motor, DC motor, The operation of the movable body (accessory object) is controlled by controlling the drive of an electrical drive source such as a solenoid, and the operation of the movable object (accessory object) is controlled based on the detection signal from an optical sensor (photo sensor, distance measurement sensor, etc.). When determining the original position, operating position, etc., the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on the detection signal from this optical sensor. In this case, a setting key switch 1311a' may be used (optical function The aspect of the object sensor (which may also include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "Modification of enter key (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key, so that the optical sensor can detect the original position of the movable object (accessory). It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory object) so that the position and operating position can be detected.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, it is possible to detect illegal magnetism in the gaming area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 is input may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (the magnetic sensor (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "modified example (24) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to move the magnet from the front of the pachinko machine 1 toward the front of the game board 5 in order to turn on the enter key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, it is possible to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1. By applying vibration to the pachinko machine 1, the course of the game ball flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is changed, and the ball enters various winning openings and gates (gates) provided on the game board 5. When a vibration sensor is provided on the game board 5 to detect fraudulent activity, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, and also determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. It may also be determined whether or not a key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (the vibration sensor (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (25) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is irradiated with radio waves to control the game. A radio wave sensor is provided on the game board 5 and the payout device 580 to detect fraudulent activities in which the game balls B are fraudulently obtained by causing malfunction of various sensors of the various winning holes provided on the board 5 and various sensors provided on the payout device 580. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may also determine whether the enter key is turned on based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (the radio wave sensor (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (26) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to irradiate radio waves to the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the press operation section 303 of the production operation button unit 360 Detection signals from the press detection sensor 381 that detects the pressing operation of , and detection signals from the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that detect the rotation direction of the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation button unit 360 are detected. The signals are input to the peripheral control board 1510, and are also branched at the peripheral control board 1510 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the enter key is ON. Good too. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON (the production operation button The aspect of the unit (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "modified example (27) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 were housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320, which is composed of a cover body and a base body, but the setting change board 1311 is separately housed. The main control board box 1320 may be housed in a body setting change board box and placed around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 has a cover body and a base body which are caulked with a one-way screw or the like at the caulking portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and includes a plurality of them. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body using a one-way screw or the like in the caulking part using one sealing mechanism, and then in order to open the main control board box 1320, It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. In other words, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. The structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation part of the enter key button are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to each. It is possible to modify the setting change board 1311 by inserting a wire or the like through the "gaps" formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and between the pressing operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding openings. In order to prevent the wire from entering the opening, a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body. Note that if the structure of the setting change board box is different from the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above and is configured such that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body, A setting change board cover body opening/closing switch may be provided that can detect opening of the cover body. In this case, the detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body may be configured to be input directly to the main control board 1310, or may be input (indirectly) to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. It may be configured so that Based on the detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body, the fact that the cover body is opened from the base body can be included in the predetermined setting value change permission conditions described above. (The mode may be described as "determination key modification (28)").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected, and in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the settings of the setting key switch 1311a are The wiring pattern for transmitting the key ON signal, the wiring pattern for transmitting the enter key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and the wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal for the setting key switch 1311a, They are formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311, and the connections to the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (terminals of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) are also spaced apart. The main control board 1310 also has a wiring pattern for transmitting various signals from the setting key switch 1311a (that is, a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and determination of the setting key switch 1311a). The wiring pattern for transmitting the key ON signal and the wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a) and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. Although they were formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), the wiring pattern is such that the signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted. One of the wiring patterns is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 via another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately from the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. The body may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 (connection between boards), or other connectors provided on this setting change board 1311 and other connectors provided on the main control board 1310 may be connected to each other. , may be electrically connected via a harness (the manner in which the wiring pattern is routed may be referred to as "modified example (29) of the enter key").

Further, it is also possible to adopt a mode that is appropriately selected and combined from among the above-described modification examples (1) to (29) of the enter key (the selection combination of the modified examples is referred to as "Modification example (30) of the enter key"). ”).

In addition, with the above-mentioned setting values, in addition to the probability for determining whether it is a jackpot or not, and the probability for determining whether it is a small hit or not, the setting value is also used for determining the lottery when transitioning from a variable probability time to a normal time. It is possible to change the probability of the game, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player (in other words, it is possible to increase the number of game balls that the player can acquire). The probability (degree of advantage) is set in advance. In this embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, and from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) was set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a plurality of setting values ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, other pachinko machines have different probabilities (degrees of advantage) that are advantageous to the player. In some cases, there is a single preset setting value. In other words, the probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) exists in advance as a plurality of setting values, such as the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, and the game specifications require setting changes, and the probability of being advantageous to the player is There are game specifications in which only a single preset probability (degree of advantage) exists and no setting changes are required. However, if the design of the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed in accordance with such game specifications, and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 Since this depends on the game specifications, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, there is a need for a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 that are not dependent on game specifications, that is, can be used in common without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification where there is only a single set value in advance and there is no need to change the settings, the probability that the set value will be advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is Therefore, it is no longer necessary to use the settings as follows, so it is necessary to change the design of the software by assigning settings 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 as the following contents. Can be done.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (area excluding a specific area out of all RAM areas), multiple actual machine confirmation operation patterns can be set (after clearing the RAM). This can be used as a setting value (which allows variation in the startup method of the pachinko machine 1). In this case, the setting value 1 is set to "all operations (movable object)" for the operation of the movable object (accessory object) that is the object of control by the main control MPU 1310a, and the lighting of light emitting objects such as lamps and LEDs. Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1, which specifies "movement of movable objects (objects), lighting of light emitters)," is assigned, and actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2, which specifies "movement of movable objects (accessory objects)," is assigned as setting value 2. Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of the light emitter" is assigned as value 3, and setting value 4 is assigned as "detailed operation of the movable object (accessory) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, etc.)". Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 is assigned, which specifies "actions such as interference check with structures and other movable bodies (accessories), operation order with other movable bodies (accessories), etc.", and setting value 5 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 is assigned that specifies "lighting of the light emitter in units of one port (lighting of the light emitter in units of predetermined output ports (that is, for each output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)", and the setting value 6 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 that specifies "No operation" is assigned (a mode of changing setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing may be referred to as "Modification (1) based on common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a performs the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to operate the movable body (accessories) and light up the light emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command (described as a setting change completion command in FIG. 145) from the main control MPU 1310a, performs peripheral control according to the setting value included in the setting change command (actual machine confirmation operation pattern). The board 1510 can operate the movable body (accessory object) that is to be controlled and can light up the light emitting body. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, variations can be provided in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of times from the end of symbol variation until a demonstration (demonstration performance performed while waiting for a player). In this case, time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" as setting value 1 is assigned, time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" as setting value 2, and "20 seconds" as setting value 3 is assigned. ” is assigned, time setting pattern 4 is assigned which specifies “25 seconds” as setting value 4, time setting pattern 5 is assigned which specifies “30 seconds” as setting value 5, Time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" as setting value 6 is assigned. )”). Note that the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the setting of the time from the end of the symbol variation until the player enters the waiting state, it is possible to provide variation in the time from the end of the symbol variation until the demonstration begins.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demonstration performance performed while waiting for the player) to be performed after the end of symbol variation. In this case, the demonstration effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect" as setting value 1 is assigned, and the demonstration effect setting pattern that specifies "comical effect, movement effect of movable objects (actual objects)" as setting value 2. 2 is assigned, and demo production setting pattern 3 is assigned, which specifies "serious production" as setting value 3, and demo production setting pattern specifies "serial production, movement production of movable objects (accessories)" as setting value 4. 4 is assigned, demo production setting pattern 5 is assigned which specifies "historical drama style production" as setting value 5, and demo production setting pattern 5 specifies "historical drama style production, movable objects (actual objects)" as setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the manner of changing and setting the contents of the demonstration performance may be described as "modification example (3) based on common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) according to the setting values included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner in which the contents of the demonstration presentation are changed and set, variations can be given to the contents of the demonstration presentation that is performed after the variation of the symbols is completed.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that allows setting a plurality of default volumes adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the volume adjustment switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" as setting value 2, and "volume 3" as setting value 3 is assigned. Volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "Volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, Volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "Volume 5" as the setting value 5 is assigned, Volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" as setting value 6 is assigned (a mode of changing the default volume may be described as "modification example (4) based on common hardware configuration"). Note that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a has a default volume set to a volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "Volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 is moved to the minimum volume end by moving the volume adjustment switch in the direction of decreasing the volume (moved in the opposite direction to increasing the volume). When the volume is adjusted to the minimum level, the volume may be muted, or the volume may be set so that the sound can be recognized when the user stops in front of the pachinko machine. Also, the default volume of "Volume 6" assigned to setting value 6 is moved to the maximum volume end after the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction of increasing the volume (moved in the opposite direction to decreasing the volume). When the volume is adjusted to the maximum volume, the volume may be set to the maximum volume, or the volume may be set to a predetermined percentage (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. By changing and setting the default volume, the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch included in the peripheral control board 1510 can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of volumes of error notification sounds in error notifications such as various malfunctions, bumps, and errors. The various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted (that is, they are not dependent on) by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and by setting the volume to the maximum, the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound can be played in a game hall. Although it is easy for staff such as store clerks to notice this, it may be annoying to players who are playing games at other pachinko machines. Therefore, there is a need for a device that can adjust the volume of various error notification sounds. In this case, error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, and error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" as setting value 2 is assigned. , error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" as setting value 3 is assigned, error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" as setting value 4, and " Error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" as setting value 6 is assigned (error notification volume (The mode of change setting may be described as "Modification (5) based on common hardware configuration"). The setting value ranges from setting value 1 (the volume that does not mute the sound, but at which you can recognize the error notification sound if you stop in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to setting value 6 (the maximum volume, The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward a level at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the player is several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, performs control to emit an error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing and setting the volume of the error notification sound, it is possible to vary the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of default brightness values for light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. The brightness of the light emitting body controlled by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default brightness. In this case, default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" as setting value 2, and " A default brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "brightness 3" is assigned, a default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 4" as a setting value 4, and a default brightness setting pattern that specifies "brightness 5" as a setting value 5. 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned. be). Note that the main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing a main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, to change the default brightness, and performs lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitting body, it is possible to turn on the light emitter, blink it, change the gradation point, etc. Depending on the manner in which the content of the default brightness is changed and set, variations can be given to the default brightness of a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of brightnesses of a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED in error notifications such as various malfunctions, bumps, and errors. Error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification brightness 1" as setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp that is the target of control by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification brightness 2" is assigned as setting value 2. The specified error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 3 is assigned which specifies "error notification brightness 3" as the setting value 3, and the error notification brightness specifies "error notification brightness 4" as the setting value 4. Brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, error notification brightness setting pattern 5 is assigned, which specifies "error notification brightness 5" as setting value 5, and error notification brightness specifies "error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)" as setting value 6. Brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (a mode of changing the brightness of the light emitting body in error notification may be described as "Modification (7) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, the lamp's brightness increases from setting value 1 (the brightness of the lamp does not turn off, but the lamp brightness is low and allows you to recognize an error notification if you stop in front of the pachinko machine) to setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter to change the brightness of the light emitter in error notification by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, and controls lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. conduct. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, selects the target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitting body, the light emitting body can be turned on, blinked, or have different gradation points. Depending on the manner in which the brightness of the light emitter in error notification is changed, the brightness of the light emitter, such as a lamp or LED, in error notification can be varied.

In addition, the various setting values assigned to the modifications (1) to (7) based on the common hardware configuration described above are determined when predetermined setting value display permission conditions are satisfied in the setting value confirmation display processing to be described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Although it is sometimes displayed on the setting display 1310g, it may be always displayed on the setting display 1310g from when the power is turned on to when the power is turned off to the pachinko machine 1 (the setting value display (This aspect may be referred to as "Modification (8) based on common hardware configuration").

Further, any one of the above-described modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted as the above-described modification of the enter key (30).

In addition, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions mentioned above apply to the outer frame 2 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. This required the setting key to be turned on. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a clears all of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-on processing to be described later. The game progresses by clearing all but a specific area of the area, and then setting interrupt permission. In addition, when the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition is met when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process to be described later, and stores data in the main control built-in RAM. The game progresses by clearing all areas except for a specific area, and then setting interrupt permission. In other words, when powering on the Pachinko machine 1 while pressing the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, the predetermined setting value change permission condition described above is satisfied when the power is restored to the Pachinko machine 1. In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then performs interrupt permission settings, etc. The game will proceed as follows. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the outer frame 2 is The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 may also be pressed ("Modification of predetermined setting value change permission condition") ).

In addition, the predetermined setting value display permission conditions mentioned above apply to the outer frame 2 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or after the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. This required the setting key to be turned on. When this predetermined setting value display permission condition is met, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current setting value in a setting value confirmation display process that is performed as a part of the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later. Display on container 1310g. Further, as described above, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 requires that the press operation section is pressed when powering on the Pachinko machine 1, and the period in which it is pressed is limited. Ta. Therefore, as the predetermined setting value display permission conditions mentioned above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the outer frame 2 is The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the setting key being turned ON, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 does not need to be pressed ("Modified example of predetermined setting value display permission condition"). ). In this case, when the predetermined modification of the set value display permission condition is met, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as part of the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, and instead In the input process, initial settings and start-up settings for the built-in WDT are performed before the game is started, and after that, interrupt permission settings and the like are performed to proceed with the game. Note that when the predetermined modification of the set value display permission condition is met and the set value confirmation display process is performed, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side timer interrupt process because the interrupt permission setting has not yet been performed. The setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is activated. The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by being rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a) and then performing the first ON operation. , and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are not read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as input information to be described later. For this reason, the main control MPU 1310a performs a main body frame opening process to detect opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when a modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied and setting value confirmation display processing is performed. The detection signal from the switch 4b and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, it is possible to prevent When the power is restored after a momentary power outage that occurs, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is inserted. Assuming that the setting key is turned ON by rotating the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and performing the first ON operation, the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the dispensing control board 633 is When the press operation is being performed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process to be described later, clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then changes the interrupt permission setting. In contrast, when the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a executes the main control side power-on process, which will be described later. A setting value confirmation display process is performed, and then the game is proceeded by performing interrupt permission settings and the like. By adopting this aspect, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the setting value confirmation display process once the game starts to progress. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a starts playing the game by setting interrupt permission or the like, it never displays the current set value on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a sectioned on the game board 5 in the ball count process of the power-on process on the main control side, which will be described later. In the port output process of the main control side power-on process to be described later, the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 is output to the base monitor 1310h and displayed on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the current setting values displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h (this may be described as a "modified example of how to use the base monitor"). . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current setting values set during the period from when the power is restored until the progress of the game is started by performing interrupt permission settings etc. In addition, when the game is started by setting interrupt permission after the power is restored, the number of game balls collected through the outlet 1008 can be displayed, so the setting display 1310g can be displayed. There is no need to provide it, which can contribute to cost reduction.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modification of the method of using the base monitor may be applied as appropriate. It may be selected and adopted in the modification example (30) of the enter key described above.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modification of the method of using the base monitor may be applied as appropriate. It may be selected and adopted in the above-described modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 107, 110, and 111. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. This functional display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that display the gaming status and the normal lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning slot 2003. It is equipped with a normal symbol display device made up of two LEDs and a normal reservation display device made up of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B into the normal winning hole 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs that displays the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and A first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to acceptance of game balls B to the second starting port 2004, and a second special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls B to the second starting port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying, and a second special reservation number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to acceptance of game balls B into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Further, the function display unit 1400 has a round display consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the grand prize opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "win" or the like. Equipped with a display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

Here, as a noise countermeasure when the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected, and the main control board 1310 is electrically connected. A plurality of wirings (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "wirings") that transmit control signals from the control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 will be described in detail.

The wiring FCBL, which is electrically connected via the connector 1400a provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400, runs from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear side of the back box 3010, as shown in FIGS. 110 and 111. When it is routed to the upper side, it is bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is held together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed vertically along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, forming a gaming panel. Along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 which is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the board holder 1100 or is attached as it is to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. It is pulled downwards.

When the wiring FCBL is routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and the function display unit connector MFCN is routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. After being routed below, it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

In this way, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 has a long wiring length, and is particularly connected from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the back box. The wiring FCBL that is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent toward the bottom of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is bent by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed vertically along the right side of the back surface of the back box 3010. They are connected to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 which is attached to the rear lower part of the gaming panel 1100, and are routed along the right side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the main control board box 1320. When the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed is the area in front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. It will be placed in

A decorative board 1131 on which a plurality of decorative LEDs are mounted is arranged behind the function display unit 1400. When the wiring UPCBL, which is a connection cable that is electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back side of the decorative board 1131, is bent toward the upper side of the rear surface of the game panel 1100, it is bent at the upper side of the front surface of the back box 3010. When it is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 and is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in a state where it is close to (or in contact with) the above-mentioned wiring FCBL, it is directed downward to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The wires are bent by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed vertically along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and routed to the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Ru. Then, the wiring UPCBL is separated from the path of the wiring FCBL described above, is bent toward the left side at the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500, and is bent toward the left side along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. After being routed above a predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector.

In this way, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the decorative board 1131 and the panel drive board 1720 arranged at the rear of the function display unit 1400 has a long wiring length and is particularly difficult to connect from the upper right corner of the game board 5. The wiring FCBL that is routed to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent toward the bottom of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is bent in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed, each of which is grouped together and routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Like the wiring FCBL described above, the area where the wiring UPCBL is routed in this way is attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. It will be placed in front of the dispensing unit 560.

As described above, the payout unit 560 is configured by the ball guiding unit 570 having a single guiding path for guiding the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the single guiding path of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out the guided game balls B one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633; an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward; It includes a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game balls B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

In addition, as mentioned above, the game balls B are polished in the island equipment of the game hall, or rubbed against each other during circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and are charged and electrostatically discharged, causing electromagnetic wave noise. emit. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which can hold the game balls B, are attached.

The main control board 1310 also includes a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., which will be described in detail later. We are prepared. This main control MPU 1310a has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The forced reset by the circuit cannot be controlled and invalidated by the user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and again executes the main control side power-on process described later. I will do it. In this case, since the main control side power-off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a will always occur, so the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a will always occur. will be completely erased (cleared). In other words, if the built-in reset circuit performs a forced reset, the RAM will be cleared when the main control MPU 1310a starts up again.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type package is adopted as the package for the main control MPU 1310a, and when the main control MPU 1310a is mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a are connected to each other. It is in a state where it protrudes from the soldering surface (the surface opposite to the mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. In other words, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a are in a state of protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320.

In this way, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and dispensing unit 560 are installed, so when electromagnetic noise is emitted due to electrostatic discharge, the function display placed in front of the dispensing unit 560 It may invade the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the unit 1400 and the main control board 1310, and it may also electrically connect the upper left panel decorative board 1131 located at the rear of the function display unit 1400 and the peripheral control board 1510. It may invade the wiring UPCBL. As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may jump out and invade the wiring UPCBL, and on the contrary, the electromagnetic noise that has invaded the wiring UPCBL may jump out and invade the wiring FCBL.

For example, suppose that the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 runs through the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. It is routed in a straight line from a predetermined position on the right side of the control board box 1320 toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 (for example, from a predetermined position on the right side of the main control board box 1320 to the upper side of the main control board box 1320). 1/4 of the length, bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the top or bottom side of the main control board box 1320), and from the center of the bottom side of the main control board 1310 to the left side. When it passes over the function display unit connector MFCN placed close to it, it is bent toward the lower side of the main control board box 1320, and after being pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, the function display unit connector MFCN When electrically connected to the wiring FCBL, if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, the wiring FCBL may be routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. Then, when passing through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a, electromagnetic noise mainly flows through the wiring FCBL. There is a risk that the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit due to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise that enters various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude toward the bottom plate of the control board box 1320.

Note that if a wiring accommodation groove is formed on the rear surface of the board holder 1200 instead of in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, the wiring FCBL is The wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 is not accommodated, but is accommodated along the wiring accommodation groove, and after being pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, the function display Electrically connected to unit connector MFCN. In this case as well, if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, as described above, when the wiring FCBL is accommodated and routed along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the board holder 1200, the main control MPU 1310a Electromagnetic wave noise passes through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of the main control board box 1320, and passes through the wiring FCBL to the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. There is a risk that the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit due to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise that enters the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude toward the main control MPU 1310a.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is installed on the main control board as the positional relationship between the mounting position of the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a is disposed toward the left side from the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a is disposed above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310. That is, in this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged below the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, whereas the function display unit connector MFCN By arranging the main control MPU 1310a above the line, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310.

As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be placed apart from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, so that electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL can be removed from the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control. It is possible to prevent various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from penetrating through the space separating the main control board 1310 from the MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Furthermore, by placing the main control MPU 1310a away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, it will not affect the main control MPU 1310a. , on the main control board 1310 or in a space separating the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310, it is now possible to attenuate electromagnetic noise that enters via this wiring FCBL. ing. In this respect as well, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged such that the right side of its package is spaced apart from the right side of the main control board 1310 by at least a predetermined distance dimension (hereinafter referred to as "first wiring separation distance dimension"). ing. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320, so the electromagnetic waves that have entered the wiring FCBL This is to prevent noise from entering various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from the wiring FCBL through a space having the first wiring separation distance dimension.

Further, as described above, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is located in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. (or accommodated along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the circuit board holder 1200), on the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the circuit board holder 1200. When it is routed downward along the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and after being routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN. , the wiring FCBL is routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 and protrudes toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 because it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. It is possible to ensure a large distance between various pins of the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as "second wiring separation distance"). This second wiring separation distance dimension is larger than the first wiring separation distance dimension. As a result, electromagnetic noise that has entered this wiring FCBL enters various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from this wiring FCBL through a space having the second wiring distance dimension. This can be prevented. In this respect as well, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are directly electrically connected by the wiring FCBL, but the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. It can also be configured to connect directly. In this case, it is preferable to provide the panel relay board 1710 with an element that can reduce or eliminate the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL (that is, a plurality of elements that transmit control signals from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400). It is preferable to provide an element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic noise for each wiring FCBL). Thereby, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise entering via the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Examples of such elements include resistors, filter circuits, and the like. From the observation results of the waveform of electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs), and as a filter circuit, it is necessary to handle signals with a waveform width larger than this. It is designed to be passed through.

In addition to resistors, filter circuits, etc., such elements include EMC countermeasure components (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.). When using coils and beads, electrical If a capacitor is used, the capacitors are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to the plurality of wirings FCBL. Furthermore, if a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the multiple wiring FCBLs, or a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the multiple wiring FCBLs. It is also possible to insert circuits configured by combining the above.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 110, 114, and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 137) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 for controlling light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control section 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 113, 114, and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at approximately the center. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding leftward from the left side and one right fixing piece 1602 protruding rightward from the right side. This effect display device 1600 has a liquid crystal screen facing forward, and the back box 3010 has two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later. Insert the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and see the locking mechanism 3020 in rear view. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it upward.

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
The table unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 119 to 124 and the like. FIG. 119(a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 119(b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the game ball on the right side of the front unit. FIG. 121(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls flowing through the first guide path in the guide path group, and FIG. 121(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls flowing through the second guide path in the guide path group. It is a diagram. FIG. 122(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls accepted into the accessory prize opening, and FIG. 122(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the third sorting device in (a) from a plane. c) is an explanatory diagram showing the parts of the second sorting device in (a).

Moreover, FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing the timing of the operation of the accessory prize opening, the first sorting device, and the second sorting device according to the type of “small win”. FIG. 124(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the attacker unit, and is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 124(a). The table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, with its front end protruding forward beyond the front of the game panel 1100, and a portion of its rear end protruding into the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100. There is.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (three in this case) general winning holes 2001 which are capable of accepting game balls B hit into the gaming area 5a and which are always open, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 which are used for gaming. A first starting port 2002 is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a first starting port 2002 is installed at a further different position in the game area 5a and is always open to accept the game ball B. a normal prize opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, which becomes capable of accepting the gaming ball B according to the normal lottery result drawn by receiving the gaming ball B in the ordinary winning opening 2003, and a first starting opening 2002. Or, a grand prize opening 2005 that can accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004, and the first starting opening. 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B, and the accessory prize opening 2006. It is provided with a first V winning hole 2007 and a second V winning hole 2008 through which a chance of receiving the game ball B received in the winning hole 2006 is given.

A plurality of (in this case, three) general winning holes 2001 are arranged below the center in the vertical direction and on the left side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction in the gaming area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 located at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a. The normal winning hole 2003 is located near the right end of the gaming area 5a, lower than the center in the vertical direction. The second starting opening 2004 is located at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003. The big prize opening 2005 is arranged between the second starting opening 2004 and the first starting opening 2002 at a slightly lower height than the first starting opening 2002. The accessory winning hole 2006 is arranged above the normal winning hole 2003. The first V winning hole 2007 is arranged at a height between the accessory winning hole 2006 and the normal winning hole 2003. The second V prize opening 2008 is arranged directly above the first starting opening 2002 at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a.

The front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002, and a starting port unit 2100 on the left side when viewed from the front of the starting port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 is installed along the inner rail 1002 and has three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 is installed slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. , an attacker unit 2400 is attached to the right side of the starting opening unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and has a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a special winning opening 2005. They are installed above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. 2008, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is located in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, directly above the out-port 1008, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward and has a width that can accept only one game ball B.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, and the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 located directly below the center of Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the central release part 2503a of the stage 2503, it will be accepted into the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

The starting port unit 2100, when attached to the game panel 1100, guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the back of the light guide plate production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to the discharge unit 3120.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is equipped with three general winning holes 2001 that are open to accept game balls B at all times. The three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning ports 2001 on the right side are open upward, and the general winning hole 2001 on the left side is open toward the upper left.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the three general prize openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. This side unit 2200 can guide the game balls received in the general prize opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver them to the back lower ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate performance unit 3100 in the back unit 3000.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
The upper left side unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 within the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes lower to the right.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flown down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by means of the shelf section 2301.

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is located to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the front view, in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 from the front. This attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 120, etc.).

The outer shape of the attacker unit 2400 when viewed from the front is formed into a triangular shape in which the height from the lower side increases toward the right. In this attacker unit 2400, the normal winning opening 2003 is always open upward at the upper right corner. The second starting opening 2004 is provided at the lower left at a distance larger than one game ball B from the normal winning opening 2003, and is always open toward the front. The big prize opening 2005 is provided near the lower end of the lower left of the second starting opening 2004, and can be opened and closed toward the front.

The attacker unit 2400 has a normal winning opening 2003 that is slightly larger than the game ball B. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a second starting opening 2004 that is slightly larger than the game ball, and a large winning opening 2005 that is approximately 3 to 6 times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left and right direction. It is open.

The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening sensor 2402 that detects the gaming ball B accepted in the second starting opening 2004, and a large It includes a big winning hole sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the winning hole 2005, and a magnetic sensor 2010 that detects illegal magnetism (see FIG. 137, etc.).

The attacker unit 2400 has a second starting port door 2411 that can guide the game ball B to the second starting port 2004, and a normal lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning port 2003 through the second starting port door 2411. A starting port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes depending on the result, a large winning port door 2413 that can open and close the large winning port 2005, and a large winning port door 2413 that connects the large winning port door 2413 to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 of the game ball B. It includes an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by acceptance.

As shown in FIGS. 120, 121, and 124, the attacker unit 2400 is provided above the second starting port 2004 at the lower left of the normal winning port 2003, and is inclined downwardly toward the left. The second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 which is provided on the left side of the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 and which extends vertically. It is provided on the right side of the big prize opening 2005 below the second starting opening right standing wall part 2423 extending downward from the right end, the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall part 2422, It is provided with a large prize opening guide shelf 2424 which is inclined so as to become lower toward the left.

The second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 extends from a portion to the right of the right end of the second starting port 2004, beyond the left end of the second starting port 2004, and extends to the center between the second starting port 2004 and the big winning port 2005 in the left-right direction. It extends to the left until nearby. This second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 prevents the game ball B from being received from above into the second starting port 2004.

The second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 is provided to the left from the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 at an interval that allows one game ball B to pass through. The second starting port left vertical wall portion 2422 extends vertically from a position higher than the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 to a position lower than the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2421 and higher than the lower end of the second starting port 2004. ing. The upper end of the second starting port left vertical wall portion 2422 is bent to the right.

The second starting port right standing wall portion 2423 extends vertically downward from the right end of the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 to approximately the same height as the lower end of the second starting port 2004 . This second starting port right standing wall portion 2423 prevents the game ball B from being received from the right side into the second starting port 2004.

The big prize opening guide shelf 2424 is at a height slightly lower than the lower end of the second starting opening 2004, and one game ball B is placed from the lower end of the second starting opening 2004 from a part to the left of the left end of the second starting opening 2004. It extends in the left-right direction to the left side of the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 and approximately the same location as the right end of the big prize opening 2005, with the left end side being lower. As shown in the figure, the right end side of the big prize opening guide shelf 2424 is curved upward, and the angle of inclination becomes steeper toward the right.

In addition, the attacker unit 2400 is an attacker that opens toward the left on the right side of the normal winning hole 2003 and guides the game ball B to a position lower than the big winning hole 2005 below the big winning hole guiding shelf 2424. A right passage 2430 is provided.

The attacker right passage 2430 is located between the first opening 2431 which is vertically long and opens toward the left above the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421. A second opening 2432 that opens toward the upper left, a third opening 2433 that opens toward the top below the second starting port 2004, and a large opening below the big prize opening guiding shelf 2424. A fourth opening 2434 that is vertically long on the right side of the winning opening 2005 and opens toward the left; and a discharge opening that communicates with the lower end of the fourth opening 2434 and opens toward the left. 2435. The attacker right passage 2430 allows the game ball B to enter through the first opening 2431, the second opening 2432, the third opening 2433, and the fourth opening 2434. It is possible to release the game ball B to the outside only from.

The attacker right passage 2430 is formed in the shape of multiple steps with the left side lowered. To be more specific, the attacker right passage 2430 extends downward from an area above the normal winning opening 2003 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and extends to the left at a position below the normal winning opening 2003. After bending and going around to the bottom of the normal winning opening 2003, and bending the second starting opening right standing wall part 2423 downward as part of the left wall under the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 It bends to the left again at a lower height than that, and bends downward below the right side of the center of the big prize opening guide shelf 2424 to extend to the lower end of the attacker unit 2400.

The attacker right passage 2430 is provided with a plurality of protrusions 2436, which protrude into the passage and extend from side to side, at intervals in the vertical direction, on the front and rear inner walls of the vertically extending portion. The plurality of protrusions 2436 are provided so that the heights are alternated on the front side and the rear side. When the game ball B comes into contact with these plurality of protrusions 2436, the game ball B can be guided downward in a zigzag pattern while suppressing an increase in the downward speed of the game ball B.

The attacker right passage 2430 has a plurality of protrusions 2436 provided on the right side of the big winning opening 2005 and in a vertically long portion where the fourth opening 2434 opens. It has a protrusion 2437 that further protrudes into the passage (see FIG. 124, etc.). Due to the presence of this protrusion 2437, the game ball B in the attacker right passage 2430 can be prevented from being ejected to the outside (to the left) from the fourth opening 2434, and can also be prevented from passing through the fourth opening 2434. The game ball B can be entered into the attacker right passage 2430 from the outside. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is released from the attacker unit 2400 into the gaming area 5a without having a chance to be received by the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005.

In addition, since the attacker right passage 2430 has a fourth opening 2434 that is vertically long and open in a portion that passes through the right side of the big winning opening 2005, game balls released from the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 to the left can B hits the plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the big prize opening 2005 and moves the game ball B, which flows above the big winning opening 2005 and to the right from the big winning opening 2005, to the fourth It can be received by the opening 2434 and entered into the attacker right passage 2430. As described above, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is ejected to the outside only from the lower end ejection port 2435, so it is guided to the right by the obstacle nail N above the big winning hole 2005. Due to the existence of the attacker right passage 2430, the game ball B will not bounce back to the big prize opening 2005 side.

Therefore, when the big winning hole 2005 is in the open state, if the game ball B released from the big winning hole guiding shelf 2424 is guided to the right side of the big winning hole 2005 by the obstacle nail N, it will enter the attacker right passage 2430. There is no way to enter and be accepted into the big prize opening 2005. For this reason, even if a passage for the game ball B (in this case, attacker right passage 2430) is provided adjacent to the grand prize opening 2005, the wall of the passage (fourth opening 2434) faces the grand prize opening 2005. It is possible to provide a passage for the game balls B adjacent to the big prize opening 2005 while suppressing excessive acceptance of the game balls B into the big winning opening 2005 without bouncing back to the big winning opening 2005. , the pachinko machine 1 can have passages that have not been seen in previous pachinko machines.

The second starting port door 2411 has a plate shape that extends from the bottom of the second starting port 2004 to the vicinity of the second starting port left vertical wall portion 2422, and is moved back and forth by the starting port solenoid 2412. The second starting port door 2411 is inclined to become lower from the left end side toward the second starting port 2004 side on the right, and is also inclined to become lower toward the rear at the second starting port 2004. are doing. This second starting port door 2411 is retracted in a normal state (closed state). Therefore, the game ball B that entered between the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left vertical wall part 2422 falls onto the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 without contacting the second starting opening door 2411. Therefore, it does not enter (accept) the second starting port 2004.

On the other hand, in the normal winning state (open state), the second starting port door 2411 is moving forward, so the game ball B that has entered between the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting port left vertical wall portion 2422 The engine contacts the second starting port door 2411, is guided toward the second starting port 2004 by the second starting port door 2411, and enters (is accepted) into the second starting port 2004. In this way, the second starting port 2004 opens and closes as the second starting port door 2411 moves back and forth. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid is ON (when energized). let

The big prize opening door 2413 has a rectangular shape that is long in the left and right directions, and is attached to be rotatable around an axis in the left and right direction with one long side as the axis. The large prize opening door 2413 can close the large prize opening 2005 that opens toward the front by keeping the short side upright using the attacker solenoid 2414, and the other long side opens forward. By rotating it so that it moves, the big prize opening 2005 can be opened and the game ball B can be received. This big winning hole door 2413 closes the big winning hole 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the big winning hole 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

In the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received in the normal winning hole 2003 is detected by the normal winning hole sensor 2401 on the back side of the gaming panel 1100, and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below. Further, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100. Furthermore, the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is discharged onto the lower board holder 1200 after being detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403 on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

This attacker unit 2400 is installed on the front side of the game panel 1100, and the normal prize opening 2003 is located below the two exits of the guide passage group 2520 on the upper right side of the center accessory 2500, which will be described later, on the stage of the center accessory 2500. 2503, the second starting opening 2004 is located at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003 and at a height between the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500, and the big winning opening 2005. is located below the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. In addition, when attached to the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the areas above the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004 (second starting opening upper guidance shelf 2421), and the big winning opening 2005. It is set up.

[5-8e. Center role]
The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is located above the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. The center accessory 2500 is formed into a frame shape, and through the frame, the effect display device 1600 placed behind the game panel 1100 and various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front. can.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 except for the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, so that the game ball B hit into the game area 5a cannot enter the frame. It has become.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 that is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter, and a frame that allows the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 to be released. It is equipped with a warp exit 2502 that opens inward, and a stage 2503 that can roll the game ball B released from the warp exit 2502 in the left-right direction and then release it into the game area 5a (see FIG. 117, etc.). ).

The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and is mounted at a position directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100. In this state, it is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the approximate center position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than both left and right sides. This stage 2503 has a portion that is slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the lateral direction (center emitting portion 2503a), and a portion that is the lowest on both left and right sides (side emitting portions 2503b). The game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from these parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised part (central discharge part 2503a) at the center in the left and right direction of the stage 2503 is located directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release part 2503a at the center of the stage 2503, it is received in the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

The center accessory 2500 also includes an upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 that forms part of the upper outer peripheral surface and slopes downwardly toward the right from a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction. , a guide passage group 2520 consisting of two passages provided at the upper right corner and through which game balls B can flow. The upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 forms an upstream space portion 2505 of a predetermined width through which the game balls B can flow between it and the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 when assembled to the game board 5. The guide passage group 2520 guides the game ball B above the attacker unit 2400.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the middle of one of the guide passage groups 2520, and the first special prize is drawn by lottery when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The game ball B can be accepted according to the lottery result and the second special lottery result, and the game ball B accepted in the game ball B can be distributed to either the V winning side or the losing side. A first sorting device 2530 that divides the game balls B distributed to the V winning side by the first sorting device 2530 to either the first V winning hole 2007 or the second V winning hole side. A device 2540, and a third sorting device 2550 that distributes the game balls B sorted to the second V winning hole side by the second sorting device 2540 to either the second V winning hole 2008 or the losing side. ing.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 includes an accessory prize opening door 2511 that can open and close the accessory prize opening 2006, and a prize winning opening door 2511 for receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. A prize winning hole solenoid 2512 that opens and closes according to the first special lottery result or second special lottery result drawn by the prize winning hole solenoid 2512, and a prize winning hole sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B received in the prize winning hole 2006. , the first loss opening sensor 2515 detects the game ball B received in the first loss opening 2535, and the first loss opening sensor 2515 detects the gaming ball B distributed by the second sorting device 2540 and accepted into the first V winning opening 2007. A first V winning opening sensor 2514 is provided.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the center accessory 2500, as shown in FIGS. , and a second guide passage 2522 whose upper entrance is provided adjacent to the left side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. The guide passage group 2520 (the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522) is formed of a colorless and transparent member, and the game balls B circulating inside can be visually recognized from the front.

The first guide passage 2521 extends vertically and briefly downward from the stop portion 1006 of the front structural member 1000 and then bends at right angles to the right. When it hits the right rail 1005, it bends downward and connects to the right rail 1005. It bends to the left at around 3/4 of the height from below the height of the game area 5a, and extends to the left at a gentle angle to become lower than the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. It bends downward at a position to the left of one ball B and extends to the height of the center of the gaming area 5a, then bends to the right and extends to the vicinity of the right rail 1005, and then bends downward so that the exit is downward. It is formed in an open shape. The first guide passage 2521 is not bent in the front-rear direction, and guides the game ball B downward on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the game panel 1100.

The accessory prize opening 2006 is provided in a part extending to the left in the first guide passage 2521, extends left and right over substantially the entire length of the part in the left and right direction, and opens upward. ing. The accessory prize opening door 2511 is formed into a plate shape that extends from front to back and left and right so that the left end is lower, and the accessory prize opening 2006 opens upward by moving back and forth. It can be opened and closed. The accessory prize opening door 2511 can close the accessory prize opening 2006 by moving forward, and in the state where the accessory prize opening 2006 is closed, the part extending to the left in the first guide passage 2521 By forming the bottom surface of the guide passage 2521, the game balls B flowing from the upstream side can be guided to the exit side of the first guide passage 2521.

The accessory prize opening door 2511 opens the accessory prize opening 2006 by moving backward by the drive of the accessory prize winning opening solenoid 2512, and transfers the game ball B that has been distributed through the first guide passage 2521 to the accessory prize winning opening 2006. can be accepted. This prize winning port door 2511 closes the prize winning port 2006 when the prize winning port solenoid 2512 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the prize winning port 2006 when the prize winning port solenoid 2512 is ON (when energized). The prize opening 2006 is opened.

The second guide passage 2522 has an entrance opening upward at a position spaced leftward from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 on the right end side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. The second guide passage 2522 extends substantially straight downward from the entrance at the upper end, bends backward at a position lower than the height of the part where the first guide passage 2521 first bends to the right, and then A portion bent downward on the rear side of the panel 1100 and aligned with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-rear direction, and extending downward on the left side of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the first guide passage 2521. It extends downward so that the left and right directions are substantially aligned, bends to the right in a crank shape at the height of the center of the game area 5a, and then bends downward, and After bending forward at a portion lower than the portion extending toward the direction, the portion extends to the lower right side of the first guide passage 2521 with the front-rear direction being on the same plane as the first guide passage 2521. It is bent to the right so as to extend along the lower side of the part, and then bent downward so as to be adjacent to the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521, so that the outlet is formed in a shape that opens downward. ing.

The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are located in a part of the first guide passage 2521 that extends vertically on the left side of the accessory prize opening 2006, and are lined up in the front-rear direction so that they appear to overlap from the front. It has a section 2520a. In this important part 2520a, both the game balls B circulating in the first guide passage 2521 and the game balls B circulating in the second guide passage 2522 can be clearly seen from the front. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine in which passage the game balls B circulating through the weighted viewing section 2520a are circulating.

In the guide passage group 2520, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted 90 degrees around the vertical axis on the upper side of the weighted part 2520a, and on the lower side of the weighted part 2520a, It is twisted 90 degrees in the opposite direction to the upper side around the vertical axis. The respective exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 open downward above the normal winning opening 2003 in the attacker unit 2400.

The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are each provided with a plurality of protrusions 2520b at intervals in the direction of flow of the game balls B, and when the game balls B come into contact with the protrusions 2520b, the flow speed increases. (See FIG. 112).

The first sorting device 2530 is provided at a height between the accessory prize opening 2006 and a portion extending to the right on the lower side of the first guide passage 2521. (front surface of the panel 1100).

The first sorting device 2530 has an accommodating portion 2531a that can accommodate only one game ball B on its outer peripheral surface, and includes a sorting rotary body 2531 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a sorting rotary body 2531 that can accommodate only one game ball B. A first distribution solenoid 2532 (see FIG. 137, etc.) for rotating the distribution rotating body 2531 between a state in which the accommodation portion 2531a faces rightward and a state in which it faces upward; A cylindrical peripheral wall portion 2533 that covers the outer periphery of the distribution rotary body 2531 and a game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 are shaken by penetrating the upper part of the distribution rotary body 2531 in the peripheral wall portion 2533. A first distribution guide path 2534 that guides to the upper outer circumferential surface of the distribution rotor 2531 and a lower part of the first distribution guide path 2534 open toward the rear, and are connected to the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531. The first loss port 2535 into which the game balls B that were not accommodated enter, and the right side portion of the distribution rotor 2531 in the peripheral wall portion 2533 through which the game balls B accommodated in the storage portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 circulate. A first strike passage 2536 extends rightward through the.

The distribution rotary body 2531 is formed into a truncated cone shape with an outer circumferential surface narrowing toward the rear. The right end side of the first hit passage 2536 bends backward, then bends downward, and communicates with the second sorting device 2540 side.

In the first distribution device 2530, when the first distribution solenoid 2532 is OFF (non-energized), the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotary body 2531 faces to the right. In this state, when the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 passes through the first distribution guiding path 2534 and comes into contact with the upper part of the outer peripheral surface of the distribution rotary body 2531, the outer circumference of the distribution rotation body 2531 Since the surface is formed in the shape of a truncated cone that narrows backward, the game ball is guided backward by the slope of the outer circumferential surface and enters the first losing port 2535.

On the other hand, when the first distribution solenoid 2532 is ON (energized), the distribution rotary body 2531 rotates counterclockwise, and the housing portion 2531a faces upward (see FIG. 122(a)). reference). In this state, when the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 passes through the first distribution guide path 2534, only one game ball B is stored in the storage section 2531a. When the game ball B is further guided by the first distribution guide path 2534 from the accessory prize opening 2006 side while the game ball B is stored in the housing part 2531a of the distribution rotary body 2531, the game ball After B comes into contact with the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a, it enters the first loss opening 2535 at the rear. The game ball B that has entered the first losing port 2535 is delivered to the back right ball ejecting unit 3130 of the light guide plate production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, and the first losing port sensor provided in the back right ball ejecting unit 3130. After being detected by 2515, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

When the first distribution solenoid 2532 rotates the distribution rotary body 2531 in the clockwise direction while the game ball B is accommodated in the accommodation section 2531a, and the accommodation section 2531a faces to the right, the accommodation section The game ball B accommodated in 2531a rolls from the storage portion 2531a toward the first hit passage 2536 on the right side, and flows through the first hit passage 2536. The game balls B that have passed through the first hit path 2536 are sent to the next second sorting device 2540.

In this way, in the first sorting device 2530, it is possible to sort the game balls B received in the accessory winning hole 2006 to either the second sorting device 2540 side or the first losing hole 2535 side. can.

As shown in FIGS. 117 and 120, the second sorting device 2540 is provided below the first sorting device 2530 and at the rear near the exit of the guide passage group 2520. The second sorting device 2540 is provided at the rear of the first sorting guide path 2534, first atari passage 2536, etc. of the first sorting device 2530.

As shown in FIG. 122, the second sorting device 2540 distributes game balls B that have been accommodated in the housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotary body 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 and sorted to the first atari passage 2536 side. A second distribution guideway 2541 extending vertically, a first V prize opening 2007 opening on the right side of the lower part of the second distribution guideway 2541, and a first V prize opening 2007 extending to the right from the first V prize entrance 2007. a first V winning passage 2542 that extends downward after the opening, and a first V winning opening sensor that is provided within the first V winning passage 2542 and detects the game ball B received in the first V winning opening 2007. 2514.

Further, the second sorting device 2540 is provided with a second losing port 2543 that opens upward at the lower end of the second sorting guideway 2541, and is provided above the second losing port 2543. A distribution door 2544 that can open and close the loss port 2543, a second distribution solenoid 2545 that moves the distribution door 2544 forward and backward to open and close the second loss port 2543, and a second distribution solenoid 2545 that extends to the left from the second loss port 2543. A second failure passage 2546 is bent downward at the rear. The distribution door 2544 has a flat plate shape that moves forward and backward, and is inclined so that the right side is lower.

In the second sorting device 2540, when the second sorting solenoid 2545 is OFF (non-energized), the sorting door 2544 is retracted and the second loss port 2543 is opened upward. In this state, when the game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 side flows down the second sorting guide path 2541, it enters the second losing port 2543, passes through the second losing path 2546, and enters the second losing path 2546. It is sent to the strikeout separator 2550 side.

On the other hand, when the second distribution solenoid 2545 is ON (energized), the distribution door 2544 is moving forward above the second loss port 2543, and the second loss port 2543 is closed by the distribution door 2544 and the game is played. Ball B cannot be accepted. In this state, when the game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 side flows down the second sorting guide path 2541, it comes into contact with the upper surface of the sorting door 2544, and then the ball B comes into contact with the upper surface of the sorting door 2544. It is guided to the right by the inclination and enters (is accepted) into the first V winning opening 2007. Then, the game ball B that has entered the first V winning hole 2007 flows through the first V winning path 2542 and is detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2514. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the back right ball discharge unit 3130.

When the game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 is received by the first V winning hole 2007 and detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2514, the big winning hole 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. A “jackpot game” that opens and closes is executed. This second sorting device 2540 can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent guide passage group 2520.

In this way, in the second sorting device 2540, the game balls B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotary body 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 are transferred to the first V winning opening 2007 or the second losing opening. 2543 (third sorting device 2550) side.

The third sorting device 2550 is provided above the stage 2503 within the frame of the center accessory 2500, as shown in FIGS. 120, 122, etc. The third sorting device 2550 communicates with the lower end of the second losing path 2546 of the second sorting device 2540, and includes a crank-shaped third sorting guide path 2551 that guides the game ball B to the left, A third distribution detection sensor 2552 is provided in the middle of the strikeout guide path 2551 and detects game balls B circulating inside, and a third distribution detection sensor 2552 is provided above the stage 2503 within the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is provided with a croon 2553 which is shaped like a container concave downward and to which the game balls B guided by the third distribution guiding path 2551 are supplied.

In addition, the third sorting device 2550 includes a sorting rotary blade 2554 that is rotatably provided around an axis in the vertical direction at the center of the upper surface of the croon in a plan view, and a sorting rotary blade 2554 that is provided below the croon 2553 and is rotatable for sorting. A third distribution drive motor 2555 (see FIG. 115) that rotates the blade 2554, a second V prize opening 2008 that is open at the front end of the peripheral wall of the croon 2553, and a second V prize opening 2008 in the peripheral wall of the croon 2553. A third losing port 2556 that is open on both left and right sides, and a third sorting ball discharge passage that distinguishes and guides the game balls B received in the second V winning port 2008 and the third losing port 2556 downward, respectively. 2557.

Furthermore, although not shown, the third distribution device 2550 includes a spur gear-shaped rotating gear that rotates integrally with the distribution rotating blade 2554 below the croon 2553, and a spur gear-shaped rotating gear that meshes with the rotating gear. The driving gear includes a driven gear, a flat detection piece projecting downward from near the periphery of the lower surface of the driven gear, and a third distributed rotation detection sensor that detects the detection piece.

The third distribution guideway 2551 extends downward for a short period of time from directly below the lower end of the second losing passage 2546, bends to the left, extends to the vicinity of the right end of the croon 2553, and then extends downward into the croon 2553. It is bent into a crank shape. This third distribution guide path 2551 is formed so as to release the game ball B to the front right corner of the croon 2553 in plan view. The third distribution detection sensor 2552 is provided at the entrance of the third distribution guideway 2551.

The croon 2553 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long oval dish with the center being the lowest point. The distribution rotary blade 2554 has a pair of protrusions 2554a (see FIG. 108, etc.) protruding at right angles to the rotation axis, and a confetti-shaped decoration with a plurality of protrusions protruding from a spherical body. 2554b. This distribution rotary blade 2554 is constantly rotated in a fixed direction by a third distribution drive motor 2555, and a third distribution rotation detection sensor monitors whether or not the distribution rotation blade 2554 is rotating. ing. When the game ball B in the croon 2553 comes into contact with the protruding piece 2554a while the distribution rotary blade 2554 is rotating, the game ball B can be flipped toward the peripheral wall of the croon 2553. The third loss openings 2556 provided on the left and right sides of the second V winning opening 2008 are each formed to have the same size as the second V winning opening 2008.

In the third sorting device 2550, a third sorting drive motor 2555 constantly rotates a sorting rotary blade 2554 at the center of the croon 2553. Then, when the game balls B are distributed to the second loss port 2543 by the second distribution device 2540, they are supplied to the clone 2553 from the second loss path 2546 through the third distribution guide path 2551. At that time, the game ball B supplied to the clone 2553 is detected by the third distribution detection sensor 2552. Based on the detection of the game balls B by the third distribution detection sensor 2552, a performance corresponding to the distribution of the game balls B by the clone 2553 is executed.

The game ball B supplied to the croon 2553 from the third distribution guideway 2551 turns (orbits) inside the croon 2553 while narrowing the turning radius, and when it comes into contact with the protrusion 2554a of the distribution rotary blade 2554, the croon 2553 It is repelled to the surrounding wall side. Then, when the game ball B is flipped forward by the distribution rotating blade 2554, it enters (is accepted) into either the second V winning opening 2008 or the two third losing openings 2556. In this third sorting device 2550, game balls B are sorted to the second V winning hole 2008 with a probability of 1/3.

The game ball B that entered the second V prize opening 2008 is delivered to the back lower ball ejection unit 3120 of the light guide plate production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 via the third distribution ball ejection passage 2557, and the back lower ball ejected. After being detected by the second V winning hole sensor 3003 provided in the unit 3120, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third losing port 2556 is delivered to the lower back ball ejecting unit 3120 of the light guide plate production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 via the third distribution ball ejecting passage 2557, and After being detected by the third missed sensor 3004 provided in the ball ejecting unit 3120, the ball is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200.

In this way, in the third sorting device 2550, the game balls B sorted to the second losing opening 2543 by the second sorting device 2540 are sent to either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2556. It can be divided into

[5-8f. Flow of game balls within the gaming area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 117, FIG. 120 to FIG. 124, etc. When assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided near the upper right of the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a region to the left of and below the center accessory 2500, and in a region between the attacker unit 2400 and the center accessory 2500. has been done. Further, on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300, a windmill W is provided which rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500 are designed to prevent the game ball B driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500 from being closer to the warp entrance 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the center of the windmill W. It is adjusted so that it mainly enters the part on the right side, and it is also adjusted so that it enters the part on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the lower end of the guide passage group 2520 in the center accessory 2500 and the normal winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 are the game which circulated through the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. Ball B is adjusted so that it enters the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430, the normal winning opening 2003, and the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with a similar probability, and the second guide passage. It is adjusted so that the game ball B that circulated through 2522 enters the normal winning hole 2003 and the left side of the normal winning hole 2003 with a higher probability than the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

In the game area 5a, a game ball B is guided by an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 and is driven into the upper part along the periphery of the game area 5a from the left side. When the game ball B is driven so as to flow on the left side of the center accessory 2500 with respect to the inside of the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. N will guide you to enter either the warp entrance 2501 of the center accessory 2500 or the part to the right of the center of the windmill W, and with a lower probability it will enter the part to the left of the center of the windmill W. be guided to enter.

The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is guided to the right by the shelf section 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that it will be accepted into the three general winning holes 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. The game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then delivered to the back lower ball ejection unit 3120 of the light guide plate production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, and is sent to the general prize opening sensor. After being detected by the substrate holder 3001, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When a game ball B is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is almost never received by the first starting port 2002. Then, the game balls B that are not accepted into the general winning hole 2001 are discharged from the out hole 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is moved to the center in the left-right direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. There is a possibility that it will be guided to the side and received into the first starting port 2002. In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may pass between a plurality of obstructing nails N arranged diagonally and flow down onto the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general prize opening 2001.

The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2503 from the warp exit 2502. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward from the center portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the gaming area 5a from the center release part 2503a at the center of the stage 2503, since the center release part 2503a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, there is a high probability that the first It is received in the starting port 2002. When the game ball B is released from the side release parts 2503b on both the left and right sides of the center release part 2503a, it will be received in the first starting port 2002 with a certain probability.

After the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, it is delivered to the back lower ball ejection unit 3120 of the light guide plate production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, and the first starting After being detected by the mouth sensor 3002, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game balls B are detected by the first starting port sensor 3002, a first special lottery result is drawn and benefits such as a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out are provided. Game balls B released from the stage 2503 and not received by the first starting port 2002 are discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the gaming area 5a.

In addition, if the game ball B is placed on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the gaming area 5a, there is no possibility that it will be accepted into the normal prize opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2004, and in rare cases, it will not be accepted into the opened grand prize opening 2005. It can be accepted.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the probability that the game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 is received by the second starting port 2004 is higher than the probability that the game ball B hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is accepted into the second starting port 2004. The probability of being accepted into the first starting port 2002 is set higher.

In contrast to the above, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, when the game ball B is hit with such force that it enters the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 (upstream space portion 2505) of the center accessory 2500, Game balls B circulate through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

To explain in detail, the game ball B is hit with such force that it contacts the stop portion 1006 that protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). ), the game ball B that has come into contact with the stopper 1006 enters the first guide path 2521 (see FIG. 121(a)). The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory prize opening door 2511 that closes the accessory prize opening 2006 in the middle of the first guide passage 2521, and then passes through the guide passage group. It is discharged from the outlet on the right side of the lower end of 2520 to the attacker unit 2400 side below.

The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is moved to the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the attacker unit 2400 and the normal winning prize. The player is guided to enter either the opening 2003 or the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with a similar probability.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the upstream space 2505 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the second guide passage 2522, it is twisted backward and passes through the first guide passage in the weighted part 2520a. After being lined up in the front-back direction with 2521, it is twisted forward and discharged from the exit on the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521 toward the attacker unit 2400 below.

The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is moved to the normal winning opening 2003 or the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 by a plurality of obstacle nails N installed between it and the attacker unit 2400. In rare cases, the attacker is guided to enter the first opening 2431 of the right passage 2430 of the attacker.

Then, the game ball B that entered the attacker right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is sent onto the lower right rail 1004 from the release opening 2435 which is below the big winning opening 2005. It is released and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. In addition, the game ball B that has entered the normal winning hole 2003 is detected by the normal winning hole sensor 2401 and is discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by the normal winning hole sensor 2401, a normal lottery is held and benefits such as a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out are given.

In addition, the game ball B that has entered the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 further comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N, and flows down onto the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421. In addition, the game ball B that has entered the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 may rarely pass through the second opening 2432 between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and enter the attacker right passage 2430. It may enter. Then, the game ball B that has flown down onto the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 passes between the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall part 2422 and flows down onto the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424. .

At this time, if the game ball B is accepted into the normal prize opening 2003 and a "normal win" is drawn as the normal lottery result, the second starting opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, so the second starting opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern. There is a possibility that the game ball B that has passed between the upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 will be received by the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting port sensor 2402, a second special lottery result is drawn and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out is provided.

The game ball B that passed between the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall part 2422 and flowing down onto the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 flows from the left end of the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 to the big winning opening 2005. is released to the upper part of the body. Then, when the game ball B is released from the big prize opening guide shelf 2424, the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and is used as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When a "big hit" is drawn, or when game ball B is accepted into the first V winning hole 2007 or the second V winning hole 2008, the big winning hole 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. The game ball B released to the left from the opening guiding shelf 2424 will be accepted into the big prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by this big prize opening sensor 2403, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. In addition, the game ball B released to the attacker unit 2400 side through the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is accepted into any of the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the special winning opening 2005. If not, it is discharged from the outlet 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the lower part behind the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

In addition, although the case where the game ball B is hit to the right has been described above, the game ball B that is hit with such force that it jumps over the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 that opens near the right end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 also It will enter the first guide passage 2521, resulting in the same result as above.

As mentioned above, due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B that passed through the second guide passage 2522 rather than the first guide passage 2521 , the possibility of being accepted into the normal winning slot 2003 is high.

By the way, if the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "small win" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second lottery result, the game ball The provided accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and the sorting rotary body 2531 of the first sorting device 2530 and the sorting door 2544 of the second sorting device 2540 operate in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when a "small win" is drawn, the accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes, so in order for the player to receive the game ball B into the accessory prize opening 2006, "Right-handed hitting" can be performed so that the game ball B flows through the first guide passage 2521 in which the opening 2006 is provided.

In this embodiment, a "small win" has a higher probability of being drawn than a "big win", and a "small win" includes a "first small win," a "second small win," and a "third small win." Three patterns are set, and in each pattern, the accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes roughly twice.

First, the opening and closing of the accessory prize opening 2006 for each "small win" will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 123, in the "first small win", after a certain period of time (3000 ms) has passed from the start of execution, the accessory prize opening 2006 is open for a short time (80 ms), and then closed. After a short period of time (1252 ms) has elapsed, it is again in the open state for a short period of time (80 ms) and then in the closed state, completing the process. In the "second small win", after a certain period of time (3000ms) has passed from the start of the execution, the accessory prize opening 2006 is open for a short time (80ms), and then closed, and from the "first small win". After a long time (5420 ms) has elapsed, the open state is reached for a long time (9414 ms), and then the closed state is completed. In the "third small win", after a certain period of time (3000ms) has passed from the start of execution, the accessory prize opening 2006 is open for a short time (80ms), and then closed, and from the "second small win" After a long time (19366 ms) has elapsed, the open state is reached for a long time (9404 ms), and then the closed state is completed.

The second open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "first small win" is started after the time from the start of execution to the completion of the "first small win". In addition, the second opening state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "third small win" is started after the time from the start of execution to the completion of the "second small win."

In addition, in FIG. 123, in the second long open state in the "second small win" and "third small win", the open state (80 ms) is repeated 8 times at constant intervals (1252 ms). . That is, the accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes (opens) twice for the "first small win" and nine times for the "second small win" and the "third small win".

Next, the operation of the distribution rotary body 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 in the "small win" is to rotate counterclockwise at the same time as the start of execution, and for a predetermined period of time (3020 ms) to direct the storage section 2531a upward. When a predetermined period of time (4560 ms) has elapsed since the storage section 2531a is rotated clockwise and turned to the right, the storage section 2531a is rotated clockwise and the storage section 2531a is turned to the right. After being in the accommodable state for a short time (500 ms), the accommodating state becomes the third accommodating state for the same time as the second time (13446 ms), and then becomes the unaccommodable state.

The first accommodating state of the sorting rotary body 2531 ends midway through the first open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "small win" and becomes the unaccommodating state. Further, the distribution rotary body 2531 becomes ready to be accommodated for the second time after the time when the "first small hit" is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, at the time of the "first small hit", the control of the distribution rotary body 2531 is completed before the second storage possible state is reached, and the second and third storage possible states are not executed. This sorting rotating body 2531 is configured such that the second accommodation state is started before the second open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "second small win", and the second open state is the closed state. After that, it becomes uncontainable.

Further, the distribution rotary body 2531 becomes ready for storage for the third time after the time when the "second small win" is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, at the time of the "second small win", the control of the distribution rotary body 2531 is completed before the third accommodation possible state is reached, and the third accommodation possible state is not executed. In other words, the distribution rotary body 2531 is in a state where it can be accommodated once when the "first small win" occurs, twice when the "second small win" occurs, and three times when the "third small win" occurs. This distributing rotary body 2531 starts the third accommodation state before the second open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "third small win", and the second open state ends. After it becomes closed state, it becomes unaccommodating state.

Next, the operation of the sorting door 2544 of the second sorting device 2540 in the "small win" is the first closed state in which it protrudes forward at the same time as the start of execution and closes the second loss opening 2535 for a predetermined time (3020 ms). After that, it becomes the state where it can be distributed to the first V winning opening 2007), and then it moves back and becomes the open state where the second winning opening 2535 is opened (the state where it can be distributed to the third distribution device 2550) for a predetermined time (23006 ms). ), the second closed state is reached for a longer time (13446 ms) than the first open state, and then the open state is reached.

The first closed state of the sorting door 2544 ends midway through the first open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "small win" and becomes the open state. In addition, the second sorting device 2540 starts the second closed state of the sorting door 2544 from the middle of the second open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "third small hit", and After the second open state in 2006 changes to the closed state, the distribution door 2544 changes from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, in the second sorting device 2540, the second closing state of the sorting door 2544 is executed only when there is a "third small hit", and when there is a "first small winning" or "second small winning", the distributing door 2544 is closed for the second time. The second closing state of the branch door 2544 is not executed.

For this reason, in the "first small hit", the opening and closing of the accessory prize opening 2006 is executed twice in a short period of time, so the game circulating in the first guide passage 2521 by "right hit" It is unlikely that the ball B will be accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006. In addition, since the first open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "second small win" and "third small win" is also for a short time, there is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted in the accessory prize opening 2006. is low. In addition, the time when the first accommodating state of the sorting rotating body 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 overlaps with the first open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "small win" 2006, the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 is stored in the storage section of the sorting rotary body 2531 when the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened for the first time. The possibility of being accommodated in 2531a is even lower. Since the first accommodating state of the sorting rotary body 2531 and the first closed state of the sorting door 2544 in the second sorting device 2540 end at the same time, the distributing rotary body 2531 ends at the same time. At the time of the first accommodation possible state, the game balls B accommodated in the accommodation section 2531a are not distributed to the first V prize opening 2007 side.

On the other hand, since the second opening state of the accessory winning hole 2006 in the "second small win" and "third small winning" takes a long time, the game ball B passes through the first guide path 2521 and enters the accessory prize. There is a high possibility that it will be accepted in 2006. At this time, the sorting rotating body 2531 of the first sorting device 2530 becomes a state where it can be accommodated before the accessory prize opening 2006 goes into the open state, and then the accessory prize opening 2006 changes from the open state to the closed state. After that, the game ball B becomes unaccommodable, so there is a high possibility that the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 in the second open state will be accommodated in the accommodating part 2531a of the distribution rotary body 2531. .

In this way, in this example, it is unlikely that the game ball B will be accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 in the first open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "second small win" and "third small win". In addition, it is even less likely that the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 will be accommodated in the accommodating part 2531a of the distribution rotary body 2531 when the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened for the first time. Nevertheless, at the same time as the start of execution of the small winning game state, the distributing rotary body 2531 is rotated counterclockwise to bring the housing section 2531a into an upwardly accommodating state, and the housing section 2531a is held for a predetermined period (3020 ms). After facing upward, it is rotated clockwise to bring the housing portion 2531a to a rightward unaccommodating state. That is, immediately after the start of the small winning gaming state, although there is a low possibility that the distribution rotary body 2531 will distribute the game ball B to the first hit path 2536 side, the distribution rotary body 2531 will distribute the game ball B to the first hit path 2536. The distribution operation by the distribution rotating body 2531 is shown in advance by performing the distribution operation to the side.

Similarly, immediately after the start of the small winning game state, there is a low possibility that the distribution rotary body 2531 will distribute the game balls B to the first hit path 2536 side, but at the same time as the execution of the small winning game state starts, the second distributing device By protruding the distribution door 2544 of 2540 forward and closing the second losing port 2535, it becomes possible to distribute to the first V winning port 2007, and after a predetermined time (3020 ms) has elapsed, it moves back and closes the second losing port 2535. By opening, the state is made such that the distribution is made to the third distribution device 2550. That is, immediately after the start of the small winning gaming state, although there is a low possibility that the distribution door 2544 will distribute the game balls B to the first V prize opening 2007 side, the distribution door 2544 will distribute the game balls B to the first V prize opening 2007 side. The sorting operation by the sorting door 2544 is shown in advance by performing the sorting operation to the side.

In this example, the distribution rotary body 2531 and the distribution door 2544 are activated at the same time as the start of the execution of the small winning game state, that is, the performance at the start of the small winning game state (the opening performance of the small winning game state, for example, Aim for 2006, etc.), which operates during the execution of a game explanation etc. in a small winning game state), and after the distribution rotary body 2531 and distribution door 2544 operate, the accessory prize opening 2006 opens for the first time. is in the open state. This reduces the possibility of the distribution rotary body 2531 distributing the game balls B to the first winning passage 2536 side and the distribution door 2544 distributing the game balls B to the first V prize opening 2007 side. are doing. In addition, there is no possibility of the distribution rotary body 2531 distributing the game balls B to the first hit passage 2536 side and the distribution door 2544 distributing the game balls B to the first V prize opening 2007 side. Alternatively, if it is as low as possible, the accessory prize opening 2006 may be opened for the first time at the same time as the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution door 2544 operate.

Alternatively, only one of the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution door 2544 may be operated in advance, and the other may not be operated in advance. That is, some of the movable parts (sorting rotating body 2531, sorting door 2544) that sort the winning game balls in the accessory prize opening 2006 are operated in advance to show the sorting operation, Other movable parts may not be operated in advance. For example, the sorting door 2544 that is likely to cause a game ball to enter the V winning hole (in this example, the first V winning hole 2007) by operating (high expectation of V winning) is not activated in advance. , Operate in advance only the distribution rotary body 2531 that is less likely to enter the V winning opening (in this example, the second V winning opening 2008) than the distribution door 2544 (the expectation of V winning is low). You can do it like this. As a result, although it is possible to know in advance some of the destinations to which game balls that have entered the variable prize opening 2006 will be distributed, other destinations can be kept unknown, and other destinations may not be revealed. To suppress a decrease in interest in a game by surprising a player and increasing his or her expectations by increasing the number of destinations to which a game is distributed, and by drawing attention to the game balls to be distributed and enjoying the movement thereof. Can be done.

In addition, by not operating the movable part (distributing door 2544) with high expectations for V winning in advance, its existence is concealed and the player is made to believe that the game ball will enter the third distributing device 2550. When the third small hit is executed, the movable part (distributing door 2544) with a high expectation of V winning operates and the game ball enters the V winning opening (in this example, the first V winning opening 2007). In addition to providing a sense of surprise, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by allowing the game ball to enter an unexpected destination. In addition, the allocation to the first V prize opening 2007 side as the allocation destination is hidden, making it possible to make people think that there are only two allocation destinations: the first losing opening 2535 side and the third distribution device 2550 side, and the third small winning Even if a second small win with a low expectation of winning is executed and game balls are distributed to the third distribution device 2550 side, the player is not disappointed.

Furthermore, in this example, the distribution rotary body 2531 is arranged in such a manner that it can be easily recognized by the player, whereas the distribution door 2544 is shaped like a flat plate that moves forward and backward from the game board 5, and has an area on the front side. Because the area is narrow, it is difficult to notice the movement even if it is operating. Furthermore, it is difficult for the player to notice the passage on the first V prize opening 2007 side, which can be entered by the distribution door 2544 protruding forward. Therefore, when the third small hit occurs, the sorting door 2544 operates and the game ball enters the first V prize opening 2007, the behavior of the game ball becomes difficult to notice, and the game ball enters the first V It is possible to give the player a feeling as if a 15R jackpot has been executed because a V winning suddenly occurs without making the player aware that he has entered the winning opening 2007.

In addition, by operating the distributing rotary body 2531 in advance during the opening performance of the small winning game state, the distributing rotary body 2531 can be used in addition to the instruction content in the opening performance, for example, "Aim for the accessory prize opening 2006." This action also allows the player to easily recognize where to hit the ball, that is, where to aim during the small winning game state.

As the "small win" is drawn as described above, when the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened, the game ball B flowing down the first guide passage 2521 is accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006. After being detected by the accessory prize opening sensor 2513, it is sent to the first distribution guide path 2534 of the first distribution device 2530. When the game ball B is detected by the accessory prize opening sensor 2513, a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided.

Among the "small wins", in the "second small win", when the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened for the second time, the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 is in the open state, so the distribution rotation When the body 2531 rotates from the accommodating state to the unaccommodating state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a passes through the first hit passage 2536 and enters the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540. The liquid flows down, flows through the second loss passage 2546 from the second loss port 2543 at the lower end, and is sent to the third sorting device 2550 side.

The game ball B sent to the third sorting device 2550 side is detected by the third sorting detection sensor 2552, and then supplied onto the croon 2553 through the third sorting guideway 2551, and is fed into the croon 2553. rotate. Then, by being flipped by the distribution rotating blade 2554 that is constantly rotated by the third distribution drive motor 2555, it will be accepted into either the second V winning opening 2008 or the two third losing openings 2556. Then, the game ball B received in the second V prize opening 2008 is passed through the third distribution ball ejection passage 2557 to the back lower ball ejection unit 3120 of the light guide plate production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, It is detected by the 2V winning hole sensor 3003 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third losing port 2556 passes through the third distribution ball ejection passage 2557 and is delivered to the back lower ball ejection unit 3120 of the light guide plate production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, After being detected by the missing edge sensor 3004, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the second V winning hole sensor 3003, a privilege is given in which the big winning hole 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern.

On the other hand, in the "third small win", when the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened for the second time, the sorting door 2544 of the second sorting device 2540 is in the closed state, so the sorting rotary body 2531 When the ball B rotates from the accommodating state to the unaccommodating state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a passes through the first atari passage 2536 and flows down the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540. Then, it comes into contact with the upper surface of the closed sorting door 2544, is guided to the right, and enters (is accepted) into the first V winning opening 2007. After the game ball B that has entered the first V winning hole 2007 passes through the first V winning path 2542 and is detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2514, the right ball is discharged from the back of the light guide plate production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the unit 3130. When the game ball B is detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2514, a privilege is given in which the big winning hole 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern.

For this reason, in order to open and close the big prize opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 must receive the game ball B to generate a "small hit", "big hit", etc. It is necessary to have the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn. When the game ball B is hit so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500, there is a chance that it will be received in the first starting hole 2002, but there is no chance that it will be accepted in the second starting hole 2004.

On the other hand, when hitting the game ball B so as to flow down the right side of the center accessory 2500, on the right side of the center accessory 2500 there is a guide passage group 2520 consisting of two guide passages, a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522. Even if you pass through the passageway, there is a chance that it will be accepted into the normal winning hole 2003 for opening and closing the second starting hole 2004, but if you hit it with the right hand, which makes it easier to drive, the first guide If the game ball B is distributed through the passage 2521, there is a possibility that the attacker enters the right passage 2430 where it is sent to the out exit 1008 without having a chance to be accepted into the normal winning opening 2003 etc., and the game ball B is circulated through the second guide passage 2522. In order to achieve this, it is necessary to adjust the hitting strength of the game ball B. In addition, in order to make the second starting port 2004 accept the game ball B, it is necessary to make the normal winning port 2003 accept the game ball B and derive the normal lottery result of "normal win", so the game ball B The acceptance probability of the second starting port 2004 is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, under normal conditions, the player is advised to drive the game ball B so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002. The game ball B can be operated and the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown to allow the user to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1. This can increase expectations for acceptance.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting opening 2002 and a "small win" is drawn as the first special lottery result, the accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes, so the game ball B enters the accessory prize opening 2006. In order to accept the ball B, the driving operation of the game ball B can be changed to "right-handed hitting" and the game ball B can be driven into the first guide passage 2521 where the accessory prize opening 2006 is provided. This can increase expectations for receiving the game ball B into the accessory prize opening 2006.

Even if the game ball B hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not accepted in the accessory prize opening 2006, there is a possibility that it will be accepted in the normal prize opening 2003 on the downstream side. There is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is opened according to the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball B, and a "small hit" or "big hit" will be won as the second special lottery result. may be selected by lottery.

When the game ball B hit into this first guide path 2521 is received in the accessory prize opening 2006, it is sent to the first sorting device 2530, so the game ball B is placed in the storage part 2531a of the sorting rotary body 2531. It is possible to make players nervous and nervous depending on whether or not they are accommodated.

When the game ball B sent to the first sorting device 2530 is stored in the accommodating part 2531a of the sorting rotary body 2531, the game ball B is sent to the next second sorting device 2540. Depending on which of the first V winning hole 2007 and the second losing hole 2543 the game balls B are sorted into in the sorting device 2540, the player can be excited and nervous. In this second sorting device 2540, even if the game ball B is sorted to the second losing hole 2543, the game ball B passes through the second losing path 2546 and passes through the third playing hole equipped with the second V winning hole 2008. Since it is sent to the distribution device 2550, it is possible to create a sense of expectation for the second V winning hole 2008, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

The game balls B sorted to the second losing port 2543 in the second sorting device 2540 are supplied to the croon 2553 of the third sorting device 2550 and rotate on the croon 2553. Then, when it is repelled to the peripheral wall side by the distribution rotary blade 2554 in the center of the croon 2553, it can make the player nervous and excited depending on whether or not it is accepted into the second V prize opening 2008, and the player is entertained. be able to.

When the game ball B is accepted into the first V winning hole 2007 or the second V winning hole 2008, or when the game ball B is received into the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004, the first special When a "jackpot" is drawn as the lottery result and the second special lottery result, the big prize opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, giving rise to an opportunity to pay out many game balls B. A driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be performed so that the game ball B is received in the opening/closing grand prize opening 2005.

At this time, the probability that the game ball B will reach the big prize opening 2005 is higher when circulating through the second guide passage 2522 than when circulating through the first guide passage 2521. The driving strength can be adjusted so that the game ball B enters the second guide path 2522 while refraining from "hitting to the right," and the driving operation of the game ball B can be enjoyed.

By the way, since the guide passage group 2520 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 has a weighted part 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction, the weighted part Looking at 2520a, it is difficult to determine in which passage the game ball B is circulating, so the player should have hit the ball into the second guide passage 2522, but instead it entered the first guide passage 2521. It is possible to make the player think that the game balls B circulating through the guide passage group 2520 can be drawn to attention. Furthermore, when the game ball B is hit into the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520, the player can be excited depending on whether or not the game ball B will come out from the exit of the second guide passage 2522. , it is possible to heighten expectations for the game, and when the player comes out from the unexpected exit of the first guide passage 2521, it can give surprise to the player and amuse the player. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

[5-8g. Another embodiment of distribution passage group for center accessories]
Next, the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 in an embodiment different from the above will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 125 and 126. 125(a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams showing an embodiment of a guide passage group different from that in FIG. 117, and FIGS. 126(e) and (f) are explanatory diagrams showing a further different embodiment of a guide passage group. It is. Note that in FIGS. 125 and 126, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125(a), compared to FIG. 117, the distance between the upper end entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 to the left is increased. This is what I did. This guide passage group 2520 can also provide the same effects as described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125(b), the angle of the blocking portion 1006 in the front component 1000 is adjusted so that the game ball B that comes into contact with it is likely to rebound toward the entrance side of the second guide passage 2522. In addition, the area between the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 in the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is inclined so that the second guide passage 2522 side (left side) is lower. This is what I did. This makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the second guide path 2522 side, and the adjustment range of the driving strength of the game ball B when the game ball B enters the second guide path 2522 becomes wider. The driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 can be easily performed.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125(c), in the guide passage group 2520 of FIG. 117 and FIGS. 125(a) and (b), the respective entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are directed upward. Whereas the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are opened, the upstream sides of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are extended to the vicinity of the center in the left and right direction above the center accessory 2500, and the respective entrances are arranged vertically. It is designed so that it opens toward the left in this state.

In this embodiment, a part of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the gaming area 5a) constitutes a part of the first guide passage 2521, and a part of the upper right peripheral wall part 2510 constitutes a part of the second guide passage 2522. It makes up the department. In addition, in this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction of the upstream space 2505 between the upper right peripheral wall 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the gaming area 5a) is from the left end of the upper right peripheral wall 2510 to the first guide. This is the length up to the respective entrances of the passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and is narrower than the upstream space 2505 shown above in FIG. 117 and the like.

In this embodiment, in order for the game ball B to enter the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, the driving force must be enough to contact the narrow portion of the upper right peripheral wall 2510 on the left side of the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. Since it is necessary to drive the game ball B with such a driving force that it directly enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 that opens toward the left, the game ball The adjustment range for the driving strength of B becomes narrower. In addition, the game ball B driven into the upstream space 2505 to the left of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 partitions the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. If the game ball B comes into contact with the left end of the wall (the part between the two entrances), it may deviate from the upstream space 2505 depending on the leftward momentum and angle of the rebounding game ball B. In other words, even if the game ball B is hit with such force that it enters the upstream space 2505, it will not deviate from the upstream space 2505 to the left and enter either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522. There is a possibility that the left side of the center accessory 2500 will be distributed. For this reason, the difficulty level of the driving operation of the game ball B increases, so that the player's motivation for the driving operation of the game ball B can be increased, and the player can be encouraged to drive the game medium. It is possible to make the operation more enjoyable and suppress a decline in interest.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 125(d) is the embodiment shown in FIG. 125(c) in which a branch part 2524 is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 and communicates with the second guide passage 2522 in a one-way manner. It is. The branch portion 2524 is provided directly above a portion of the second guide passage 2522 that extends from side to side (upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) and bends downward from the right end. In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is hit with such force that it enters the first guide path 2521, depending on the driving force (if the driving force is weak), the game ball B may reach the second guide path 2524. Since it branches to the guide path 2522 side, the difficulty level of the distribution of game balls B to the second guide path 2522 can be made lower than in the embodiment of FIG. 125(c).

In addition, in order to make the game ball B enter the second guide path 2522, it is necessary to hit the game ball B with a weaker driving force than that of the game ball B that enters the first guide path 2521. Since the communicating branch portion 2524 is provided above the downwardly bent portion of the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B that enters the second guide passage 2522 will not be able to reach the downwardly bent portion. It does not jump upward (toward the branching part 2524 side) and does not pass through the branching part 2524 and enter the first guide passage 2521 side. That is, the branch portion 2524 communicates from the first guide passage 2521 to the second guide passage 2522 in a one-way manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when entering the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 that has a branch part 2524 in the middle and flowing through the first guide passage 2521, at the part of the branch part 2524, the first guide passage 2521 side Or, since it branches to either side of the second guide passage 2522, it is possible to make the player nervous and nervous depending on which side the game ball B branches to at the branch part 2524, and the first guide It is possible to enjoy the flow of game balls B within the passage 2521 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the player hits the game ball B aiming at the second guide path 2522, the game ball B enters the entrance of the first guide path 2521. , there is a possibility that the first guide passage 2521 branches to the second guide passage 2522 side at the branching part 2524. Therefore, depending on whether or not to branch to the second guide passage 2522 side at the branching part 2524, the player may be left in suspense. It is possible to make the player's heart pound and have fun, and when the branch part 2524 branches to the second guide path 2522 side, mistakes in the player's typing operation are covered up, and the desired second guide path 2522 is avoided. The game balls B will be distributed, making the players feel like they have won, and preventing the players from losing interest in the game.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 126(e), the second guide passage 2522 has a bypass portion 2525 that crosses within the frame of the center accessory 2500. In this embodiment, the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 opens upward at a position to the left of the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. Therefore, all the game balls B hit into the upstream space 2505 above the upper right peripheral wall 2510 will flow through the first guide path 2521. According to this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the bypass section 2525, the game ball B crosses within the frame of the center accessory 2500, so the player's side Since it is possible to make the distribution of game balls B noticeable, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen after the game ball B circulates through the bypass section 2525. The player can perform the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 having the bypass portion 2525, and it is possible to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B and suppress a decrease in interest. can.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 126(f), the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is provided behind the first guide passage 2521, and the respective entrances are lined up in the front-rear direction. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is provided on the front side of the front of the game panel 1100, and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is provided on the rear side of the front of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is inclined to the right rear in the vicinity of the blocking part 1006 of the front component 1000 in the upstream space 2505, and the game balls that have been distributed along the front surface of the game panel 1100 are B is guided to the second guide passage 2522 side. Further, the blocking portion 1006 of the front component 1000 is inclined so that the portion near the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 moves to the right as it goes rearward, and the part near the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 The game ball B hit with great force can be reflected toward the entrance side of the second guide path 2522. In this embodiment, since the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 appear to line up and overlap in the front-rear direction, the game inserted into the upstream space 2505 above the center accessory 2500 It is possible to make it difficult to determine into which passage the ball B has entered, and to attract the attention of the player.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 113 to 116 and the like. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 includes a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game balls B received in the three general winning holes 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game balls B received in the three general winning holes 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a The first starting hole sensor 3002 detects the game ball B received in the first starting hole 2002, and the second V winning hole sensor 3003 detects the game ball B received in the second V winning hole 2008 of the center accessory 2500. and a third loss port sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B received in the third loss port 2556 of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 137).

The back unit 3000 also includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall; A locking mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the cage effect display device 1600 is provided.

In addition, the back unit 3000 is driven into the gaming area 5a, and is inserted into the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. An out ball detection unit 3030 that detects a game ball B that is not accepted (a game ball B that is not given a benefit), a light guide plate performance unit 3100 provided at the front end of the back box 3010, and a light guide plate performance unit 3100. A rear effect unit 3200 is provided in a rear box 3010 at the rear of the rear display unit 3010.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape that is open at the front, and has an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square manner, and a flat frame-like shape that projects rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed toward the left from the inside of the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the production display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A notch 3010d is provided from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 near the center in the left-right direction on the right side of the box 3010 to which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. formed at appropriate positions for attaching the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the back effect unit 3200, and the like.

[5-9a. Out ball detection unit]
Next, the out ball detection unit 3030 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 127 to 131 and the like. FIG. 127 (a) is a front view of the out ball detection unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out ball detection unit, (c) is a rear view of the out ball detection unit, and (d ) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit seen from the front, (e) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit seen from the back, and (f) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit viewed from a position closer to the lower right front. (g) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 128(a) is an exploded perspective view of the out ball detection unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 128(b) is an exploded perspective view of the out ball detection unit as seen from the rear.

Further, FIG. 129(a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the game panel and the out ball detection unit, and FIG. 129(b) is a perspective view showing the out ball detection unit in contact with the game panel. FIG. 130 is an enlarged sectional view taken from the right side when assembled to a game board and cut vertically at the center of the right sensor at the exit. FIG. 131 is a perspective view showing the vicinity of the exit from the front when assembled on the game board.

The out ball detection unit 3030 of the back unit 3000 is driven into the gaming area 5a, and detects the general prize opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory. This is to detect a game ball B that has not been accepted into the winning hole 2006 (a game ball B that has not been given a benefit, also referred to as an "out ball"). In this embodiment, the game ball B discharged from the outlet 1008 is detected. This out ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the front surface of the back lower ball ejection unit 3120 in the light guide plate production unit 3100.

The out ball detection unit 3030 is inserted from the rear into the out recess 1101 in the game panel 1100, and includes a unit main body 3031 attached to the front of the light guide plate production unit 3100, and an out exit left sensor attached to the unit main body 3031. 3032 and an outlet right sensor 3033, and a cover 3034 attached to the unit main body 3031 so as to cover the rear sides of the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033.

The unit main body 3031 includes a cylindrical cylindrical part 3031a that is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100 and extends cylindrical in the front-rear direction, and a partition part 3031b that divides the inside of the cylindrical part 3031a into left and right parts. , a flange portion 3031c protruding from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3031a in a flat plate shape in the left-right direction, and a flange portion 3031c that is recessed toward the front from the rear end side of the cylindrical portion, into which an out-port left sensor 3032 and an out-port right sensor 3033 are inserted. and an insertion recess 3031d. The cylindrical portion 3031a has a front end approximately the same size as the outlet 1008 of the front component 1000, is long in the left and right directions, and has a lower inner surface inclined so as to become lower toward the rear side.

The partition portion 3031b is provided near the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3031a, and is partitioned into a size that allows one game ball B to pass through on both left and right sides. The front end side of the partition portion 3031b is curved so as to protrude forward as it goes downward, and is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B and protrudes forward. The insertion recess 3031d is inclined so that the front side thereof is perpendicular to the lower inclined inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3031a, and moves rearward as it goes upward.

The out-port left sensor 3032 detects the game ball B that has passed through the left side of the partition portion 3031b within the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit body 3031. The out-port right sensor 3033 detects the game ball B that has passed through the right side of the partition portion 3031b within the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit body 3031. The left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 are non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches.

The cover 3034 is curved so as to guide the game ball B that has passed the exit left sensor 3032 and the exit right sensor 3033 downward, and has a partition plate 3034a in the center in the left-right direction.

In this out-ball detection unit 3030, the flange portion 3031c of the unit body 3031 is attached to the front surface of the back lower ball ejection unit 3120 of the light guide plate production unit 3100 (see FIG. 130). In addition, when the out ball detection unit 3030 is assembled to the game board 5, the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit body 3031 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100, and the front surface of the flange portion 3031c is inserted into the game panel 1100. (See FIGS. 129 and 130).

When the out-ball detection unit 3030 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper front end of the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit body 3031 protrudes forward beyond the rear end of the out-guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000 (FIG. 130 ). That is, the rear end of the out-guiding part 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical part 3031a of the unit main body 3031. Further, the lower end of the cover 3034 passes through the ejection part 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 (see FIG. 130).

This out ball detection unit 3030 detects that the game ball B guided backward by the out guiding section 1003 after flowing down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the gaming area 5a. It is supplied into the cylindrical portion 3031a, detected by either the left outlet sensor 3032 or the right outlet sensor 3033, and then discharged downward by the cover 3034. The out ball detection unit 3030 discharges the game ball B to the island equipment side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, without bringing it into contact with the board holder 1200.

According to the out ball detection unit 3030 of this embodiment, when the ball is hit into the gaming area 5a, the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the normal winning hole 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, and Since it is possible to detect game balls B that have not been accepted into any of the accessory prize openings 2006 ("out balls"), for example, acceptance of game balls B into a specific prize opening is continuously detected. If an "out ball" is not detected despite the presence of a player, it means that a fraudulent act is being carried out against a specific winning hole, and it is possible to notify that a fraudulent act is being carried out.

In addition, by detecting "out balls", the number can be counted, so the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the normal winning hole 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, and the accessory The ratio of "safe balls" in the pachinko machine 1 can be known from the number of "safe balls" counted by detecting the game balls B received in the winning hole 2006 and the number of "out balls".

Furthermore, in the out ball detection unit 3030, since the out exit left sensor 3032 and the out exit right sensor 3033 provided on the left and right sides are partitioned by a partition portion 3031b, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 can be guided to the out-port left sensor 3032 side, and the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be guided to the out-port right sensor 3033 side. The game ball B that has flown down the left side of the object 2500 can be mainly detected, and the game ball B that has flown down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be mainly detected by the outlet right sensor 3033. Therefore, depending on the number of game balls B detected per hour by the out-door left sensor 3032 and the out-door right sensor 3033, it is determined whether the player tends to "hit the ball left-handed" or "hit the right-hand ball." Based on this determination, it is possible to prompt the player to perform the most suitable input operation for the game situation, thereby allowing the player to enjoy the intended game.

In addition, since the forward protrusion of the partition part 3031b is shortened to make it easier for the game balls B to climb over, when many game balls B enter the out port 1008 per time, the game balls in the partition part 3031b are relatively easy to climb over. The game balls B can be released to the left or right side where the amount of B flowing is small, and the game balls B can be discharged without being delayed at the outlet 1008.

In addition, since the lower end of the cover 3034 is made to protrude below the discharge part 1201 of the board holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005, and the game ball B ("safe ball") received by the accessory prize opening 2006 and ejected onto the board holder 1200 flows backward in the out ball detection unit 3030 and is detected by the out exit left sensor 3032 and the out exit right sensor. 3033 can be prevented from being detected, and only "out balls" can be accurately detected.

In this embodiment, the out ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the back unit 3000, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the out ball detection unit 3030 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has an out recess 1101, the out ball detection unit 3030 can be attached, so it is compatible with the existing game panel 1100 that has an out recess 1101. In addition, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

In addition, on the game board 5, all the game balls B ("all balls") hit into the game area 5a are detected, and all the game balls B ("all balls") ejected from the game area 5a are detected. ), the out ball detection unit 3030 detects only "out balls", so the numbers of "out balls", "safe balls", and "all balls" are compared. This makes it possible to detect the occurrence of ball jamming within the game board 5.

[5-9b. Light guide plate production unit]
Next, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 134. FIG. 132(a) is a perspective view of the light guide plate presentation unit of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 132(b) is a perspective view of the light guide plate presentation unit seen from the back. FIG. 133 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the pattern board in the light guide plate production unit from the front. FIG. 134(a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is emitted, and FIG. 134(b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is emitted.

The light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. The light guide plate production unit 3100 includes a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate 3102 attached to the unit base 3101, and a unit base 3101 above the light guide plate 3102. A first picture board 3103 is mounted on the unit base 3101 on the left side of the light guide plate 3102, and a first picture board 3103 is mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the top surface of the light guide plate 3102. , a second pattern board 3104 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the left side of the light guide plate 3102 are mounted.

In addition, the light guide plate production unit 3100 covers a transparent plate-shaped diffusion lens 3105 provided between the first picture board 3103 and the light guide plate 3102, and the front of the first picture board 3103 and the diffusion lens 3105. It is attached to the upper side of the unit base 3101 as shown in FIG. A left board cover 3107 in the form of a band plate is provided.

In addition, the light guide plate production unit 3100 is attached to the front lower part of the unit base 3101, and includes the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200, and the first starting port 2001 of the center accessory 2500. A back lower ball ejection unit 3120 that receives the accepted game ball B into the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2556 of the strikeout separator 2550 and discharges it downward, and a back lower ball ejection unit 3120 that is attached to the lower right side of the unit base 3101. and a back right ball ejection unit 3130 and a back lower ball ejection unit 3120 that receive the game ball B received in the first losing port 2535 and the first V winning port 2007 in the center accessory 2500 and discharge it downward. It is attached to the cooling fan 3140 for cooling the third distribution drive motor 2555 of the center accessory 2500, and is provided at a part of the center accessory 2500 that is behind the warp entrance 2501, so that it acts illegally. It includes a magnetic sensor (not shown) that detects magnetism.

The light guide plate 3102 includes a first pattern 3102a (see FIG. 134(a)) formed by numerous uneven first reflecting portions that reflect only light from above forward, and a first pattern 3102a (see FIG. 134(a)) that reflects only light from above. A second pattern 3102b (see FIG. 134(b)) is formed of a countless number of uneven second reflecting portions that reflect the light forward. In other words, when the light guide plate production unit 3100 makes the LED of the first picture board 3103 emit light, it can display the first picture 3102a, and when it makes the LED of the second picture board 3104 emit light, it can display the second picture. 3102b can be displayed by emitting light.

The light guide plate 3102 has countless first reflecting parts forming the first pattern 3102a and countless second reflecting parts forming the second pattern 3102b, each of which has fine irregularities. When the LEDs on the first picture board 3103 and the second picture board 3104 are not emitting light, they appear transparent, and the back effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 and the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side appear transparent. The effect images etc. displayed on the screen can be viewed in good condition.

The first pattern 3102a is a pattern imitating the area around one eye of a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 134(a). Further, the second pattern 3102b is a pattern consisting of the characters "CHANCE!", as shown in FIG. 134(b).

The light guide plate 3102 also includes a lower notch 3102c cut upward from the lower side, and a right notch 3102d cut leftward from the right side. The lower notch 3102c is for preventing contact with the croon 2553 of the third sorting device 2550 in the center accessory 2500, and the right notch 3102d is for preventing the center accessory 2500 from coming into contact with the croon 2553 of the third sorting device 2550. This is to prevent it from coming into contact with the twisted second guide passage 2522.

The first picture board 3103 is divided into three parts in the left and right direction. The second picture substrate 3104 is divided into two parts in the vertical direction. Note that the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first picture board 3103 and the second picture board 3104 are full-color LEDs.

The back lower ball ejection unit 3120 includes a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001, and a first starting hole sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting hole 2002. and a second V winning hole sensor 3003 that detects the game ball B accepted in the second V winning hole 2008, and a third losing hole sensor 3004 that detects the gaming ball B accepted in the third losing hole 2556. is provided.

The back lower ball discharge unit 3120 can discharge the game balls B received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third losing opening 2556 onto the board holder 1200. can. An out ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the front of this back lower ball discharge unit 3120.

[5-9c. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 113 and the like. The back production unit 3200 is installed inside the back box 3010 behind the light guide plate production unit 3100. The back presentation unit 3200 has a plurality of hemispherical decorations surrounding the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 when viewed from the front. A decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward is mounted is provided behind these decorative bodies. Therefore, by causing the LEDs on the decorative board to emit light as appropriate, a plurality of decorations can be decorated with light emission, and the player can see the light emission effects of the decorations.

[5-10. Performance on game board]
Next, the main effects on the game board 5 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 135 and 136. FIG. 135 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the second picture is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate performance unit of the back unit. FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the first picture is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate performance unit of the back unit. The game board 5 has a light guide plate effect on the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The unit 3100 and the back effect unit 3200 perform predetermined light emission effects.

Specifically, as a light emission effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The plurality of LEDs shown in the figure are made to emit light to decorate the second pattern 3102b with light emission. As a result, the characters "CHAHCE!" are illuminated in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, which can indicate to the player that an opportunity has arrived, which may be a good thing. It is possible to increase expectations for the game by making the player think that there is no such thing, thereby suppressing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a light emission effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. , the first pattern 3102a is decorated with light. As a result, the eyes of a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are displayed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, thereby surprising the player. Not only can it give a strong impact, but it can also make people think that an advantageous game state such as a "jackpot game" will occur, and it can make them feel more excited about the game.

In addition, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, the light emitting effect by the light guide plate 3102 as described above and the light emitting effect of the decorative body can be combined as appropriate, and the effect displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be combined as appropriate. It can also be combined with images (display effects). As a result, by appropriately combining light emitting effects, display effects, etc., it is possible to present a variety of patterns of effects to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored, and also making it possible to keep the players entertained through various effects. It is possible to keep the player entertained and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls on the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, as shown in the figure. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls gaming operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. and an effect display control section 1512 that controls. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control section 633a that controls the payout of the game balls B, and a launch control section 633b that controls the launch of the game balls B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and commands, RAM that temporarily stores data, etc. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game. MPU1310a, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. A circuit, a setting display 1310g for displaying setting values and error display, and a setting display 1310g for displaying the number of game balls collected through an outlet 1008 provided in a game area 5a sectioned on the game board 5. A base monitor 1310h is provided. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also includes a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1310a includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), etc. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in main control") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This nonvolatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code that is given a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. This ID code once assigned is stored in non-volatile RAM and cannot be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as a "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to an incoherent content, it forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a as being affected by electrical noise. This is a reset circuit. The forced reset by such a built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and invalidated by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and again executes the main control side power-on process described later. I will do it. In this case, since the main control side power-off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error in the main control built-in RAM will always occur as described later, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( clear). Note that even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a will not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633, so the main control board 1310 (main control Only the MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the payout control board 633 remains activated.

The main control MPU 1310a also operates a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as a "main control built-in hardware It has a built-in random number circuit. This hard random number circuit with built-in main control generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value to 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit first uses a clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical value range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed, and the values within the predetermined numerical value range are extracted. When all the values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as a jackpot determination random number. It is designed to be set as .

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from its various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit that is

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, and a second starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. mouth sensor 2402, general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B accepted in the general winning hole 2001, normal winning hole sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B accepted in the normal winning hole 2003, accepted in the big winning hole 2005 The big winning hole sensor 2403 detects the game ball B received in the prize winning hole 2006, the prize winning hole sensor 2513 detects the game ball B received in the prize winning hole 2006, and the game ball B accepted in the first V winning hole 2007. The first V winning a prize opening sensor 2514 detects, the first losing opening sensor 2515 detects the game ball B accepted in the first losing opening 2535, and the second detecting the gaming ball B accepted in the second V winning opening 2008. V winning opening sensor 3003, third losing opening sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B received in the third losing opening 2556, out opening left sensor 3032 and out opening right sensor that detects the gaming ball B accepted in the out opening 1008. A sensor 3033, a magnetic sensor 2010 that detects illegal magnetism in the gaming area 5a, and either one of them detects the game ball B collected through the exit port 1008 provided in the gaming area 5a sectioned on the gaming board 5. Detection signals from the outlet left sensor 3032, the outlet right sensor 3033, etc. are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Further, a detection signal from a setting key 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. Further, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z provided on the payout control board 633 is also input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Note that the RWM clear button 633z is a RAM built in the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310. It functions as a RAM clear switch to completely erase the information stored in each predetermined area of It also functions as a setting switch button for selecting and switching. Therefore, the signals from the RWM clear button 633z that are input to the main control board 1310 include a signal (RAM clear signal) that serves as a RAM clear switch to notify RAM clear, and a signal (RAM clear signal) that serves as an error release switch to notify that the error has been cleared. Although the main control board 1310 has a RAM clear signal and a setting value signal, which are important signals related to itself, While it monitors the input of the value setting change signal, it does not monitor the input of the error release signal, which is controlled by the payout control board 633 that is not related to itself.

In addition, the detection signal from the door frame release switch 4a and the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (that is, via the payout control input circuit 633ab and the payout control input circuit 633ab, which will be described later). When input to the main control board 1310 (as is without going through the output circuit 633ac), the signals are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Note that the respective detection signals from the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor 2402 are input directly to the main control board 1310 without going through another board, and are inputted directly to the main control board 1310 via the main control input circuit. The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, each of the signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the ordinary winning opening sensor 2401, the first receiving opening sensor 2406, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the magnetic sensor 2010, the out opening left sensor 3032, and the out opening right sensor 3033 The detection signal is input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby causing the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 to be activated from the main control solenoid drive circuit. , the respective drive signals to the prize winning opening solenoid 2512, the first distribution solenoid 2532, and the second distribution solenoid 2545 are output via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, or the predetermined From the output terminal of the output port, the status display of the function display unit 1400, normal symbol display, normal reservation display, first special symbol display, first special reservation number display, second special symbol display, second special Drive signals to the pending number display and the round display are directly output without going through another board. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z of the setting change board 1311 by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information regarding the game (gaming information) to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information regarding the game (gaming information) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port. By outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power outage clear signal) can be output to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, and a game ball can be output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal that indicates that the launch of game ball B is permitted, a launch permission signal that indicates that launch of game ball B is permitted is output to the payout control board 633. The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission for launch is set to launch permission logic when the launch is permitted, and launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the launch permission logic when the launch is not permitted. is set to Note that the logic of the firing permission signal is that, as an initial value (default), the firing permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is started after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (after the power is restored). Up to this point, the device is constructed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is an inversion of the firing permission logic.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the Non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first loss opening sensor 2515, the second V winning opening sensor 3003, the third losing opening sensor 3004, the left exit sensor 3032, and the right exit exit sensor 3033. On the other hand, a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch is used for the general winning a prize opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, and the normal winning hole 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 3002, the second starting hole sensor 2402, and the normal winning hole Detection of the game ball B by the winning hole sensor 2401 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, and the normal winning port sensor 2401.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous for the player (such as a "jackpot" game) occurs, the big winning hole 2005 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently, so the game ball is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403. Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the big prize opening sensor 2403. Furthermore, since a large amount of the game balls B fired into the game area 5a are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a sectioned on the game board 5, the game ball B is detected by the out port left sensor 3032. , and detection of the game ball B by the out-port right sensor 3033 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning hole 2001 where the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001. Incidentally, regardless of whether the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 frequently or not, a proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long life may be used.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of game performance and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. Note that, although the detailed explanation will be given later, when the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, it formats these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "main control side (described as "capacitor"). This main control side capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM during power cut-off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is inputted to the main control MPU 1310a by a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated when the power is turned on. When this happens, it is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and when these voltages become lower than the power failure warning voltage, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, a firing solenoid 542 that performs firing control, and a ball feeding solenoid 145 that performs ball feeding control. It includes a control section 633b, an error LED indicator that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, and an RWM clear button 633z that has a press operation section that serves multiple functions. The RWM clear button 633z is a RAM built in the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and a RAM (main control built-in It functions as a RAM clear switch to completely erase the information stored in each predetermined area of the RAM, and as an error release switch to release the error displayed on the error LED indicator. It also functions as a setting switch button for selecting and switching values.

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch is the RAM clear determination period after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-on processing described later). is limited to the period from the start of the process until the determination in step S14 in the same process is made.

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button is from the elapse of the RAM clear determination period to the setting switching effective period (the main control MPU 1310a determines the period from when the RAM clear determination period has elapsed to when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later). In the setting change process of step S37 in the process, the setting key inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is used to change the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the enter key. to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) until it is determined that the setting key cylinder has been rotated 60 degrees clockwise). There is.

The period in which the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error release switch is a valid period from the time when the RAM clear determination period and the setting switching validity period have elapsed. In addition, during the RAM clear determination period and the setting switching validity period, even if a signal indicating that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is input to the payout control unit 633a (payout control MPU described later), the invalidation will not be performed. has been done.

Note that, as described above, the period in which the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button is limited to the setting switching valid period after the RAM clear determination period has elapsed. However, during this setting switching valid period, the main control MPU 1310a does not activate the setting key switch provided on the setting change board 1311 in the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later, after the RAM clear determination period has elapsed. Since the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of 1311a continues to monitor the rotational position of the setting key cylinder, interrupt permission settings are required to allow the start of the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. (Step S52 in the power-on process on the main control side) cannot be performed, and the fraudulent activity detection process in step S112 in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, cannot be performed. In other words, the setting switching validity period is a period during which fraudulent activity cannot be detected.

During this setting switching valid period, that is, the period in which fraudulent activity cannot be detected, there is a possibility that a fraudulent person may make some unauthorized changes to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to access (operate) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 can first be opened, as described above. In order to secure space, the main body frame 4 has to be opened wide (approximately 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, during the valid setting switching period, that is, the period during which fraudulent activity cannot be detected, the main body frame 4 is opened wide (approximately 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2, so the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 If any attempt is made to make any unauthorized alterations to the game hall, the fraudulent activity will become extremely conspicuous in the gaming hall, so such countermeasures against fraudulent activity can be taken. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing fraudulent acts.

[6-2a. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls regarding payouts on the payout control board 633 is a microcomputer that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout control MPU as a processor. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input.

The payout control MPU includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in payout control") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, In addition to inputting a signal to the effect that the push operation part has been operated through the dispensing control I/O port, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and a signal indicating that the push operation part of Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input. Note that a signal indicating that the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310.

Detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Further, detection signals from the door frame release switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame release switch that detects the release of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the dispensing control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, a power outage of the main control board 1310, The power failure notice signal from the monitoring circuit 1310e is input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , sends commands to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner to output commands to the error LED display or to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 via the payout control I/O port. Or, the number of game balls B actually put out is outputted to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the games of the players by ascertaining the number of game balls B put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

The error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is reported that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is reported that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, the connection between the main control board 1310 and When the number "1" is displayed, it will notify you that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it is notified that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "playing for balls" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, it notifies that the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, making it difficult for the payout blade 589 to rotate; When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it will notify you that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, that the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it notifies that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the ball is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and sent to the payout control MPU. is input. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls B lent out, and outputs a display signal of the remaining balance to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal The information is input and displayed on the ball rental display section of the operation unit 220.

Various voltages are supplied to the payout control board 633 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "payout control side (described as "capacitor"). With this payout control side capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The various information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM with built-in payout control is released when the power is turned on and a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is input to the payout control MPU. It is completely erased (cleared) from the control built-in RAM. A signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The firing control unit 633b performs firing control using the firing solenoid 542 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at fixed time intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit; a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse; The ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the gaming area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , generates a ball feeding reference pulse which is the firing reference pulse multiplied by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the handle unit 180, there is a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, and a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the launching of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input as a CR connection signal to the firing control input circuit, and then to the firing timing control circuit. A firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys permission to fire the game ball B is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity with which the game ball B is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 182, is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

The firing timing control circuit connects the CR unit to the CR unit connection terminal board based on the CR connection signal when firing condition 1 is satisfied that the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192. If the firing condition 2 that the game ball B is electrically connected is satisfied, and the firing condition 3 that the game ball B is allowed to fire based on the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B For example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

This firing solenoid drive circuit generates a driving current to launch the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a with a launch intensity commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 182, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189. In response to the input, the signal is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, thereby controlling the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. One ball B is received into the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

In this embodiment, the firing control board 633 is provided with a firing control unit 633b that performs firing control using the firing solenoid 542 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 145. may be configured. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. The signal may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that is not connected to the power supply board 630.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 137, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 that performs production control based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a production display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control section 1511. and an effect display control section 1512 that performs drawing control.

[6-3a. Peripheral control section]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. on one semiconductor chip, although detailed illustration is omitted. An integrated peripheral control IC, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and commands, a sound source IC that performs high-quality performances, and sound information such as music, voices, and sound effects that are referenced by this sound source IC. It is equipped with a stored sound ROM.

The peripheral control IC has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip, and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls the peripherals based on these various commands. The CPU of the control IC sends game board side light emission data to the lamp drive board serial I/O for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. For transmitting a drive signal from the port to each decorative board of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, or to output a drive signal to the drive motor that operates the various presentation units provided on the game board 5. The drive data on the game board side is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720, or to the operation ring drive motor provided on the door frame 3. 342, and door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to the operation button lift drive motor 367, etc., and lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting to color LEDs, etc. provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. A screen for transmitting door-side light emission data for outputting signals and door-side driving light emission data consisting of the data from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, and for displaying it on the effect display device 1600. In addition to sending control data (display commands) indicating the display control unit from the serial I/O port for the display control unit to the production display control unit 1512, it also sends control signals (sound commands) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM. Output to the sound source IC.

A detection signal from the third distribution detection sensor 2552 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 is input to the peripheral control IC via the panel drive board 1720. Further, detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the production operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) from the production display control unit 1512 that indicates that the production display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the production display control unit The operation of 1512 is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and extracts sound information from the sound ROM, and extracts sound information from the vibration speaker 354 provided in the door frame 3, main body frame 4, etc., the top center speaker 462, Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from the top side speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, etc. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume adjustment switch that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, the top central speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 are provided with an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, etc.). signal, 2.1ch surround signal, 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is out of control.

The display commands output from the CPU of this peripheral control IC to the effect display control section 1512 are executed by a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting and blinking commands, game board side lighting and blinking commands, movable body drive commands, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are multiple serial input/outputs different from display commands. The bit rate is set to 250 kbps in this embodiment.

[6-3b. Production display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in this image ROM is transferred and copied. We are prepared.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I/O port, serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. is under control. Note that, if the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify that fact. Further, the display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

In addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the display control ROM stores schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and the control data (display commands). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data etc. are stored. The schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data defines in advance the order in which various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM, including screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 as the schedule data progresses.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one starting from the first screen data, and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and generates the drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to inform the effect. Note that the VDP uses a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that one line's worth of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and the one line's worth of drawing data held in this line buffer is transferred to the effect display device 1600. This is a method to output to.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, a "sprite" will be explained. A "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can also be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the positions where they are arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as "sprite overlapping order").

Note that the sprite is constructed by pasting together a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be expressed using one sprite character, and relatively large sprites such as people can be expressed using a total of six sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 horizontally x 3 vertically. can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using an even larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially performs main scanning to set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front, and repeats main scanning in a direction intersecting that one direction. It is driven by the sub-scanning to be performed. When the effect display device 1600 receives one line of drawing data output from the effect display control unit 1512, the effect display device 1600 sequentially draws one line from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as a main scan. output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, the drawing data for the next line is As main scanning, each of the pixels for one line is outputted sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[6-4. Mounting of SMD type electronic components]
Here, countermeasures against discontinued electronic components will be explained. First, due to the circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, for boards that are treated as main boards such as the power supply board, main control board, and payout control board, lead-type electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface, which is the front side, and the back side is You need to solder on the solder side. However, as mentioned above, lead-type electronic components are important for manufacturers of gaming machines such as pachinko machines, slots, and integrated gaming machines, but other general electronics manufacturers are unable to make them smaller. A surface mount type (so-called SMD type) is used. As a result, the number of lead-type electronic components produced may decrease, leading to the discontinuation of production. Therefore, it is possible to mount a lead-type electronic component in which an SMD-type electronic component can be configured as a lead-type electronic component on the mounting surface of a board that is treated as a main board.

However, when configured as a lead-type electronic component, the outer shape (shape) of the lead-type electronic component becomes larger than that of the lead-type electronic component, and a portion or plurality of the lead-type electronic components have protrusions. This may result in a distorted outer shape (shape). When a lead-type electronic component with such an external shape (shape) is mounted on the mounting surface of a board that is treated as a main board, it may be difficult to place it on the board due to the positional relationship with other electronic components. Therefore, it may be difficult to construct an SMD type electronic component as the above-mentioned lead type electronic component. Therefore, in addition to such lead-type electronic components, among the lead-type electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs, there are limited cases where SMD-type electronic components are used as the main board. Mounting on the mounting surface may be permitted.

Here, an SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 141. Figure 138 is an enlarged view of a part of the area where SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board (a), and a view of this enlarged view from the right side of the main control board (b) FIG. 139 is a schematic diagram (a) of the surface (mounting surface) of a board in which SMD-type electronic components, which replace lead-type electronic components, are concentrated in a predetermined area. 140 is a schematic diagram (b) showing the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of a miniaturized board by consolidating various types of electronic components, and FIG. 140 is an enlarged view of FIG. 138 (a) as a main control board. FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the main control board box of the main control unit. Note that in FIGS. 138 and 140, various electronic components other than those necessary for explanation are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings.

The SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is an alternative having the same function as a lead type Schmitt trigger inverter (DIP (Dual Inline Package) type), and this lead type Schmitt trigger inverter is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. The SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is one of the main circuits constituting the main control input circuit into which detection signals from the various sensors described above are input, and the main control board 1310 is If it is missing from the board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 always determines that the ball has not entered the game ball among the various sensors that notify the player that the game ball has entered the ball. Any information that indicates fraudulent activity, such as the following, is always determined to be fraudulent activity. Note that the main control board 1310 has a plurality of lead-type electronic components mounted thereon, such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, LEDs, and the like.

In this embodiment, green is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the main control board 1310 are painted solidly with green resist except for various land patterns. has been done.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. A lead-type high-frequency bypass capacitor MC30 (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor MC30") that can remove the noise voltage generated by the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 itself is now mounted near the inverter MIC30. ing. Note that in FIG. 138(a), the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 and capacitor MC30 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawing.

In the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, six Schmitt trigger inverter circuits are integrated and housed in one SMD package. In this embodiment, the SMD package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is an SOP (Small) having 14 pins.
(Hereinafter, the SMD package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 may be referred to as "SOP14"). In the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, seven leads from two opposing sides of the SMD package body are bent toward the outside with a distance between the leads (so-called "lead pitch", in this embodiment, 1.27 mm). The surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to each lead is mounted on a rectangular land pattern formed only on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 corresponding to each lead. (Mounting surface) A rectangular land pattern formed only on the mounting surface 1310x is soldered. The width of each lead is 0.43 mm, and the width of the rectangular land pattern is 0.76 mm, which is larger than the width of each lead (the length of the rectangular land pattern is 1.27 mm). It is. In this embodiment, the size of the SMD package body is 5.3 mm in width, 10.8 mm in length, and 1.5 mm in height. Including the length of the protruding leads, the width of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is 7.8 mm.

Although the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is soldered to the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, in order to mount lead-type electronic components on the main control board 1310, the back surface of the main control board 1310 is used as the soldering surface. It will be described as "the back side (solder side) of the main control board 1310" (the same applies hereinafter).

The capacitor MC30 has two leads protruding from a main body having a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and protruding outward in parallel straight lines with a distance between the leads (so-called "lead pitch", in this embodiment, 5 mm). are formed on both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and rear surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310, passing through the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x and back surface (solder surface) 1310y corresponding to the two leads. Among the ring-shaped land patterns (also referred to as through holes, hereinafter the same), a ring-shaped land pattern formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y. After the two leads are inserted toward the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the two leads and the main control board protrude from the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. A ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of 1310 is soldered. The diameter of the two leads is 0.5 mm, and the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is 0.7 mm, which is larger than the diameter of the two leads (the outer diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is 1.5 mm). 3mm).

Note that the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is grounded (GND) except for areas where wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, wiring patterns for supplying power, and various land patterns are formed. , is formed as a so-called solid ground, and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is also formed with other areas other than the areas where wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, wiring patterns for supplying power, and various land patterns are formed. It is formed as a so-called solid earth, where the area is grounded (GND). The solid ground formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are defined as A plurality of through holes (holes (copper plated holes) that pass through both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310 formed on the back surface (solder surface)) By being connected, they become the same ground (GND). The diameter of the through hole is 0.3 mm, which is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern. Note that the solid ground formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are connected to the same ground (GND) in the through hole. In addition to those used for this purpose, there are also multiple types used for routing various wiring patterns on both sides (the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (soldering surface)) of the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 138(a), on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, an area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including specification of direction) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed is printed in white as a silk screen. It is printed as a solid line (or a solid black line), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as a silkscreen in the lower left corner of the area MSLKMIC30. Specifically, in the area MSLKMIC30, the lead serving as the No. 1 terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is connected to the lower left side and the No. 7 terminal (ground) so that the longitudinal direction of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is the left-right direction in FIG. (GND) terminal) on the lower right side, the lead for terminal 8 on the upper right side, and the lead for terminal 14 (power supply terminal) on the upper left side. .

The rectangular land patterns corresponding to the leads, which are the 1st to 6th terminals and the 8th to 13th terminals of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, are electrically connected to each wiring pattern that transmits the corresponding control signals. The rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that becomes the No. 7 terminal (ground (GND) terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is electrically connected to the solid ground formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. A rectangular land pattern corresponding to a lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is electrically connected to a wiring pattern for supplying power.

The manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols, e.g., "ABC") and product number (the number published in the catalog, e.g., "74XXYYZZ") are engraved on the surface of the package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. , or printed in a predetermined color (depending on the manufacturer). However, since the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is an SMD package called SOP14 and is small, the surface area of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is small.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, the main control board 1310 is an important control board that controls the progress of the game, so the main control board 1310 can be prevented from being illegally modified to obtain illegal game balls. The main control board box 1320 is sealed and housed in a main control board box 1320 consisting of a transparent cover body with a plurality of ventilation holes for heat dissipation and a transparent base body. This heat radiation vent can discharge the air inside the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

Then, when checking the product numbers (numbers published in the catalog) of various electronic components of the main control board 1310, the surface of the main control board 1310 ( The manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) and product number (number published in the catalog) that are engraved or printed on the surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 package body when the mounting surface (mounting surface) side is viewed through the transparent cover body. is small and difficult to see.

Therefore, in this embodiment, an information area is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 near the area MSLKMIC30 in FIG. The part number of MIC30 (number published in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is printed on the package of Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 so that it is easily visible compared to the size of the part number (number published in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body. It is printed in white (or black). Therefore, the product number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

In addition, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black) together with the product number (the number published in the catalog). In this case, the silk printing is white (or black) so that it is easy to see compared to the size of the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Preferably, it is printed in Thereby, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a capacitor MC30 is arranged so as to be placed near a rectangular land pattern corresponding to a lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. An area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is placed (there is no direction specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is printed as a silk screen with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30. At the upper right corner, a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen. Specifically, the area MSLKMC30 connects one lead to the upper side that is electrically connected to the wiring pattern that supplies power so that the two leads of the capacitor MC30 are in the vertical direction in FIG. 138(a). This is an instruction to insert the ring-shaped land pattern and the other lead into the lower ring-shaped land pattern that is paired with the upper ring-shaped land pattern.

The wiring pattern to which the upper ring-shaped land pattern is electrically connected is also electrically connected to the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Further, the lower ring-shaped land pattern is electrically connected to a solid ground formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

Here, the advantages of mounting an SMD type electronic component on the surface (mounting surface) of a board treated as a main board will be briefly explained. As mentioned above, SMD type electronic components can be made smaller than lead type electronic components, so the electronic component mounting density when SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board is can be extremely suppressed compared to the electronic component mounting density when lead-type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board. Therefore, when mounting an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the lead type electronic component on the surface (mounting surface) area of the board on which the lead type electronic component is mounted, Since SMD type electronic components are small, it is possible to increase the peripheral area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board on which the SMD type electronic components are mounted, and it is also possible to increase the size of the SMD type electronic components from lead type electronic components to SMD type electronic components. The area between the substituted components can also be increased (that is, the electronic component can be mounted in a manner in which there are many gaps on the surface (mounting surface) of the board between the substituted components). This allows SMD type electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board to be viewed from multiple directions, thereby preventing unauthorized tampering of the SMD type electronic components. It is possible to check the mounting state (soldering state) with electronic components, the state of various wiring patterns and various land patterns on SMD type electronic components. Therefore, use of SMD type electronic components can contribute to ease of discovering unauthorized alteration.

In addition, it is possible to increase the peripheral area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board on which SMD-type electronic components are mounted, and also to increase the area between components where lead-type electronic components are replaced with SMD-type electronic components. Therefore, for these areas (the surface of the board (mounting surface)), the part number (number published in the catalog) of the SMD type electronic component is engraved or stamped on the surface of the package body of the SMD type electronic component. It can be printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it is easy to see compared to the size of the printed product number (number published in the catalog), and It is also possible to print the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) in white (or black) as well as silk screen printing. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the ease of recognition of SMD type electronic components.

Note that when an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the board, the distance between the back surface of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the board is extremely short (for example, Schmitt trigger In the inverter MIC30, the distance between the back surface of the main body and the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is 0.1 mm to 0.2 mm. There is a problem in that even if some kind of illegal circuit is formed in the gap with the mounting surface), it is difficult to discover such an illegal circuit.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the following configuration is adopted as a method for preventing any kind of illegal circuit from being formed in the gap between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the board.

A configuration was adopted in which no wiring patterns for transmitting control signals were placed in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 138(a), the area on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30) We adopted a configuration in which no wiring patterns for transmitting control signals are placed at all in the area where the control signal passes through.

We adopted a configuration in which no wiring pattern for electrical connection to ground (GND) or wiring pattern for supplying power is placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component body. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 138(a), the area on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30) A configuration was adopted in which no wiring pattern for electrically connecting to the ground (GND) and no wiring pattern for supplying power was placed in the area (where the power passes through).

We adopted a configuration in which no through holes are placed in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 138(a), through holes MTH are arranged at the upper right and upper left of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, and the front surface of the main control board 1310 corresponds to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. (In other words, the area passing through the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30) has a configuration in which no through holes MTH are disposed at all. As described above, this through hole MTH is electrically connected by a hole (copper-plated hole) penetrating both sides (the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (soldering surface)) of the main control board 1310. Therefore, it is possible to use the same ground (GND). In addition to this through hole MTH, a plurality of through holes MTH' (not shown) are also provided on the main control board 1310 in order to route various wiring patterns to both sides (the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (soldering surface)) of the main control board 1310. Although such a through hole MTH' exists, it also passes through a region of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, it passes through the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30). A configuration was adopted in which no through-hole MTH' was placed in the area where the

A wiring pattern that electrically connects to one of the leads of the SMD type electronic component is formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component. A configuration has been adopted that prevents the electronic components from being drawn out. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 138(a), various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are connected to an area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. (In other words, it is not placed at all in the area passing through the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30), but a configuration is adopted in which it is placed from above or below the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

In order to shorten the wiring pattern that electrically connects one lead to the other among the leads of an SMD type electronic component, it is necessary to ) A configuration was adopted in which no wiring patterns for transmitting control signals were placed at all. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 138(a), various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are connected to an area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. (In other words, it is not placed at all in the area passing through the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30), but is placed from above or below the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

By soldering each lead of the SMD type electronic component to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern is electrically connected to the land pattern. A configuration was adopted in which the control signal cannot be extracted. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 138(a), each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is soldered to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. We adopted a configuration in which control signals cannot be extracted without going through each wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the controller. In other words, a configuration is adopted in which the control signal cannot be taken out from a portion different from each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

By adopting such a configuration, it is impossible to illegally create new circuits such as short circuits or disconnection circuits in the gap between the back of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the board. It can be difficult. In addition, since various wiring patterns to SMD type electronic components can be visually observed, fraudsters can be deterred from attempting to install fraudulent circuits on SMD type electronic components. Can be done. Therefore, unauthorized acts against SMD type electronic components can be prevented.

In addition, by not placing any wiring patterns for transmitting control signals in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component, it is possible to Control signals to SMD type electronic components are provided to prevent other unauthorized ICs (SMD type electronic components) from being mounted between the back surface of the body of the type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the corresponding board. It is possible to make it impossible to use a combination of the control signal and an unauthorized control signal to another IC in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component.

In addition, by not placing any wiring patterns for transmitting control signals in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, it is possible to prevent other unauthorized ICs (SMD type electronic components). As for the type of electronic component, it is easy to arrange it between the back side of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back side of the main body of this SMD type electronic component, so that control signals can be easily routed. You can make it impossible to select things.

In addition, a wiring pattern electrically connected to one of the leads of the SMD type electronic component is formed in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component body. By not leading out the SMD type electronic component, it is possible to prevent unauthorized use of the control signal that transmits the wiring pattern led out to the outside.

In addition, by soldering each lead of an SMD type electronic component to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, each wiring pattern electrically connected to the land pattern can be connected. By not being able to extract control signals from different parts than the leads of SMD type electronic components, it is possible to prevent unauthorized use of control signals that transmit wiring patterns. can do.

In addition, in order to shorten the wiring pattern that electrically connects one lead to the other among the leads of the SMD type electronic component, the surface of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component By not placing any wiring patterns that transmit control signals in the area (mounting surface), each wiring pattern that is electrically connected to each lead of the SMD type electronic component can be easily connected from above or below the SMD type electronic component. By arranging the lead, it is possible to prevent an illegal circuit from being formed around the lead. Among the leads of SMD type electronic components, unused leads (also referred to as "empty terminals") may be electrically connected to a wiring pattern that electrically connects to the ground (GND), or Or, when electrically connecting to a wiring pattern that supplies power, placing SMD type electronic components from above or below prevents the formation of illegal circuits around empty terminals. Can be done.

In addition, by not arranging any through holes in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component, it is possible to To prevent other unauthorized ICs (SMD type electronic components) from being mounted between the back surface and the corresponding board surface (mounting surface), control signals cannot be taken out through the through-holes. It is possible to prevent other ICs from being fixed (soldered) to the through-holes, and the through-holes can be used to pass control signals from the back side (soldering side) to the front side (mounting side) of the board. It can be made so that it cannot be used for removal.

In addition, by not placing any wiring pattern for electrical connection to the ground (GND) or wiring pattern for supplying power on the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, , another unauthorized IC (SMD type electronic component) is mounted between the back of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back of the SMD type electronic component. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the IC from becoming a driving source for other illegal ICs.

Next, a configuration in which SMD type electronic components are collectively mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a board treated as a main board will be described. As described above, SMD type electronic components can be miniaturized, and by mounting them in a concentrated manner, the size of the board itself can also be miniaturized. Here, the main control board 1310 will be explained as the main board, and when the main control board 1310 is visually inspected while being housed in the main control board box 1320, the present invention takes measures to make the product number visible by using an SMD package. Another configuration (hereinafter referred to as "configuration for product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the second and third embodiments") will be described. Note that in FIGS. 139(a) and (b), the embodiment shown in FIGS. 138(a) and (b) (hereinafter referred to as "configuration of product number visibility measures using an SMD package according to the first embodiment") Components that perform the same functions as those shown in FIG.

[Comparison between the configuration of product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the second embodiment]

In the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the lead is attached to the surface (mounting surface) 1310x area of the main control board 1310 on which the Schmitt trigger inverter, which is a lead type electronic component, is mounted. The area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including direction designation) for placing the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the SMD type electronic component, is silk-printed with a solid white line (or black (solid line), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen print in the lower left corner of the area MSLKMIC30.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure for visibility of the product number, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, there is information on the right side near the area MSLKMIC30. An area is provided in which the part number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (MSLKMIC30p) is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number published in the catalog). It is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen to make it easier to see.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. The surface of the main control board 1310' (mounting surface ) 1310x'. The external dimensions (vertical dimension, horizontal dimension, and thickness dimension) of this main control board 1310' are the same as the external dimensions of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the SMD package as a measure for product number visibility according to the first embodiment. .

The main control board 1310' has a center line that passes through the midpoints of its upper side and its lower side, and a surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' on the left side of this center line has various electronic components. The area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310' on the right side of the center line includes a part number and a product number (as listed in the catalog). It is formed as a parts list area 1310xb', which is an information area written like a parts list of electronic parts, which is configured by arranging the numbers).

Specifically, the component placement area 1310xa' includes a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type main control MPU 1310a included in the lead type, various lead type connectors MCN1 to MCN4 (other connectors not shown), and a resistor MR0. ~MR4 (other multiple resistors not shown), capacitors MC0 to MC5, MC30 (other multiple capacitors not shown), diode D0 (other multiple diodes not shown), Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (other various types not shown) IC) is implemented. In the component placement area 1310xa', an area (not shown) indicating the placement position (or orientation may also be included) of these various electronic components and various connectors is silk-printed with solid white lines (or solid black lines). At the same time, corresponding part numbers are printed in white (or black) as silk printing near these various electronic components and various connectors. In addition, various types of connectors use lead-type connectors, but this is because when wiring is connected to the connector, the stress caused by this wiring (this stress is caused by the routing of the wiring until it is connected to the connector). This is to prevent the connector from peeling off from the board due to the reaction force of the wiring acting on the connector.

In the parts list area 1310xb', a parts list of electronic components is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen, and is configured by aligning part numbers and product numbers (numbers published in the catalog). The size of the part number and product number is larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the component placement area 1310xa'. printed in white (or black). A delimiter ":" is placed between the part number and the product number (number published in the catalog), so that the part number and product number (number published in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . This delimiter allows the part number and the product number (number published in the catalog) to be distinguished and identified.

In addition, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black) along with the product number (number published in the catalog). Further, in addition to describing information on such parts, precautions regarding the gaming machine may also be described. For example, a statement such as "The main control board is an important board for security purposes and should be handled with sufficient care" may be made for the purpose of calling attention to it.

In this way, the area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310' can be divided into the component placement area 1310xa' and the parts list area 1310xb'. It is possible to easily recognize various electronic components and various connectors mounted on the computer.

Note that instead of silk printing printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310', a foil-cutting area and a foil-cutting area in the structure of the product number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment described later are used. A character may be adopted, or a resist cutout area using two coats of resist and a white resist cutout character using two coats of resist in the structure of the product number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment may be adopted. may be adopted.

[Comparison between the configuration of product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the third embodiment]

In the structure of the SMD package as a measure for visibility of the part number according to the first embodiment, the lead is attached to the surface (mounting surface) 1310x area of the main control board 1310 on which the Schmitt trigger inverter, which is a lead-type electronic component, is mounted. An area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including direction designation) for placing the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the SMD type electronic component, is silk-printed with a solid white line (or black (solid line), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen print in the lower left corner of the area MSLKMIC30.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure for visibility of the product number, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, there is information on the right side near the area MSLKMIC30. An area is provided in which the part number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (MSLKMIC30p) is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number published in the catalog). It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it is easier to see than the original.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. The surface of the main control board 1310' (mounting surface ) 1310x'. By consolidating SMD type electronic components and mounting them on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310', the size of the main control board 1310' can be reduced. The external dimensions (vertical dimension, horizontal dimension, and thickness dimension) of this main control board 1310' are among the external dimensions of the main control board 1310 in the structure of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Only the dimensions are half the length (vertical and thickness dimensions are the same).

Various electronic components and various connectors are arranged on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'. The arrangement of these various electronic components and various connectors are those arranged in the component arrangement area 1310xa' formed on the main control board 1310' in the structure of the SMD package according to the second embodiment described above to improve visibility of the product number. (In other words, the areas (not shown) indicating the positions (which may include specifying the orientation) of these various electronic components and various connectors are arranged in the same manner as in white (or white) as silk printing. ), and the corresponding part numbers near these various electronic components and various connectors are also printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the same arrangement. In addition, various types of connectors use lead-type connectors, but this is because when wiring is connected to the connector, the stress caused by this wiring (this stress is caused by the routing of the wiring until it is connected to the connector). This is to prevent the connector from peeling off from the board due to the reaction force of the wiring acting on the connector.

On the back side (solder side) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', there is a parts list, which is an information area formed on the main control board 1310' in the structure of the SMD package according to the second embodiment described above to improve visibility of product numbers. A parts list of electronic components, which is configured by aligning part numbers printed in white (or black) as silk printing in area 1310xb' and product numbers (numbers published in catalogs), is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in area 1310xb'. , black). The size of the part number and product number (number published in the catalog) is compared to the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as a silk screen on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310'. It is printed large (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) in white (or black) as silk printing. A delimiter ":" is placed between the part number and the product number (number published in the catalog), so that the part number and product number (number published in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . This delimiter allows the part number and the product number (number published in the catalog) to be distinguished and identified. In addition, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black) along with the product number (number published in the catalog). Further, in addition to describing information on such parts, precautions regarding the gaming machine may also be described. For example, a statement such as "The main control board is an important board for security purposes and should be handled with sufficient care" may be made for the purpose of calling attention to it.

In addition, on the back side (solder side) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', each lead of the above-mentioned ZIP type main control MPU 1310a (indicated as part number "MIC1" in the figure) and lead type electronic components are installed. The leads of certain capacitors MC0 to MC5, MC30 and resistors MR0 to MR4 protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' and are soldered to the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310'. The main control board 1310' has a part number and part number (number published in the catalog) so as not to overlap (avoid) this part. The parts list area 1310xb' formed in the part list area 1310xb' is printed in white (or black) as silk printing.

In this way, the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' is used as an area for arranging components, and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' is used as a part number and part number (listed in the catalog). The front surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' and the back surface of the main control board 1310' can be Since the role of the (solder surface) 1310y' can be differentiated, it is possible to easily recognize various electronic components and various connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'.

In addition, by consolidating SMD type electronic components and mounting them on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310', the size of the main control board 1310' can be reduced. The number of ring-shaped land patterns required when mounting electronic components can be determined and reduced. As a result, various leads of lead-type electronic components protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', and the number of soldered parts is also reduced. The solder surface) 1310y' can be formed as a flat surface.

In addition, the various leads of lead-type electronic components that protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' are soldered, so if light from a fluorescent lamp or the like shines on them, they will reflect and cause a dazzling sensation. As mentioned above, various leads of lead-type electronic components protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', making it difficult to see the soldered parts. By reducing the number of soldered parts, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' can be formed as a flat surface. This eliminates the problem of making it difficult to visually recognize the parts list of electronic parts, which is formed by aligning the silk-printed part numbers and the part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog).

Note that instead of silk printing printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x' and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', a part number visibility measure using an SMD package according to the fifth embodiment described later is used. The foil-cut area and foil-cut letters in the structure may be adopted, or the resist-cut area and the two-coat resist in the structure of the product number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment may be adopted. White resist-cut characters using resist may also be used.

By the way, general electronics manufacturers use multilayer boards on which various wiring patterns can be formed on each layer. However, the main control boards and payout control boards used in gaming machines are two-layer boards ("double-sided boards") that have various wiring patterns formed on the front (mounting side) and back (solder side) of the board to increase security. ), and it is necessary to mount various electronic components only on the surface (mounting surface) of the board, regardless of whether they are lead type electronic components or SMD type electronic components. For example, in order to increase security, it is necessary to mount the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a included in the lead type on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and it is also necessary to mount lead type electronic components on the surface (mounting surface). For some devices, lead-type electronic components are mounted without using SMD-type electronic components.

If SMD type electronic components and lead type electronic components are mounted together on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or dispensing control board, the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or dispensing control board Compared to the case where only lead-type electronic components are mounted on the board, the number of leads of the lead-type electronic components protruding from the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board or the payout control board is reduced. As a result, it is possible to increase the area used as an area for forming various wiring patterns on the back side (solder side) of the main control board and payout control board, and also acquire the area used as an area used for other functions. Can be done.

Therefore, for example, various SMD type ICs and various SMD type connectors may be installed on the back side (solder side) of the main control board, although they will not be mounted on the main control board produced as a mass-produced machine, in the area where the area mentioned above has increased. A mounting land pattern etc. formation area 1310ya' (see FIG. 139(b)) can be provided in which various land patterns for mounting and pad patterns for extracting signals can be formed. In the main control board produced as a mass-produced machine, SMD type electronic components are not mounted on the various land patterns and pad patterns in the mounting land pattern etc. forming area 1310ya', so the various lands in the mounting land pattern etc forming area 1310ya' The pattern and pad pattern become unmounted patterns, and the mounting land pattern etc. formation area 1310ya' becomes an empty area.

When such an unmounted pattern is formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, the area where the unmounted pattern is formed may cause damage to various electronic components and various connectors on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board. However, if such an unmounted pattern is formed on the back side (solder side) of the main control board, the surface (solder side) of the main control board The entire area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board can be effectively used without being subject to restrictions on the arrangement of various electronic components and various connectors and the routing of various wiring patterns on the surface (mounting surface).

In addition, since such unmounted patterns are formed on the back side (solder side) of the main control board, they cannot be seen from the front side (mounting side) of the main control board, making it possible to hide the existence of the unmounted patterns. , which is preferable in terms of security.

It should be noted that a part of such unmounted patterns may be formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board if necessary. For example, it may be easier to connect the connector (SMD type connector) to the wiring if it is placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board.

Moreover, a part of such unmounted patterns may be formed as a lead-type electronic component or a lead-type connector according to convenience. For example, there may be cases where soldering strength is required, such as a connector that is connected and disconnected many times.

Next, when visually inspecting the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box 1320, the manufacturer name (abbreviation and symbol) is Other configurations of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as "fourth to sixth embodiments") that take measures against the visibility of product numbers using SMD packages, where product numbers (including numbers published in catalogs) are small and difficult to see. The following describes the configuration of measures to improve visibility of part numbers using SMD packages. In addition, in FIGS. 140(a) to (c), the embodiment shown in FIGS. 138(a) and (b) (hereinafter referred to as "configuration of product number visibility measures using an SMD package according to the first embodiment") Components that perform the same functions as those shown in Figure 1) are designated with the same reference numerals.

[Comparison between the configuration of product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure for the visibility of the part number, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has the position (orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged. ) is silk-printed as a white solid line (or black solid line), and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-printed near this area MSLKMIC30 and on the lower left. It is printed in white (or black).

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure for visibility of the product number, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, there is information on the right side near the area MSLKMIC30. An area is provided in which the part number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (MSLKMIC30p) is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number published in the catalog). It is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen to make it easier to see.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure for the visibility of the part number, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has the No. 14 terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. ), the area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is to be placed (there is no direction specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is printed as a silk screen so that the capacitor MC30 is placed near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead. It is printed with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen in the upper right corner near this area MSLKMC30. .

On the other hand, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment as a measure for visibility of the product number, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 further includes a main control board as shown in FIG. At a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310, an area MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including direction specification) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed is silk-printed with a white chain line. (or a black chain line), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen print on the upper left in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30'. This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the part number and print it by placing it near the corresponding electronic component. On the other hand, since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the part number can be printed in a larger size.

Furthermore, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. In place of the part number MSLKMIC30p, this part number MSLKMIC30p provides an information area on the back side (solder side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 near and below the area MSLKMIC30', and in this information area, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is installed. It is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen so that it is easy to see compared to the size of the product number stamped or printed on the surface of the package body (the number published in the catalog). Therefore, the product number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

The product number MSLKMIC30p may be the same size as the product number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the structure of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for visibility of the product number, or may be larger. You can. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the part number MSLKMIC30p and place it near the corresponding electronic components when printing. On the other hand, since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the product number MSLKMIC30p can be printed in a larger size.

In addition, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black) together with the product number (the number published in the catalog). In this case, the silk printing is white (or black) so that it is easy to see compared to the size of the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Preferably, it is printed in Thereby, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment as a measure for visibility of the part number, on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, there is also printed information on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. An area MSLKMC30' indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is placed (no direction is specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is silk-printed with a solid white line (or a solid black line) at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30. At the same time, a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen on the upper left near this area MSLKMC30'. This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so the size of the part number is It is necessary to make the part number smaller and print it by placing it near the corresponding electronic component, but since no electronic component is mounted on the back side (solder side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, it is necessary to increase the size of the part number. This is because it can be printed.

[Comparison between the configuration of product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure for visibility of the part number, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has the position (orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged. ) is printed as a solid white line (or a solid black line) as a silkscreen, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed on the lower left near this area MSLKMIC30. It is printed in white (or black).

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure for visibility of the product number, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, there is information on the right side near the area MSLKMIC30. An area is provided in which the part number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (MSLKMIC30p) is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number published in the catalog). It is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen to make it easier to see.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure for the visibility of the part number, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has the No. 14 terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. ), the area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is to be placed (there is no direction specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is silk-printed so that it is placed near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead. It is printed with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen in the upper right corner of this area MSLKMC30. .

On the other hand, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment as a measure for the visibility of the product number, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 further includes a main control board as shown in FIG. At a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310, an area MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including direction specification) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed is indicated by a chain line as a foil-cutting area. At the same time, a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30' and on the upper left side as a foil-cut letter.

The foil removal area is a layer where various wiring patterns are formed (copper plane), except for wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, wiring patterns for supplying power, and various land patterns. This is the area that is formed by creating a copper foil and removing the surrounding copper foil. In the region MSLKMIC30' formed as the foil-cut region, a cutout portion 1310yMIC30 is formed in a part of the left side in FIG. 140(b). As a result, the region MSLKMIC30' has a katakana U-shape, and the solid earth formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 connects to the inner region of the U-shaped region MSLKMIC30' via the notch 1310yMIC30. and can be electrically connected. This is because the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so the ground (GND) is connected to the back surface (solder surface) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 corresponding to the mounting area. This is because by securing as much of the area as possible, it is possible to prevent the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 from malfunctioning due to noise (make it resistant to noise).

Foil punched characters are formed by creating characters using a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, and then punching out the surrounding copper foil. The part number formed as a foil-cut character is larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because multiple electronic components of various types are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the part number and print it by placing it near the corresponding electronic component. On the other hand, since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the part number can be increased in size and formed as a foil-cut character.

Furthermore, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. In place of the part number MSLKMIC30p, this part number MSLKMIC30p provides an information area on the back side (solder side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 near and below the area MSLKMIC30', and in this information area, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is installed. The letters are formed as foil-cut letters so that they are easy to see compared to the size of the product number stamped or printed on the surface of the package body (the number published in the catalog). Foil punched characters are formed by creating characters using a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, and then punching out the surrounding copper foil. Therefore, the product number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

The product number MSLKMIC30p formed as a foil-cut character is the same size as the product number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a part number visibility measure. It can be large, or it can be large. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p is It is necessary to make the product smaller and print it by placing it near the corresponding electronic components, but since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the part number MSLKMIC30p must be increased. This is because it can be formed as a foil-cut character.

In addition to the product number (the number published in the catalog), the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be formed as foil-cut characters. In this case, the letters must be formed as foil-cut letters so that they are easily recognizable compared to the size of the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. is preferred. Thereby, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment as a measure for visibility of the part number, on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, there is also printed information on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. An area MSLKMC30' indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is placed (no direction is specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is formed with a chain line as a foil-cut area at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30. A part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as foil-cut letters near the upper left corner of the figure. The foil removal area is a layer where various wiring patterns are formed (copper plane), except for wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, wiring patterns for supplying power, and various land patterns. This is the area that is formed by creating a copper foil and removing the surrounding copper foil. Foil punched characters are formed by creating characters using a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, and then punching out the surrounding copper foil. The part number formed as a foil-cut character is larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the part number and print it by placing it near the corresponding electronic component. On the other hand, since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the part number can be increased in size and formed as a foil-cut letter.

Note that the wiring patterns that form the foil-cutting areas and the foil-cutting characters are electrically insulated from various electronic components, and are also electrically insulated from various electronic components, such as wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, wiring patterns for supplying power, and various other electronic components. It is formed to be electrically insulated from the land pattern and the solid earth formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

[Comparison between the structure of the product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the structure of the product number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment]
In the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure for visibility of the part number, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has the position (orientation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged. ) is printed as a solid white line (or a solid black line) as a silkscreen, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed on the lower left near this area MSLKMIC30. It is printed in white (or black).

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure for visibility of the product number, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, there is information on the right side near the area MSLKMIC30. An area is provided in which the part number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (MSLKMIC30p) is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number published in the catalog). It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it is easier to see than the original.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure for the visibility of the part number, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has the No. 14 terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. ), the area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is to be placed (there is no direction specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is printed as a silk screen so that the capacitor MC30 is placed near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead. It is printed with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as a silk screen in the upper right corner near this area MSLKMC30. .

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure for visibility of the product number, green is used as a resist for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are used. ) The entire area is painted solid with green resist except for various land patterns.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment as a measure for the visibility of the part number, on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. At a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310, an area MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including direction specification) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed is printed in two coats of white. A white resist using resist is formed as a region to be removed by a chain line, and near this region MSLKMIC30' and in the upper left corner, there is a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a white resist using double-coated white resist. It is formed as a cutout character.

Furthermore, in the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the part number visibility measure using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Instead of the product number MSLKMIC30p, this product number is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 near and below the area MSLKMIC30'. It is formed as a white resist-cut character using two coats of white resist so that it is easy to see compared to the size of the number listed in the catalog.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment as a part number visibility measure, on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, there is also printed information on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The area MSLKMC30' indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is placed (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) corresponds to the area MSLKMC30 where the capacitor MC30 is placed is a white resist removal area using twice-coated white resist. In addition, near this region MSLKMC30' and in the upper left corner, a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as a white resist cut-out character using double-coated white resist.

Specifically, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is entirely covered with white resist as the first of two coats of white resist (that is, the second coat of white resist is coated with white resist). For the first time, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is completely coated with white resist except for various land patterns). Then, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is applied as the second coat of white resist at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. , an area MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including direction designation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed is masked as a white resist removal area in the form of a chain line, and the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is located near this area MSLKMIC30' and on the upper left. The corresponding part number is masked as a white resist-cut character, and an information area is provided below and near this area MSLKMIC30', and within this information area, the part number MSLKMIC30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is masked as a white resist-cut character. An area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is placed (no orientation is specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30. ' is masked as a white resist removed area in the form of a chain line, and a part number corresponding to capacitor MC30 is masked as white resist removed characters in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30' and on the upper left.

In this masked state, the entire back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, except for various land patterns, is covered with white resist by solid coating. In other words, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment to improve visibility of the product number, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is painted solidly with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is painted solid with green resist except for various land patterns.

As a result, two layers of white resist are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, but the first layer of white resist covers the whole, and the second layer of white resist By covering the entire area except for the masked area with the resist, the masked area is depressed as a recess, and the area MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including direction specification) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed is white. The part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as a resist cutout area by a chain line, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as a white resist cutout character, and the part number is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number published in the catalog). MSLKMIC30p is formed as a white resist cutout character, an area MSLKMC30' indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is placed (no direction is specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is formed with a chain line, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed. Formed as white resist-cut characters. Therefore, the product number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

When the part number corresponding to Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as white resist-cut characters, it is formed larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of main control board 1310. This is because multiple electronic components of various types are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the part number and print it by placing it near the corresponding electronic component. On the other hand, since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the part number can be increased in size and formed as white resist-cut characters.

When forming the part number MSLKMIC30p as a white resist-cut character, the size of the part number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of part number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. It may be the same or larger. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p is It is necessary to make the product smaller and print it by placing it near the corresponding electronic components, but since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the part number MSLKMIC30p must be increased. This is because the characters can be formed as white resist-cut characters.

In addition to the product number (the number published in the catalog), the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be formed as white resist-cut characters. In this case, the name is formed as white resist-cut characters so that it is easily recognizable compared to the size of the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is preferable. Thereby, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

When the part number corresponding to capacitor MC30 is formed as white resist-cut characters, it is printed larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of main control board 1310. This is because multiple electronic components of various types are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the part number and print it by placing it near the corresponding electronic component. On the other hand, since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the part number can be increased in size and formed as white resist-cut characters.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment as a measure for the visibility of the product number, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is painted solidly with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is painted solidly with green resist except for various land patterns, but the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is also painted with white resist with the exception of various land patterns. It may be configured so that the area is filled with solid color except for the pattern. In this case, an area indicating the position (which may also include specifying the orientation) of various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is silk-printed. The surface of the main control board 1310 is printed with dark solid lines in dark green, black, gray, etc., and the part numbers corresponding to various electronic components are silk-printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Printed as dark text. With this configuration, the front side (mounting side) and back side (soldering side) of other boards are painted solidly with green resist, except for various land patterns, making it easy to use for these other boards. The control board 1310 can be given a feature that makes it stand out. Also, among the various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the product number of the SMD type electronic component (in addition to this product number, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) is also written. ) may also be printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as silk printing.

In addition to configuring the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 to be solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns, the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is It may be configured to be printed as silk printing using a two-coat resist of different colors in which the first (base) and second coats are of different colors. For the first time (base), the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is silk-printed in white, excluding the various land patterns, and then the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is printed. The main control board 1310 is installed a second time while masking the area indicating the placement position (which may also include designation of orientation) of the various electronic components to be mounted and the part numbers corresponding to the various electronic components. The entire surface (mounting surface) may be silk-screen printed in any color among black, blue, yellow, and red, except for various land patterns. Even with this configuration, the front side (mounting side) and back side (soldering side) of other boards are painted solid with green resist, except for various land patterns, so it is difficult to distinguish between these other boards. The control board 1310 can be given a feature that makes it stand out. In addition, it is possible to visually recognize areas indicating positions (which may include designation of orientation) of various electronic components and part numbers corresponding to the various electronic components.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment as a measure for product number visibility, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is painted solidly with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is painted solidly with green resist except for various land patterns, but the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is also painted with white resist with the exception of various land patterns. It may be configured so that the area is filled with solid color except for the pattern. In this case, an area indicating the position (which may also include specifying the orientation) of various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is marked on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. A solid line is formed as a white resist-cut area, and part numbers corresponding to various electronic components are formed as white resist-cut characters on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Also, among the various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the product number (in addition to this product number, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols)) of the SMD type electronic component is also They may be formed as white resist-cut characters on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1310.

[Measures to prevent modification of SMD type electronic components]
Next, a miniaturized electronic component called an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and the fraudulent electronic component is replaced with a fraudulent electronic component to obtain fraudulent game balls. Explain the points to prevent the act.

As mentioned above, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an SMD type electronic component mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, has an SMD package body size of 5.3 mm in width and 5.3 mm in length. has a width of 10.8 mm, a height of 1.5 mm, and a width of 7.8 mm, including the length of the leads protruding from the two sides of the SMD package body.

Since the main control board 1310 is an important control board that controls the progress of the game, it is necessary to prevent the main control board 1310 from being illegally modified to obtain illegal game balls. The main control board box 1320 is sealed and housed in a main control board box 1320 that includes a transparent cover body in which a plurality of pores are formed and a transparent base body. In the main control board box 1320, as shown in FIG. 141, a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302 are caulked with a one-way screw or the like of a caulking portion 1303. The caulking portion 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and includes a plurality of caulking portions 1303. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 using a one-way screw of the caulking part 1303 using one sealing mechanism, and then the main control board box 1320 can be opened. It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. In other words, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed.

However, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 was removed from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some illegal means such as a thin wire on the main control board box 1320, and the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 was illegally removed from the main control board box 1320. If the electronic parts are replaced with other electronic parts, there is a risk that the person who makes such unauthorized changes may obtain illegal game balls.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141, a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z having an inner diameter smaller than the size of the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (2 mm in this embodiment) are formed in a transparent cover body 1301. A configuration was adopted. As a result, even if the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some illegal means such as a thin wire attached to the main control board box 1320, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 Trigger inverter MIC30 cannot be taken out from main control board box 1320 via ventilation hole 1301z. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 from being replaced with an unauthorized electronic component.

Further, as described above, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is one of the main circuits forming the main control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors are input, and is removed from the main control board 1310 by some unauthorized means. Then, among the various sensors, the main control MPU 1310a always determines that the ball has not entered the game ball with respect to the sensor that indicates that the game ball has entered the ball, and always determines that the sensor that indicates fraudulent activity such as the approach of a magnet or unauthorized vibration is always detected. It is now possible to determine if fraudulent activity is occurring. As a result, if the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and if the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is missing, a person who makes unauthorized changes will be given a non-entering status. By maintaining the state, illegal game balls will not be obtained, and by notifying the game card (hole) that unauthorized changes have been made, the game can be played. You can also inform staff such as hall clerks. In addition, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that an unauthorized act is always being carried out with respect to the various sensors that notify unauthorized acts such as the approach of a magnet or unauthorized vibration, the main control MPU 1310a sends a firing permission signal as described above. The logic is set to the launch stop logic (launch disallowed logic) to control the game ball so that it cannot be launched towards the game area 5a, so if unauthorized modification is performed, the game will be stopped. It becomes impossible to do anything at all.

In the above-described embodiment, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted as an SMD type electronic component on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, but as other SMD type electronic components, For example, when a resistor is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, this SMD type resistor is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 and passes through the ventilation hole 1301z to the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to make the inner diameter of the ventilation hole 1301z smaller than the size of the SMD type resistor so that it does not protrude from the inside to the outside.

Since such an SMD type resistor is small, even if it peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it can be visually confirmed whether it is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. It may be difficult to distinguish between Furthermore, when the SMD type resistor that has peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 jumps out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 through the ventilation hole 1301z, the inside lower side of the main control board box 1320 Since there is no trace of the SMD type resistor that has peeled off, it becomes increasingly difficult to visually determine whether or not it is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, if, for example, a JIS standard 1/8 watt 2012 type is adopted as the SMD type resistor, the 2012 type has a length dimension of 2.0 mm and a width dimension of 1.2 mm. With such a small SMD type resistor, even if a problem occurs in which the main control board 1310 peels off from the surface (mounting surface) due to the main control board 1310 being bent, it will not be able to be removed from the inside of the main control board box 1320. To prevent it from protruding outside, the inner diameter of the ventilation hole 1301z is smaller than the smaller of the length and width of the small SMD type resistor (in this case, the width is 1.2 mm). (here, for example, 1.0 mm).

As a result, even if the small SMD type resistor peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is reliably prevented from jumping out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 through the ventilation hole 1301z. Therefore, you can get an opportunity to visually check this small SMD type resistor that has fallen off inside the main control board box 1320, and if you shake the main control board box 1320 vertically or horizontally, you can see this small SMD type resistor. When the small SMD type resistor that has fallen off collides with the inner wall of the main control board box 1320 or the main control board 1310, a sound is generated, and this sound provides an opportunity to recognize the small SMD type resistor that has fallen off. Obtainable. In addition to this small SMD type resistor, if electronic components such as lead type capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs are replaced with electronic components such as SMD type capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs, The inner diameter of the ventilation hole 1301z is set to be smaller than the smallest dimension among these dimensions.

In this way, even if a small SMD type electronic component peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is ensured that it will jump out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 through the ventilation hole 1301z. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability of discovering a problem in which an SMD type electronic component peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 due to the deflection of the main control board 1310.

Note that in the above-described embodiments (including the configuration of the SMD package as a measure for visibility of product numbers according to the first to sixth embodiments), SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. As described above, SMD type electronic components can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of boards treated as main boards such as the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633.

[Test connector]
The pachinko machine 1 is tested by a specific testing agency, and cannot be shipped to game halls unless it is approved by this specific testing agency. The main control board 1310 is provided with a test connector 1310k for taking out various signals related to the game. This test connector 1310k is an SMD type electronic component. The test connector 1310k is a straight SMD type connector (a type in which each pin of the connector is arranged vertically parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the main control board). , when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific test institute, is usually mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and is also mounted on a transparent cover body 1301 facing the test connector 1310k. A test harness cover body side opening 1301k is formed for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k, whereas the main control board 1310 is formed when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass-produced machine to be shipped to game halls. In addition, the test harness cover body side opening 1301k is not formed in the transparent cover body 1301. Therefore, in the main control board 1310 produced as a mass-produced machine, the area where the test connector 1310k is mounted is formed as an empty area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific test institute, the test connector 1310k is placed in the mounting land pattern etc. forming area 1310ya on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310. (See FIG. 139(b)), and a test harness base body side opening 1302k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k is provided in the transparent base body 1302 facing the test connector 1310k. A configuration was adopted to form the structure. This allows the surface of the main control board 1310 to Since the area where the test connector 1310k is mounted on the (mounting surface) is not formed as an empty area, other SMD type electronic components can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. . Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 can be increased.

Further, with this configuration, in preparation for starting a test of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific testing institution, a test operator first installs the main control board box 1320 from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5 shown in FIG. After removing the test harness, the test harness electrically connected to the test equipment installed at a specific test institution is inserted through the test harness base body side opening 1302k formed in the transparent base body 1302. Then, it is electrically connected to the test connector 1310k mounted in the mounting land pattern etc. forming area 1310ya' on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310. Next, the test operator attaches the main control board box 1320 to the board holder 1200. In this state, the test harness can be held (held) between the transparent base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 and the board holder 1200, so that it can be moved toward the test connector 1310k. By applying a load in the direction in which the test harness is pushed in, the electrical connection between the test connector 1310k and the test harness becomes unstable due to vibrations caused by the movable body operated by various electrical drive sources provided in the pachinko machine 1. In addition, it is possible to prevent the test harness from which various important signals related to the game are taken out during testing of the pachinko machine 1 from being twisted and disconnected.

In this embodiment, the test connector 1310k is a straight SMD type connector (in which each pin of the connector is arranged vertically parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the main control board. However, we mainly use right-angle SMD type connectors (a type in which each pin of the connector is arranged parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the main control board). It is mounted on the back side (solder side) of the control board near any one of the left side, bottom side, right side, and top side, and the side wall of the transparent cover body 1301 (transparent cover body 1301 A test harness cover body side opening 1301k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k is formed on the left side wall, lower wall, right side wall, and upper side wall (the side wall facing the test connector 1310k). May be adopted. Even with this configuration, the main Since the area where the test connector 1310k is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1310 is not formed as an empty area, it is possible to mount other SMD type electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Can be implemented. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 can be increased. In addition, in preparation for starting a test of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific test institution, the test operator can perform a specific test without first removing the main control board box 1320 from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5 shown in FIG. The test harness electrically connected to the test equipment installed in the engine is attached to the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board through the test harness cover body side opening 1301k formed in the transparent cover body 1301. It can be electrically connected to the test connector 1310k to be mounted.

Incidentally, gaming machines have been proposed in the past in which a gaming control device (gaming control board) is provided with a test firing test terminal (testing connector) to which a cable for transmitting gaming information to a testing device at a specific testing institution is connected. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-128621 (paragraph [0054] and FIG. 6)). By the way, in the game machine described in this document, a test connector is mounted on the surface of the game control board when it is tested by a specific testing institution, whereas when it is used in a game hall, a test connector is mounted on the surface of the game control board. Since the test connector is not mounted on the surface of the game control board, leaving a vacant area, there is a problem in that the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface of the game control board cannot be increased due to this vacant area.

Furthermore, gaming machines in which surface-mounted electronic components are mounted on a board have been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). Incidentally, the surface mount type electronic components in the game machines described in this document may have an identifier such as a product number that corresponds to the surface mount type electronic component, but the size of the surface mount type electronic component may vary. There was a problem in that the size of the identifier was small and it was difficult to visually recognize the identifier.

Furthermore, gaming machines in which surface-mounted electronic components are mounted on a board have been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, when the surface mount type electronic components in the game machine described in this document are mounted on the game control board that can control the progress of the game, the surface mount type electronic components are mounted by some illegal means. There was a fear that illegal game balls could be obtained by peeling them off from the game control board and replacing them with illegal electronic parts.

In addition, gaming machines have been proposed in the past that are equipped with a tact switch or the like on the board that allows you to operate the press operation part and feel the switch turn on or off with a click feeling when operating (for example, Publication No. 2017-023427 (paragraph [0071] and FIG. 20)). By the way, the electronic components such as tactile switches described in this document are of the lead type, in which each lead is inserted into a through hole provided in the board from the front side of the board to the back side, and is soldered on the back side of the board. It is an electronic component. When such a lead-type electronic component is mounted on a board such as a game control board that controls the progress of a game, if the board flexes due to the operation of the lead-type electronic component, this deflection causes the board to There was a risk that the soldered parts of other electronic components mounted on the device would peel off, causing electrical problems.

Furthermore, gaming machines in which various control boards are disposed at predetermined positions on the back of the gaming board have been proposed (for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2013-128621 (paragraphs [0032] to [0034] and FIG. 3)). By the way, the game control board that controls the progress of the game is an important board that determines whether or not to give a profit to the player, so it is housed in a board case with a sealed structure to prevent fraudulent activities such as unauthorized modification. Prevention measures are required.

Furthermore, gaming machines in which surface-mounted components are mounted on a board have been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, in the case where the surface mount components in the game machine described in this document are mounted on a game control board that can control the progress of the game, within the area of the surface of the game control board on which the surface mount components are mounted. If the wiring pattern is routed around the surface mount type electronic component, the distance between the back side of the surface mount component and the front surface of the game control board is small, so even if this wiring pattern is modified by some illegal means, it will be difficult to see, and the surface mount type electronic component A problem arises in that it is not possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

[7. Game content]
The game content by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 117, FIG. 120 to FIG. 124, etc. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, game balls B are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. is struck into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more clockwise the handle 182 is rotated, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, the game ball The speed of the ball B flowing down is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Moreover, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 in front view (left side of the upper right peripheral wall part 2510), It flows down the area to the left of the center accessory 2500 while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the left side area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2502 to the stage 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the gaming area 5a from the center release part 2503a at the center of the stage 2503, since the center release part 2503a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, there is a high probability that the first ball B will be released into the game area 5a. It is received in the starting port 2002. When game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the gaming area 5a has a possibility of being accepted into the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the general winning port 2001, and the grand winning port 2005 in the open state. be.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flown down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it will be moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and will be moved to the center side in the left-right direction. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general prize opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, etc. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, the game ball B hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a is on the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (in the upstream space above the upper right peripheral wall part 2510). 2505), it passes through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and is released above the normal prize opening 2003 of the center accessory 2500, After coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the normal winning hole 2003, it is accepted into the normal winning hole 2003 with a certain probability.

The guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first guide passage 2521 whose entrance opens near the blocking portion 1006, and an entrance which opens at a distance to the left from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. A second guide passage 2522 is provided. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with such force that it hits the stopper 1006 (so-called right-handed hit), it enters the first guide passage 2521, enters the upstream space 2505, and hits the stopper 1006. If the game ball B is hit with a force that does not make contact (a force that is somewhat weaker than when hitting right-handed), there is a high probability that the game ball B will enter the second guide path 2522. That is, the game ball B driven into the upstream space 2505 flows through either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 depending on the driving strength.

In this embodiment, it is configured such that the second guide path 2522 is more likely to be accepted into the normal winning hole 2003 than the first guide path 2521.

When the game ball B is accepted into the normal winning hole 2003 and detected by the normal winning hole sensor 2401, a predetermined number of games (for example, one) are issued from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. As the ball B is put out onto the upper tray 201, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the normal lottery result is "normal win", the closed second starting port in the attacker unit 2400 2004 remains open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery that is performed when the game ball B is accepted into the normal winning slot 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the time when the normal lottery result is indicated (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). This suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 becomes open after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

Furthermore, if the game ball B is accepted into the normal winning slot 2003 after the game ball B is received into the normal winning slot 2003 and before the normal lottery result is suggested, it is possible to start suggesting the normal lottery result. Since this is not possible, the start of suggesting the normal lottery result is suspended until the previous suggestion of the normal lottery result ends. Further, the maximum number of pending normal lottery results is four, and for more than that, even if game balls B are accepted into the normal winning slot 2003, they are discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The game ball B that entered the attacker right passage 2430 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 has no chance of being accepted into the second starting opening 2004 or the big winning opening 2005, and is released onto the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000, It is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. On the other hand, the game ball B that has passed through the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 passes between the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left vertical wall part 2422, and then passes through the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424. , passes in front of the closed grand prize opening 2005 and is released onto the lower right rail 1004.

Then, when the game ball B passes between the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall part 2422, the normal lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B at the normal winning port 2003 is " When the second starting port door 2411 is moving forward in the case of "Normal hit", the game ball B is guided by the second starting port door 2411 and the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004. When game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

The game ball B that was not guided by the second starting opening door 2411 falls onto the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424, passes from the left end of the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 to the front of the closed winning opening door 2413, and passes to the right. It is released onto the lower rail 1004 and is ejected from the out port 1008 to the outside of the gaming area 5a.

On the other hand, although the game ball B was guided to the second starting port 2004 side by the second starting port door 2411, the second starting port door 2411 retreated on the way and was not received into the second starting port 2004. The attacker enters the right passage 2430 from the third opening 2433 on the lower side of the starting port 2004, is ejected onto the lower right rail 1004 without passing in front of the closed big prize door 2413, and exits from the out port 1008. It is discharged outside the game area 5a.

In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421, and the second opening 2432 of the attacker right passage 2430 is open. The game ball B passing through the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 enters the attacker right passage 2430 through the second opening 2432 with a low probability. The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without involving the big winning port 2005.

Because of the above, the game balls B that have passed through the first guide passage 2521 are not often accepted into the normal winning opening 2003, so the receiving of the gaming balls B into the normal winning opening 2003 causes the second starting opening 2004 It is rare that a normal lottery result in which the ball is in an open state is derived, and the game balls B are not often accepted into the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, since the game ball B that has passed through the second guide passage 2522 is accepted into the normal winning opening 2003 with a higher probability than the first guiding passage 2521, the game ball B passing through the ordinary winning opening 2003 is accepted into the second starting opening 2003. There is a high possibility that a normal lottery result (“normal win”) will be drawn in which the is in an open state, and there is also a high possibility that the game ball B will be accepted into the second starting port 2004.

For this reason, since the player performs the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, the driving force with which the game ball B enters the upstream space 2505 increases. And, the driving strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is driven into the gaming area 5a with the driving strength that allows the game ball B to enter the second guide path 2522. It won't happen. As a result, it is possible to give variation to the driving operation of the game ball B, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and making the driving operation of the game ball B enjoyable for the player, suppressing a drop in interest. can be done.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "jackpot"). ”, “Small win”, and “Time saving (time saving) win”) A special lottery result will be drawn. Then, the special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variable time). In addition, the special lottery results that are drawn when game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "loss", "first small win", "second small win", and " There are "3rd small hit", "2R jackpot", "15R jackpot", etc. In this embodiment, the lottery probability of "small win" ("first small win", "second small win", "third small win") is higher in the second special lottery result than in the first special lottery result. is set high.

If the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are "small hit", "small hit" The accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern depending on the type of item (see FIG. 123). The accessory prize opening 2006 is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, so if a "small win" is drawn, hit "right" and enter the first guide passage. Hit game ball B at 2521.

When the "small win" is the "first small win", the opening/closing time of the accessory prize opening 2006 is short, and it is almost impossible to accept the game ball B. In the case of "second small hit" or "third small win", the time when the accessory prize opening 2006 is open is long, and the game ball B is accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 by "hitting right". Probability is high. When the game balls B are received in the accessory prize opening 2006, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

When the "small win" is "second small win" or "third small win", if game balls B are accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006, one of the accepted game balls B will be distributed to the first distribution. It is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotary body 2531 in the device 2530. When the "small hit" is a "second small win", the game ball B accommodated in the housing section 2531a of the sorting rotary body 2531 passes through the second sorting device 2540 and passes through the third sorting device 2550. is supplied on the clone 2553 of. Thereafter, it is bounced by the distribution rotating blade 2554 and distributed to either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2556. When the game ball B is received (distributed) into the second V winning hole 2008, a "15R jackpot" is executed. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the third loss opening 2556, the "15R jackpot" etc. are not executed and the state returns to the previous state.

On the other hand, if the "small win" is the "third small win", the game ball B accommodated in the housing part 2531a of the sorting rotary body 2531 is transferred to the first V prize opening 2007 side in the second sorting device 2540. The winnings are distributed and a "15R jackpot" is executed.

The first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first V prize opening 2007 and the second V prize opening 2008, and the reception of the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and the second 2. If the special lottery result is "2R jackpot" or "15R jackpot", a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed after the big prize opening 2005 is opened to accept the game ball B, or When any one of the following conditions is satisfied: acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B into the grand prize opening 2005, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern A "jackpot" game is executed in which a game (referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds, for example, 2 rounds or 15 rounds).

Since this big prize opening 2005 is mainly located on the flow path of the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500, the player is not allowed to drive the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500. Can be done. When the game ball B is received in the big winning hole 2005 when the big winning hole 2005 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 send a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13 balls) from the payout device 580. game balls B are paid out onto the upper tray 201. Therefore, by allowing the grand prize opening 2005 to accept the gaming balls B when the grand prize opening 2005 is ready to accept the gaming balls B, it is possible to pay out many gaming balls B and entertain the players. can.

Note that in the guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it is easier to perform the driving operation on the first guide passage 2521 side than on the second guide passage 2522 side, but on the other hand, the second guide passage 2522 Since the possibility of being accepted into the big prize opening 2005 is lower than that from the side, it is possible to allow the player to select which path to perform the betting operation, making it difficult for the player to get bored with a variety of games. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the case of a "15R jackpot" or a "2R jackpot" during the time saving state, after the "jackpot" game ends, the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and the lottery is drawn. The variation time of the special symbol for indicating the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result to the player is made shorter than usual until a predetermined number of variations (for example, 100 times) is reached, and then the next To speed up the time until a "win" is drawn.

In addition, in the "jackpot" game where you aim for the big winning hole 2005, the normal winning hole 2003 and the second starting hole 2004 exist on the way the game ball B reaches the big winning hole 2005. There is a high possibility that the game ball B will be received by the second starting hole 2004, and if the next "big win" or "small win" is drawn during the "big hit" game, the player will be in an advantageous gaming state. This will continue for a long time, making it possible for the player to enjoy the game even more.

In this embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 receive game balls B from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested. Once the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it is not possible to start suggesting the special lottery result, so the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. It will be put on hold. The maximum number of reserved special lottery results to be held is 4 for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than 4, Even if game ball B was accepted in 2004, the special lottery result was not held and was discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

By the way, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 by flashing a plurality of LEDs by repeatedly turning them on and off for a predetermined period of time, and then indicating the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as a effect image. The performance image that suggests the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is created by displaying three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols side by side in the left and right direction, and by varying each symbol row. are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the three pattern rows are stopped and displayed so that the symbols in the three stop-displayed pattern rows form a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "lose", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is completed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small win" game, a "big win" game, etc.) occurs depending on the special lottery result.

It should be noted that the time for indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time for suggesting the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 (the pattern row changes and the final image is changed) (time until display), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying an effect image for suggesting a special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the special lottery result drawn. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect in which the player operates the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the section 301. In a player participation type performance, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotary operation unit 302, assist rotation operation, or inhibit rotation operation, and the operation button lift drive motor 342 367, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised to make it stand out, and the player can enjoy the participatory performance by operating the performance operation section 301.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back By appropriately using the production unit 3200, etc., it is possible to perform light emission production, display production, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player with various productions, thereby suppressing the player's interest in the game from decreasing. can do.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 allows the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation that should be performed in a player participation type performance in which the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 is operated. The player will be notified accordingly. Specifically, for example, when a pressing operation of the central pressing operation section 303a is requested, when the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation section 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[8. Relationship between this embodiment and the present invention]
The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 in the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 of this embodiment are the guide passage of the present invention, and the normal prize opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 of this embodiment, The second starting opening 2004 and the big winning opening 2005 each correspond to a benefit granting section of the present invention.

[9. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
In this way, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B hit into the upper part of the game area 5a from the left side along the periphery is placed in the first position in the guide passage group 2520 on the right side of the center accessory 2500. If it passes through either the guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 and is accepted into the normal prize opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 provided on the downstream side, a predetermined benefit (with the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, Since a normal lottery to determine whether to open or close the second starting hole 2004 is given, the player is made to perform a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 where the normal winning hole 2003 is located. You can play games.

The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 are twisted in positional relationship so that they are lined up in the front-back direction at the weighted part 2520a in the middle of the line in the left-right direction. On the upper entrance side, the respective first guide passages 2521 and second guide passages 2522 are lined up in the left-right direction, and the respective first guide passages 2521 and second guide passages 2522 can be clearly distinguished. The driving operation of the game ball B can be made easier to perform the sorting, and the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the desired first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 can be enjoyed.

On the other hand, in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the weighted parts 2520a are twisted so that they are lined up in the front and back direction, so that the player cannot This makes it difficult to distinguish which guide passage is being distributed, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game ball B that is circulating through the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. can. The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 allow the game balls B being guided (distributed) to be seen from the front, and the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are formed of a transparent member. Because of this, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 appear to overlap in the weighted portion 2520a that is lined up front and rear, so it is difficult to recognize the route of each guide passage at first glance. can be taken as a thing. Furthermore, since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted so as to be aligned in the left-right direction on the exit side of the lower part of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, Although the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be clearly distinguished, since the upstream side is twisted twice, the alignment of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the entrance side is , the relationship with the arrangement of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the exit side may be difficult to distinguish and may be unclear.

Therefore, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, when the game ball B is hit (entered) into one of the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522, it is difficult to tell where it will come out from, and the guide path It is possible to make it difficult to recognize what the game result will be after circulating the group 2520, and if you hit the game ball B into which guide path among the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522, you will normally win a prize. Since it is difficult to know whether the game ball B is likely to be accepted in the opening 2003, when the game ball B is hit, it is possible to make the player care about which guide path the game ball B is traveling through, and to encourage the player to It is possible to draw attention to the game ball B that is playing.

In addition, by paying attention to the game ball B circulating through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, the player can check the guide passage (the second guide It is possible to make the player nervous depending on whether or not the game ball B will come out from the exit of the passageway 2522), and increase the expectation for the game. ), it is possible to surprise the player by giving it a sense of surprise, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent him from losing interest.

In addition, in order for the game ball B to enter the second guide passage 2522 that has an exit that is likely to be accepted into the normal winning hole 2003, it is necessary to adjust the driving force of the game ball B, so the player It is possible to adjust the driving force of the game ball B against the ball B and allow the game ball B to be hit. Therefore, it is possible to give a level of difficulty to the driving operation of the game ball B, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored by changing the driving operation of the game ball B. It is possible to enjoy the input operation of B, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 have weighted portions 2520a that are lined up in the front-rear direction, the width of the guide passage group 2520 in the left-right direction can be adjusted in this part. Since it can be made as narrow as possible, it is relatively easy to secure a space on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and in the secured space, the accessory prize opening 2006, the first sorting device 2530, etc. are arranged. The pachinko machine 1 can further entertain players by making it possible to play games and arrange presentation devices.

[10. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 137 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 147. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 142, and FIG. 144 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process, FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an example of an error display process, and FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting value confirmation display process. First, we will explain the various random numbers used for game control, followed by the movement of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, and setting value confirmation. Display processing will be explained. Note that in the following description, the main control MPU 1310a may be simply referred to as "main control MPU".

[10-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include special random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state or a small win game state, and an initial value for hit determination used to determine the initial value of this special random number. A determined random number, a random number for reach determination used to determine whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when a jackpot gaming state is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special of the function display unit 1400. A random number for a variable display pattern used to determine a variable display pattern of special symbols that are variably displayed on a symbol display, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 when generating a jackpot game state. A symbol random number used to determine the jackpot symbol or small win symbol derived and displayed on the symbol display (determining the hit type), and a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol used to determine the initial value of this symbol random number. etc. are available. In addition to these random numbers, there is also a random number for normal symbol hit determination, which is used to determine whether or not to open/close the movable piece that allows the second starting port 2004 to accept game balls, and this normal symbol hit determination. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination used to determine the initial value of the random number for use, and the normal symbol used to determine the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers and the like for variable display patterns are prepared.

Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware using a main control built-in hardware random number circuit built into the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, this main control built-in hardware random number circuit first uses a value of 1 within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and then performs a random number circuit at high speed based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another, and once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on a clock signal input to the MPU. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as a special random number at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1, thereby counting up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated. This method of updating a counter is called an "initial value update type counter." The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which a value of 1 is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated at power-on, or when the power is turned on on the main control side, which will be described later, it is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of various information as numerical values is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When clearing only a specific area out of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when they do not match, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is set by the main control MPU from its built-in non-volatile RAM. The ID code is extracted from the ID code, and based on the extracted ID code, an initial value derivation process is executed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination, and this derived fixed value is set. In other words, the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set as the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU by the manufacturer of the main control MPU. The first security measure is that once the ID code is memorized, it cannot be rewritten even using an external device, and the initial value derivation process is used when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. The second security measure is to derive the same fixed value based on the ID code by executing the ID code.A two-step security measure is taken to prevent analysis.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU and using the extracted ID code as the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination will be explained. For example, a person who attempts to illegally acquire game balls that are paid out as prize balls may somehow obtain the game board 5, disassemble it, and steal the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU. Even if it is obtained illegally and it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the ID code is attached with a code, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU' provided in other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value is also completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', that is, other pachinko machines 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if an instantaneous stop is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and a game ball is passed through the normal winning port 2003 at each predetermined interval, the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 by opening and closing the movable piece. It is not possible to generate a gaming state where

[10-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer can, for example, indicate the address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after exiting a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded.

Under the control of the main control MPU, the main control side power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 142 and 143. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control MPU performs a power outage clearing process (step S12). In this power outage clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power outage advance notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input as a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). has been done.

Following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S14). As mentioned above, the RWM clear button 633z has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting changeover button, and error release switch), and here, the RWM clear button 633z has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting changeover button, and error release switch). It functions as a RAM clear switch to completely erase information. In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the RAM will not be cleared when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated is HI. When it is determined that the push operation section of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, and the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the push operation section of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is LOW, the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the press operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated. Note that the period from the start of the main control side power-on process that is this routine until the determination in step S14 is extremely short, so in reality, the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. The operator turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z.

In the determination of step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). In other words, the main control MPU is in a state where it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, and includes game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc., and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls). This is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase various information, including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc.), and is set to the value 1 when various information is to be erased, and to 0 when the various information is not erased. . Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S16A and step S16B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU receives a detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and a detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Then, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and the first ON operation is performed to turn the setting key switch 1311a OFF. The setting key 1311a is turned on, and the setting key is turned on based on the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. By determining that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 due to the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b. and/or by determining that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on by the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination at step S18, when the main control MPU determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, it sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to a value of 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S18 that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, it sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to the value 0 (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG indicates the current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (setting value exclusive area in a specific area, described later) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU. This is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the settings to be changed (values set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time of the first ON operation), and the settings of the setting values are changed. The value is set to 1 when the setting value is allowed to be changed, and the value is set to 0 when the setting value is not allowed to be changed. Note that the value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in step S20A and step S20B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs wait time waiting processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system waits until the system that controls drawing on the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. Note that at the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a short time compared to the peripheral control board 1510, so the payout control board 633 ) is in a state where it can receive various commands from.

Following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU determines that there is an input of the power outage warning signal, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. Note that a detailed explanation will be given later regarding the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

When the main control MPU determines in step S24 that no power outage warning signal is input, it determines whether the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and to a value of 0 when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted.

In the determination in step S25, the main control MPU determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted. (Step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when various information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the various information is not to be erased. In the determination at step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that various information is not to be deleted, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the sum thereof.

Following step S28, the main control MPU compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in main control side power-off processing (power-off time), which will be described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is the value 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG is stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM during main control side power-off processing, which will be described later, for game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally, and is set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed. In the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum calculation in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. A detailed explanation of , will be given later.

In the determination of step S30, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1. (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, error display processing is performed (step S33) and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

Note that when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is moved from its initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). After performing the first ON operation by turning the machine 60 degrees clockwise, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, is started again. In the determination in step S18 described above, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b, and the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. By determining that the setting key of the key switch 1311a is turned ON, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and in step S20A described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to 1. In order to set , in the determination in step S25 described above, it is determined that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 1, that is, it is determined that the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and the setting change is performed in step S37, which will be described later. Following the process, in the process of step S38, which will be described later, by clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, it is possible to cancel the RAM error and proceed with the game ( (Hereinafter, this will be referred to as the "first RAM error cancellation method.")

As a method different from this first RAM error release method, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. As a result, the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, is started again. The main control MPU determines in the above-mentioned step S14 that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in the above-mentioned step S16A. Therefore, in the determination in step S26 described above, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1, that is, it is determined that various information is to be erased, and in the process of step S38, which will be described later, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are By clearing all but a specific area, it is possible to cancel the RAM error and proceed with the game (hereinafter referred to as "second RAM error cancellation method").

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, an error display is performed in step S33, and the main control built-in RAM is When informing that there is an abnormality in the content stored in the memory (or that it cannot be trusted), there are two methods of clearing the RAM error: the first RAM error clearing method and the second RAM error clearing method. It is now possible to do so. As a result, if there is no need to change the settings at all, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RWM clear button 633z.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when determining that the main control side power-off processing has been normally completed, the main control MPU A RAM work area is set (step S34). In this setting, power recovery information is read from the ROM built into the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU will proceed with the game based on the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power restoration" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, as well as the state in which power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage. This also includes a state in which the main control MPU itself is reset by irradiating the main control board 1310 with high frequency waves from a hidden high frequency output device (hidden high frequency output device) and then returned to normal state.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as various processes are performed after this, so the main control side power-off process (described later) is successfully completed and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area will be cleared.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S25, the main control MPU executes the setting change process when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting change is permitted to be performed. (Step S37). This setting change process, which will be described in detail later, is performed based on a signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. As mentioned above, the RWM clear button 633z has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch), and here, the RWM clear button 633z has a function that serves three functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch). Operates as a button function. Every time the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, a signal to that effect (setting value selection switching signal) is input, the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key switch 1311a is changed. When the setting key cylinder is operated from the first ON operation to the second ON operation, the changed setting value is determined based on the determination key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and the main control MPU has a built-in The data is stored in a predetermined area of RAM.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, the main control MPU All areas except for a specific area are cleared (step S38). Here, the main control MPU performs this by writing the value 0 into a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area among all areas of the main control built-in RAM). In this embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be deleted, and when the setting change process is finished, the main control built-in RAM is (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (area excluding the specified area among the whole area of the main control built-in RAM)). Here, the "specific area" refers to a setting value dedicated area where setting values are stored, and counting of the number of game balls collected through the outlet 1008 provided in the gaming area 5a sectioned on the game board 5. It consists of an area dedicated to out pitch counting where the results (total number) are stored. The setting value dedicated area stores setting values that are changed in the setting change process described later, and the out ball counting dedicated area stores the game balls collected by the out port 1008 that are counted in the ball count process described later. The counting result (total number) is stored.

Note that the main control MPU may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM and set it as an initial value. The main control MPU also controls the logic of a signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch. is an instruction to clear the RAM and when erasing various information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU is A pre-stored unique ID code is retrieved, and based on the retrieved ID code, an initial value derivation process is performed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination. A fixed value is set as the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination to be used for determining the initial value of the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and, for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set to the initial value of 0. Further, the main control MPU will proceed with the game based on the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, we will use the watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the WDT control register (described as "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT is activated, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU is reset. When the main control built-in WDT starts, time measurement by the main control built-in WDT starts, and by the time the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU ( If a timer clear setting value is not set in the WDT clear register (hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU will be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and starts timing, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and time measurement is started again. In this way, by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until it reaches the time set by the timer setting value and starting time measurement again, the operation (system) of the main control MPU can be performed normally. It is possible to monitor whether the

Following step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU (for example, serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the payout control board 633, serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the peripheral control board 1510, ), the transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed, parity is present, etc., and the transmission serial port control register is configured to initialize the transmitting circuit, enable transmission, etc.

Following step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, at a gaming machine testing institute, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU performs startup settings for the main control built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is updated by hardware, so the random number is input to the hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU. Settings such as latching and acquisition are performed, and settings such as activation of the built-in hardware random number circuit for the main control are set in the hardware random number setting register. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is activated by these settings, it rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, and When all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical value range is quickly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Extract other values one after another without duplication. Note that when the main control MPU obtains a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, and when this latch signal is input, the main control built-in hardware The random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the obtained random number as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, the power is turned on to notify that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 when setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM. A status command at power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information at power-on are created and sent as transmission information to the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. to be memorized. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM may read out various information from the game backup information and store various commands corresponding to this various information. be. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information, then the status command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command will be transmitted. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later. A detailed explanation will be given later regarding the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50.

Following step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, as described above, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e to the main control MPU as a power outage warning. be done. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In the determination of step S54, when the main control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, it performs a non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning/losing random number updating process, the above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number updating process, random numbers that are not related to winning/losing determination (jackpot determining) are updated by software. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, random numbers for normal symbol fluctuation display patterns, etc. are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If the power outage warning signal has not been input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. and repeat steps S54 to S56. Note that the processing from step S54 to step S56 is referred to as "main processing on the main control side."

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S54 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting prevents the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects the above-mentioned rewriting of various information including gaming information and other information.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as that for starting output of the power outage clear signal in the power outage clearing process in step S12 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU stops the drive signals being output to, for example, the various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting port solenoid 2404, the attacker solenoid 2405, the base monitor 1310h, etc. (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S41, and time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and time measurement starts again. As a result, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU performs this main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU cannot make the determination in step S54 and cannot perform the main control side power-off processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control side power-off processing, and then executes the main control side power-on processing again. . In other words, since the main control side power off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off process based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored, so the previous The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power-off process is executed when the power is cut off, and the checksum value calculated in step S28 when the built-in reset circuit performs a forced reset and restarts. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM will always occur, and in the process of step S38, the check sum (sum value) of the main control built-in RAM will be It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control side power-on process is performed.

In addition, in step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step S32, it is checked whether the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

In addition, in the determination in step S25, if the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when changing the setting value is permitted, the setting change process in step S37 is performed, In the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1). In other words, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, all areas of the RAM with built-in main control are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area in the process of step S38. In this way, when the press operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch, and the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated) When powering on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the button), when changing settings that can be changed and determined (when the main control MPU performs the setting change process), the main control MPU Be sure to clear the specified area of the control built-in RAM. This is when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch, and when the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 If the game is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, a state where the probability fluctuation (probability change) is a hit), it is necessary to delete (clear) the game backup information mentioned above before the next business starts. Therefore, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch, an attendant such as a clerk at the game hall needs to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z. In addition, when deciding to change the setting value, if the setting change process is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value before the setting change process is performed) It is necessary to erase (clear) game backup information, including various information such as game information, from the main control's built-in RAM.As mentioned above, in addition to changing the setting values, the setting key can also be used to Because it is an important key that allows you to check the setting values, only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, are allowed to possess it, and the number is limited to 2 to 3 people.In this embodiment, the setting value Even if no changes have been made to the information, that is, even if there is no setting key that only a limited number of people possess, staff such as game hall clerks can use RWM when it is necessary to erase (clear) game backup information. When the clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM. ).

Here, a description will be given of the fact that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22. First, regarding the problem when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time waiting process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. We will explain the problems in .

As mentioned above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, receives the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2. DC +5V is applied over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power outage or power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5V, so that the island of the game hall The main control side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power from the equipment is cut off. This is because a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing (described later) occurs. When the power from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, when the power is restored, in the wait time waiting process of step S22, the waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is started (booted) is 2.5 seconds), and if a momentary power outage or power outage occurs just before the standby time is reached, a hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. Although the electric charge charged in is applied as DC +5V, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side, which will be described later, Even if the timer interrupt process is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process may not be completed. Therefore, the main control side power-on process is started again when the power is restored without storing the calculated checksum value based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process in step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power outage or power outage, and then, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM When the value calculated based on the contents of the checksum and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power outage are compared in step S30, it is found that the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the power is restored, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch, and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated by a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall to perform a game called RAM clear. There is a problem in that the above-mentioned game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no indication of intention by an attendant such as a clerk at the hall.

Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power outage warning signal is input, Returning again to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. This makes it impossible to proceed with the game. Although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24. When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the game cannot proceed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, etc.) This prevents the checksum from being updated, and thus prevents fluctuations in the checksum calculation results. This allows the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 to determine that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and memorized value in step S64 match when the main control board 1310 is restarted. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power outage occurs. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage from being initialized.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and if the power outage warning signal has not been input (that is, in step S22) (When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is in progress of the game, the pachinko machine Even if the power to the main control MPU is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 supplies power to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU. The main control board performs the main control side power-off process, which is a backup process for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc. Since the main control MPU of 1310 can complete the calculation, when the main control MPU of the main control MPU is restarted, the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process are Since it is determined that the result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) matches, the gaming information immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is never initialized. In other words, the main control board 1310 can be started after being restored to the gaming information that existed immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurred.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT, thereby updating the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control side power-off processing can be started again without updating the The main control side power-off processing can be reliably completed within the "instantaneous power outage or power outage securing period" of about 7 ms by the standard hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, when power is cut off from the island equipment of the gaming hall due to an instantaneous power outage or power outage while the main control side power-on processing is being performed at the time of power restoration, the main control The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2, the processing immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22 In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal is being input. If the power outage warning signal is being input, the process returns to step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is made. By repeatedly doing this, it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

Such software makes it impossible to proceed with the game, so that the steps after step S24 (specifically, initial settings for interrupts are performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission is enabled in step S52). The contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and other information (for example, main prize ball count information output determination We have adopted a mechanism that can avoid updating various information (including information indicating the value of the counter). In this way, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output judgment The contents of the main controller built-in RAM (gaming information, By configuring the system by dividing it into two parts: a part covered by hardware, and a part covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main prize ball count information output judgment counter) will not be changed at all. , to reliably prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) from being changed. is now possible.

Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (restored) is determined based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to convey this information, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball count information output at power-on are created and sent to the main control as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM. This power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2404 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405. Here, first, we will discuss the problem when the main control return destination command upon power-on does not include information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2404 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405. A problem that occurs when the command to be sent when the power is turned on is not reserved as the main control return destination command at power-on is not set in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen in a jackpot game state (for example, a screen for a jackpot game effect) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2405. If an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs while the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 controls the main control board 1310 in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurred, and the attacker solenoid 2405 starts to be driven and the grand prize opening 2005 opens and closes. The state changes from being closed by the member to being open.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will control the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to display which round it is at all. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403, the main control board sends a big winning hole 1 count display command that tells the number of game balls that entered the big winning hole 2005. 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the number of game balls that entered the big prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and time saving state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state it is.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2405 and opens the big prize opening 2005 by the opening/closing member when finishing the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state, for example. The main control board 1310 sends a grand prize opening 1 close display command that instructs the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, to start closing the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2100 between rounds) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) in the jackpot game state, it starts driving the attacker solenoid 2405 to open the jackpot 2005 from the closed state by the opening/closing member. The main control board 1310 transmits a grand prize opening display command for the fifth time instructing to shift to the current state (that is, start opening the fifth round of the grand prize opening 2005) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen indicating the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and time saving state described above and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Also, for example, a screen may be displayed to notify the player that the game state is such that the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. While the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the screen that conveys to If an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs while the 2004 is in a state where it is open, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurred, and the start port solenoid 2404 is started to operate to close the movable piece. A transition will be made to a state in which the secondary start port 2004 is closed.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which game balls can be received into the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state advantageous to the player, a momentary power outage or power outage may occur. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and time-saving state specified by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it is possible to return by displaying it in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, indicating that the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen to convey the information in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, players seated at the front of the pachinko machine may be surprised at the occurrence of a momentary power outage or power outage, and when the power is restored, game balls may be received into the second starting port 2004 just before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs. In some cases, the user may forget that the gaming state is such that the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state when the power is restored. Nevertheless, when the power is restored, the screen for instructing the game to be played (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the game cannot be played. There was also the problem that the player would not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there was a problem in that the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power outage could not be returned to immediately after the power was restored. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. There was a problem.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 turns on the power (in addition to turning on the power, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs), the main control board 1310 uses the power-on status command. In order to send the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main control return destination command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the fourth round of the jackpot gaming state, When a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 returns to start driving the attacker solenoid 2405, and the big prize opening 2005 is opened from the closed state by the opening/closing member. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified of the transition to the state, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen that specifies that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game state (that is, a screen that indicates what round it is). cannot be displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, but the screen informs that the jackpot game state is in progress and the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven and the jackpot opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member. (For example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, "You have won the jackpot. The grand prize opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the grand prize opening.") This can be displayed in the display area to instruct a player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which the player who is seated at the front of the pachinko machine enters the game ball into the big winning hole 2005 after the power is restored. When the game state is such that game balls can be accepted into the secondary start port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs, and then when the power is restored, the main control board 1310 As a return destination, a screen informing you that the second starting port 2004 is now open by starting to drive the starting port solenoid 2404 and opening the movable piece (for example, ``The movable piece is open.'' The peripheral control board 1510 displays a message on the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the front of the pachinko machine. It is possible to instruct a player seated in a game machine to play a game by entering a game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored.

This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions as to where the peripheral control board 1510 should return when power is restored after a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, after the power is restored, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. This can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process that is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum in step S28 is checked when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be explained. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, it is not executed in step S30. In the comparison and determination, there is no way that the checksum values match, and in step S38 all areas of the RAM with built-in main control, except for a specific area, must be cleared.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on status command categorized as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on By creating a counter notification command for output determination and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball at power-on are generated. Only three commands, namely the counter notification command for determining the number information output, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, these commands first send a power-on status command, then a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then a main control return destination command when the power is turned on. A counter notification command for information output determination is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is used to press the RWM clear button on the payout control board 633 when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs). When the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch and the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to clear the RAM, information to that effect, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, (Including when power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs.), any of the above-mentioned low probability time saving states, high probability time saving states, low probability non time saving states, and high probability non time saving states. The machine consists of information indicating whether to return to the state (probability and time saving state) and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem occurs when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

When creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine is determined based on which work's copyright it corresponds to. What kind of game specifications (for example, a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs), as well as a game specification in which the number of changes of special symbols is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) It is possible to specify whether the game specifications (such as a so-called ST machine) are such that a probability change occurs in a state where

In the manufacturing line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works may coexist. Then, workers on the production line can determine which of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) has ownership over the copyright. You may not know whether the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright for a work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also a misconception or misunderstanding that it is flowing down the production line.

Therefore, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the production line worker will It is not possible to confirm which work's copyright belongs to the manufactured main control board 1310, and even if the copyright of the same work belongs to which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also impossible to confirm what type of game it is (type of game) and what kind of game specifications (game specifications or ST machines in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist. 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line sometimes attached a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there was a problem in that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreased.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control board 1310 inputs the model code of the pachinko machine when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs). In order to send a power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a power-on state command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, a worker on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 can turn on the power to the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from and sweet digital type, the series code to identify which type it is, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state will be changed. In addition to game specifications in which the state continues until the occurrence of a special symbol, a game specification code for specifying a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in the special symbol (ST machine, etc.); By visually checking detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on What type of machine is it (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type) and what kind of game specifications (if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs) It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or an ST machine.

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control board inspection process of the production line By being able to visually check the inspection monitor and accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the operator can classify the copyright of the work by main control board 1310 and perform subsequent work. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[10-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing will be explained. This main control side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 142 and 143.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU switches register banks as shown in FIG. 144 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks, each consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is the main routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is changed from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started, there is no need to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to a variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 lights up according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmits Performs time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands has been input. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. Note that these various times and ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU receives, for example, a detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, and a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402. detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403, detection signal from the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, detection signal from the first V winning opening sensor 2514, detection signal from the first losing opening sensor 2515, second Detection signal from the V winning opening sensor 3003, detection signal from the third losing opening sensor 3004, detection signal from the out opening left sensor 3032 and out opening right sensor 3033, detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and the detection signal from the payout control board 633. Signal from the RWM clear button 633z (This signal from the RWM clear button 633z is not an important signal in the main control side timer interrupt processing that is this routine, so it may be masked and reading may be omitted.) , a detection signal from the door frame release switch 4a, a detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, a detection signal from the left outlet sensor 3032, a detection signal from the right outlet sensor 3033, which will be described later. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633, which indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control process, is read, and the input information is stored in the main control built-in RAM as input information. Store in area. In addition, when the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402 are read, the corresponding starting port prize command classified into others is sent as transmission information to the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second starting port sensor 2402. When there is a detection signal, the starting opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Note that in this embodiment, when the switch input process is started, the state in which input is being input to all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those that have been processed as empty terminals) is , are each read for the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a third time, and the third and second reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a fourth time, and the fourth and third reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is the same, it will be treated as if no game ball entered or the input will be ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state of input to all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those that have been processed as empty terminals) is checked from the first to the third time. By performing a total of two readings, one for comparing the two readings and the second reading for comparing the second to fourth readings, it is possible to avoid false detections due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible to do so, the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, Detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403, detection signal from the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, detection signal from the first V winning opening sensor 2514, detection signal from the first losing opening sensor 2515, second V winning opening sensor Detection signal from 3003, detection signal from third loss opening sensor 3004, detection signal from left exit sensor 3032 and right exit exit sensor 3033, detection signal from magnetic sensor 2010, RWM clear button 633z of payout control board 633 (For example, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button, it becomes a setting value selection switching signal for selecting and switching the setting value.), a detection signal from the door frame release switch 4a, a detection signal from the main body frame Pays out the detection signal from the open switch 4b, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the detection signal from the out-port left sensor 3032, the detection signal from the out-port right sensor 3033, and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. The reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that indicates that the control board 633 has normally received it can be increased.

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal malfunction monitoring process, the status of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have undergone vacant terminal processing is checked based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is connected to the ground (GND) as a vacant terminal process, so that the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 determines whether or not the logic state of the input terminal to which vacant terminal processing has been applied is LOW among the input terminals of various input ports. Based on. When the main control MPU determines that the logic state of the input terminal that is being processed as an empty terminal is not LOW, it displays a notification indicating that a problem has occurred in the peripheral circuits of the main control MPU. The malfunction command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs win/loss random number update processing (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-mentioned symbol random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols, which are updated in the non-winning random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small prize symbol are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing to further enhance randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to winning/losing determination (hit/losing determination), each counter counts up only every time this winning/losing random number update process is performed. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination and initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are also updated by this win/loss random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is, as mentioned above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value. The range from 1 to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. It counts up from the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the initial value determining random number for hit determination is updated by this win/loss random number update process. The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which a value of 1 is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are used as the random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The winning/losing random number updating process and the winning/losing random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine are updated, but each time the interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven and the next If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs pitch counting processing (step S107). In this ball counting process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the exit left sensor 3032 is inputted to form a game area 5a on the game board 5. When the out-port left sensor 3032 detects game balls collected through the out-port 1008 provided in In addition to performing addition (incrementing) calculations, a detection signal from the right sensor 3033 for the out port is input, and the recovered game ball is sent to the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. When the right sensor 3033 detects the detection, a calculation is performed to add (increment) the value of 1 to the value of a collected ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008. In other words, in the ball count process, if the left sensor 3032 detects the game balls collected by the exit port 1008 and the right sensor 3033 detects the game balls collected by the exit port 1008, then , performs an operation to add the value 2 to the value of the recovered ball counter. The main control MPU stores the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, into an out ball counting area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. At the same time, the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. In addition, the main control MPU creates a ball collection command that notifies you when the value of the collected ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 balls. and stores it in the output information storage area as transmission information. Note that when the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value 65535), and the value of the recovered ball counter is further added (incremented) by 1, the main control MPU detects the recovered ball. The value of the counter overflows and becomes the value 0, and an operation is performed to add from this value 0.

Following step S107, the main control MPU performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 2005, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls. Therefore, in order to convey that fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 633. If the payer ACK signal indicating that the command has been successfully received by the payout control board 633 is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command is issued to check the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. It may be created and sent to the payout control board 633.

In addition, in the prize ball control process of step S108, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, if the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls. In order to convey this fact, a main prize pitch number information output command classified into others is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize pitch number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize pitch number information output determination counter. The value of this main prize ball number information output determination counter is determined based on the input information read from the input information storage area mentioned above, that is, the general winning hole 2001 provided on the game board 5, the normal winning hole 2003, Based on the game balls that have entered various winning holes (hereinafter referred to as "various winning holes provided on the game board 5") such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, and the big winning hole 2005. , which counts the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls, and is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. . In the prize ball control process in step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter that has been read is The input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of , and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value 10. (In other words, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls), create a main prize ball number information output command to convey that fact, and send it as the transmission information. In addition to storing the value in the output information storage area, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command). In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 633 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame state 2 command)) are stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. If it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave emission (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave emission") is being carried out, the value of the radio wave emission counter is incremented by 1. The value of this radio wave counter is incremented each time it is determined that a radio wave emission has occurred in the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the interrupt period of 4 ms in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). ), a radio wave irradiation notification command classified into a notification display informing that the radio wave irradiation is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In the fraud detection process in step S112, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 is input, fraud using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is detected. ) is being performed, and the value of the magnet counter is incremented by 1. The value of this magnet goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that radio wave irradiation has been performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, it is initialized. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the interrupt period of 4 ms in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). ), a magnet notification command classified into a notification display to notify that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. In this embodiment, by using such a mechanism to reliably detect and notify magnet spots, it is possible to contribute to the ability of staff such as game hall clerks to discover magnet spots at an early stage. It has become.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the big winning hole sensor 2403 is input when the jackpot game state is not (big winning hole When a game ball enters a game ball in 2005), a winning abnormality display command that is categorized as a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. .

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when the radio wave irradiation spot and/or the magnet spot are detected, the value 1 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as fraud detection; When no fraud is detected, a value of 0 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG, indicating that no fraud has been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. Further, even when the occurrence of abnormal winning in the big winning opening is detected, the value 1 may be set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs firing permission signal setting processing (step S113). In this firing permission signal setting process, the logic of the firing permission signal that informs the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that firing of the game ball B is permitted is set. Specifically, the main control MPU determines that when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, no fraud has been detected, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above. Sometimes, the launch permission logic is set as the logic of the launch permission signal and stored in the output information storage area mentioned above as output information, while when the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value is 1), that is, fraud is detected. When it is determined that the firing permission signal is detected, the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is an inversion of the firing permission logic, is set as the logic of the firing permission signal, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The main control MPU reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a is input, and the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4. When the door frame release switch 4a detects that the door frame release switch 4a detects that the door frame release switch 4a detects that the main body frame release switch 4a detects that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, a detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b is input. In this case, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is an inversion of the launch permission logic, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. As an initial value (default), the logic of the launch permission signal is set such that the launch permission signal setting process in step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine is performed after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (after the power is restored). It is constituted by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is an inversion of the firing permission logic, is set until the firing is started.

Following step S113, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit when the latch signal is input is used as the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. The random number is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the control MPU, and the obtained random number is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether the special random number (that is, the random number obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU) matches the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (jackpot It determines whether or not to generate a gaming state (referred to as "special lottery") and updates the symbol random number.The value of the counter is taken out and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance according to the jackpot type or small win type. It is determined whether or not the winning type matches any of the winning type determination values (determining the winning type).

If these judgment results (lottery results) are based on the first starting port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special map 1 synchronization effect are created, while the judgment results (lottery results) are determined by the second starting port sensor 2402. , create various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect and store them in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and determine the fluctuation display pattern of the special symbol based on the random number for the fluctuation display pattern described above. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is changed so that the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when the jackpot gaming state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related (jackpot opening command, jackpot opening 1 opening Nth display command, jackpot opening 1 closing display command, jackpot opening command, jackpot opening 1 opening display command, jackpot opening command, jackpot opening command, A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, a drive signal is sent to the attacker solenoid 2414 to open and close the opening/closing member. When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the big prize opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is 2, the 2nd round indicator of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. A lighting signal is set to be output to the second round indicator lamp so that the round indicator lamp is lit, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area, and when the number of rounds is 15, the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 is The function display unit 1400 sets the output of a lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp so that the 15th round indicator lamp lights up, stores it in the output information storage area as output information, and lights it in a predetermined color to indicate whether or not time saving has occurred. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning hole winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the normal winning hole sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment mentioned above is extracted and is stored in the main control as normal winning opening winning information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

This normal winning opening winning information storage area is provided with 0th section to 3rd section (4 sections), and the normal winning opening is arranged in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning hole winning information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the normal winning hole winning information storage, when the detection signal from the normal winning hole sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal of the input port, it is normal. The winning hole winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning hole winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this normal winning slot winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the second winning opening winning information is stored in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. The normal winning slot winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the normal winning opening winning information of the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. Shifted, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, if the normal winning slot winning information is stored in the first section to the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning opening winning information. The regular winning slot winning information in the second compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage is shifted to the 0th compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage, and the regular winning slot winning information in the second compartment of the regular winning opening winning information storage is shifted to the first compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage. The second section and the third section for storing the winning information of the normal winning opening are empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is held and the normal winning opening of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. In order to light up the hold display, the output of the lighting signal for the normal hold display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal winning opening winning information, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area mentioned above.

Following the normal winning hole winning process, the normal winning hole winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted from the read normal winning hole winning information, and the main control It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Based on the result of this determination (the result of a normal lottery), it is determined whether the movable piece should be opened or closed. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the movable piece is in the opening operation state, resulting in a gaming state in which the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. The fluctuating display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the fluctuating display pattern of the regular symbol mentioned above, various commands classified as related to the synchronized production of the common symbol are created, and the above-mentioned transmission information is stored as the transmission information. At the same time, the output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and output information is stored in the area. is stored in the output information storage area described above.

In addition, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit judgment matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric role performance are created and sent. In addition to storing information in the transmission information storage area, the output of a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2412 is set to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information, while the extracted normal When the value of the random number for symbol hit determination does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above. , creates various commands related to the common pattern synchronization performance, stores them as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and lights up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to cause the function display unit 1400 to do so, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. In this example, the probability of winning the normal lottery (probability of winning normally) is 1/2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs a setting value confirmation display process (step S117). In this setting value confirmation display process, detailed explanation will be given later, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and based on this input information, a process is performed to detect opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. When the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b and the setting key are inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is at the initial position (that is, the rotation of the setting key cylinder to turn off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a clockwise by 60 degrees clockwise from the setting key switch 1311a. By determining that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the frame 2 and determining that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established. On the other hand, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and/or the setting key is turned on due to the setting key ON signal. By determining that the setting key of the switch 1311a is not turned on, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied. In the set value confirmation display process, when the set value display permission condition is met, a lighting signal is sent to display the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. The output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, while if the set value display permission condition is satisfied, the process ends and returns to the present routine.

Following step S117, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area mentioned above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when the main control MPU successfully receives various commands from the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information, the main control MPU sends a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633. When in the jackpot game state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the big winning opening 2005, and a drive signal is output to the starting opening solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting opening winning information Outputs various information (gaming information) signals related to games such as output signals to the payout control board 633, and outputs a launch permission signal set to the launch permission logic or launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633. It also outputs a display signal to the base monitor 1310h that displays the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, and outputs a display signal to the base monitor 1310h that displays the result of counting the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008. It outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronized performance, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronized performance, and various commands classified as related to jackpot created in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. Various commands (for example, a big winning hole 1 count display command that corresponds to a big winning hole count command based on the detection signal from the big winning hole sensor 2403 when a game ball entering the big winning hole 2005 is detected) , various commands categorized as power-on, various commands categorized as related to general figure synchronization performance, various commands categorized as related to normal electric role production, various commands categorized as notification display, various commands categorized as status display. commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others (for example, the main control board 1310 plans to pay out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls that enter the various winning holes provided on the game board 5) A main prize ball that instructs to transmit a main prize ball number information output signal as main prize ball number information to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 every time the number of game balls reaches 10 balls. (number information output command, etc.), and various commands categorized into specific history (for example, a ball collection command that notifies you every time the number of game balls collected at the out exit 1008 reaches 10 balls, a setting value is set. A setting change command that indicates that a change has been made, an error display command that indicates that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and a specific area of the main control built-in RAM A setting key ON operation command (such as a setting key ON operation command that conveys confirmation of setting values stored in a setting value dedicated area, which will be described later) is stored. One packet of the main cycle serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data includes a status that indicates the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode that indicates a variation of the effect that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As mentioned above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V DC to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. The main serial transmission port built in the main control MPU at least transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main serial data. is now possible. When powering on the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs after the power is turned on, the data is transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 143. In order to notify that the power has been restored, a power-on state command categorized as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information at power-on are set to notify that the power has been restored. Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the main cycle serial data consists of the status, mode, and sum value that make up the power-on status command. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the command to return to the main control when the power is turned on, are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the main prize ball count information when the power is turned on. The output determination counter notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read from the gaming backup information and the data is stored according to this various information. In some cases, various commands are stored. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information, then the status command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command will be transmitted.

Note that whenever the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command to inform the peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command. For each ball collection command, the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 is counted, and ball collection information (the counted value (i.e., the counted value (i.e., at the out port 1008) is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). (Total number of game balls to be collected) and information that associates the updated date and time) are updated. Note that if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off at the end of the game hall's business hours without receiving the ball collection command, the last counted value (that is, the game ball collected at the exit 1008) Ball collection information that associates the total number of balls) with the updated date and time is stored and held in a built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on when the game hall starts operating, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 transfers the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) to the pachinko machine 1 for operation. Ball recovery information is created again from the day it started, and the ball recovery information is stored as ball recovery history information in the built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). Note that the counted value stored and held as ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day, or the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the values counted so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU. This clears the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT. Then, by restarting time measurement by the built-in main control WDT, the main control MPU does not have to be forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT.

Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 performs the backup function described above for storing game information based on the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be executed and completed, and when the power is restored, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup process was executed as the destination for the main control board 1310 to resume playing the game. When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command is output to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414, which are electrical drive sources, by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine. It is now possible to do so. That is, the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM when setting the work area of A main control return destination command when the power is turned on and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and step S120 in this routine is performed. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main serial data is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on status command, and then the main control return destination at power-on is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and sum value are sent to the peripheral control board 1510, which constitute the main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command when the power is turned on. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 determines the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored based on the main control return destination command at power-on from the main control board 1310 in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can be displayed in effect. As a result, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, and the power is restored afterwards, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage can be restored after the power is restored. At the same time, it is possible to notify the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 by displaying an effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 can be kept in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from seeing something and being mistaken for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that a malfunction has occurred.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process that is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 1, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are necessarily cleared. As a result, when the reservation setting for the command to be sent at power-on is performed in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. By creating a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on, and storing them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, when the power is turned on. A state in which only three commands, the status command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, in the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of this routine, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, are sent to the inspection equipment in the main control board inspection process as main serial data in the order of Then, when the power is turned on, the main control return destination command is sent to the inspection equipment of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then when the power is turned on, the main prize ball number information is output. A determination counter notification command is sent to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection step configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code to identify the model type among the Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in special symbols (ST Detailed machine type information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for specifying the machine (such as machine).

[16-4. Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change process will be explained. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 142.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU obtains the current installation values as shown in FIG. 145 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU obtains the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this setting value, it may be read out or taken out, but when taking out the setting value, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by considering the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values, and is the checksum performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is the same process as calculating .

Following step S202, the main control MPU stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off process (power off) in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. It is determined whether the checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) (step S204). In step S204, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is the value 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 142, respectively. As mentioned above, the backup flag BK-FLG is used to store game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power-off process, which will be described later. This is a flag that indicates whether or not it has been stored in the RAM. It is set to 1 when the main control side power off processing has been completed normally, and set to 0 when the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed. be done.

In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1. (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, it is determined whether the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the "normal range" is a value that can be changed as a setting value, and in this embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value It is preset to a value up to 6. When the flowchart proceeds to the determination in step S208, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally at the time of power-off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU determines that the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 are within the normal range. It is determined whether the set value is within the normal range, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S208, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, it sets the initial value, ie, the setting value 1, to the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In addition, in the determination in step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is one of the setting values 1 to 6 that is within the normal range. However, without performing the determination in step S208, in the determination in step S204, the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match. or in the determination at step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally. In some cases, the process may proceed to step S210 and set the setting value 1, which is an initial value, to the setting value acquired in step S200.

In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, that the main control side power-off processing has been normally completed, or in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU When the MPU determines that the setting change permission lamp 1310z is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

Following step S214, the main control MPU determines whether the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S216). As mentioned above, the RWM clear button 633z has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch), and here, the RWM clear button 633z has a function that serves three functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch). Operates as a button function. This determination is made by reading a signal (setting value selection switching signal) that indicates that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated, and inputting a setting change signal of the setting value from the RWM clear button 633z. Determine whether or not. When the setting value selection switching signal from the RWM clear button 633z is input, the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, and on the other hand, it determines that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is input, When the selection switching signal is not input, it is determined that the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated.

In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the main control MPU performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value to update it (step S218 ). At this time, when acquiring the setting value in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a predetermined area, this predetermined area The value 1 will be added (incremented) to the set value set in .

Following step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g, and displays the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, the main control MPU determines whether or not the enter key has been operated. Determination is made (step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU sets the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. When the key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees (that is, from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (in other words, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) The setting key switch is turned OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position (rotated position), and then turning it OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the second ON operation. 1311a determines that the enter key has been operated based on the enter key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the enter key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, When the enter key ON signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the enter key is not operated.

In the determination of step S222, when the main control MPU determines that the enter key is not operated, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S216 and determines whether or not the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the main control MPU performs the processing of step S218 and step S220 again, performs the determination of step S222, and presses the enter key. When it is determined that the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, the process returns to step S216, and the set value changes to 1 each time the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is operated until the enter key is operated. If the push operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the setting value updated by the previous operation of the push operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is displayed on the setting display 1310g. will be displayed. Note that even if a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power is restored before it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the setting value updated immediately before the power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs will be used for main control. Since it is not stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, it is discarded, and the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, it stores the updated setting value in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when acquiring the setting value in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a predetermined area, this predetermined area The updated setting value is returned to the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the RAM with built-in main control. Even if a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power is restored after the process of step S224 is completed, the updated setting value when the enter key was operated before the power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs will be stored in the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in a setting value dedicated area in a specific area.

Following step S224, the main control MPU determines whether there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU moves the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder is turned on). The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so as to return to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the switch 1311a OFF, and by performing the OFF operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, while the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input. Sometimes, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

In the determination of step S226, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S226 and repeats the determination of step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, when determining in step S226 that the setting key has been turned OFF, the main control MPU stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to the value 0 (step S232). As described above, this setting change permission flag CS-FLG indicates the current setting value (when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is in the first This is a flag indicating whether or not to allow changes to the settings (values set among settings 1 to 6 at the time of operation), and when permission is given to change settings. The value is set to 1, and the value is set to 0 when changing the setting value is not permitted. In the process of step S232, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to the value 0, thereby disallowing the setting value to be changed from now on.

Following step S232, the main control MPU determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The "normal range" is the same as that determined in step S208, and as described above, in this embodiment, the "normal range" is set to set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value. It is preset to a value up to 6. In the determination in step S233, the main control MPU confirms that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether the value is within the range of set value 1 to set value 6, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as is.

In the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that the range is within the normal range, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial settings (step S234), then creates a setting change command and sets transmission information (step S236), Next, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing is performed to transmit the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumferential serial data (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This process is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, which is performed before the serial communication initial setting in step S44, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is mainly transmitted in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238. This data is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial serial data, but this is given priority before the command to be sent at power-on is reserved in step S50 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed using a setting change command. Note that the setting change command is a command that conveys the changed setting value and the completion of setting value storage. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information that associates the setting value with the date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). do.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, it performs an error display process (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state where the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[16-5. Setting value confirmation display processing]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be explained. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 144.

When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU determines whether the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0 (step S350), as shown in FIG. 146. This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the value is 1, the setting Each is set to the value 0 when the value is not displayed for confirmation.

In the determination in step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the setting value is not displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU determines whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on. (Step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU reads input information from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, detects the detection from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). When the setting key switch 1311a is rotated by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the main body frame 4 to move against the outer frame 2. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. On the other hand, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and/or the setting key switch 1311a is determined to be turned on by the setting key ON signal. By determining that there is no setting value, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination of step S352, when the main control MPU determines that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU immediately ends this routine, while the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the setting value is to be displayed for confirmation, the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 1 (step S354), and the current setting value is subsequently obtained (step S356). Here, the main control MPU obtains the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU determines whether the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process in FIG. The values are set in advance to value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6. In the determination in step S357, the main control MPU determines the setting value obtained in step S356 (in other words, in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether the set value (stored in the set value stored in do.

In the determination of step S357, when the main control MPU determines that the setting value is within the normal range, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU creates a setting key ON operation command, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the setting key ON operation command (step S360 ), this routine ends. This setting key ON operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The setting key ON operation command indicates that the setting value confirmation display process that is this routine has started (that is, to confirm the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). This is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 generates setting key ON operation history information (when the setting value has been confirmed) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). information that associates the date and time).

Further, upon receiving the setting key ON operation command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 generates the above-mentioned ball recovery history information, setting value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information. A predetermined condition for permitting display of specific history information is established, such as permitting display of specific history information such as . The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 allows a person who checks the specific history information to perform a rotation operation on the rotary operation section 302 and a press operation on the press operation section 303 in a state in which the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied. By doing this, control is performed to switch from the image that has been displayed to a specific history information display image that selectively displays specific history information and to display it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S350, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key has been turned OFF when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the determination key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. On the other hand, if the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

In the determination in step S362, if the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, it ends this routine as is, but if it determines that the setting key has been turned OFF, it does not display the setting value for confirmation. The confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. Then, the acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then a setting key OFF operation command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , sets the setting key OFF operation command (step S368), and ends this routine. This setting key OFF operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The setting key OFF operation command indicates that the setting value confirmation display processing of this routine has been completed (that is, confirmation of the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been completed). This is a command that conveys.

Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the above-described predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 was controlling to display the above-mentioned specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Control is performed to switch to the image that was displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and return to the original image.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S357, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, it sets interrupt disallowance (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 144, which was repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

Following step S370, the main control MPU performs error display processing (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop in which it continues to clear the main control built-in WDT (step S374). This infinite loop causes the main control built-in WDT to continue to be cleared, but since the main control built-in WDT cannot be stopped once started, the main control built-in WDT cannot be stopped by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT. By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and by restarting the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT, the main control by the main control built-in WDT is resumed. The MPU does not have to be forcibly reset. Furthermore, due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[16-6. Error display processing]
Next, error display processing will be explained. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 142, and a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 146), and the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the firing permission signal, as shown in FIG. 147 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal is to notify the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch permission signal is activated. On the other hand, if the logic is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the inverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to tell that launch is to be stopped (non-permitted). .

The error display process that is this routine is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 142 or a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. (Specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 145), the main control MPU interrupts the step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 144 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the same process cannot be performed. The firing permission signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function. The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the inversion of the firing permission logic.

Therefore, the error display process that is this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 142 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 145), the main control MPU displays an error message that is the main routine after power is restored in step S400. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired even after the process has started, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (launching non-permission logic) and the prescribed output port is It is output from the output terminal of the main control output circuit with a reset function to the firing control section 633b of the paying-out control board 633.

When the error display process that is this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 146, the main control MPU In the determination, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 143, the main control MPU has already performed the interrupt permission setting shown in FIG. Since interrupts are not permitted in step S370 in the setting value confirmation display processing, when the error display processing of this routine is finished, an infinite loop is entered as described above, so that the main control side shown in FIG. 144 Timer interrupt processing cannot be performed, and firing permission signal setting processing in step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process that is this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. In order to reliably prevent game ball B from being fired under certain conditions, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (launching non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the specified output port. It is output to the firing control section 633b of the paying-out control board 633 via the main control output circuit with function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the alphabetical character E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial settings (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and then sets the transmission information in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing is performed to transmit the transmission information (error display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data (step S410), and this routine ends.

The serial communication initial settings in step S406 are the same as the serial communication initial settings in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 145 and the serial communication initial settings in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 145 and the main control side timer interrupt processing in FIG. 144. This processing is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. The error display process of this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 142, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 146) and the process performed in step S372 of the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, serial communication initial settings are performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is sent to the peripheral control board as main serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410. It is sending to 1510.

Note that the error display command is a command that informs that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 generates error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the date and time of reception) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). ) to update.

In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it displays a message in the display area of the effect display device 1600 with a blue background image saying "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." In addition to controlling the display of a message image in white text, the system also adjusts the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff" by rotating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Control is performed such that the volume is forcibly set to be the maximum volume without depending on the volume set, and is played from various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, main body frame speaker 622, etc.). The process of notifying a RAM error using an error display command is a process with the highest priority. Give top priority to error notification.

[11. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 137 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing an example of the process when the power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the process when the power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing, and FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt processing. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be explained, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be explained.

[11-1. Payout control unit power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 148 to 150. . When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the interrupt priority of the payout control MPU. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, that process is performed preferentially.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output settings (I/O input/output settings) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether a power outage notice signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input as a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds ( ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is made based on a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated (step S512). As mentioned above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function that serves three functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch), and here, the RWM clear button 633z has a function that serves three functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch), and here, the It functions as a RAM clear switch to completely erase information. This determination is made when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is HI, it is determined that the RAM is not cleared, and the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, and the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is to be cleared and the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. It is determined that the press operation section is being operated.

In the determination of step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 1 (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU is in a state where it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time from the time the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, such as various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area The prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in , and the logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase payout information related to payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.), and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is to be erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not to be erased. Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs settings to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, it is possible to access the payout control built-in RAM, and, for example, write (storage) or read payout information.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets a stack pointer (step S520). For example, the stack pointer can indicate an address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or it can temporarily indicate the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after exiting a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded onto the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the register contents, return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. The stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not to be erased.

In the determination of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not to be deleted, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum thereof.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (at the time of power-off), which will be described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is the value 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value has been stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off processing described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is normally completed, and the value is set to 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has been normally completed, the payout control MPU uses the payout control built-in RAM as the power restoration. A work area is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 0, power restoration information is read from the ROM built into the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM), and when the power is restored, Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage areas, etc. (for example, the prize information stored in the prize ball information storage area, Ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the CR communication information storage area. Information used for various processes is set based on payout information regarding payout (inconsistency counter reset judgment time, etc.) stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state where the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state where the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the payout information is to be deleted, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU When it is determined that the power-off processing of the payout control unit has not been completed normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets a work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is for setting the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by sequentially setting value A, value B, and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, as described above, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In the determination of step S540, when the dispensing control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1 (step S542). This 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing that is processed every 2ms, which will be described later.When 2ms has passed, the value is 1, and when 2ms has not passed, the value is 0. Set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the dispensing control MPU returns to step S540, and the dispensing control MPU receives the input power failure warning signal. Determine whether or not.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that 2ms have elapsed, the payout control MPU sets the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 0 (step S544 ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this various information, various signals are outputted from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU. The output information storage area includes, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) have been successfully received from the main control board 1310, and drive control for the payout motor 584. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED indicator is stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 and a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or, the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is outputted to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the number of balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is outputted to the external terminal board 558). Each time the ball is put out, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558.

Specifically, a counter for determining the output of prize ball number information is provided to determine whether or not to output the prize ball number information. The number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550, which will be described later. The information is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (not shown) for monitoring.

In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, a counter for outputting prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is used. The memory is updated by adding to the value the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550, which will be described later.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from this prize ball information storage area, and if the read value of the prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( In other words, when the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control described above as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter.), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals inputted to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z (for example, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error release switch, it becomes an error release signal to notify that the error displayed on the error LED display has been cleared), A detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal, a BRDY signal and a CR connection signal from the CR unit are transmitted in the command transmission process described later. A main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that indicates that the main control board 1310 has successfully received the various commands received is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball jamming determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball jamming state has occurred due to the dispensing blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is transmitted, The skip determination time is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and the skip determination time is set as a determination condition when determining whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 during the full tank determination time. In addition to managing time such as the ball outage determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls received and put out by the ball storage portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 When determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the inconsistent payout of game balls due to the discrepancy between the number of balls detected and the number of balls detected in Performs time management of the conditions and the set mismatch counter reset judgment time. For example, when the ball jam determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms, so each time this timer update process is performed, the ball jam determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the result of the subtraction is the value By setting it to 0, the ball jam judgment time is accurately measured. Note that these various judgment times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the RAM with built-in payout control in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the RAM with built-in payout control, various information stored in the various information storage areas. etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc.) Information used for various processes is set based on payout information regarding payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc. in which the logical state of the signal is set).

Through this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power outage or power outage, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. to the values immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage. As a result, even if you are unable to continue the putting-out operation due to a momentary power outage or power outage while the putting-out device 580 is performing the putting-out operation of game balls, the putting-out operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, when the payout control MPU is paying out game balls to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process, a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the CR unit Even if the exchange of various signals is interrupted and it becomes impossible to continue paying out game balls, the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. will be maintained when the power is restored. The values are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage, which are stored as payout backup information. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a power outage can be continued from the time power is restored, and game balls can continue to be paid out. ing.

In this way, even if the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit exchange various signals, even if there is a momentary power outage or stoppage, when the power is restored, the exchange will be restored to the state immediately before the momentary power outage or stoppage. This prevents various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit from changing due to the influence of a momentary power outage or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be improved.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the RAM with built-in payout control, which was set in the process of setting the work area of the RAM with built-in payout control in step S530. If the PRDY signal output setting information read by the lever is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is used for payout control. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as a part of the main operation setting process, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information. Based on this, it is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is an abnormal operation. It is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, and the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1, and in the payout ball gag operation determination setting process, As a setting for outputting an error state to the CR unit, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit, the logic state (LOW) of the PRDY signal is output, which indicates that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt from the time of power restoration, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. output to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before a momentary power outage, that state will be restored when the power is restored, so it can be done very quickly after the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal can be outputted to the CR unit from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, and the payout device 580 is sent to the CR unit. It is possible to notify that the payout operation of the game ball is in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting BRDY, which is a wasteful ball rental request signal, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control, and based on this CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, the PRDY While the logic state of the signal is set to HI and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logic state of the PRDY signal to LOW to convey that the payout operation for paying out rental balls is impossible. output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. The logic state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and is communicated with the payout control board 633. A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the status information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out of ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out of ball checking process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, the lower tray 202 described above is stored in the game ball based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether the tank is full or not, and the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 described above is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574. to determine whether or not the For example, to determine whether or not the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls, the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is used to determine whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls or not by using the current fullness and out of ball check processing. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 turns OFF in the previous full tank and bulb out check process (2 ms ago), that is, the detection signal from the full tank sensor 154 changes from OFF to ON. When the transition occurs, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the full tank determination time described above. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes the value 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank and out of bulb check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is full with stored game balls, and full tank information indicating this is stored in the above-mentioned status information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls, and full tank information indicating the fact is stored in the status information storage area.

The current full and out of ball check process also uses the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to determine whether the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. When the detection signal from the out-of-bulb switch is ON, and the detection signal from the out-of-bulb switch is OFF during the previous full charge and out-of-bulb check process (2 ms ago), that is, the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is When the transition is made from OFF to ON, measurement of the above-mentioned ball outage determination time is started in the timer update process of step S552. Then, when the ball outage determination time reaches the value 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball outage determination time has come, the detection signal from the ball outage detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and ball outage check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than a predetermined number, and a ball cut to that effect is sent. While the information is stored in the status information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number. Ball-out information that conveys this fact is stored in the status information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) are received from the main control board 1310. When these various commands are received normally, payer ACK information that conveys the fact is stored in the output information storage area mentioned above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, there is a connection error that indicates that there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in the various command signals). The information is stored in the state information storage area mentioned above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize ball, rental ball, ball removal, and ball holding, etc. are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. .

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned status information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and is stored as LED display information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. do. For example, the above-mentioned ball outage information is read from the status information storage area, and based on this ball outage information, if the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number, the corresponding Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command sending process, various types of information are read from the status information storage area mentioned above, and various commands classified into status displays (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) are created based on this various information. and transmits it to the main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, if the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number, the frame state 1 It creates a command and sends it to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, value A, value B, and value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines in step S540 whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input, and determines whether or not the power outage warning signal has been input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, and when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, 2ms have elapsed, step S544 is performed. In step S546, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, in step S546 the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, in step S548 port output processing is performed, in step S550 port input processing is performed, and in step S552 performs timer update processing in step S554, performs CR communication processing in step S556, performs full tank and bulb out check processing in step S556, performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, and performs command analysis processing in step S562. Main operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. Note that the processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main processing".

The processing contents of the payout control section main processing vary depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for processing by the payout control MPU will vary. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received. There is. Thereby, the payout control MPU secures enough processing time to perform other fluctuating processing.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets interrupt prohibition (step S570). With this setting, the payout control section timer interrupt processing to be described later is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM, and protecting the above-mentioned payout information from being rewritten.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). This stops the payout of game balls.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, this clear setting is performed by sequentially setting value A, value B, and value C in watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared and set because the value A, value B, and value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. Note that the processing from step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the payout control unit performs power-on processing when the power is restored thereafter.

In addition, in step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step S528, it is checked whether the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the payout backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

[11-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be explained. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 148 to 150.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saved) the register, as shown in FIG. 151 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described main processing of the payout control unit is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control section timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 1 (step S592). This 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2ms, and the value is 1 when 2ms have passed, and the value is 0 when 2ms have not passed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). In this return, the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is switched to a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control section main processing, the value of the auxiliary register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control section timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[12. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 156. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. First, we will explain the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and then we will explain the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, the priority order of interrupt processing is set to the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. The order is set as V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[12-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 152. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs initial setting processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes the process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, the process of determining hot start/cold start, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, the process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required to initialize the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC can be initialized in an extremely short time. can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC enters a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs commands related to control of game effects, which are output from the main control board 1310. The pachinko machine 1 is in a state where it can receive various commands such as commands regarding the status of the pachinko machine 1 and the status of the pachinko machine 1.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once, when the power is turned on. Further, after performing this current time information acquisition processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute peripheral control section steady processing, which will be described later.When executing peripheral control section steady processing, the value is 1; When not executed, each is set to the value 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to indicate that it is ready to accept screen data (information that defines the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed in response to the above. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), it returns to step S1006 again and determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1. It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such a determination, the peripheral control unit enters a standby state until the steady state processing is executed. Furthermore, after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset. ing.

In the determination in step S1006, when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control section steady processing is to be executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. A value of 1 is set (step S1008). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and is set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1ms interrupt timer is activated to execute the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the number of times this 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized by setting the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting. This 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this performance operation unit monitoring process, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process to be described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the performance operation unit 300, The rotation (rotation direction) and rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 are controlled based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382 (hereinafter referred to as "various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300"). Various information obtained from the operation of the press operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300, and press operation The rotation direction of the rotary operation section 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the press operation section 303 are monitored based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which the operation history information of the rotation operation section 303 and the like are set. It is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation unit 303 is to be reflected in the game performance. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the production operation unit information acquisition processing, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is rewritten according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the volume and brightness adjustments are reflected in real time, and the performance progresses with the adjusted volume and brightness.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the production operation unit monitoring processing. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of an LED used as direct light, the brightness of an LED used as indirect light, and Set each. While the performance is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the performance operation section 301 (rotary operation section 302, press operation section 303) to set the first When a specified brightness value ranging from the specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness, is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is set to the specified brightness value. It is now possible to update the information.

Here, the brightness specification value, normal palette value, and special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly explained. The specified brightness value can be set to one of the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (turns off) to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance in correspondence with the 0th (zero) brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value, respectively. The player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the operable performance operation section 301 (rotary operation section 302, press operation section 303) to change the 31st brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. One specified brightness value can be set up to the specified value.

For example, when a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 clockwise, the current brightness is temporarily set to the 0th (zero) brightness, which is the minimum brightness (lights out). When the brightness is set to the first specified brightness value, which is the next highest level of brightness, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed along a tone curve (or a spline tone curve) to increase the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. When rotating clockwise and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear (or a spline-like tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to become lower. When a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) rotates the rotary operation section 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the press operation section 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In addition, in this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance in which the player (or a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall) can set the brightness while the performance is in progress. , etc.) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303. In addition, when a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) operates the rotary operation unit 302, a predetermined position of the display area of the performance display device 1600 while the performance is in progress is displayed with a first brightness specified value to a 31st brightness value. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator that indicates the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate as an image the desired brightness level of the player (or the staff such as a clerk at the game hall). It is now possible to do so. Further, in this embodiment, the 14th specified brightness value is set as the initial value (default).

Normally, the palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards installed on the game board side and various decorative boards installed on the door frame side, which are irradiated with direct light. be. Normally, the palette value is selected from 17 stages in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%) to the maximum palette value (100%), and the brightness described above is selected. The pallet value corresponding to one brightness designation in the 32-step range from the 0th (zero) brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value is determined by a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve). , or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one brightness designation among the 32-level range from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which are the brightness designation values mentioned above. (100%), and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) written in parentheses is the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the brightness specified value mentioned above. This is the value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one brightness designation in the 32-step range up to the 31st brightness designation value.

In this embodiment, the maximum palette value (100%) is normally selected in advance for the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are irradiated with direct light. Among the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that are set as the above-mentioned gradation information and are irradiated with direct light, the palette The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the above-mentioned gradation information.

The special palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used in a light guide plate that is irradiated with indirect light. The special palette value differs from the normal palette value in that it has only one level, and is one of the 32 levels from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. Palette values corresponding to the brightness designation are set as the above-mentioned gradation information along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate will be darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value that is set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light using indirect light at the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (lights out). The lowest possible brightness is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th specified brightness value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value. Among them, the palette value corresponding to one specified brightness value is set along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

In this way, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of brightness specified values, normal palette values, and special palette values. When setting the brightness of the LED and the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall) sets the brightness by operating the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303. While the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) can control the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section. The brightness is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness specified value by the operation 303. As a result, when a player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and sets it by operating the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 in order to reduce the brightness, it is possible to use the LED as direct light. The brightness of the LED to be used is set to the lowest brightness (in other words, the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the minimum brightness (turns off), and the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level), and Therefore, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light was set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (turns off)). However, since the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), The lowest brightness that allows the light guide plate to visually recognize the state in which it emits light by indirect light is set.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards installed on the game board side and various decorative boards installed on the door frame side, in contrast to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if you do not set it, you can set the lighting mode that follows the flow of the performance, and the flow of the performance depending on the lighting mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. After looking at this, set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a particular decorative board that is too bright (or the effect would be better achieved with a slightly darker brightness), and set the other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for the decorative board, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed extremely easily. In other words, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) operates the operable performance operation section 301 (rotary operation section 302, press operation section 303) to change the brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. Even if one brightness specification value that extends up to the brightness specification value is set, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one brightness specification value will be set for a specific decorative board. , For other decorative boards, one luminance specified value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set respectively, so the relationship between the mutually set luminous modes (bright or dark) The brightness can be adjusted extremely easily without destroying the relationship (

Furthermore, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of indirect light from a light guide plate compared to direct light, special palette values that are different from the normal palette values (in other words, independent from the normal palette values) are required for LEDs used as indirect light. You can now set the brightness. As a result, the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light is managed by special palette values, and the brightness of LEDs used as direct light is managed by normal palette values. The brightness of the LED and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and generates one screen on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC. (one frame worth) of drawing data is output to the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In addition, in the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. This makes it possible to prevent delays in processing time, but although so-called dropped frames may occur, the vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, main body frame The system is such that priority can be given to presentations using presentation sounds such as music and sound effects that match various presentations from various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers").

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel. . As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, out of the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, it is necessary to instruct which screen data, starting from the first screen data, is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC. , update the pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is used to indicate which light emitting data is to be output from the first light emitting data among the light emitting data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode. Update.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the sound data of production sounds such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds, which are arranged in chronological order and constitute the sound generation schedule data, The pointer is updated to instruct which number of sound command data from the first sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that make up the electric drive source schedule data, which drive data is to be output from the first drive data? Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data for electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitutes the electrical drive source schedule data, is a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated in motor and solenoid drive processing. In the motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed every time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in chronological order is performed. Updates the pointer to the data, and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. In other words, the drive data pointed to by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so if for some reason the pointer points to the original point in the motor and solenoid drive process, Even if the drive data that is supposed to be used instructs other drive data, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that was originally supposed to be used.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, and the various received commands are analyzed and used for various settings of the performance. Random numbers (for example, random numbers used for effects related to pending prefetching) are updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and in this received command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes various commands. Based on the analyzed various commands, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM. (Extract it) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the received command analysis processing. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the above-mentioned brightness specified value, normal palette value, and special palette value. and set respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) schedule data for generating light emitting modes from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs lamp palette setting processing. Then, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the production operation section 301 (rotary operation section 302, press operation section 303) to change the brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. When a single luminance specification value up to the 31st luminance specification value is set, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so that the set luminance specification value is used. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a command from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, a starting opening winning command for instructing the start of a starting opening winning presentation, a normal symbol A normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of reservations (0 to 4), and a variation pattern for instructing the start of a variation display such as a variation display of a decorative symbol on the production display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of a special symbol. The command, the symbol memory command that is output when the starting pending number changes, and the big winning hole 1 count display command that is output every time a game ball is accepted in the big winning hole 2005 are analyzed, and it is determined which game is currently being played. Recognize the condition.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the received command analysis processing. Analyzes various commands. Various commands include various commands related to special figure 1 synchronized production, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronized production, various commands related to jackpot, various commands classified to power on, and general commands. Various commands classified as figure synchronization performance related, various commands classified as normal electric role performance related, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test related, etc. There are various other types of commands. Additionally, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process regarding notices etc. based on the received command, and based on the lottery results, schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical Drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

Note that the peripheral control ROM stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control section 1511, the effect display control section 1511, and the like. Various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data for generating light emission modes for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sounds for generating production sounds such as music and sound effects. There are schedule data for generation, and electric drive source schedule data for generating the driving mode of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging light emission mode data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , and a track number for instructing in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands categorized as notification display, the abnormality display mode is set to execute various abnormality notifications. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in warning processing, if multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification will be performed in the order of priority registered in advance, and the system will automatically move to other abnormality notifications that remain after the abnormality has been resolved. It is supposed to be done. This makes it possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing information that the first abnormality has occurred because another abnormality occurs after the first abnormality occurs and before that abnormality is resolved. Can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. Through this RCT acquisition information update process, hours, minutes, and seconds, which are time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, are updated, and calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on this updated time information. The date will be updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation is transferred to the peripheral control ROM. It is read out from (extracted from) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 based on the input screen data. (one frame worth) of drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the sound command data indicated by the pointer is selected from among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

In addition, in the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is adjusted based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. has been identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch, and outputs the output set in the sound data creation process in the sound data output process of step S1018. Output sound data from the channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is varied by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into a value in 1024 steps up to the value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024-level value is divided into seven parts and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. At board volume 0, the volume is set to mute, and at board volume 6, the volume is set to maximum, and the volume is set so that it increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the sound source is output from the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. Music and sound effects are played from here. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the bass body frame speaker 622 on the body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch. It looks like this.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is installed, and the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC have production sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value that adjusts the sound data and its volume, the sound data and volume of the notification sound that is used to notify the hall staff, etc. of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted. Includes subvolume values.

Specifically, for production sound, the above-mentioned board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value, and for notification sound, the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the production sound is determined during a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display. A certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the device (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) Until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the variable pattern command was received by the peripheral control unit and after the variable display of the decorative pattern started, or 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the peripheral control unit received the stop display command and the final display of the decorative pattern has elapsed. ) can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example operates for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral Until 0.5 seconds elapse after the control unit receives the fluctuation pattern command and the decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner, or after the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command and 0.5 seconds after the final display of the decorative pattern. By operating the rotary operation section 302 or press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch can be applied to the board in the sound data creation process. The volume is converted into 7 levels of values from 0 to 6, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is used to operate the rotational operation section 302 and press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume and setting the board volume.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, the volume is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, and this amplified performance sound is serialized. It is designed to be output as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized performance sound is at the maximum volume, the top central speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side is amplified to the master volume value. The volume of the sound coming from the top side speaker 464 and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value to adjust the volume is synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound is actually adjusted to the top center of the door frame 3 side. The speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4 amplify the volume up to the master volume value, and serialize this amplified performance sound and output it as audio data, and use it as notification sound. For this, the volume is adjusted based on the sound data of the notification sound built into the track being used and the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch, which is set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the notification sound built into the track being used. The maximum volume without depending on The amplified notification sound is amplified to a master volume value corresponding to the volume of the sound coming from the frame speaker 622, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, if the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, a problem may occur in the pachinko machine 1 or the pachinko machine To briefly explain the control that plays a notification sound to notify the hall staff of the fraudulent activity against 1, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is installed is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is Combines the sound data of the incorporated track, the sub-volume value set to mute it, the sound data of the track embedded with the notification sound, and the sub-volume value set to the maximum volume of the notification sound. , the volume of the synthesized performance sound and the volume of the notification sound are compared to the volume actually flowing from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. The amplified performance sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, only the maximum volume notification sound is actually heard from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4. At this time, the performance sound is muted, so it does not flow from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, but the performance sound is as described above. The process is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data.

In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After this predetermined period of time has elapsed, the volume of the production sound that is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute will be changed to the sub-board volume that was adjusted by turning the volume adjustment switch. The volume value is set again as the volume value (at this time, if the volume of the performance sound is adjusted by operating the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the sub volume of the adjusted performance sound is The sound is set to a volume value), and is output from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4.

In this way, when the performance sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the pachinko machine 1 or When a notification sound is played to notify the hall staff of fraudulent activity on the machine 1, the volume of the performance sound is muted and the notification sound is transmitted to the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame. 4, but this muted production sound is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, so the notification sound is output from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side after a predetermined period of time. 462, when the sound stops flowing from the top side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, the production sound does not start playing again from the point where the notification sound started, but instead continues for a predetermined period after the notification sound starts playing. The flow starts again from the point at which the sound generation schedule data has progressed up to the point in time.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the peripheral control by programming the volume from mute to maximum volume. It is now possible to control and adjust the sound source of the IC. The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an employee such as a clerk in a game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers will be reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 When a malfunction occurs or when a player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set at a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for staff such as clerks at the game hall to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or a fraudulent act by a player.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up to the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to the backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Copy it to the backup area for regular processing and back it up.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeatedly performed until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. That is, in step S1006, the system waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1008 to The process of S1038 is performed and the process returns to step S1004 again. In this manner, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processes in steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing."

In this peripheral control unit steady processing, first, in step S1008, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to the value 1, and in step S1010, 1ms interrupt timer activation processing is started. , performs each process in steps S1014, . Become. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted is sent from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, and which is executed upon input to the CPU. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 fps. .3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[12-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the peripheral control IC is ready to accept screen data from the CPU is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. I will explain about it. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045), as shown in FIG. As described above, this steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control section power-on processing of FIG. 152 is being executed; They are each set to the value 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC continues to perform the normal processing. End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination in step S1045, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB - Set the value 1 to FLG (step S1050) and end this routine. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control section steady processing, and when the peripheral control section steady processing is executed, the value is 1; They are each set to a value of 0 when no stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control section steady processing is executed. When it is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady state processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 152. In order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. By setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to the value 1, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing in this routine is informed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. By setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to the value 0 in step S1038 in the process when the peripheral control unit is turned on (peripheral control unit steady processing), the peripheral control unit in this routine By transmitting the information to the V blank signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination in step S1045 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, the peripheral control section steady processing. It is determined whether the execution has been completed or not. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the routine processing of the peripheral control section cannot be completed between the input of the V blank signal and the input of the next V blank signal, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, if the processing cannot be completed in approximately 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next It is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, it takes approximately 66.6 ms to execute the current peripheral control section steady processing that has failed. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is normally executed repeatedly every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 152. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process will be executed 64 times. It is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the steady processing of the peripheral control unit fails, the progress state of the effect caused by the steady processing of the peripheral control unit and the progress state of the effect caused by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control section steady processing fails, the progress of the performance can be reliably matched.

[12-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 152. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 154 (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer being activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 152. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 fps. .3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3ms, after starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before it is executed. Specifically, when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit, first the first 1ms timer interrupt occurs, then the second, etc., and then the 32nd 1ms timer interrupt are sequentially generated. This will occur.

In the determination in step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that when the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has started. When the determination is made, this routine is immediately terminated. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has priority over the peripheral control unit V blank signal. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is smaller than 33, it adds a value of 1 to the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN (increments step S1102). By adding the value 1 to this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Drives an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid according to the drive data, and updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and updates the pointer every time this motor and solenoid drive process is executed. do. As a result, electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, electric drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and electric drive sources provided in various presentation units provided in the game board 5, etc.) ) are driven according to electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a moving body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the original positions (standby positions) of various movable bodies provided in various production units provided on the game board 5 based on the history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Understand the movable position by setting or obtaining the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs production operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this performance operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, rotation operation unit (rotation (rotation direction) history information of 302, operation history information of press operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The rotational direction of the rotary operation section 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the press operation section 303 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the production operation section 301, the volume of production sound output from the vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, and main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 is controlled. It is also possible to adjust the brightness of a plurality of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are transferred to the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the provided backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set to different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the performance from step S1104 to step S1108 are executed as the performance progresses within a period of 1ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 152, various processing related to the effect from step S1014 to step S1032 is executed as the effect progresses within a period of approximately 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. , this routine ends as is, so even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt After forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control is started again by the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the performance.

Furthermore, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute section V blank interrupt processing, the start of peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. This makes it possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[12-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts transmitting various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as an opportunity to send the main circuit serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC by 1 byte (8 bits). ) is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated using this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet consists of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values and are summed as the 3rd byte. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 155 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received among the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

In the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives information of 1 byte (8 bits) of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that it is within the period in which reception is possible, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data is taken out from the reception buffer.When the status, which is the first byte of the main frequency serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the value is 1, which is the second byte of the main frequency serial data, which is the mode. When taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. Note that the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has been taken out from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this judgment, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, are sequentially read from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination in step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC selects a mode when the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3, that is, the status is still the second byte of the main serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data. , and when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has not been taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is 3, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives the status in the 2nd byte of the main serial data following the status which is the 1st byte of the main serial data. When it is determined that a certain mode and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, have been taken out from the reception buffer in order, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, which has already been taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main frequency serial data among the main frequency serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and noise is generated, so the pachinko machine 1 is not affected by the noise. It is in a favorable environment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data are regarded as numerical values. and calculates the total (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main frequency serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has changed to different from normal main frequency serial data due to the influence of noise. can be determined.

In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined that the status is assigned as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), exit this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives 1 byte (8 bits) of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the period in which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives the sum value, which is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202. If it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is immediately terminated.

[12-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing that is executed when a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control block power outage warning signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), as shown in FIG. 156, and checks whether the power outage warning signal is input. (Step S1302). In the determination in step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has not been input, it immediately ends this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1300 has elapsed for 2 microseconds. In the determination in step S1304, if 2 macro seconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302, determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input, and determines that a power outage warning signal has not been input. If it is determined, this routine is immediately terminated, while if it is determined that a power outage warning signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

In the determination in step S1304, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control section power outage warning signal interrupt processing that is this routine, the CPU of the peripheral control IC executes the power saving process. (Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the production display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off the lights of various LEDs. By suppressing this, even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being sent by the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 waits for at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the commands being sent. It is set to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control section command reception interrupt process described above is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, the commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination in step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power outage warning signal is input, it performs a WDT clearing process (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has not been input, or following step S1314, the CPU returns to step S1312 again and determines whether the power outage warning signal has been input. Determine whether In other words, it continues to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal is inputted indefinitely. By continuing to make the determination indefinitely in this way, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has not been input, it will no longer be able to output a clear signal to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, if it is determined in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314, and clears the peripheral control IC. The CPU is not reset. Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 152 is restarted.

In this way, if the input of the power outage warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power outage occurs. It is designed so that it does not take too long. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process is not executed, so the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is mistakenly started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for a period exceeding 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, the step If it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process in step S1314 is not executed and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset. It is now possible to deal with such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[13. Main control board control processing]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used in various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 will first start the process using the first starting port sensor 3002, as shown in FIG. 157. Under the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is stored in the RAM. A first starting opening passage process such as storing in a special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S232). Further, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2402 is in the ON state (ball has entered the second starting port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second starting opening passage process is executed, such as acquiring it from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol retention storage area of the RAM (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled is set (step S235), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. A jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed. In addition, in the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "15R jackpot", 15R A process for controlling the opening and closing of the big prize opening 2005 is executed according to the jackpot game state. Furthermore, when a mode indicating a "2R jackpot" is reached, a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the jackpot 2005 according to the 2R jackpot gaming state.

In the jackpot control process (step S235A), after controlling the opening of the big winning opening 2005, each setting process of the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that the time-saving state is in effect, and the 2R jackpot game is based on the fact that the result of the lottery process when the first special symbol stops changing during the time-saving state becomes a mode that suggests a "2R jackpot". It is set when ending the 15R jackpot game state during the time saving state and the non-time saving state. Then, the time saving flag is activated when the next jackpot occurs or when the counter value of the time saving number counter reaches "0", the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 168, which will be described later, or the second special symbol stop (not shown) Reset during processing.

In addition, the time saving number counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of variable displays of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of times the time saving state continues, and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. In this case, when the jackpot game state is ended, the number of times the time saving state continues is set. The time saving counter counts down every time the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner until the counter value reaches 0, but the next jackpot occurs before the counter value reaches 0. Sometimes, it is reset (the counter value is returned to "0") by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 168, which will be described later, or the second special symbol stop process (not shown).

Also, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, the condition is that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is "0". (Step S237), executes the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped (step S238), and executes the first special symbol process process including the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped (step S238). On the condition that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special symbol including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S239). In this way, in this example, when the value of the second special reservation number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the process of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 3002 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, then as shown in FIG. In step S241, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and Based on the counter value, it is determined whether the first pending storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) "4" or not (step S242). In the process of step S242, if it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to The process of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is stored in a first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S241. whether or not to be a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing a performance preliminary determination process in which preliminary determination information such as the type of variation pattern is determined before starting a variable display according to the starting prize (step S245), the process ends.

However, in the process of step S242, if it is determined that the first pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the first reservation memory number changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reservation number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first reservation memory. At the same time, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a command for instructing the first pending memory number (first pending number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first pending memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the first pending number designation commands 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 memory commands 0 to 4). It looks like this.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the performance advance determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the performance pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S241 above, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation By comparing with the random number, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 or not. The mode type of game performance is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified preliminary judgment information (whether or not there will be a jackpot, if it will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it will not be a jackpot, whether or not to execute a reach effect as a game effect to be executed on the effect display device 1600, (e.g., the type of game performance to be performed), the type of the obtained special random number (first special random number), and the number of pending memories stored corresponding to the obtained special random number (value of the pending number counter). Set the prejudgment command. For example, in the effect pre-judgment process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting gate passing process, the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first pending memory number (the 1 (value of the special reservation number counter), and a first special symbol preliminary determination command corresponding to the value is set (step S262).

Then, by transmitting a preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), the command is stored in correspondence with the first starting port 2002 where the starting prize has occurred. In addition to the number of retained memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of special symbols based on the starting winning that has occurred is considered a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, and the effect display device 1600 if it is not a jackpot. The peripheral control installed in the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether a reach effect is to be executed as a game effect to be executed or prior determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed before starting variable display according to the starting winning. You will be able to understand IC.

Note that when the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reservation storage area that stores advance determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

Further, the first pending storage area has storage areas 1 to 4 corresponding to the number of pending memories, and the peripheral control IC stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command in the first (earliest) storage area. Store in order starting from the area. Then, when a preliminary determination command is received when preliminary determination information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the preliminary determination information notified to the n+1th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the first variable pattern command notifying the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is received, the preset data stored in the first storage area of the first pending storage area is stored in accordance with the received first variation pattern command. Discard the judgment information and move the preliminary judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the N-1st (N = 2 to 4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). (shift the stored pre-judgment information). Thereby, the advance determination information of the first special symbol is stored in such a manner that the order in which the start of variable display is suspended can be specified, and is discarded in order from the earliest advance determination information.

When the variable display control is put on hold in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (on hold), the jackpot expectation (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control is ), it will be possible to notify this at a predetermined timing, for example, when a new pending display is output, or when a shifted display of a pending display is displayed in accordance with the expiration of the pending display. .

FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2402 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, then as shown in FIG. In step S251, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value). ) is "1" (step S252). In the process of step S252, if it is determined that the second pending storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to The process of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is stored in a second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

However, in the process of step S252, if it is determined that the second pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the second hold memory number changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second hold memory. At the same time, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a command for instructing the second pending memory number (second pending number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 to 1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second pending memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the second pending number designation commands 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory commands 0 to 1). It looks like this.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 2002 is set to "4", while the upper limit of the number of game balls entering the second starting port 2004 is set to "4". The upper limit of the second pending memory number based on the ball being entered is set to "1". In addition, the second starting port 2002 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time saving state, and since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than in the normal state, the number of second pending memories is reduced. Even if the upper limit is set to "1", if the period in which the second special symbol is not displayed fluctuating continues for a long time, or if the period in which the number of second pending memories is at the upper limit continues for a long time, the second starting port 2002 This prevents the player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to get a chance to win a jackpot even if the game ball enters the ball.

FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S238). It should be noted that the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and the random numbers used for determination are the same. Since only the table and table are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and based on the read out first special random number, a lottery process is performed regarding the display mode of the first special symbol when the fluctuation control is stopped. Normal symbol processing (step S280)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281 )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variation random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed in response to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282) in which a lottery process for
4. A first special symbol variation process (step S283) that waits until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. Regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the mode of the first special symbol when the variation control is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol so that the first special symbol is displayed as follows (step S284)

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 142).

FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 162, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S301 As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in a pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in a pending state, then as a process in step S302, the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is read from the RAM. . Next, as processing in steps S303 and S304, the first special reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation number counter is counted down, and the first Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of special symbols is stopped are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a starting prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a starting winning occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and are stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Move various random numbers to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the above-mentioned first special symbol occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

Thereafter, as the process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for winning or losing the jackpot, is performed based on the first special random number of the first special symbol read out. Thereafter, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so as to proceed to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process ends.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 uses the hit determination table shown in FIG. If the second special symbol normal process is being executed, the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process is compared with the second special random number (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in FIG. 164(A) is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, one type of first special random number matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and three types of first special random numbers that are different from the jackpot determination value are found. Each of the first special random numbers is set so that the first special random number matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won, and the first special random number of 315 types matches the loss judgment value indicating that the first special random number is a loss. (Jackpot probability: 1/319, small win probability: 3/319). In addition, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing, in the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number, one type of second special random number is a jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won. A loss determination indicating that the 144 kinds of second special random numbers that match and are different from the jackpot determination value have won the small hit and that the 174 kinds of second special random numbers that match the small hit determination value and are different from the jackpot determination value are the above-mentioned losses. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values (big hit probability: 1/319, small hit probability: 144/319). That is, the determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured so that the probability of determining a small hit is higher than the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. , when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed based on the starting prize in the second starting hole 2004 than when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed based on the starting winning in the first starting hole 2002. The situation is now considered to be more advantageous to the player.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 uses the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal processing). As a result of the comparison with the random number), if it is determined to be a jackpot (step S312), a jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won as a jackpot is set (step S313), and the hit determination process is ended.

In addition, as a result of comparing the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal processing), If it is determined that the fluctuation is a small win (step S314), a small win flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won as a small win is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is ended.

On the other hand, if neither the jackpot nor the small hit has been won, that is, if it is determined that it is a loss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read out in step S302 (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and includes a reach determination table in the time-saving state that is used when the gaming state is in the time-saving state, and a reach determination table in the time-saving state that is used when the gaming state is in the non-time-saving state. It is equipped with a reach determination table in the state. In the reach judgment table in the time saving state, one type of reach random number matches the reach judgment value indicating reach, and 71 types of reach random numbers match the reach judgment value indicating no reach. A random number is associated with each.

In addition, in the reach judgment table during the non-time saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach judgment table during the time saving state match the reach judgment value indicating reach, The above-mentioned reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach judgment value indicating that there is no reach. In this manner, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is lost (step S317) as a result of comparing the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read out in step S302 (step S316). A reach flag indicating that the game is a reach is set, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 165, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether the jackpot flag is set (step S321) and whether the small win flag is set (step S324).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 164(B). The type of jackpot is determined, and the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol (stop symbol of the first special symbol) corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined (step S322).

in particular,
1. After opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the big winning hole sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls have won in the big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern is set 15 times. By repeating (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 15R jackpot game state where it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and after the jackpot game state ends, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are 15R jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state that ends if there is no jackpot before the variable display is executed 77 times 2. After opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the big winning hole sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern is changed twice ( By repeating (2 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 2R jackpot game state where it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and if the time saving state is controlled before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the jackpot game state ends. If the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not executed 77 times later, the time-saving state will be terminated if the jackpot does not occur, and the One of the two types of jackpots is determined: a 2R jackpot, which is controlled to a normal state after the end of the jackpot game state if the time saving state is controlled.

In addition, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 8 determination values are distributed for a 15R jackpot, and 192 determination values are distributed for a 2R jackpot. That is, when a jackpot lottery result is obtained by the lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 4% probability that it will be a 15R jackpot, and a 96% probability that it will be a 2R jackpot. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 196 determination values are distributed for a 15R jackpot, and 4 determination values are distributed for a 2R jackpot. That is, when a lottery result based on the second special random number is obtained as a jackpot, there is a 98% probability that it will be a 15R jackpot, and a 2% probability that it will be a 2R jackpot. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of determining a 15R jackpot is higher in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number than in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting prize in the second starting hole 2004 is executed more than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning in the first starting hole 2002, the game The situation is now advantageous to those who

Moreover, when the type of jackpot is determined, a stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the 15R jackpot is determined, the 15R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 reads the small hit flag in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process if the small hit flag is set (step S324) when the jackpot flag is not set in step S131. The type of small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small winning symbol determination table shown in FIG. 164(C), and when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is stopped. The mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

in particular,
1. An opening/closing pattern in which the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control the game ball into a small winning game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the accessory prize opening 2006, and By guiding all the game balls that have entered the accessory prize opening 2006 during the small winning game state to the first loss opening 2535, it is difficult to accept the game balls into the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008. First small hit 2. An opening/closing pattern in which the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed nine times to control the small winning game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the accessory prize opening 2006, and The second V prize opening 2008 is created by guiding one of the game balls that entered the prize winning hole 2006 during the small winning game state to the third sorting device 2550 after closing the prize winning hole 2006. In addition, when the game ball is accepted into the second V winning hole 2008, after opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) after the small winning game state, or Game balls can enter the big winning hole 2005 by repeating the opening/closing pattern that is closed 15 times (15 rounds) when the big winning hole sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2005. (easy) control to a 15R jackpot game state, and if the jackpot does not occur before the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times after the end of the jackpot game state. 2nd small win that controls the time saving state to be terminated 3. By executing an opening/closing pattern in which the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed nine times, the game ball is controlled to a small winning game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the accessory prize opening 2006, During the small winning game state, one of the game balls that entered the prize winning opening 2006 is guided to the first V winning opening 2007 after the accessory winning opening 2006 is closed, and the game ball enters the first V prize opening 2007. The above is based on the fact that 10 game balls have been won in the big winning hole 2005 after opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) after the small winning gaming state based on the fact that it was accepted in the V winning hole 2007. The opening/closing pattern that closes when detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403 is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) to control the game ball to a 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and the jackpot game is There are three types of third small hits that control the time-saving state that ends if the jackpot does not occur until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times after the end of the state. One of the small wins is determined as one of the small wins.

In addition, in the small hit symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 199 judgment values are distributed in the case of the second small hit, and 1 judgment value is distributed in the case of the third small hit. ing. In other words, if a lottery result based on the first special random number results in a small win, there is a 99.5% probability that it will be a second small win, a 0.5% probability that it will be a third small win, and so on. You won't win a small prize. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 20 judgment values are distributed in the case of the first small hit, and 130 judgment values are distributed in the case of the second small win. , 50 judgment values are distributed for the third small hit. In other words, if a lottery result based on the second special random number results in a small win, there is a 10% probability that it will be the first small win, a 65% probability that it will be the second small win, and a 25% probability that it will be the second small win. This will be the third small hit. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the small winning symbol determining table which is compared with the second random symbol is compared with the first symbol random number, and the small winning symbol determining table which is compared with the first random symbol is compared with the first symbol random number. By guiding one of the game balls to the first V prize opening 2007, the probability of being determined to be the third small win, which will always be the 15R jackpot game state after the small win game state ends, is increased. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning in the second starting opening 2004 is executed, the variable displaying of the second special symbol based on the starting winning in the second starting opening 2004 is executed, rather than the variable displaying of the first special symbol based on the starting winning in the first starting opening 2002. This is shaping up to be an advantageous situation.

Furthermore, when the type of small hit is determined, a stopping pattern corresponding to the type of small winning is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, if it is determined to be a second small hit, the second small winning symbol is determined as the small winning symbol, and if it is determined to be a third small winning symbol, the third small winning symbol is determined as the small winning symbol. . In addition, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), if it is determined to be the first small hit, the first small winning symbol is determined as the small winning symbol, and if it is determined to be the second small winning, the small winning symbol is If it is determined to be a third small winning symbol, the third small winning symbol is determined as the small winning symbol.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the symbol is a loss when neither the jackpot flag nor the small win flag is set (step S327). Then, after the process of determining the stop symbols is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S328, in which the lottery results (type of jackpot, small hit, out of reach, out of reach) are selected. A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may also be an instruction for the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S328 ). After that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command (variably displays the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and changes the display from left decorative symbol to right decorative symbol to middle). The decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative patterns (in some cases, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are the same pattern, are synchronously displayed in a variable manner, and are stopped and displayed at the same time). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies a small hit from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop pattern) when the decorative pattern displayed on the production display device 1600 stops changing, the peripheral control unit 1511 detects a small hit. If the symbol ("Final Battle") is determined and a 2R jackpot is specified, a 2R jackpot symbol (a combination where the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are the same even number symbols from "0" to "9") ), and when a 15R jackpot is specified, a 15R jackpot symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols from "0" to "9") is determined. In addition, when a reach miss is identified, a miss symbol with a reach (a combination of the same symbols with left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; a miss reach symbol) If the pattern is determined and a miss is identified, it is determined to be a miss symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols), and the variation is determined. When the variable time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game performance), the determined stop symbols are controlled to be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to control the time-saving state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a maximum of 77 times after the jackpot game state. The time saving state may be ended based on the fact that a predetermined number of jackpots have occurred after the transition control is performed. Specifically, if the jackpot game state is controlled to the time-saving state after the jackpot gaming state, and then a predetermined number of jackpots (for example, twice) occurs, the time-saving state is not controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state for the predetermined number of times. , it may be controlled to a normal state. Further, even if the number of jackpot occurrences is less than a predetermined number, the control may be made to be in a non-time saving state during the jackpot gaming state, and the time saving state may be controlled again after the jackpot gaming state.

FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 166, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S341), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag is set. If it is set (step S343), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a small hit corresponding to the type of small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344). If the reach flag is set (step S345), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S346), and if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, the normal If it is a loss (a loss without performing the reach effect), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, a variation pattern to be executed is determined (step S348), and the surroundings for starting the determined variation pattern are determined. A variable pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). Further, the main control MPU sets a variation time set in correspondence to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the performance control is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 for the variable time determined in this way.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of pieces of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in a form that is associated with each fluctuating random number. Therefore, the main control MPU selects the selected variation pattern table from among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination results based on the special random numbers and symbol random numbers, and the variation random numbers read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined by comparing the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table. As a result, a lottery process regarding the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. Note that the variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect to execute with the fluctuation random number. . For example, among the reach performances, the super reach performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach performance, and when the super reach performance is executed, the player's expectation level for the jackpot game state increases.

Furthermore, when the first special symbol fluctuation display control is started, then in step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving number counter, in which the number of continuations of the time saving state is set, is "0". do. If this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S352), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short time number counter is "0" (step S353). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving control is to be ended is set (step S354).

If it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S351, and if it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S353, at that point Then, the process moves to step S355. Then, at the time when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is ended.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a miss, the fluctuation time information of the special symbol, which is set to about 1 second in the time short state, is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), The special symbol fluctuation pattern is set in such a way that the special symbol fluctuation time information, which is set to about 12 seconds in the non-time saving state, is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). . In other words, the fluctuation pattern at the time of failure selected in the time-saving state is such that the time required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol is extremely short compared to the fluctuation pattern at the time of failure selected in the non-time-saving state. Fluctuation time information of the above special symbol is set.

FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 167, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S371. As the process, a variable timer in which a variable time is set according to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process for the variable pattern (step S282) is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S372), the process moves to step S373. That is, in the process of this step S373, this process ends at the time when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 168, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S381. As the processing, display control is performed to display the stop symbols determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the display control is performed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the derivation and display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the first special pattern (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). As a result, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 77 times), the time-saving control (control in the time-saving state) is ended and the non-time-saving control is performed. (normal state control) starts.

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start a jackpot game (step S387), and starts the jackpot game. The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process is also executed in which the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot is set to a jackpot number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds. The jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot number counter reaches "0", the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that a specified number of rounds have been executed. The jackpot game is controlled so as to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot control process described later, the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S401) and the jackpot opening processing (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the jackpot number counter reaches "0", and the jackpot opening process (step S402) is repeatedly executed. When the round is ended in the opening process (step S402), the jackpot number counter is decremented by 1, and based on the fact that it becomes "0", the process proceeds to the post-opening process (step S403) and the jackpot game ends. Execute control to

Then, a jackpot execution flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. Thereby, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. Also, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, similarly, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) is set according to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot, 2R jackpot). It has become.

In addition, the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set when the jackpot game is completed, specifically, when the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot opening process (step S403) of the jackpot control process (step S235A). Opening/closing control of the first grand prize opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the first grand prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls have entered the first grand prize opening 2005 It is reset when the opening/closing control (which repeats the opening/closing pattern that closes when detected by the jackpot sensor 2403 2 or 15 times) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), and the first It becomes possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (step S386) and the small win flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates to start a small win game. A small winning start command is set (step S391), and a waiting time until the small winning game starts (a time for displaying a display indicating that the small winning game is to be started, etc.) is set in an interval timer (step S392). Then, a small winning execution flag indicating that a small winning game is being executed is set (step S393). Note that the small winning start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of small winning. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command, third small hit) according to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) start command). Thereby, the performance of the small win game according to the type of small win instructed by the small win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, the small hit start command (first small hit) corresponding to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) is also used. A winning start command, a second small winning start command, a third small winning starting command) are set.

In addition, when the small winning game is finished, the small winning flag indicating that the small winning game is being executed is set in the small winning process (step S411) of the small winning control process (step S236A), which will be described later. ) to complete the opening/closing control of the accessory prize opening 2006 according to the type of small win (for example, the opening/closing control in which the opening/closing pattern of opening the accessory prize opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is repeated two or nine times). It will be reset when By resetting the small hit execution flag, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in the function display unit 1400. It becomes possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

In addition, if the small hit flag is not set, that is, if you lose, set the waiting time (the time during which the stop symbol of the special symbol is displayed) until the next variable display of the special symbol starts to be displayed in the interval timer. (Step S394), the process moves to step S395.

When the processes of steps S386 to S394 are executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is transferred to the initial value, the first special symbol normal process. (Step S395), this process ends.

FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. The peripheral control board notifies the player that the state will shift to the jackpot game state based on the state in which the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stop varying and display becomes a jackpot symbol. 1510 or the start of the next round (step S401)
2. The first big prize opening 2005 is controlled to be open based on the fact that the state when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped becomes a jackpot symbol, or the first big prize mouth 2005 is controlled to be open based on the start of the next round. is controlled to be in an open state and the first grand prize opening 2005 is left open for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when the winning of ten game balls in the first grand prize opening 2005 is detected by the grand prize opening sensor 2403. Big winning opening opening process to close when the event occurs (step S402)
3. A post-opening process for jackpot opening that waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot gaming state ends when all rounds are finished (step S403).

The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S401) should be performed in the process of step S42. In addition, in the above-mentioned big winning hole opening process (step S402), at the start of the round that controls the first big winning hole 2005 to be open, a jackpot round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and the first big winning hole At the end of the round in which the mouth 2005 is controlled to be closed, a jackpot round end command is set according to the number of rounds. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game performance according to the number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. This is performed using a device 1600, a lamp/LED, a speaker, and the like.

FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit control process (step S236A). In the small winning process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small winning process flag.

1. Small win start processing (step S410) that executes a setting process for starting a small win gaming state
2. Small win processing to monitor the entry and opening time of game balls during the small win gaming state (step S411)

In addition, the said small hit process flag is operated in the process of said step S42 so that it may indicate that the said small hit start process (step S410) should be performed. In addition, when the entry of a game ball into a specific area is detected during the small hit process, the jackpot execution flag is set, and the number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game state (15 rounds in this example) is set as the number of jackpots. Set it on the counter and end the process. As a result, the jackpot game state is started following the small win game state.

FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal by the normal winning hole sensor 2401 is in the ON state and a game ball has passed through the normal winning hole 2003, as shown in FIG. 171. As the process of step S802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and stores it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. Execute the winning process.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal processing (step S803) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and based on the read normal random number, a lottery process regarding the display mode of the normal symbol when the variation control is stopped is performed.
2. A normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed based on the regular symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S805) that waits until the variable display of the above-mentioned normal symbols on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
4. The above-mentioned normal symbol is set so that the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped. Normal symbol stop processing to stop the fluctuating display of symbols (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is a mode that suggests "normal symbol hit", the second starting port door 2411 is moved back and the game ball is sent to the second starting port 2004. Ordinary electric accessories release processing that executes processing to enable acceptance (step S807)

The normal symbol process flag is operated in the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 142) to indicate that the normal symbol normal processing (step S803) should be performed.

[14. Game in small hit game state]
Next, the game in the small winning game state will be explained. As mentioned above, in this example, when the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a small win, the small win game is executed a predetermined number of times to open and close the accessory prize opening 2006 after opening it for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it. All the game balls that enter the accessory prize opening 2006 during the small winning game state and are detected by the accessory prize winning opening sensor 2513 are sent to the first loss opening sensor 2515, the third losing opening sensor 3004, When detected by either the first V winning hole sensor 2514 or the second V winning hole sensor 3003, that is, when the accessory is discharged from the inside of the winning hole 2006 to the rear of the game board 5, the small winning game state is detected. It is set to end. In addition, the game ball that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 during the small winning game state is received by the first V prize opening 2007 and the second V prize opening 2008, and is received by the first V prize opening sensor 2514 and the second V prize opening. When detected by the sensor 3003, the small winning gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and the game ball that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 during the small winning gaming state enters the first losing opening 2535 or the third losing opening 2556. When it is accepted and detected by the first loss sensor 2515 or the third loss sensor 3004, after the small win game state is controlled to the normal state or time saving state according to the control state before the small win.

In addition, as described above, in this example, the first small hit is controlled so that all the game balls that have entered the accessory prize opening 2006 are guided to the first loss opening 2535, and the game balls that have entered the accessory prize opening 2006. One of the game balls is controlled to be guided to the third sorting device 2550, and after turning inside the croon 2553, it is placed in either the second V winning opening 2008 or the two third losing openings 2556. A second small win that is controlled so that it is accepted, and a third small win that is controlled so that one of the game balls that entered the accessory winning hole 2006 is guided to the first V winning hole 2007. , the small winning game state is controlled.

In addition, in the first small hit, the number of openings and closings of the accessory prize opening 2006 is smaller than in the second and third small winnings, and in addition, all the game balls that have entered the prize winning hole 2006 are transferred to the accessory prize opening. 2006 to the nearest first loss opening 2535 and detected by the first loss opening sensor 2515, the execution period of the small winning game state (the period from the start of the small winning gaming state to the end) is short. In the three small winnings, one game ball out of the winning game balls in the accessory prize opening 2006 is guided to the first V prize opening 2007 whose distance from the accessory prize opening 2006 is the next closest to the first losing opening 2535. Since this is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the execution period of the small winning game state is the second shortest after the first small winning. On the other hand, in the second small hit, one of the game balls that entered the prize winning hole 2006 is guided to the third sorting device 2550 which is the farthest distance from the prize winning hole 2006, and After the game ball guided by the dividing device 2550 is rotated in the croon 2553, the game ball received in the second V winning port 2008 is detected by the second V winning port sensor 3003, and the game ball is received in the third losing port 2556. Since the game ball that has been thrown is detected by the third loss opening sensor 3004, the execution period of the small winning game state is the longest among the three types of small winnings mentioned above.

In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, if it is determined to be a small hit based on the first special random number, it is determined as a second small hit. In the normal state, the second small hit is executed in most cases, but in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, the small hit is executed based on the second special random number. When it is determined that the third small hit is executed, the ratio of the third small hit is increased compared to the normal state, and in the time saving state, the third small hit is executed at a rate of one out of every four small wins. .

That is, in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, if a game ball is accepted into the second V winning hole 2008 during the small hit game state, the time saving state will occur after the 15R jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player. Therefore, one of the game balls that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 during the small winning game state is rotated into the croon 2553 to enter the second V prize opening 2008. While the player is excited to watch for a certain period of time whether it will be accepted or accepted into the third loss opening 2556, in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, the second V prize is won during the small hit game state. Even if a game ball is accepted into the opening 2008, the time-saving state is only controlled again after the 15R jackpot game state, so one game ball among the game balls that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 is inside the clone 2553. If the player rotates the player, there is a risk that the player's interest in the game will decrease. Therefore, in this example, in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, by increasing the ratio of the third small winning, which has a short execution period of the small winning game state, the small winning gaming state is shortened during the time saving state. It is designed to end in time.

In addition, as described above, in the third small hit, when the distribution rotary body 2531 rotates from the accommodating state to the unaccommodable state, the game ball accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotary body 2531 is moved to the first hit path. 2536, flows down the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540, comes into contact with the top surface of the closed distribution door 2544, is guided to the right, and enters the first V prize opening 2007. . Therefore, in the case of the third small hit, the game balls distributed to the first hit passage 2536 are ejected to the rear of the game board 5 in a short time by rotating the distribution rotating body 2531 from the accommodating state to the unaccommodating state. The player will not be able to see it. In addition, the first V prize opening 2007 can be entered when the distribution door 2544 is moving forward above the second losing opening 2543, but the distribution door 2544 operates in the front and back direction. Therefore, it is difficult to visually check the operating status. In other words, the existence of the sorting door 2544 is difficult for players to recognize (hard to see), and the game balls sorted to the first V prize opening 2007 by the sorting door 2544 are quickly sent to the rear of the game board 5. Coupled with this, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the existence of the first V winning hole 2007, so the player is aware that the game ball has been guided to the first V winning hole 2007, in other words, the first V winning hole 2007 is not recognized as a game ball. It is difficult to notice that it is passing. In this way, in order to make it difficult for the player to notice that the game ball has been guided to the first V prize opening 2007 when the third small win occurs in the time saving state, the lottery in the small win game state ( A small winning game state is executed without making the user aware of whether or not the game ball is accepted in the V winning hole (first V winning hole 2007, second V winning hole 2008), and the small winning gaming state is ended. A 15R jackpot gaming state can be executed later. As a result, the small win game state and the 15R jackpot game state occur consecutively in a short period of time, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the case where the game ball is distributed to the third distribution device 2550 due to the second small hit, and when the game ball is distributed to the first V prize opening 2007 due to the third small hit, the performance display device 1600 The effects of the small winning game states that are executed are different. Specifically, in the case of a second small hit, it is determined whether the game balls distributed to the third sorting device 2550 enter the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2556. In contrast to the execution of a lively effect, when a third small hit occurs, an effect that does not make the user conscious of the rotation of the distribution rotating body 2531 (for example, in the case of a third small hit, a large hit is performed). By giving the same notification as when the third small win occurs (such as notifying that it is a jackpot instead of a small win when the third small win occurs), it is difficult for the player to realize that a small win gaming state is being executed. However, as a special bonus chance to obtain prize balls different from the prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game state, an opportunity to obtain prize balls similar to the small win game state is executed before the start of the jackpot game state. As a result, a player who recognizes that he has won the 15R jackpot can receive a special bonus chance before the start of the 15R jackpot game state and win a prize different from the 15R jackpot game state. Since the ball can be acquired, the game becomes more interesting.

In addition, if the time to reach the V winning opening is shorter for the third small winning than the second small winning, the path ( The lengths of the first route) and the second route until the game ball guided by the third small hit is accepted into the V winning hole will be longer in proportion to the time it takes to reach the V winning hole. However, if the time taken to reach the V-winning hole is longer than the third small hit, the path (first route) for the game ball guided by the second small hit to be accepted into the V-winning hole is the third small winning hole. The path (second path) for the game ball guided by a hit until it is accepted into the V winning hole may be made shorter. For example, by providing a deceleration means to reduce the rolling speed of the game ball in the first path, it may take longer for the game ball to reach the V winning hole than the game ball passing through the second path.

In addition, in the above example, a plurality of V winning holes such as the first V winning hole 2007 and the second V winning hole 2008 are provided, and in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, the accessory winning hole 2006 One game ball among the winning game balls is distributed to the third sorting device 2550 having the second V winning hole 2008, and in the fluctuating display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, it is used as the accessory winning hole. By guiding one of the winning game balls in 2006 to the first V winning opening 2007, which is the closest distance from the accessory winning opening 2006 to the first losing opening 2535, a small winning game state can be achieved. Although the execution period is configured to be different, the distance to the V-winning hole, the number of V-winning holes, etc. are not limited to those described above, and the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine having only one V-winning hole, for example. The technical idea of is applicable. Specifically, for example, a means (such as an obstacle) is provided to prevent or delay the acceptance of the game ball into the V-winning port, such as allowing the game ball to be accepted into the V-winning port after circling inside the croon 2553. The second small hit takes a long time to reach the V winning hole, and there is no means to obstruct or delay the acceptance of game balls into the V winning hole (at least the number of balls provided is smaller than the second small winning hole). The third small hit takes a short time to reach the V-winning hole (if there is one), and the normal state (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) and short-time state ( (variable display of the second special symbol) may be changed.

[14-1. Error notification in small hit gaming state]
Next, error notification in the small winning gaming state will be explained. In this example, in the small winning game state, the time until the winning game ball is ejected from the accessory prize opening 2006 is monitored, and if it is not ejected even after a predetermined period of time, an error notification is performed.

FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit start process (step S411). In the small win start process, a setting process for starting a small win game state is executed.

When the small hit start process is started, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the interval timer set in step S392 of the first special symbol stop process or the second special symbol stop process (step S421), and then starts the interval timer. When it times out (step S422), that is, when the waiting time from the stop display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) to the start of the small winning game state has elapsed, the small winning gaming state is started. An initial value "0" is set to an elapsed timer that measures the elapsed time since the start (step S423).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects opening/closing pattern data corresponding to the type of small win being executed (first small win, second small win, third small win) (step S424), and selects Control of the accessory prize opening 2006, the sorting rotating body 2531, and the sorting door 2544 is started based on the opening/closing pattern data (step S425), and the process is transferred to the small winning process (step S411) as described above. When the small winning process flag is updated (step S426), this process ends. On the other hand, if the interval timer has not timed out in step S421, the process ends without executing subsequent processes.

The opening/closing pattern data is provided for each type of small win, and indicates the operation mode of the accessory prize opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531, and the distribution door 2544 according to the elapsed time from the start of the small win game state. It is something. In this example, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the accessory prize opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531, and the distribution door 2544 based on the opening/closing pattern data according to the small winning type selected in step S424. Then, the accessory prize opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531, and the distribution door 2544 come to operate in the manner shown in FIG. 123.

FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit process (step S412).

When the small winning process is started, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first adds 1 to an elapsed timer that measures the elapsed time since starting the small winning gaming state, and also sets an emission monitoring timer to be described later. If so, the timer value of this discharge monitoring timer is subtracted by 1 (step S431). When the elapsed timer is incremented by 1, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects the opening/closing pattern corresponding to the elapsed timer (time elapsed from the start of the small winning game state) among the opening/closing pattern data selected in step S424 of the small winning start process. The data is read out, and the opening/closing control of the accessory prize opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531, and the distribution door 2544 is controlled based on the read opening/closing pattern data (step S432).

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 detects the game ball received in the accessory winning hole 2006 if the accessory winning hole sensor 2513 is on (step S433), that is, the game ball is placed in the accessory winning hole 2006. If the ball has been accepted, a remaining ball counter that counts the remaining balls that have not yet been ejected from the accessory prize opening 2006 among the game balls that have entered the prize winning opening 2006 is incremented by 1 (step S434).

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls, when a game ball is first received in the accessory prize opening 2006 after the small winning game state is started (when the first game ball enters the ball), (Step S435), the expected longest period provided corresponding to each small hit type is set as the expected longest period until all the game balls that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 including this game ball are discharged. The discharge monitoring timer is set (step S436).

In this example, in the case of the first small hit, all the game balls received in the accessory prize opening 2006 enter the second loss opening 2535 without being distributed to the first hit passage 2536 by the distribution rotary body 2531. In order to do so, the shortest period among the three types of small wins is set as the assumed longest period (for example, 10000 ms). In addition, in the case of a second small hit, one of the game balls received in the accessory prize opening 2006 is distributed to the first hit path 2536 by the distribution rotary body 2531, and the first hit path 2536 is distributed to the first hit path 2536. Since the game ball that has entered the third sorting device 2550 through the passageway and enters the third sorting device 2550 turns in the croon 2553 and then enters either the second V winning opening 2008 or the two third losing openings 2556, there are three types of expected longest periods. The longest period among the small wins is set (for example, 180000 ms). In addition, in the case of a third small hit, one of the game balls received in the accessory prize opening 2006 is distributed to the first hit passage 2536 by the distribution rotary body 2531, but the first hit passage 2536 In order to accept the passing game ball at the second V prize opening 2008 without entering the third sorting device 2550, the shortest period after the first small hit is set as the assumed longest period (for example, 60000 seconds).

The discharge monitoring timer is decremented in step S431, and the state of discrepancy between the number of game balls entered in the accessory prize opening 2006 and the number of game balls discharged from the accessory prize opening 2006 continues until after the discharge monitoring timer times out. If the process continues, it is determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity is occurring.

In addition, we monitor the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game state, and if this elapsed time reaches the expected maximum period according to the type of small winning that is being executed, it is possible that some abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity is occurring. Alternatively, the elapsed time from the first opening timing of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the small winning game state may be monitored and this elapsed time may be determined as the expected maximum period according to the type of small winning that is being executed. It may be determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraud is occurring when At the start of the winning game state, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned ON (energized), and the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned OFF (de-energized) from a state in which the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotary body 2531 is facing upward. ), and the accommodating part 2531a of the distributing rotary body 2531 operates to face right (timing of the first distributing operation of the distributing rotary body 2531), in the second small win, the distributing rotary body 2531 After the first distribution operation timing, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned ON (energized) again, and the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned OFF from the state where the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotary body 2531 is facing upward. (non-energized) state and the housing part 2531a of the distribution rotary body 2531 operates to face right (timing of the second distribution operation of the distribution rotation body 2531), the third small hit is distributed After the second distribution operation timing of the rotary body 2531, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned ON (energized) again, and the first distribution solenoid is turned on from the state where the accommodation portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 is facing upward. 2532 is turned off (non-energized) and the housing section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 operates to face right (the third distribution operation timing of the distribution rotation body 2531). It may be possible to monitor this and determine that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent act is occurring when this elapsed time reaches the expected maximum period according to the type of small win being executed.

In addition, when detecting the discharge of the game ball accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006, that is, when the first loss opening sensor 2515 detects when the game ball accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 is discharged, the first V winning prize is detected. When a game ball is detected in any of the opening sensor 2514, the second V winning opening sensor 3003, and the third losing opening sensor 3004 (step S437), the remaining ball counter is subtracted by 1 (step S438).

Then, whether the remaining ball counter is "0" or not, that is, whether the number of game balls accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 and the number of game balls discharged from the accessory prize opening 2006 match. (step S439), and if the remaining number counter is "0", it is assumed that no abnormality or fraudulent activity has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S442.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S439 that the remaining ball counter is not "0", it is determined whether or not the discharge monitoring timer has timed out in order to determine whether an abnormality or illegal act has occurred (step S440). . As mentioned above, the discharge monitoring timer is set corresponding to each small winning type as the longest period expected from the start of the small winning gaming state until all the game balls are ejected from the accessory prize opening 2006. This indicates the remaining period of the assumed maximum period. If the discharge monitoring timer has not timed out in step S440, the process ends without executing subsequent processes. As a result, when the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114) of the main control side timer interrupt process is executed again, the small hit process is executed and the remaining ball counter is monitored until the discharge monitoring timer times out. It becomes like this.

Further, if the remaining ball counter is not "0" and the discharge monitoring timer has timed out in step S440, it is determined that an abnormality or illegal act has occurred, and a discharge error is notified (step S441). It is designed to end the hit process. Ejection error notification includes error display on the performance display device 1600, output of notification sound from speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, etc., and lighting and lighting in a predetermined manner using lamps, LEDs, etc. provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3. This includes blinking, etc., and in this example, a message such as "Ejection abnormality" is displayed in a part of the effect display device 1600, and the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464 do not output. In other words, the state where the remaining ball counter is not "0" mostly indicates a minor abnormality such as the game ball that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 not being ejected, so this is to notify the abnormality of the gaming machine. Displays that may make players uncomfortable or anxious are avoided. After notifying the discharge error in step S441, by terminating the small winning process without updating the small winning process flag, next the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of the main control side timer interrupt process (step When S114) is executed, the small hit process is executed again. In other words, the RWM clear button 633z is pressed by the game store clerk on the condition that all the game balls accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 are ejected or the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch. The small winning game state does not end until the press operation part is operated and the information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built into the main control MPU is completely erased (until it is reset), and the ejection error is notified. will now be executed.

If it is determined in step S439 that the remaining ball counter is "0", it is determined whether game balls have entered the first V winning hole 2007 and the second V winning hole 2008 (step S442). If the game ball has not entered the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008 in step S442, that is, the game ball has entered the first losing port 2535 or the third losing port 2556 and the first losing port sensor 2515 or the third loss opening sensor 3004, a small winning end command is set to instruct execution of the performance at the end of the small winning gaming state (step S443), and the small winning starting process (step S411) is performed. At the time when the small win process flag is updated so as to be transferred to the process (step S447), this process ends.

If the game ball enters the first V winning hole 2007 or the second V winning hole 2008 in step S442 and is detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2514 or the second V winning hole sensor 3003, until the jackpot game starts. After setting the waiting time in the interval timer (step S444), the small hit execution flag is reset and the jackpot execution flag is set (step S445). In addition, a V winning jackpot start command is set (step S446) that instructs the execution of the performance at the start of the jackpot gaming state based on the acceptance of game balls into the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008, and the above-mentioned small winning When the small win process flag is updated (step S447) so that the process can be moved to the start process (step S411), this process ends.

In this way, in this example, when a game ball is accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006, the value of the remaining ball counter is incremented by 1, and each time a game ball is ejected from the accessory prize opening 2006, the value of the remaining ball counter is increased by 1. By subtracting, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls remaining without being ejected from the accessory winning device 2006. In addition, the period until the ejection error notification is executed (estimated longest period) is made to differ depending on the small hit type, in other words, the destination to which the game balls are distributed, and the game balls that have passed through the first hit path 2536 are In the third small win, which is accepted in the second V prize opening 2008 without entering the distribution device 2550, the ejection error is higher than in the second small win, in which the game ball enters the third distribution device 2550 and rotates inside the croon 2553. The period (estimated maximum period) until notification is executed has been shortened. That is, the period until the ejection error notification is executed is shorter for the small win which takes a shorter time (distance) to reach the V winning hole.

Normally, no game balls remain in the accessory prize opening 2006, so if a game ball remains in the accessory prize opening 2006 for a long period of time, some abnormality (error) may occur. It can be determined that this is occurring. In addition, if it is detected that more game balls have been discharged than the number of game balls that have entered the prize winning hole 2006, a fraudulent act such as illegally placing game balls into the prize winning hole 2006 is being carried out. It can be determined that there is a possibility. The pachinko machine 1 of this example monitors the occurrence of these abnormalities and fraudulent acts, and issues an ejection error notification if any of these is suspected.

In addition, in this example, the remaining game balls may remain in the accessory prize opening 2006, or if it is detected that a larger number of game balls than the game balls that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 have been ejected. Even after the ejection error notification is performed based on the ejection monitoring timer timing out when the ball counter is not "0", the small hit processing is executed every time the main control side timer interrupt processing is executed without stopping the game. Execute and monitor the value of the remaining ball counter, and if the value of the remaining ball counter becomes "0", that is, if it returns to the normal state, the first V winning hole 2007 and the second V winning hole The state is automatically returned to a state in which it is determined whether the game ball enters the mouth 2008, and the small winning game state is ended.

In addition, in this example, even if the value of the remaining ball counter does not become "0" after executing the ejection error notification in step S441 of the small hit process, if a more serious abnormality occurs, Error notification regarding this serious abnormality is executed with priority. Serious abnormalities include, for example, when one of the plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 detects magnetic field acting illegally within the gaming area 5a (magnetic detection error notification), or when radio wave irradiation is detected (radio wave detection error notification). ), when it is detected that the door frame 3 has been opened (door opening error notification), and other situations in which there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity is being carried out. If such a serious abnormality occurs, the ejection error notification in step S441 in the small winning gaming state is terminated, and error notifications related to these serious abnormalities (magnetic detection error notification, radio wave detection error notification, magnetic detection error notification) are executed. etc.), and the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small winning game state may be resumed after the error notification related to the serious abnormality ends, or the error notification related to the serious abnormality may be restarted in the small winning gaming state. By overwriting and executing the ejection error notification in step S441, the ejection error notification in step S441 in the small winning gaming state is displayed on the production display device 1600, the output of the speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, etc., and the game board. Although it is not reflected in the lighting/blinking of lamps/LEDs, etc. installed on the door frame 5 or the door frame 3 (executed in a visible/audible manner) (executed behind the scenes), it is an error notification related to a serious abnormality. The content of the discharge error notification progresses as time passes while the system is running, and when the error notification related to a serious abnormality ends, the content of the discharge error notification is displayed with the progressed content so that it can be viewed or listened to. It may be reflected in the display on the device 1600, the output of the speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, etc., the lighting/blinking of lamps/LEDs etc. provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 (for example, when playing a small winning game) If the error notification related to a serious abnormality is started 5 seconds after the start of the discharge error notification in step S441 in the state and this error notification is executed for 30 seconds, after the error notification related to the serious abnormality is finished. (The content is restarted 35 seconds after the start of the ejection error notification in step S441 in the small winning game state).

Further, the mode of ejection error notification may be made different depending on whether the remaining ball counter is "1" or more in step S439 of the small hit processing and when it is less than "0". If the remaining ball counter is "1" or more, it only indicates a slight abnormality in that the game ball that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 is not ejected, while if the remaining ball counter is less than "0" This indicates a serious abnormality in which more game balls are ejected than the number of game balls that entered the accessory prize opening 2006, and there is a possibility that game balls are illegally entered into the accessory prize opening 2006. There is. Therefore, when a slight abnormality occurs such that a game ball that has entered the accessory prize opening 2006 is not ejected, an ejection error notification 1 is displayed in a part of the production display device 1600 as shown in FIG. ” etc., and the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464 continue to output the performance sound, so that the error sound is not output, and a part of the LED installed in the door frame 3 is When a serious abnormality occurs in which more game balls are ejected than the number of game balls that entered, a message such as "Illegal Occurrence!" is displayed in the entire area of the effect display device 1600 as the ejection error notification 2. In addition to displaying the display, the volume of the performance sound is suppressed from the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464, and an error sound saying "Illegal activity is being carried out" is output at a high volume, and an LED provided in the door frame 3 The occurrence of fraudulent activity may be notified by causing the entire door frame 3 to emit light.

In this example, the detection signal of the third distribution detection sensor 2552 provided in the middle of the third distribution guide path 2551 is input to the peripheral control board 1510, and the second distribution device 2540 outputs the detection signal in the second small winning game state. When the third distribution detection sensor 2552 provided in the middle of the third distribution guide path 2551 detects the game ball guided to the strikeout guide path 2551, the peripheral control unit 1511 activates the effect display device 1610 and the speaker 622. , 354, 462, 464, the game balls that control the lamps, LEDs, etc. provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 to rotate the croon 2553 in the third sorting device 2550 are connected to the second V prize opening 2008 and the third A performance is performed to excite the audience as to whether it will be accepted or not.

Note that the detection signal of the third distribution detection sensor 2552 provided in the middle of the third distribution guideway 2551 may be input to the main control board 1310, and in this case, the detection signal of the third distribution detection sensor 2552 The presence or absence of an abnormality may be determined based on the detection of game balls by the controller. For example, if a game ball is detected in a V winning hole or losing hole that is different from the V winning hole or losing hole that is scheduled according to the small winning type in the above small winning process, or if the game ball is detected in a V winning hole or losing hole that is scheduled according to the small winning type, If there is a possibility that a game ball will be detected in a V-winning or losing opening that is different from the V-winning or losing opening that has been If the game ball goes to the winning hole), it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred and a distribution error notification may be executed in step S441 of the small winning process.

Specifically, as the V winning opening and losing opening scheduled according to the type of small hit, the first losing opening 2535 is scheduled in the case of the first small winning, and the second losing opening 2535 is scheduled in the case of the second small winning. A V winning opening 2008 or a third losing opening 2556 is scheduled, and in the case of a third small win, a first V winning opening 2007 is scheduled. In the case of the first small hit, if it is detected that the game ball has been accepted in any of the first V winning hole 2007, the second V winning hole 2008, and the third losing hole 2556 in the small winning process, In the case of a second small hit, if it is detected that the game ball has been accepted into one of the first loss opening 2535 and the first V winning hole 2007 in the small winning medium processing, in the case of the third small winning, the small winning medium processing is performed. When it is detected that a game ball has been received in any of the first losing port 2535, the second V winning port 2008, and the third losing port 2556, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and for example, as shown in FIG. In this way, a message such as "Fraud has occurred!" is displayed in the entire area of the effect display device 1600, and the volume of the effect sound is suppressed from the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464, and an error sound "Fraud has occurred!" is displayed. ” at a loud volume, and also causes all the LEDs provided in the door frame 3 to emit light, thereby causing the entire door frame 3 to emit light, thereby executing a sorting error notification that notifies the occurrence of fraudulent activity. You can. In this case, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be immediately notified, and fraudulent activity can be detected at an early stage.

In addition, a second distribution detection sensor is provided in the middle of the second distribution guideway 2541 to detect game balls circulating inside the second distribution guideway 2541, and a detection signal of the second distribution detection sensor is provided. The input may be made to the main control board 1310, and in the case of the first small hit, the game ball is placed in either the first V winning hole 2007, the second V winning hole 2008, or the third losing hole 2556 in the small winning process. If there is a possibility that the game ball will be accepted, that is, if the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball and determines that the game ball has entered the second distribution guideway 2541, or if there is a second small hit. Although the second distribution detection sensor detected the game ball during the small hit process, the third distribution detection sensor 2552 could not detect the game ball, so the game ball passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 was placed in the first distribution. If it is determined that the game ball is heading towards the V winning hole 2007, the third distribution detection sensor 2552 detects the game ball after the second sorting detection sensor detects the game ball in the small winning process in the case of a third small hit. When it is determined that the game ball passing through the second sorting guideway 2541 is heading towards the third sorting device 2550, a V winning hole different from the scheduled V winning hole or losing hole is selected. If there is a possibility that a game ball will be detected in a losing position, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred and a distribution error notification may be executed. In this case, it is possible to notify when a situation where a fraudulent act is likely to occur, and it is possible to detect a fraudulent act at an early stage.

Note that the mode of distribution error notification may be changed depending on the degree of abnormality (fraud level). For example, in the case of the first small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects a game ball, and the game is stopped. If it is determined that the ball has entered the second distribution guide path 2541, or in the case of a second small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball during the small win process, but the third distribution detection sensor detects the game ball. If it is determined that the game ball passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 is heading towards the first V prize opening 2007 because the game ball cannot be detected in step 2552, it is determined that the degree of abnormality is high and, for example, A display such as "Fraud has occurred!" is displayed in the entire area of the performance display device 1600, and the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464 output "Fraud is being committed." at a high volume, thereby indicating that fraud has occurred. In the case of a second small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball in the small hit process, and in the case of the third small hit, the third distribution detection sensor 2552 detects the game ball. If it is determined that the game ball passing through the second sorting guide path 2541 is heading towards the third sorting device 2550 by detecting the ball, it is determined that the degree of abnormality is low and the effect display device, for example, The occurrence of an abnormality other than fraudulent activity may be notified by displaying a message such as "Discharge abnormality" in a part of the area of the controller 1600 and not outputting from the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464. . In other words, if the game ball is passing through a path in which the game ball enters the V-winning hole at a higher rate than the percentage of game balls entering the V-winning hole that is preset according to the small winning type (when the game ball is not executed) If the expected level of winning is higher than the expected level of winning that is preset according to the type of small win), it is determined that there is a high degree of abnormality and that fraud is occurring. If the game ball is passing through a path that enters the V winning hole at a lower rate than the percentage of game balls entering the V winning hole that is preset according to the small winning type (execution) If the expected level of winning is lower than the expected level of winning that is preset according to the type of small winning that is being carried out), the degree of abnormality is determined to be low, and an abnormality that is different from fraudulent activity occurs. may also be notified. In addition, if the V winning expectation level is lower than the V winning expectation level that is preset according to the type of small win being executed, the player himself will suffer a disadvantage, but the gaming parlor will suffer no damage. Since this does not occur, if the degree of such an abnormality is low, the distribution error notification may not be performed.

In addition, if a game ball is detected in a V winning hole or losing hole that is different from the V winning hole or losing hole that is scheduled according to the small hit type, or if a game ball is detected in a V winning hole or losing hole that is scheduled according to the small winning type. During the period in which a distribution error notification is being performed based on the possibility that a game ball may be detected in a V-winning hole or a losing hole that is different from a losing hole or a losing hole, a game ball is sent to the accessory winning hole 2006 in the above-mentioned small winning process. Even if it is determined that a slight abnormality has occurred, such as the game ball that entered the game ball not being ejected, the game ball may be placed in a V winning hole or losing hole that is different from the scheduled V winning hole or losing hole depending on the type of small hit. It is executed based on the detection or the possibility that the game ball will be detected in a V winning hole or losing hole that is different from the V winning hole or losing hole that is scheduled depending on the type of small hit. The distribution error notification is continuously executed without being terminated. However, the ejection error notification 1, which is based on the determination that a slight abnormality has occurred in which the game ball that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 is not ejected during the small winning process, is not in a visible/listenable state. Although it is not executed, it is executed behind the scenes, and the contents of the discharge error notification 1 are advanced as time passes. In addition, in this case, if the game ball that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 is discharged and the value of the remaining ball counter becomes "0", a slight abnormality may occur that the game ball that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 is not discharged. The discharge error notification 1 based on the fact that it is determined that the discharge error has occurred ends. In this way, even if a minor abnormality occurs during the period when an error notification (distribution error notification in this example) is performed based on the occurrence of a major abnormality, an error notification (distribution error notification in this example) is performed based on the occurrence of a minor abnormality. In this example, the discharge error notification 1) is not executed in a visible or audible manner. However, it is quietly executed behind the scenes of error notification based on the occurrence of a major abnormality (in this example, distribution error notification), and when a minor abnormality is resolved, an error notification based on the occurrence of a minor abnormality (this In the example, the discharge error notification 1) is terminated.

In this example, even in a state where a small hit game state or a jackpot game state is not occurring, the accessory winning hole sensor 2513, the first V winning hole sensor 2514, the first losing hole sensor 2515, the second V winning hole sensor 3003, The detection of a game ball by the third loss opening sensor 3004 is monitored, and if a game ball is detected by any of these sensors, it is determined that a fraudulent act is being carried out and the occurrence of a fraudulent act is notified. It has become. In addition, in a state where a small hit game state or a jackpot game state is not occurring, the detection of game balls by the second distribution detection sensor or the third distribution detection sensor 2552 may be monitored, and the second distribution If a game ball is detected by either the detection sensor or the third sorting detection sensor 2552, it is determined that the degree of abnormality is high, that is, a fraudulent act is being carried out, and the occurrence of a fraudulent act is notified. good. In other words, in a state where a small winning game state or a jackpot gaming state is not occurring, regardless of the degree (high or low) of the rate at which game balls enter the V prize opening, the game ball may pass through any passage in the accessory prize opening 2006. It is also possible to determine that a fraudulent act is being committed even if the password is passed, and to notify the user of the occurrence of a fraudulent act.

In addition, in the above example, when the discharge error notification is executed in step S441, or when a game ball is detected in a V winning hole or a losing hole that is different from the V winning hole or losing hole that is scheduled depending on the small winning type. Or, if a distribution error notification is made based on the possibility that a game ball will be detected in a V winning hole or losing hole that is different from the V winning hole or losing hole that is scheduled according to the small winning type. Although the value of the remaining ball counter is monitored by repeatedly executing the small winning process, the progress of the game may be stopped without monitoring the value of the remaining ball counter. In addition, even if the progress of the game is not stopped, the value of the remaining ball counter is monitored and when the value of the remaining ball counter becomes normal ("0"), the abnormal state is automatically restored and a small win is achieved. The gaming state may not be ended. This makes it possible to reliably grasp the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, after the distribution error notification is performed, if a game ball is detected in the V winning opening or loss opening (regular receiving opening) scheduled according to the small winning type, If a game ball rolling on the route (regular route) is detected (for example, when the third distribution detection sensor 2552 detects a second small hit), the distribution error notification ends. You may also do so. In addition, after the ejection error notification is performed, if a game ball is detected in the V winning opening or loss opening (regular receiving opening) scheduled according to the small winning type, or when the game ball is When a game ball rolling on a route (regular route) is detected (for example, when the third distribution detection sensor 2552 detects a second small hit), the ejection error notification is terminated. Good too. In addition, the measurement value of the discharge monitoring timer that causes the discharge error notification to be detected is determined by detecting the game ball rolling on the scheduled route (regular route) according to the type of small hit (for example, the second small hit). In this case, the discharge monitoring timer may be reset every time the third distribution detection sensor 2552 detects a It is only necessary to enable the discharge error notification to be executed when the expected maximum period according to the small winning type is reached.

[15-1. Volume adjustment]
The volume adjustment switch is used for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or the special symbol display (the For a certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit controls the fluctuation pattern when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device). (from receiving the command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, or from receiving the stop display command in the peripheral control unit until 0.5 second has elapsed after the final display of the decorative pattern) Turn the volume adjustment switch to adjust the volume of the performance sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. It can be adjusted by operating it. As mentioned above, the resistance value of the volume adjustment switch is changed by rotating it, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak changes the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023.

In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024-level value is divided into seven parts and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. At board volume 0, the sound is muted, and at board volume 6, the volume is set to maximum, and the volume is set so that it increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music is output from the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. and sound effects are played. In this way, music, sound effects, etc. are output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the bass body frame speaker 622 on the body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the volume adjustment switch. The sound of the performance is now playing.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, in addition to production sounds such as music and sound effects, a notification sound is also used to notify the hall clerk, etc. of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity with respect to the pachinko machine 1. (For example, the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be made more powerful, or the player may be notified that there is a high possibility of transitioning to an advantageous game state.) (etc.) is also played from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, but the notification sound and notification sound can be adjusted by adjusting the volume. The flow is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the switch, and the volume from mute to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the peripheral control IC using a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned board volume which is divided into 7 levels, and can be changed into 5 levels from mute to maximum volume. As a result, even if, for example, a clerk in the hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume low, the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and main body frame 4 Although the performance sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the bass body frame speaker 622 are reduced, the volume may be increased when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player is cheating (in this implementation). In this mode, a notification sound set at maximum volume can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for the hall staff etc. to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the fraudulent activity of a player.

Furthermore, as described above, in this embodiment, a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special A certain period of time (in this example, peripheral control Until 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the variable pattern command is received by the peripheral control unit and after the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, or 0.5 seconds after the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command and after the final display of the decorative pattern. In addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the volume control switch, the volume of the music and sound effects is adjusted by rotating the volume control switch. The period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and special symbol displays (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) for a certain period of time when starting or stopping the fluctuating display (in this example, 0.5 seconds after receiving the fluctuating pattern command in the peripheral control unit and starting the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol) (until 0.5 seconds elapse after the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command and the final display of the decorative pattern), and furthermore, the rotary operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300 set in the variable production. The rotary operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300 and the operation period of the press operation section 303 (valid period for accepting operations of the rotation operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 in so-called button production), etc. By operating the operation unit 303, the volume of the music and sound effects can be adjusted. Specifically, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display (the first A certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the special symbol display (special symbol display, second special symbol display) (in this example, the peripheral control unit uses the fluctuation pattern command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, or from the time the peripheral control unit received the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the final display of the decorative pattern), and The operation period of the rotary operation section 302 and press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 set in the variable production (valid period for accepting operations of the rotation operation section 302 and press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 in so-called button production), etc. When the rotary operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300 is rotated, an indicator composed of a plurality of scales is displayed on the production display device 1600, and the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300 is rotated. You can change the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume (from the minimum volume of 1 to the maximum volume of 5).

Specifically, the rotation operation section 302 is rotated clockwise without operating the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300, and when the rotation amount of the rotation operation section 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the volume of the production sound is reduced to 1. The volume is changed to a higher level, the rotation operation section 302 is rotated to the left without operating the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300, and when the rotation amount of the rotation operation section 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the production sound is changed to a higher level. The volume will be changed to one level lower.

FIG. 175 shows how the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and bass sound on the main body frame 4 are activated in response to the rotational operation of the volume adjustment switch and the rotational operation of the rotational operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300. With the volume of the effect sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 set to volume 5, a variable effect in which a decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner is started on the effect display device 1600, and during this variable effect, the effect operation unit 300 is It is a timing chart showing an example when the press operation section 303 is pressed and then the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300 is rotated.

As shown in FIG. 175, in order to change the volume of the effect sound from volume 5 to volume 4 during the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600, the pressure operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is not operated. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the left and the rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the volume of the performance sound is lowered by one level from volume 5 to volume 4, and the rotation of this rotation operation unit 302 Changes according to the operation are immediately reflected in the effect sounds output from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4. That is, in order to change the volume of the effect sound output from the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker 464, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, the rotary operation section of the effect operation unit 300 is used. 302 is rotated, the volume after this change is reflected in the output from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. It has become.

Further, the scale of the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 is changed according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300. This allows you to visually determine the current volume setting. Furthermore, in this example, an indicator that is displayed in response to a rotational operation of the rotary operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is displayed on the performance display device 1600 where a performance performance using a decorative pattern or the like is executed. Further, this indicator is displayed at the top of the images displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this example, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed semitransparently, so that images such as variable effects performed on the back can be recognized. It should be noted that a sub-display device different from the effect display device 1600 on which variable effects such as decorative patterns are executed may be provided. The indicator may be displayed on a sub display device. Furthermore, in this example, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the operation of the rotary operation unit 302, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears. Note that after displaying the indicator on the effect display device 1600 based on the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears based on the operation of the press operation unit 303. You may also do so. The above-mentioned indicator may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, or the lower right display area that does not overlap with the effect image etc. in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be partitioned, and the indicator may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600. An indicator may be displayed in the lower display area. Further, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided separately from the effect display device 1600, and an indicator may be displayed on this display device.

Furthermore, when the scale of the indicator and the volume of the performance sound of music or sound effects change by rotating the rotary operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300, a specific sound (such as "beep") corresponding to the changed volume will be heard. Electronic sounds) are output from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sounds of the main body frame 4. As a result, when the rotary operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300 is rotated, the production sounds such as music and sound effects are transmitted to the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the bass body on the main body frame 4. Even if it is not output from the frame speaker 622, the actual volume can be determined by the specific sound output from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. You can adjust the volume while checking the Note that the specific sound may not be output while the variable performance is being performed. That is, during execution of the variable performance, a performance sound corresponding to the content of the variable performance is output, and the actual volume can be confirmed without outputting a specific sound. As a result, it is possible to prevent a specific sound unrelated to the contents of the variable performance from being output during the variable performance, thereby inhibiting the variable performance in progress and reducing the game's interest.

This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of production sounds such as music and sound effects is incorporated, among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. However, it is not reflected in the volume adjustment of the above-mentioned notification sound or notification sound.

As described above, in this embodiment, the volume of the production sound of music and sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the volume of the production sound of music and sound effects is adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch directly. Adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value from the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch according to the operation. There are two methods: Since the volume adjustment switch is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to keep the main body frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. In this case, only the hall clerk can turn the volume control switch. However, the volume adjusted by the hall staff may feel too small for the player, making it difficult to hear the music or sound effects, or may feel too loud for the player, making the music or sound effects too loud. be. Therefore, when the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the volume of the production sound of music and sound effects can be adjusted to the desired volume. It looks like this. This allows the player to adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to the desired volume, so if the player feels that the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effects. The user can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300, and can also feel the volume adjusted by the hall staff to be louder and listen to the music and sound effects. If you find it too loud, you can reduce the volume to a desired level by operating the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 continues to be in a state where no game is played for a predetermined period of time, enters a customer waiting state, and repeatedly performs a demonstration using the performance display device 1600 (for example, 10 times), the previous The volume adjusted by the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 while playing the game is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk directly rotating the volume adjustment switch. As a result, if a player who was playing the game while sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the adjusted volume is too low and has difficulty hearing the music or sound effects, this time, A player who plays a game while seated on the pachinko machine 1 can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300. If the player who is playing the game feels that the adjusted volume is too loud and the production sound of the music and sound effects is noisy, the player who is sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game may change the production operation unit 300. The volume can be lowered to a desired level by operating the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303.

[15-2. Adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated, a predetermined value is added or subtracted from the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch. In addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume, it is also possible to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band. Specifically, the sound output in the high frequency range (a predetermined frequency band or higher) can be suppressed (or muted).

That is, for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display (the first special symbol Display unit, second special symbol display unit) for a certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (in this example, the peripheral control unit receives a variation pattern command) until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, or until 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the reception of the stop display command in the peripheral control unit after the final display of the decorative design), and further fluctuating effects. The operation period of the rotary operation section 302 and press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 set in (the valid period for accepting the operation of the rotation operation section 302 and press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 in so-called button production), etc. Except for this, when the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed, an environment change mode is set for setting various environments of the pachinko machine 1 (such as whether or not high-pitched sound is output, whether or not the LED of the door frame 3 lights up, etc.). The screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the screen for performing the environment change mode, a list of environments that can be changed (the presence or absence of high-pitched sound output, the presence or absence of light emission of the LED on the door frame 3, etc.) is displayed, and the rotary operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300 can be used to change the environment. By operating the press operation unit 303 with one of the environment settings selected, it becomes possible to execute a process for changing the environment setting. In this way, by operating the rotary operation section 302 and press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 according to the environment change mode screen, you can suppress the sound output of a specific frequency band, rotate the volume adjustment switch, etc. It is possible to output the sound at a set volume according to the rotational operation of the rotational operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300. Although the environment change mode screen is displayed at the top of the images displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is displayed semitransparently so that the image on the back can be recognized.

Specifically, when the press operation section 303 is pressed without rotating the rotary operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300, a screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the production display device 1600. Then, by operating the rotary operation unit 302 to select the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band, and pressing the press operation unit 303, the sound output of the specific frequency band is suppressed. A selection screen will be displayed to choose between not suppressing the sound output (for example, a mini character for setting the volume will be displayed, ``treble cut on'' or ``treble cut off'' will be displayed in the mini character's speech bubble, and the rotation operation will be displayed. (the display is switched each time the section 302 is rotated by a predetermined amount), and a state in which the sound output in a specific frequency band is suppressed by operating the rotation operating section 302 again and a state in which the sound output in a specific frequency band is not suppressed. By pressing the press operation section 303 with one of the ``There is a cut in the high range'' or ``There is no cut in the treble range''). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the decision screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears, thereby ending the environment change mode. Note that after the decision screen is displayed, the decision screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be made to disappear based on the press operation section 303 being operated. Note that the screen for performing the environment change mode, the selection screen, and the decision screen may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, or the effect image or the above effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be displayed. A lower left display area that does not overlap with the display of the indicator when adjusting the sound volume may be divided, and a screen for performing the environment change mode, a selection screen, and a determination screen may be displayed in this lower left display area. Further, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 is provided separately from the effect display device 1600, and a screen for performing the environment change mode, a selection screen, and a decision screen are displayed on this display device. You can.

Note that by pressing the press operation section 303 without rotating the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300, a screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the production display device 1600, and then the rotation operation is performed. Even if the section 302 is rotated, the volume adjustment of the performance sound is disabled, and no indicator is displayed on the performance display device 1600. Then, after the environment change mode ends, if the rotation operation section 302 is rotated without pressing the pressure operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300, the volume adjustment of the production sound becomes effective and an indicator is displayed on the production display device 1600. will be done.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 175, the volume of the performance sound in a specific frequency band can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch or rotating the rotary operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300 during the variable performance executed by the performance display device 1600. When the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated in order to suppress the volume from the volume set according to the operation, the rotation operation of the production operation unit 300 is performed at timing t2 when these operations are completed. Changes made in response to the operations on the section 302 and the press operation section 303 are not reflected in the effect sound output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. . Then, at the timing t3 when the variable performance executed by the performance display device 1600 ends (the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped based on the reception of a stop display command instructing the derivation and display of the display result of the decorative pattern from the main control MPU). In other words, the volume of the performance sound in a specific frequency band can be adjusted by adjusting the volume adjustment switch to reflect the changes made in response to the operation of the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 during the variable production at a certain timing). or the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300.

In addition, after the timing t2 when the rotary operation part 302 or the press operation part 303 is completed in adjusting the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band during the fluctuating performance, the volume adjustment of the performance sound of the specific frequency band is invalidated. Ru. Then, when the change in the volume adjustment of the performance sound of a specific frequency band according to the operation of the rotation operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is reflected at the timing t3 when the variable production ends, the specific The volume adjustment of the performance sound of the frequency band becomes effective. In addition, in this example, even if the volume adjustment of the performance sound of a specific frequency band is disabled, if the press operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300, the environment Although a screen for performing a change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to select volume adjustment of a specific frequency band. In addition, during the period when the volume adjustment of the production sound of a specific frequency band is disabled, the environment change mode is performed even if the press operation section 303 is pressed without rotating the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300. The screen may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in order to adjust the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band during the variable performance executed by the performance display device 1600, the rotary operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300 or the press operation is used. When the section 303 is operated, the changes corresponding to these operations are not reflected immediately, but are reflected after the variable effect being executed on the effect display device 1600 ends. Normally, from the start to the end of the variable performance, the effect sound corresponding to the content of the variable effect is continuous from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. Therefore, if you want to adjust the volume of the sound of a specific frequency band during a fluctuating performance (the sound that is being output continuously will be interrupted for a moment, then the volume of the specific frequency band will be adjusted). There is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable due to the restart of the output of the effect sound whose volume is suppressed or the effect sound whose volume is not suppressed in a specific frequency band.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the production sound of a specific frequency band during the variation production, the variation production is By not reflecting the change according to this operation until the end of the fluctuating performance, but by reflecting it after the fluctuating performance ends, the performance sound that plays continuously during the fluctuating performance will be output with the content set in advance, and the fluctuation After the production ends and the output of the production sound that has been continuously flowing according to the content of the variable production stops, the volume of a specific frequency band is changed by operating the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300. To make it possible to output a performance sound that reflects the adjustment, so as not to give a sense of discomfort to a player. In other words, during a fluctuating performance in which the production sound is being output continuously, the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not reflected, and the production sound that has been continuously output stops and the next production sound is started. By reflecting the change at the switching timing before outputting, it is possible to change the performance sound according to the adjustment without feeling any discomfort.

On the other hand, if the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band during a period when the variable performance is not performed, this operation The corresponding changes are immediately reflected, and a sound effect with the volume of a specific frequency band adjusted is output from the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. be done.

In this way, while the volume adjustment of the performance sound during the fluctuating performance is reflected immediately, the volume adjustment of the performance sound in a specific frequency band is not immediately reflected. In other words, with regard to sound-related information that could have a negative impact on the performance scheduled for a variable performance that is currently in progress, such as by giving a sense of discomfort to the player due to a change in the production sound, changes during the variable performance are prohibited to reduce the performance effect. It is designed to be suppressed.

Furthermore, if the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not immediately reflected, the player may be notified of this by displaying it on the effect display device 1600. For example, when the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the production sound of a specific frequency band during a variable production, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is Although it is not reflected immediately, the volume of the performance sound in a specific frequency band is adjusted by displaying a mini-character for volume setting on the performance display device 1600 and displaying a standby message such as "Please wait a moment" in the speech bubble of this mini-character. The player may be notified that the operation of the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 for playing the game is normally accepted. In addition, a standby display that notifies the player that the operation of the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 to adjust the volume of the production sound of a specific frequency band is specified. The change may be made according to the remaining time until the timing to reflect the volume adjustment of the frequency band.For example, a mini-character for volume setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a message saying "Wait a moment" is displayed in the mini-character's speech bubble. The player displays a standby display 1 such as "Yes" to indicate that the operation of the rotary operation section 302 or press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of the production sound in a specific frequency band is normally accepted. After notifying the user, if the remaining time until the timing to reflect the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band reaches a predetermined time, a mini-character for volume setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and a message is displayed in the speech bubble of this mini-character. A standby display 2 that counts down "3", "2", "1", etc. may be performed. Furthermore, when the time has come to adjust the volume of the performance sound in a specific frequency band, a notification to that effect may be provided. For example, a mini-character for volume setting is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and this mini-character is A reflection display such as "Start reflecting selection!" may be displayed in a speech bubble.

In addition, in the above example, when adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band, equalizer setting patterns such as equalizer setting A in which the volume in the specific frequency band is not suppressed and equalizer setting B in which the volume in the specific frequency band is suppressed are preset. By adjusting the volume of the performance sound in the specific frequency band and switching between equalizer setting A and equalizer setting B, a state in which the volume in the specific frequency band is not suppressed and a state in which the volume in the specific frequency band is It is designed to switch between two stages (on and off): a state where the volume of the band is suppressed, and a state where the volume of the band is suppressed. Note that by storing multiple equalizer settings with different degrees of volume suppression in a specific frequency band as equalizer setting patterns in advance, and switching between these multiple equalizer settings, you can create multiple equalizer settings with different degrees of volume suppression in a specific frequency band. The state may be changed. For example, equalizer setting A in which the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, equalizer setting B in which the volume of a specific frequency band is muted, and equalizer setting B in which the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed by rotating the volume adjustment switch or the production operation unit 300. An equalizer setting C that suppresses the volume to half the volume set according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 (for example, if the set volume is volume 6, it is changed to volume 3); The volume of the specific frequency band can be changed by storing it as a setting pattern, and switching between equalizer setting A, equalizer setting B, and equalizer setting C by adjusting the volume of the performance sound of the specific frequency band. A state where the volume is not suppressed, a state where the volume of a specific frequency band is muted, and a state where the volume of a specific frequency band is set according to the rotational operation of the volume adjustment switch or the rotational operation of the rotational operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300. It may also be possible to switch between three levels: a state in which the volume is suppressed to half the volume that is currently being played; This makes it possible to make settings that suit the tastes of various players.

In addition, the production sound of a specific frequency band is not limited to the above-mentioned ones, but also includes the audio frequency band and low frequency range, etc. For example, it is possible to adjust the volume of dialogue uttered by characters etc. during variable production. (If there are multiple characters, it may be adjusted all at once or individually), or the volume of the bass range may be adjustable. Furthermore, it may also be possible to adjust the performance sound (confirmation sound) for notifying the confirmation of a jackpot, the payout sound when paying out prize balls, and the like. Further, the volume of a plurality of frequency bands as a specific frequency band may be adjusted, for example, the volume of both the treble range and the bass range may be adjusted. In this case, the treble range and the bass range may be adjusted individually (for example, by switching between not suppressing the treble range and suppressing the treble range, and by switching between the state where the treble range is not suppressed and the state where the bass range is suppressed). (for example, switching between not suppressing the high range and suppressing the high range and suppressing the low range) The operation of switching to one of the states and the operation of switching to one may be performed separately. That is, the player may be able to select one of a plurality of setting modes (treble cut, payout sound cut, jackpot confirmation sound cut, etc.). This allows settings to be made that suit the tastes of various players.

In addition, when continuous effect sound is output during a jackpot game state, a small win game state, etc., the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, While it is immediately reflected in the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band may be reflected after the jackpot game state and the small win game state are completed. As a result, the volume of a specific frequency band can be adjusted from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 at the switching timing until the continuous production sound output stops and the next production sound is output. By reflecting this in the output from the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, it is possible to change the performance sound according to the adjustment without any discomfort. In addition, during the jackpot game state or the small win game state, the player's attention to the performance content is lower compared to the fluctuating performance, so the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is also done in the same way as the volume adjustment of the above-mentioned performance sound. It may be immediately reflected in the outputs from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the third side, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4.

In addition, when continuous effect sound is output in a gaming state different from the normal state such as a time saving state, the volume of the above effect sound can be adjusted by using the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side. , it is immediately reflected in the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for bass in the main body frame 4, and the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is performed during the production operation to adjust the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band. When the rotation operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the unit 300 is operated, the changes according to this operation are not reflected until the variation production ends, but are reflected after the variation production ends, and the variation production is performed. When the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the production sound of a specific frequency band when the sound is not being played, the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top It may be immediately reflected in the outputs from the side speakers 464 and the bass body frame speakers 622 of the body frame 4. In other words, the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not reflected during the execution of the fluctuating performance, which attracts the most attention of the player, but is reflected after the fluctuating performance is completed, so that it can be adjusted when the player is not paying much attention. It may also be possible to reflect the volume adjustment of the frequency band so that the effect sound can be changed in accordance with the adjustment without any discomfort.

In addition, even if the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected, the produced sound is actually produced from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. The changed performance sound will not be output until is output. Therefore, if the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the production sound of a specific frequency band during the fluctuating production, the specific frequency Even if the band volume adjustment is reflected, the changed performance sound will be transmitted to the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4 after the start of the next variable performance. is output from. That is, the actual output is performed after the lottery process (winning determination lottery, etc.) for starting the next variable performance is performed. Similarly, when the rotary operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band during a period when a demonstration is being performed on the performance display device 1600, will immediately reflect the volume adjustment of the performance sound in a specific frequency band, but if the performance sound is not output as a demonstration, the changed performance sound will be affected by the door frame 3 until the next variable performance starts. The sound is not output from the side top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, and bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, but is output after the start of the variable effect.

Further, the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is initialized at the same time as the volume of the performance sound is initialized. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 continues for a predetermined period of time in which no games are played, enters the customer waiting state, and repeatedly performs the demonstration using the performance display device 1600 (for example, 10 times), the front of the pachinko machine 1 The volume adjusted by the player who was playing the game while seated is canceled, the volume is initialized, and at the same time the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is also initialized (the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed). state).

In addition, the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section of the production operation unit 300 is used to adjust the volume of the production sound of a specific frequency band during the execution of error notification in which the notification sound is output at a high volume (maximum volume may be sufficient). 303 is operated, it may be set as appropriate whether or not the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound depending on the degree of abnormality (incorrect level) that caused the error notification. good.

For example, when a slight abnormality (full tank error) occurs, such as when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls as shown in FIG. When the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band during the full tank error notification being executed, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is immediately changed to the notification sound. If a slight abnormality (full tank error) occurs after adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band, the notification sound will continue to reflect the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band, and the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side will 462, the changed notification sound may be output from the top side speaker 464 and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4. In this example, the sound output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 as a full tank error notification (for example, "Please remove the bulb!") reflects the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band. (For example, if the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, a female voice is output; if the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, a male voice is output.)

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 177, when a serious abnormality (door open error) such as detecting that the door frame 3 has been opened occurs, the volume of a specific frequency band may be adjusted during the door open error notification. When the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume, or when a serious abnormality (door opening error) occurs after adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band, The volume adjustment may not be reflected in the notification sound. In this example, it is possible to adjust the volume in a specific frequency band of the sound (for example, "The door is open!") output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side as a door open error notification. (For example, if the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, a female voice will be output, and if the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, a male voice will be output). When an abnormality occurs, the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band is disabled and a notification sound is output in which the volume in the specific frequency band is not suppressed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 176, a full tank error occurs when a slight abnormality (full tank error) occurs, such as when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls. During the notification, if the rotary operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300 is rotated to adjust the volume, the operation is accepted as valid, but the volume adjustment is not reflected in the notification sound. The volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound, and the changed notification sound is output from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. do. Further, as shown in FIG. 177, during door opening error notification when a serious abnormality (door opening error) such as detecting that the door frame 3 has been opened, the effect operation unit 300 is used to adjust the volume. When the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated, the operation is accepted as valid, but not only is the volume adjustment not reflected in the notification sound, but also the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not reflected in the notification sound. It looks like this. In this way, by appropriately setting whether or not to reflect the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band in the notification sound depending on the degree of abnormality (incorrect level) that caused the error notification, serious abnormalities can be reliably detected. become discoverable.

Further, as shown in FIG. 177, the rotation operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 are operated to suppress the volume of a specific frequency band, and the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side are 464 and the bass frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 is outputting the changed performance sound, if a serious abnormality occurs, the environment change mode or the production operation unit 300 is activated. Suppression of the volume of a specific frequency band is forcibly canceled (turned off) without adjusting the volume of the specific frequency band, and a notification sound in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output. As mentioned above, the notification sound is output for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when restarting the production sound output after the notification sound has stopped, a specific Without adjusting the volume of the frequency band, the suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band that was forcibly canceled is set (turned on) again, and the production sound with the volume of the specific frequency band suppressed is displayed on the door frame 3 side. The sound is output from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example makes it possible to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band, and reflects the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band by operating the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300. In cases where it is possible to immediately output performance sounds and notification sounds, and when the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band by operating the rotary operation section 302 or press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is not immediately reflected in the output of the performance sound. Depending on the state of the pachinko machine 1 (playing state, error state, etc.), it is set as appropriate whether the timing is delayed and the changed performance sound or notification sound can be output. This makes it possible to suppress deterioration in performance effects and to reliably discover serious abnormalities.

[16. Changing settings such as winning probability]
An example of changing the probabilities of jackpots, small wins, etc. in the pachinko machine 1 according to set values will be described. Here, operation signals from the setting key, setting change switch, and setting confirmation switch on the setting board are output to the payout control board 633, and the RWM clear button 633z having multiple functions is not provided on the payout control board 633. A RAM clear switch, error release switch, etc. shall be provided separately. In this example, the setting board is connected to the payout control board 633, but it may be connected to the power board 630 inside the power board cover 631, or the setting board may be connected to the main control board 1310. Further, the setting board may not be an independent board, but may be a part of the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, or the main control board 1310. That is, a setting key, a setting change switch, a setting confirmation switch, and a setting display may be mounted on either the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, or the main control board 1310.

The pachinko machine 1 of this example has a setting board for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine on the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The setting board is connected to the payout control board 633 of the board unit 620, and the payout control unit 633a obtains the operating state of each switch provided on the setting board, and displays a setting display that displays the set or selected setting value. control the device.

The setting board includes a setting key for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode, a setting change switch for changing setting values, a setting confirmation switch for firmly inputting the changed setting values, and , a setting display that displays set or selected setting values is provided, and functions as a setting change operation section that accepts settings change operations. As described above, the setting board is provided on the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row on a game island in a game parlor, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. This makes it possible to change settings.

In this embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key, setting change switch, and setting confirmation switch on the setting board are taken into the payout control section 633a. Further, the setting display is controlled by the payout control section 633a. The finalized settings are sent from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU uses them as tables used in special lottery etc. (hit determination table, jackpot symbol determination table, small hit symbol determination table, etc.) according to the settings. Select the table you want. Note that the tables used in the special lottery etc. are provided for each setting, and each table is set so that at least some of the values are different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178, in this example, "Jackpot probability", "Small hit probability", "Small hit type", "Normal symbol hit probability", and "Second hit probability according to the normal symbol hit type" The opening/closing pattern of the starting port is set corresponding to each of set values 1 to 6.

In addition, the jackpot probability (the ratio of the jackpot judgment value that indicates winning the jackpot in the hit judgment table) is set to a different value for each setting value, and setting value 1 is "1/319", setting value 2 is "1/319". Setting value 3 is "1/299", setting value 4 and setting value 6 is "1/279", and setting value 5 is "1/289". In this example, for setting values 1 to 5, the higher the setting value, the higher the jackpot probability, but for setting value 6, which is the highest setting value, the jackpot probability is lower than setting value 5. There is. Note that the jackpot probability may be increased in proportion to the set value, and in this case, the jackpot probability may be set so that the higher the set value is from set value 1 to set value 6, the higher the jackpot probability.

In addition, the small hit probability (the ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won in the hit judgment table) is set to a different value for each set value, and in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, Setting value 1 to setting value 4 is "1/100", setting value 5 and setting value 6 is "1/90", and in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol, setting value 1 to 4 is "1/100". Setting values up to 5 are "50/100", and setting values 6 are "66/100". In this example, in the case of high setting values (setting value 5 and setting value 6), the probability of small winning is increased compared to other setting values (low setting value), thereby indirectly increasing the frequency of occurrence of jackpot game state. It has become. In this way, in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, by changing the small hit probability according to the set value, the set value is estimated based on the winning frequency of the small win in the normal state, while the second special symbol In the table used for the special lottery, the small winning probability is set to be approximately the same for all set values, so that when the time is short, it is possible to purely enjoy the continuation of the time save (renchan).

In addition, in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, which is mainly executed during the normal state, the small winning probability for set values 5 and 6 is set higher than for set values 1 to 4. On the other hand, in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol that is mainly executed during the time saving state, only the small hit probability of set value 6 is set higher than set values 1 to 5. Therefore, with setting value 4 and setting value 5, although the special lottery for the first special symbol that is executed during the normal state is drawn with different small hit probabilities, the special lottery for the second special symbol that is executed during the time saving state is drawn. A small winning lottery is held with the same probability. However, the jackpot probability and the determination ratio of the small hit type described later are set so that setting value 5 is higher than setting value 4, and overall setting value 5 is more advantageous than setting value 4. has been done.

In addition, while the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is high, the probability of a small win is low, so while there is a high probability that the hit that triggers the transition to the time-saving state is a "jackpot" as in setting value 4, " A game where there is a low possibility of winning a jackpot through a "small hit", and a game where there is a low probability of a "jackpot" winning as a trigger to be controlled to shift to a time-saving state as in setting value 5, but a "small win". To provide a new game property in which a game in which there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot can be realized by changing a set value, and the set value is guessed according to the type of win as a trigger for shifting to a time saving state. Can be done.

Note that the small hit probability may be increased in proportion to the set value, and in this case, the setting value may be set such that the higher the set value is from the set value 1 to the set value 6, the higher the small hit probability becomes. . In addition, the small hit probability according to some of the setting values from setting values 1 to 6 is lower than the small hit probability according to any of the setting values lower than this part of the setting values. You may also do so. For example, the small hit probability for setting value 4 may be set to 1/100, and the small winning probability for setting value 3, which is lower than setting value 4, may be set to 1/90. In this case, when a small hit occurs, the ratio determined for the advantageous small hit type (in this example, the third small hit) can be set so that the setting value 4 is higher than the setting value 3. The setting value 4 may be more advantageous than the setting value 3.

In addition, as a result of the above-mentioned special lottery (hit determination process (step S305)), the determination ratio when determining the small hit type based on the fact that it has been decided to be a small hit (set in the small hit symbol determination table) is also determined. (selection ratio), different values are set for each setting value. In this example, when it is decided to make a small win as the special lottery result of the first special symbol, the second small win is decided at a rate of 9/10 for setting values 1 to 3, and it takes 10 minutes. At a rate of 1, the third small hit is determined, and at a set value of 4 and 5, the second small hit is determined at a rate of 8/10, and the third small hit is determined at a rate of 2/10. , with a setting value of 6, the first small hit is determined at a rate of 1/10, the second small hit is determined at a six-tenths rate, and the third small hit is determined at a three-tenths rate. It looks like this.

In addition, when it is decided to make a small win as the special lottery result of the second special symbol, the first small win will be determined at a ratio of 3/10 for setting value 1 and setting value 2, and 6/10. The second small win is determined by the ratio, the third small win is determined by the ratio of 1/10, and the first small win is determined by the ratio of 2/10 for setting value 3 and setting value 4, and 10 minutes. A ratio of 6 is determined as the second small hit, a ratio of 2/10 is determined as the third small hit, and a set value of 5 and 6 is determined as the first small hit with a ratio of 1/10. , the second small win is determined at a rate of 6/10, and the third small win is determined at a rate of 3/10.

In addition, as mentioned above, the first small hit is to guide the game ball accepted into the accessory winning hole 2006 to the first losing hole 2535, and there is no possibility of occurrence of a jackpot gaming state or a jackpot gaming state. The possibility of this occurring is extremely low. In this example, if it is decided to make a small hit as the special lottery result of the first special symbol, the first small hit will be selected only when the set value is 6, and the other set value (set value 1 to set value 5) are not selected, so that if the player receives a small win in a state that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the normal state, which is a time-saving state, the set value 1 to set value 5 will always result in a jackpot game. It is possible to generate a second small win or a third small win that has a possibility of occurrence of a state, and to create a small win game state while creating expectations for a jackpot game state. In other words, in the case of set values 1 to 5, if a small win occurs in a state that is disadvantageous to the player than the normal state, which is a time-saving state, we focused on the small win game state with the expectation of a jackpot game state. When the player realizes that all the game balls accepted into the accessory winning hole 2006 are guided to the first losing hole 2535 and there is no possibility of a jackpot game state occurring, the player becomes very disappointed, but at least By generating a second small win or a third small win that has the possibility of generating a jackpot gaming state, during the small winning gaming state, it is possible to create expectations for the jackpot gaming state and draw attention to it, which reduces gaming interest. can be suppressed. On the other hand, if the setting value is 6, the first small hit may be selected, but by executing the first small hit in the normal state, it can be determined that the setting value is 6, which is the highest setting value. , it is possible to give the player a joy that is more than the disappointment of winning the first small prize, and it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when it is decided to make a small hit as the special lottery result of the second special symbol, the first small win is selected. In the time saving state, the small winning probability is increased compared to the normal state, so that the small winning game state is executed more frequently. Therefore, even if it is recognized that the first small hit is executed and all the game balls accepted into the accessory winning hole 2006 are guided to the first losing hole 2535, and there is no possibility of a jackpot game state occurring. Don't let players down. In addition, when it is decided to make a small hit as the special lottery result of the second special symbol, a low setting value (setting value 1 or setting value 2) increases the determination ratio of the first small winning, and a high setting value The decision ratio for the first small hit has been reduced. In other words, with a high setting value, when it is determined to be a small win as a special lottery result of the second special symbol, the proportion of small winnings that are disadvantageous to the player is determined to be lower than with a low setting value. Therefore, a high setting value is more advantageous to the player than a low setting value.

In addition, as mentioned above, the third small hit is to guide the game ball accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 to the first V prize opening 2007, and being determined as the third small hit means that you have won the jackpot. The situation is almost the same. In other words, an increase in the probability of winning the third small hit is synonymous with an increase in the probability of winning the jackpot. By increasing the ratio, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot gaming state is indirectly improved.

In addition, the winning probability of the normal lottery (the ratio of the normal symbol per judgment value indicating a normal win among the random numbers for normal symbol per winning judgment) is set to a different value for each setting value, and for setting values 1 to 5, The setting value is "1/2", and the setting value 6 is "1/1". Therefore, with the setting value 6, when a game ball is accepted into the normal prize opening 2003 and a normal lottery is held, the second starting opening door 2411 will move forward and the second starting opening 2004 will be able to receive the gaming ball. This is a situation that is more advantageous to the player than other setting values.

In addition, in this example, if it is decided to make a normal win as the normal lottery result, normal symbol per A (normal pattern per pattern A) and normal pattern per B (normal pattern per pattern B (normal pattern per pattern B1 ~ It is designed to determine one of the multiple normal symbol per type of normal symbol per symbol B5)) and normal symbol per symbol C (ordinary symbol per symbol C), and according to the determined normal symbol per type. The modes (symbol A per normal pattern, pattern B per normal pattern, pattern C per normal pattern) are derived and displayed on the normal pattern display. Further, the opening/closing manner of the second starting port door 2411 is made different for each set value. Specifically, when it becomes A per normal symbol in the normal state, the opening/closing mode of "executing 0.1 s opening once" is executed with all setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6), and the time saving state If it becomes A per normal symbol, execute the opening/closing mode of "execute 6s open once" with all setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6), and if it becomes B per normal symbol in normal state Execute the opening/closing mode "0.1s open twice" with odd set values (set value 1, set value 3, and set value 5), and execute the opening/closing mode of "executing 0.1 s opening twice" with odd set values (set value 2, set value 4, and set value With the value 6), execute the opening/closing mode of "execute 0.1s open once", and if the normal symbol per hit becomes B during the time shortening state, from set value 1 to set value 3, "execute 6s open once" At set value 4 and set value 5, the opening/closing mode "3s open is executed twice" is executed, and at set value 6, the opening/closing mode "3s open is executed once" is executed.

In addition, in the case of setting value 1 to setting value 5, one of the two types of normal symbol per type, normal symbol per A and normal symbol per B, is determined as the normal symbol per type. , in the case of the setting value 6, the type per normal symbol is determined as one of the three types per normal symbol: per normal symbol A, per normal symbol B, and per normal symbol C. . Then, if the normal symbol hits C in the normal state, the opening/closing mode of "execute 0.1s release 6 times" is executed with the setting value 6, and if the normal symbol hits C in the time saving state, set With a value of 6, the opening/closing mode of "executing 1 s opening 6 times" is executed.

In this way, the operating mode of the second starting port door 2411 (the opening/closing mode of the second starting port 2004) that opens the second starting port 2004 based on the normal lottery result being a normal win is changed for each set value. Therefore, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be suggested by the operation mode of the second starting port door 2411.

The above setting key is used to maintain the short-circuited or open state of the contacts by inserting the specified key into the keyhole (key insertion part) and turning the key to the setting position, which triggers the change to the setting change mode. This is a switch that outputs a signal. Note that another switch may be used instead of providing a setting key. In this case, by operating (holding down) the setting change switch for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer, the setting change mode will start, and by holding down the setting change switch while in the setting change mode, the setting change mode will be ended. You can.

Further, the setting change mode may be started and ended by operating the RAM clear switch. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch, and then continuing to operate the RAM clear switch for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Furthermore, the setting change mode may be ended by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch during the setting change mode.

In this way, even an employee who does not own the setting key can change the settings, making it easier to handle the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Furthermore, since the operation time of the setting change switch is detected, it is preferable to detect the operation at the falling edge of the setting change switch.

The setting change switch is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to sequentially switch and select setting values (1 to 6). That is, when the setting change switch is pressed once, the set value increases by 1, and when the setting change switch is operated when the set value is 6, the set value becomes 1. Note that the setting value may be selectable by operating a RAM clear switch without providing a setting change switch. Note that the set value is not limited to 6 levels, but may be set to a smaller number (for example, 2 levels) or a larger number (eg, 8 levels).

The set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device (that is, the winning probability of the special symbol), and the set value = 1 has a low winning probability, and the set value = 6 has a high winning probability. In addition, depending on the setting value, the percentage of variable jackpots, the percentage of time saving (ST) after jackpot, the number of time reductions, the number of rounds and counts of jackpots, the probability of winning a normal figure, the prize ball of the general prize opening, starting opening, and big winning opening. The number of prize balls that the player can obtain may be changed by changing various parameters related to the game, such as the number of prize balls.

The setting confirmation switch is, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary switch. It is preferable that the setting change switch and the setting confirmation switch have different operating methods (operating directions) and shapes to prevent the switches from being operated by mistake. For example, the setting change switch may be a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch may be a momentary toggle switch.

Note that the selected setting may be confirmed by returning the setting key to the normal position without providing a setting confirmation switch. Further, the selected setting value may be determined based on the operation of other switches or sensors provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, operation of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, contact detection by the handle touch sensor 192 due to touching the handle 182, operation of the single button operation sensor 194, operation of the ball rental button, operation of the return button, The selected setting may be determined by detecting winning of a game ball into the starting holes 2002, 2004, or the like. The operation unit that substitutes for the setting confirmation switch may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for playing games) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

In other words, in order to set the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 in this example, three switches (including a setting key) are provided on the setting board, but it is sufficient to provide one or two switches on the setting board. .

Furthermore, neither a setting key, a setting change switch, nor a setting confirmation switch may be provided, and the setting change operation may be made possible only with a RAM clear switch. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch, and then continuing to operate the RAM clear switch for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Furthermore, instead of the setting change switch, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) during the setting change mode, and instead of the setting confirmation switch, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). By the above operation (long press), the set value can be determined. Furthermore, the setting change mode may be terminated by long-pressing the RAM clear switch after setting is confirmed.

The setting display is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and displays a setting value selected by operating a setting change switch, and displays a current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operating a setting key). Note that the setting display may be configured with a settable number of LEDs instead of the 7-segment LED. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value lights up to display the set value.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the payout control board 633 is provided with an error type display using a 7-segment LED that displays the type of payout error. The set value or current set value may be displayed on the error type display. In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so that the error type display and the setting value display can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off when displaying the error type, and the dot may be lit when displaying the setting value. Further, the error type may be displayed by a lighting display (not blinking), and the setting value may be displayed by a blinking display.

[16-1. Setting change processing]
Next, processing related to setting changes will be explained. FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram showing the procedure for changing the setting value.

In this example, the main control side power-on process is executed based on the power being turned on to the pachinko machine 1, and if the conditions for starting the setting change mode are satisfied in the main control side power-on process, The above setting values can be changed.

Specifically, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and start-up setting (step S12) for the main control built-in WDT in the main control side power-on processing, and then determines the state of the setting key and determines whether the setting key is turned on. If it has been operated, a setting change mode for changing the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. When the setting key is operated, a setting key operation signal is output from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU determines that the setting key is turned on when receiving the setting key operation signal. . Note that the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 is being operated, the handle 182 is touched and detected by the handle touch sensor 192, or a prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit (there is a balance on the prepaid card). However, if there is a balance in the cash sand, the setting change mode may not be started. Further, the setting change mode may not be started even if there is a possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being performed on the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a magnetic error is detected).

When the setting change mode is started, the main control MPU uses data other than the game status (for example, probability change status, time saving status, information regarding prize balls) in the game control area (also called specific area) of the built-in RAM. Then, a first RAM clearing process is executed to clear data indicating the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, by performing a setting change operation, setting values 1 to 6 are switched. That is, when the main control MPU finishes the first RAM clear process, it sends a first RAM clear process end command to the payout control unit 633a, and upon receiving the first RAM clear process end command, the payout control unit 633a displays the set value on the setting display. The initial value (for example, set value 0) is displayed blinking, and the set value displayed on the setting display is switched each time the setting change switch is operated (loop from set value 1 to set value 6).

Note that when the main control MPU executes the first RAM clearing process, the set value is cleared and becomes an unset state. In addition, the settings change mode cannot be exited when the settings have not been set, so if the power is cut off during the settings change mode when the settings are not set, the power will be turned on again. Then the settings change mode will be activated. At this time, if the setting key is turned off, a loop process is performed that monitors the setting key status until the setting key is turned on, and the setting change mode is activated in response to the setting key being turned on. will be started.

Further, the payout control unit 633a checks whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, that is, whether the main body frame release switch is off, and the main body frame release switch is turned on (the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2). (not released), the process loops until the main body frame release switch is turned off, and no operation of the setting confirmation switch is accepted. That is, the setting change operation is not completed until the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2.

When the main body frame opening switch is off, or when the main body frame opening switch is off and the setting confirmation switch is operated, the dispensing control unit 633a confirms the setting value displayed on the setting display ( (The flashing display ends and the display lights up.) Then, a setting change end command indicating the finalized setting value is sent to the main control MPU.

When the main control MPU receives the setting change end command, it stores the setting value indicated by the received setting change end command in the game control area of the built-in RAM. As a result, a lottery process or the like is performed according to the determined set value.

Then, when the conditions for ending the setting change mode are met, that is, when the setting key is turned off, the main control MPU performs a power outage clearing process (step S14).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the setting values are changed by the above-described process.

Note that when the setting change mode ends, that is, when the setting key is turned off, the payout control unit 633a ends the display of the setting value on the setting display (does not display the setting value). You can. Furthermore, if the setting key is turned on after the setting change mode ends, the setting change mode is not executed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting display. This allows the game store clerk to understand the current setting value and then change the setting value.

Furthermore, when the setting change mode is to be executed, a notification to that effect may be provided. For example, when it is determined that the setting key is turned on, a setting change mode start command is sent to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify the peripheral control unit 1511 to start the setting change mode, and upon receiving the setting change mode start command, Based on this, the peripheral control unit 1511 may perform a predetermined display (settings are being changed, etc.) on the effect display device 1600. In this case, when the setting change mode is to be ended, that is, when the setting key is turned off, a setting change mode end command is sent to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify the peripheral control unit 1511 that the setting change mode is to be ended, and the setting change mode is terminated. The peripheral control unit 1511 may end the predetermined display being performed on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the change mode end command. It should be noted that the set value that has been determined as a predetermined display or the set value that is displayed on the setting display may be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and in this case, it may be made to disappear when the setting change mode ends. good.

Further, in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU may also notify the setting change mode. For example, the display on the function display unit 1400 may be a special display that does not appear during normal gaming (for example, all special symbol displays are turned off or turned on).

On the other hand, after performing the initial value setting and startup setting (step S12) of the main control built-in WDT in the main control side power-on processing, the state of the setting key is determined, and if the setting key is not turned on, step Processing from S14 onward is executed.

Then, in the main control side power-on process, the main control MPU performs the following operations when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, or when the determination in step S30 is made. When it is determined that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S32, or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (value is 0) in the determination of step S32, that is, the main control side power-off processing If it is determined in step S38 that data other than the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 in the game control area is data about the game status (for example, information regarding the probability change status, time saving status, and prize ball). ) After executing the second RAM clearing process to clear the data indicating the data, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set (step S40). In this way, unlike the first RAM clearing process, the setting value information is not initialized in the second RAM clearing process. That is, by turning on the setting key when the power is turned on, the first RAM clear process can be executed and the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be cleared, and by operating the RAM clear switch when the power is turned on, the second RAM can be cleared. By executing the process, it is possible to clear information regarding the gaming state (for example, information regarding the probability change state, time saving state, and prize balls). Also, after turning on the setting key when the power is turned on, the first RAM clearing process is executed to clear the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1, and then the RAM clearing switch is operated to execute the second RAM clearing process to play the game. Clearing the information regarding the state (for example, the variable probability state, time saving state, information regarding the prize ball), that is, the information regarding the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 and the information regarding the gaming state (for example, the variable probability state, the time saving state, the information regarding the prize ball) It is also possible to clear both. In this way, one or both of the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process can be selectively executed depending on the information to be cleared.

Note that in this example, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key is operated, but the payout control unit 633a may determine. In addition, the setting key operation signal sent from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310 may be sent by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (pulses of a predetermined frequency a predetermined number of times), or a setting key operation signal sent from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310. A signal at an intermediate potential that is not a voltage may also be output. In order to prevent unauthorized acts such as short-circuiting the terminals of the setting key and activating the setting change mode, the control unit 633a sends a signal related to the operation of the setting key to the main control board 1310 using a signal that cannot be generated by shorting the terminals. This is because it is preferable to send the information to .

[16-2. Variable effects according to setting values]
Next, a description will be given of variable effects according to each set value. FIG. 180 is a variation pattern table referenced in the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process, second variation pattern setting process).

In this example, a variation pattern table is provided for each set value, and the type of variation pattern to be selected differs depending on the set value of the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, when the first special lottery result is out of reach in the normal state, the special symbol 1 is out of reach variation pattern table (which is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first variation pattern setting process) In FIG. 180(A), for example, a mini-character to suggest settings is displayed on the production display device 1600, and messages such as "Maybe it's low?" or "Maybe it's one of 1, 2, or 3?" are displayed in the mini-character's speech bubble. By doing so, the error variation pattern 25 that executes the "low setting suggestion effect" that suggests that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is one of 1, 2, and 3 can be selected from setting values 1 to 3. For example, by displaying a mini-character to suggest settings on the effect display device 1600, and displaying messages such as "Maybe expensive?" or "Maybe one of 4, 5, or 6?" in the mini-character's speech bubble, the performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. The outlier variation pattern 26 that executes a "high setting suggestion effect" that suggests that the set value is 4, 5, or 6 can be selected from set values 4 to 6. Therefore, when the "high setting suggestion performance" is executed in the variable performance, the player can recognize that the setting value is at least 4 or more, and therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, for example, by displaying a mini-character to suggest settings on the performance display device 1600, and displaying "Maybe an even number?" or "Maybe one of 2, 4, or 6?" in the mini-character's speech bubble, the pachinko machine 1 The outlier variation pattern 27 that executes the "even number setting suggestion effect" that suggests that the set value of is either 2, 4, or 6 can be selected with the set value 2, the set value 4, and the set value 6, for example. By displaying a mini-character to suggest settings on the performance display device 1600, and displaying messages such as "Maybe an odd number?" or "Maybe one of 1, 3, or 5?" in the mini-character's speech bubble, the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed. The outlier variation pattern 28 that executes the "odd number setting suggestion effect" that suggests that is one of 1, 3, and 5 can be selected with a setting value of 1, a setting value of 3, and a setting value of 5. Therefore, when the "even number setting suggestion performance" is executed in the variation performance, the setting value is 2, the setting value 4, or the setting value 6, and when the "odd number setting suggestion performance" is executed, the setting value is 1, the setting value is 3. The player can now recognize that the setting value is 5. In addition, it is possible to estimate the setting value by combining it with the execution history of "low setting suggestion effect" and "high setting suggestion effect". That is, if the "odd number setting suggestion performance" and the "low setting suggestion performance" are executed, the setting value is 1 or the setting value 3, and the "odd number setting suggestion performance" and the "high setting suggestion performance" are executed. If so, the setting value is 5, and if the "even number setting suggestion performance" and "low setting suggestion performance" are executed, the setting value is 2, and the "even number setting suggestion performance" and "high setting suggestion performance" are executed. If this is executed, it can be inferred that the setting value is 4 or 6. In this way, this example provides a new game feature in which the setting value is guessed by a combination of executed setting suggestion effects out of a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects.

In addition, in this example, for example, a mini-character for suggesting settings is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and messages such as "Maybe the best?" or "Maybe 6?" are displayed in the mini-character's speech bubble, so that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted. The error variation pattern 29 that executes the "highest setting suggestion effect" that suggests that the setting value is 6 is selectable only at the setting value 6. Therefore, when the "maximum setting suggestion performance" is executed in the variable performance, the player can recognize that the set value is the highest setting value, 6, and his/her enjoyment of the game increases. In addition, in the case of setting value 6, it is possible to select a loss variation pattern 31 that executes the "highest setting confirmation effect" when the result is not a reach or when the reach is out of reach. It is possible to notify the player that the highest setting, the setting value 6, has been determined, and to make the player aware that the highest setting has been determined, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when the first special lottery result is a small hit in the normal state, the special symbol 1 small hit fluctuation pattern table (Fig. 180 In (B)), for example, a mini-character for suggesting settings is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a message such as "Maximum setting confirmed!" or "6 confirmed!" is displayed in the mini-character's speech bubble to set the pachinko machine 1. The small winning variation pattern 33 and the small winning variation pattern 34 that execute the "highest setting confirmation performance" which notifies that the value is 6 can be selected only at the set value 6. Therefore, when the "highest setting confirmation effect" is executed in the variable effect when a small hit occurs, the player can recognize that the set value is the highest setting value 6, and the game's interest increases. .

In addition, when the first special lottery result is a jackpot in the normal state, the special symbol 1 jackpot variation pattern table (Figure 180 (C )), the jackpot variation pattern 34 that executes the "highest setting confirmed effect" can be selected only at the setting value 6. Therefore, when the "highest setting confirmation effect" is executed in the variable effect when a jackpot occurs, the player can recognize that the setting value is the highest setting value 6, and the jackpot game state is executed. By doing so, it is possible to give double pleasure to the player, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, when the second special lottery result is a small hit in the time saving state, the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern table (Fig. 180 In (D)), the small winning variation pattern 34 that executes the "highest setting confirmation effect" can be selected only at the setting value 6. Therefore, when the "highest setting confirmation effect" is executed in the variable effect in the case of a small hit, the player can recognize that the set value is the highest setting value 6, and also By guiding the game ball entered in 2006 to the first V prize opening 2007 and winning the third small hit that generates a jackpot game state, the player can be given double pleasure. Interest improves.

As described above, in this example, the small hit probability is changed depending on the setting value of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, in the normal state, set values 1 to 4 have a small hit probability of "1/100," while set values 5 and 6 have a higher probability of winning in 90 minutes than set values 1 to 4. No. 1”. Similarly, in the time saving state, set values 1 to 5 have a small winning probability of "1/10", while set value 6 has a higher probability of hitting "1/9" than set values 1 to 5. It is said that

In addition, the small winning variation pattern 34 that executes the "highest setting confirmation performance" that can be selected in the second variation pattern setting process when the second special lottery result is a small winning in the time saving state is a small winning variation pattern 34 that runs for a long period of time (155 seconds). The variation time is longer than the variation time of the variation patterns that can be selected with setting values 1 to 5, which are lower than setting value 6. Further, at setting value 6, the selection rate of small winning variation pattern 20 having a longer fluctuation time compared to small winning variation patterns 1 to 3 is made higher than setting value 1 to setting value 5, which is lower than setting value 6. That is, at the setting value 6 where the small hit probability is higher than the other setting values, the variation time of the variation performance executed in the time saving state is longer. As mentioned above, with setting value 6, the probability of a small hit is higher than with setting values 1 to 5, and furthermore, when a small hit occurs, the game ball that enters the accessory prize opening 2006 is transferred to the first V prize opening 2007. Since the ratio determined for the third small win that induces a jackpot game state to occur is also set higher than the set value 1 to set value 5, it becomes possible to obtain a large amount of prize balls in a short time. Therefore, in the case of setting value 6, by increasing the selection rate of small winning fluctuation pattern 20 and small winning fluctuation pattern 34, which have a longer fluctuation time than other small winning fluctuation patterns, than setting value 1 to setting value 5. The number of executions of variable effects per unit time is suppressed to suppress the improvement in the gambling experience.

In addition, in this example, although the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern are distributed in the same way for all setting values, in the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to setting value 6, there are fluctuation patterns specific to setting value 6 (outlier fluctuation pattern 29 to outlier fluctuation pattern). pattern 31, small hit fluctuation pattern 33, small hit fluctuation pattern 34, and jackpot fluctuation pattern 34), the random numbers for determining the fluctuation patterns are distributed differently. Therefore, in this example, only the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern assigned to a specific fluctuation pattern (adjustment fluctuation pattern) in the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the setting value 6 are adjusted, and the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern are distributed. In this way, only the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern assigned to a specific fluctuation pattern are adjusted without changing the distribution of the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern for each of all the fluctuation patterns in the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to setting value 6. This reduces the burden of adding and deleting variable patterns, making it easier to design the gaming machine. Note that a specific variation pattern is one that maintains a frequency of appearance above a certain level even if the number of distributed random numbers for variation pattern determination is reduced, and at least It may be adjusted to have 60% or more of the number of distributions, and the appearance rate may not be excessively lowered compared to other setting values.

In this way, in this example, the small hit probability and the variable time of the variable performance that is executed when the special lottery result is a small win are varied according to the setting values of the pachinko machine 1, thereby creating a balance with the gambling experience. is taking.

In addition, for the above setting suggestion performances (low setting suggestion performance, high setting suggestion performance, even number setting suggestion performance, odd number setting suggestion performance, highest setting suggestion performance, highest setting confirmation performance), the first special lottery result in the normal state is off. Or, it is most likely to be executed when the reach is off, and there are many types of setting suggestion effects that can be executed. On the other hand, if the second special lottery result in the time-saving state is off or out of reach, or the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) in the normal state and time-saving state are a small hit or a jackpot. In this case, the first special lottery result in the normal state is less likely to be executed than in the case where the first special lottery result is a loss or a reach loss, and there are fewer types of executable setting suggestion effects. In other words, by reducing the frequency of execution of the setting suggestion performance during the time saving state or when winning a small hit compared to when the game is out of reach or out of reach in the normal state, attention is drawn to the acceptance of the game ball into the V winning opening. There is.

[17. Guide passage group consisting of the first guide passage and the second guide passage]
[17-1. Regarding the case where the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide path]
As an embodiment different from the above, FIG. 181 and FIG. This will be explained with reference to FIG. 182. FIG. 181 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide passage 2521, and FIG. 182 is a specific example of a warning effect when executing a warning effect using the right detection sensor 2404. .

As shown in FIG. 181, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting passage of the game ball B is provided at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, slightly below the entrance (near the entrance). This right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position where the game ball B entering the first guide path 2521 will definitely pass through. In other words, when the game ball B enters the upstream space 2505 and hits the stopper 1006 with such force (so-called hitting to the right), it enters the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. When the game ball B enters the first guide path 2521, the game ball B will be detected by the right detection sensor 2404. On the other hand, if the game ball B is hit with a force that does not enter the upstream space 2505 and contact the stopper 1006 (a force that is somewhat weaker than that of a right-hand ball), there is a high probability that the ball will enter the second guide path 2522. , when the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided inside the first guide passage 2521, so the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404. There isn't.

The right detection sensor 2404 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404 is input to the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521 based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B has been hit into the first guide path 2521, and the right detection sensor 2404 detects the game ball B passing. If the passage of the ball B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521.

In this embodiment, it is necessary to change the way the game ball B is hit (launch intensity) depending on the game state, and to vary the area and path into which the game ball B is hit. First, during the small winning game, the accessory prize opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521 becomes open, and the game ball B is allowed to enter the accessory prize opening 2006 that is in the open state. is required. Therefore, during a small winning game, the game ball B enters the upstream space 2505 and hits the stopper 1006 with such force that the game ball B enters the first guide path 2521 of the guide path group 2520. It is necessary to hit B (so-called right-handed hit).

Also, during a jackpot game, the jackpot 2005 provided at the lower right of the center accessory 2500 becomes open, and it is required to enter the game ball B into the jackpot 2005 that is in the open state. However, the game ball B is configured so that it has a higher probability of entering the big prize opening 2005 when it is ejected from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 than from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. ing. In addition, during the time saving state, based on the ball entering the normal prize opening 2003 provided at the lower right of the center accessory 2500, the second starting port 2004 also provided at the lower right of the center accessory 2500 is opened. state, and the game ball B is required to enter the second starting port 2005 which is in the open state. It is configured such that the game ball B discharged from the exit has a higher probability of entering the normal winning hole 2003 and the second starting hole 2005. Therefore, during the jackpot game and the time saving state, the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520, so that it enters the upstream space 2505 and does not come into contact with the blocking part 1006. It is preferable to hit the game ball B with a force that is somewhat weaker than that of a right-handed hit.

Further, during the normal state, it is required that the game ball B enter the first starting port 2002 provided below the center accessory 2500. Therefore, during the normal state, the highest point on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 is set so that the game ball B flows down the left side area of the center accessory 2500 where the ball can enter the first starting port 2002. It is necessary to hit the game ball B with such force that it enters the left side in front view (left side of the upper right circumferential wall portion 2510) from the part where the game ball B hit (so-called left-handed hitting).

In this embodiment, it is necessary to change the way the game ball B is hit (launch strength) depending on the game state, and to vary the area and path where the game ball B is hit. If ball B has not been hit, the player is alerted to hit the game ball B into the recommended area or path. Specifically, when the game state is not such that the game ball B should be driven into the first guide path 2521 of the guide path group 2520, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide path 2521 detects the passage of the game ball B. If this state continues for a predetermined period of time, a warning is given to the player.

First, during the jackpot game and the time saving state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the second guide path 2522 of the guide path group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide path 2521 When the passage of the game ball B is detected, it is determined that the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521, and this state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, if 5 or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds) ), the player is warned that he should hit the game ball B into the second guide path 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 182(A), the effect display device 1600 executes a first warning effect that notifies the user of the message "Please type into the second guide path." As a result, during the jackpot game and the time saving state, the hitting method is changed to a strength that does not enter the upstream space part 2505 and contact the blocking part 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than right-handed hitting), and the second guide The player can understand that he should hit the game ball B into the passage 2522. If the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) after the execution of the first warning effect, the game ball B is placed in the first guide path 2521. It is determined that the state in which the symbol has been typed has been resolved, and the first warning effect is ended.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passing of the game ball B during the jackpot game and the time saving state, it determines that the game ball B has been hit into the first guide path 2521, and starts the monitoring timer. At the same time as the start, the count value is incremented every time the right detection sensor 2404 detects the game ball B during the monitoring by the monitoring timer. After the monitoring timer starts, if the state in which game balls B are hit into the first guide path 2521 continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, if 5 or more game balls B are detected within 5 seconds), the 1 warning effect is executed, but if this state does not continue for a predetermined period of time (for example, if less than 5 game balls B are detected within 5 seconds), a game ball is displayed in the first guide path 2521. Assuming that the state in which ball B was hit has been resolved, the first warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. Furthermore, after the monitoring timer starts, if the gaming state changes from a jackpot game or a time-saving state and the game ball B is no longer in the state where it should be hit into the second guide path 2522, information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. ing. After the first warning effect is executed, a monitoring timer is started, and if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passing of the game ball B for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), the first warning effect is activated. In addition to ending the first warning performance assuming that the state in which the game ball B was hit into the guide path 2521 has been resolved, the second guide path 2522 is also activated when the game state changes from a jackpot game or a time saving state. It is assumed that the game ball B is no longer in a state in which it should be hit, and the first warning performance is ended.

Also, during the normal state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the left area of the center accessory 2500, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide path 2521 detects the passage of the game ball B. Then, it is determined that the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521, and if this state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), the center role The player is warned that he should hit the game ball B into the area on the left side of the object 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 182(B), a second warning effect is executed on the effect display device 1600 to notify a message "Please hit left." As a result, during the normal state, the force of hitting changes to the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 in front view (left side of the upper right peripheral wall part 2510). , the player can understand that he should hit the game ball B into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. If the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect passage of the game ball B for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), the state in which the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521 is resolved. It is determined that this is the case, and the second warning effect is ended.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects passage of the game ball B during the normal state, it is determined that the game ball B has been hit into the first guide path 2521, and a monitoring timer is started. During the monitoring by the monitoring timer, the count value is incremented every time the right detection sensor 2404 detects the game ball B. After the monitoring timer starts, if the state in which game balls B are hit into the first guide path 2521 continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, if 5 or more game balls B are detected within 5 seconds), the 2 Warning effect is executed, but if this state does not continue for a predetermined period of time (for example, if less than 5 game balls B are detected within 5 seconds), a game ball is sent to the first guide path 2521. Assuming that the state in which ball B was hit has been resolved, the second warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. Also, if the gaming state changes from the normal state after the monitoring timer starts, and the game ball B is no longer in the state where it should be hit into the left area of the center accessory 2500, information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. ing. After the execution of the second warning effect, a monitoring timer is started, and if the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passing of the game ball B continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), the first warning effect is activated. In addition to ending the second warning effect as if the state in which the game ball B was hit into the guide path 2521 has been resolved, when the game state is switched from the normal state, a warning is displayed in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. The second warning performance is ended because the game ball B is no longer in a state in which it should be hit.

As described above, when it is not the gaming state in which the game ball B should be hit into the first guide path 2521 of the guide path group 2520, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide path 2521 detects the passage of the game ball B. When this state continues for a predetermined period of time, a warning screen (first and second warning performances) is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the content of the warning changes depending on the gaming state. As a result, even if you hit the game ball B into the first guide path 2521 when it is not the gaming state in which you should hit the game ball B into the first guide path 2521, you will not know which area or path is recommended. , the player can accurately grasp the information.

On the other hand, during a small winning game, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the first guide path 2521 of the guide path group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide path 2521 If the passing of the game ball B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521, and if this state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521. To warn a player that he should hit ball B. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 182(C), the effect display device 1600 executes a third warning effect that notifies the user of the message "Please type into the first guide path." As a result, during a small winning game, the game ball B should be hit into the first guide passage 2521 by changing the hitting method to a strength that enters the upstream space 2505 and contacts the blocking part 1006. person can understand it. When the right detection sensor 2404 detects passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state where the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521 is resolved, and the third warning effect is ended. I have to.

More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passing of the game ball B during a small winning game, it is determined that the game ball B has not been hit into the first guide path 2521, and the monitoring timer is activated. has started. If the state in which no game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521 continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) after the start of the monitoring timer, the third warning effect is executed. If the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B within the time (for example, 5 seconds), it is assumed that the state where the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521 has been resolved, and a third warning is issued. The performance is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Furthermore, even when the game state is switched from a small winning game after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B is no longer in a state where it should be hit into the first guide path 2521, the information of the monitoring timer and the like is cleared. After the third warning performance is executed, a monitoring timer is started, and if the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passing of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521. In addition to ending the fourth warning performance assuming that the problem has been resolved, if the game state is switched from a small winning game, the third warning performance is performed because it is assumed that the game ball B is no longer in the state to be hit into the first guide path 2521. has ended.

In this embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below the entrance (near the entrance) which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, but the game ball B entering the first guide passage 2521 is always It may be located at any position through which the first guide passage 2521 passes, for example, an entrance at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, an outlet at the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, or an inside of the first guide passage 2521.

In addition, in this embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided upstream of the accessory prize opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, but is provided downstream of the accessory prize opening 2006. It may be arranged so that it is provided. In such a case, when the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521 during the small winning game, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the accessory prize opening 2006 which is in the open state. Therefore, the frequency of the game ball B passing through the right detection sensor 2404 located on the downstream side is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from passing excessively and causing a problem in the right detection sensor 2404.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first to third warning performances are exemplified as displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600, but in each game state, in which mode the game ball B is displayed. If you want to separately display a driving area instruction display (for example, a right-hand hitting display consisting of a right arrow image or a left-hand hitting display consisting of a left arrow image) so that the player always knows what to hit, this It is desirable to execute the first to third warning effects so as not to obstruct the display of the area instruction. For example, a "display area for displaying input area instruction display" is partitioned and provided in the upper right part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and a display area of the effect display device 1600 that is separate from that area is provided. It is desirable to divide and provide a "display area for displaying the first to third warning effects" in the upper left part of the screen so that each guide does not overlap and become obstructed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first to third warning effects are shown as displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but such warnings may be realized as audio effects instead of displays. In that case, the priority level of allocation to a limited number of channels for outputting audio will be higher than the various performance sounds set during the normal state, jackpot game, or time saving state. It is desirable to set this so that output can be made as much as possible even in a situation where there are no vacant (unused channels) among the limited number of channels provided. Thereby, it becomes possible to effectively prevent a player who is not accustomed to the game, which has a variety of types of shots of the game ball B, from being disadvantaged.

[17-2. Regarding the case where detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage and the second guide passage]
As an embodiment different from the above, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting a game ball B that has entered the first guide path 2521 of the guide path group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and a right detection sensor 2404 that can detect the game ball B that has entered the second guide path 2522 is provided. A case in which a left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting the game ball B that has been played is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184. FIG. 183 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and FIG. This is a specific example of performance during execution.

As shown in FIG. 183, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting passage of the game ball B is provided at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, slightly below the entrance (near the entrance), and a second A left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting passage of the game ball B is provided at the upper end of the guide passage 2522, slightly below the entrance (near the entrance). This right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position where the game ball B entering the first guide path 2521 will definitely pass through. In other words, when the game ball B enters the upstream space 2505 and hits the stopper 1006 with such force (so-called hitting to the right), it enters the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. When the game ball B enters the first guide path 2521, the game ball B will be detected by the right detection sensor 2404.

On the other hand, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided at a position where the game ball B entering the second guide path 2522 will definitely pass through. In other words, if the game ball B is hit with such force that it enters the upstream space 2505 and does not come into contact with the blocking part 1006 (a force that is somewhat weaker than when hitting right-handed), there is a high probability that it will enter the second guide passage 2522. , when the game ball B enters the second guide path 2522, the game ball B will be detected by the left detection sensor 2405.

The right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 receives detection signals from the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405. has been entered. Then, the peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521 based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404, and also monitors based on the detection signal from the left detection sensor 2405. Then, it is monitored whether or not the game ball B is hit into the second guide path 2522. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B has been hit into the first guide path 2521, and the left detection sensor 2405 detects the game ball B passing. When the passage of the ball B is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been hit into the second guide path 2522, and if the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect the passage of the game ball B, It is determined that the game ball B is not hit into either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522.

In this embodiment, as described in detail above, it is necessary to change the way the game ball B is hit (launch intensity) depending on the gaming state, and to vary the area and path into which the game ball B is hit, but this is not recommended. If the game ball B is not hit into the recommended area or passage, the player is alerted to hit the game ball B into the recommended area or passage. Specifically, since the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in both the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the normal state in which the game ball B should be hit into the left side area of the center accessory 2500 , the state in which either the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 or the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 detects passage of the game ball B is a predetermined period of time. If the game continues, it is possible to alert the player.

More specifically, during the normal state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the left area of the center accessory 2500, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide path 2521 When the passage is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been hit into the first guide path 2521, and when the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide path 2522 detects the passage of the game ball B, the second It is determined that the game ball B is hit into the guide path 2522, and this state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, if the game ball B is hit in the guide path 2522 for 5 seconds by one or both of the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405). If five or more balls are detected), the player is warned that he should hit the game ball B into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 184(A), a fourth warning effect is executed on the effect display device 1600 to notify a message "Please hit left." As a result, during the normal state, the way of hitting is changed to a force that enters the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 to the left side of the highest part in front view (left side of the upper right peripheral wall part 2510). , the player can understand that he should hit the game ball B into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. When the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect the passing of the game ball B for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 It is determined that the state in which the game ball B has been hit has been resolved, and the fourth warning performance is ended.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 detect passage of the game ball B during the normal state, the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522. Based on this determination, a monitoring timer is started, and a count value is incremented each time a game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. Then, after the monitoring timer starts, if the state in which game balls B are hit into the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, if 5 or more game balls B are detected within 5 seconds) ), the fourth warning effect is executed; however, if the condition does not continue for a predetermined period of time (for example, if less than 5 game balls B are detected within 5 seconds), the fourth warning effect is executed. Assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been hit into the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522 has been resolved, the fourth warning performance is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. Also, if the gaming state changes from the normal state after the monitoring timer starts, and the game ball B is no longer in the state where it should be hit into the left area of the center accessory 2500, information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. ing. After the execution of the fourth warning effect, a monitoring timer is started, and if the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect the passing of the game ball B continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) In addition to ending the fourth warning performance assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been hit into the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 has been resolved, when the game state changes from the normal state, Also, the fourth warning effect is ended because the game ball B is no longer in the condition to be hit into the left side area of the center accessory 2500.

In addition, during the small winning game, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the first guide path 2521 of the guide path group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide path 2521 detects the game ball B. If the passing of the game ball B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521, and if this state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), the game ball B is sent to the first guide path 2521. The player is warned that he should hit ball B. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 184(B), the effect display device 1600 executes a fifth warning effect that notifies the user of the message "Please type into the first guide path." As a result, during a small winning game, the game ball B should be hit into the first guide passage 2521 by changing the hitting method to the strength that enters the upstream space 2505 and contacts the blocking part 1006. person can understand it. When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passing of the game ball B, it is determined that the state where the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521 is resolved, and the fifth warning effect is ended. I have to.

More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passing of the game ball B during a small winning game, it is determined that the game ball B has not been hit into the first guide path 2521, and the monitoring timer is activated. has started. Then, if the state in which no game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521 continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) after the start of the monitoring timer, the fifth warning effect is executed. If the right detection sensor 2404 detects passage of the game ball B within the time (for example, 5 seconds), it is assumed that the state where the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521 has been resolved, and a fifth warning is issued. The performance is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Furthermore, even when the game state is switched from a small winning game after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B is no longer in a state where it should be hit into the first guide path 2521, the information of the monitoring timer and the like is cleared. After the fifth warning effect is executed, a monitoring timer is started, and if the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passing of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521. In addition to ending the fifth warning performance assuming that the issue has been resolved, if the game state is switched from a small winning game, the fifth warning performance is also performed assuming that the game ball B is no longer in the state to be hit into the first guide path 2521. has ended.

On the other hand, during the jackpot game and the time saving state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the second guide path 2522 of the guide path group 2520, but the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide path 2522 If the passing of the game ball B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into the second guide path 2522, and if this state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), the second guide path The player is warned that he should hit the game ball B at 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 184(C), the effect display device 1600 executes a sixth warning effect that notifies the user of the message "Please type into the second guide path." As a result, during the jackpot game and the time saving state, the hitting method is changed to a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2505 and contact the blocking portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than right-handed hitting), and the second guide The player can understand that he should hit the game ball B into the passage 2522. When the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passing of the game ball B, it is determined that the state where the game ball B is not hit into the second guide path 2522 has been resolved, and the warning effect is ended. There is.

More specifically, if the left detection sensor 2405 does not detect the passing of the game ball B during the jackpot game and the time saving state, it is determined that the game ball B has not been hit into the second guide path 2522. , has started the watchdog timer. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, if the state in which the game ball B is not hit into the second guide path 2522 continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), the sixth warning effect is executed. If the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passing of the game ball B within the time (for example, 5 seconds), it is assumed that the state where the game ball B is not hit into the second guide path 2522 has been resolved, and a sixth warning is issued. The performance is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Further, even when the game state is switched from a jackpot game or a time saving state after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B is no longer in a state where the game ball B should be hit into the second guide path 2522, the information of the monitoring timer etc. is cleared. After the sixth warning effect is executed, a monitoring timer is started, and if the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passing of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into the second guide path 2522. In addition to ending the sixth warning performance as if the problem has been resolved, if the game state is switched from a jackpot game or a time saving state, the sixth warning performance is performed as it is assumed that the game ball B is no longer in the state where it should be hit into the second guide path 2522. The warning performance has ended.

In this embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below the entrance (near the entrance) which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, but the game ball B entering the first guide passage 2521 is always It may be located at any position through which the first guide passage 2521 passes, for example, an entrance at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, an outlet at the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, or an inside of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided slightly below the entrance (near the entrance), which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, so that the game ball B entering the second guide passage 2522 will definitely pass through. For example, it may be provided at an entrance at the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, an outlet at the lower end of the second guide passage 2522, or inside the second guide passage 2522.

In addition, in this embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided upstream of the accessory prize opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, but is provided downstream of the accessory prize opening 2006. It may be arranged so that it is provided. In such a case, when the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521 during the small winning game, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the accessory prize opening 2006 which is in the open state. Therefore, the frequency with which the game ball B passes through the right detection sensor 2404 located on the downstream side is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the right detection sensor 2404 due to excessive passage of the game ball B.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, detection sensors (right detection sensor 2404, left detection sensor 2405) are provided in both the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 among the guide passage group 2520; One detection sensor may be provided at a position where the game ball B entering the passage group 2520 always passes through. For example, one detection sensor may be provided in the passage before the game ball B that has entered the upstream space 2505 branches into either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, so that the guide It becomes possible to detect whether the game ball B enters the passage group 2520 with one detection sensor. In other words, when one detection sensor detects the passage of game ball B, it is determined that game ball B has been hit into the guide path group 2520, and one detection sensor does not detect the passage of game ball B. Then, it can be determined that the game ball B is not hit into the guide path group 2520. Even in such a case, if the state in which one detection sensor detects passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined period of time when the game ball B should be hit into the left side area of the center accessory 2500, the game By alerting the player, the player can at least understand whether or not he or she should hit the game ball B into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning performances are exemplified as displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600, but in each game state, in which mode the game ball B is displayed. If you want to separately display a driving area instruction display (for example, a right-hand hitting display consisting of a right arrow image or a left-hand hitting display consisting of a left arrow image) so that the player always knows what to hit, this It is desirable to execute the fourth to sixth warning effects so as not to obstruct the display of the crowded area instruction. For example, a "display area for displaying input area instruction display" is partitioned and provided in the upper right part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and a display area of the effect display device 1600 that is separate from that area is provided. It is desirable to divide and provide a "display area for displaying the 4th to 6th warning effects" in the upper left part of the screen so that each guidance is not overlapped and obstructed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects are shown as displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but these warnings may be realized as audio effects instead of displays. In that case, the priority level of allocation to a limited number of channels for outputting audio will be higher than the various performance sounds set during the normal state, jackpot game, or time saving state. It is desirable to set this so that output can be made as much as possible even in a situation where there are no vacant (unused channels) among the limited number of channels provided. This makes it possible to effectively prevent players who are unfamiliar with the game, which has a variety of types of shots of the game balls B, from being disadvantaged.

[17-3. Regarding the case where the ball clogging elimination hole is provided in the weighted part where the first guide passage and the second guide passage are lined up in the front-rear direction]
As an embodiment different from the above, in a weighted part 2520a where a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, a ball can be removed from a ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side. A case where the clogging hole 2523 is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 and 186. 185 and 186 are explanatory diagrams showing an embodiment in which a ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

Although the details have been described above, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in front and back directions in a part of the first guide passage 2521 that extends vertically on the left side of the accessory prize opening 2006. It has a weighted portion 2520a that appears to overlap from the top. In this weighted portion 2520a, the second guide passage 2522 is located on the rear side of the first guide passage 2521.

As shown in FIGS. 185 and 186(A), a predetermined rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 into the weighted part 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction. A ball clogging hole 2523 is provided, which can be inserted into the ball clogging hole 2523 and into which a ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side can be removed by inserting the rod-shaped member. Specifically, the ball clogging hole 2523 is provided on the front side of the first guide passage 2521 and at a portion adjacent to the rear side of the first guide passage 2521 and the front side of the second guide passage 2522. In addition, the ball clogging hole 2523 provided in a portion where the rear side of the first guide passage 2521 and the front side of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other is provided on the front side of the first guide passage 2521 when viewed from the front. It is located at a position that coincides with the ball clogging release hole 2523, and is provided so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. Thereby, the rod-shaped member can be smoothly inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. In other words, when ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, by inserting a rod-shaped member from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side can be closed. The rod-shaped member can come into contact with the game balls B that are clogged with balls, and by moving the rod-shaped member in the front-back direction, the ball jam in the second guide path 2522 can be removed.

Note that when a cover member is provided on the front side of the guide passage group 2520 consisting of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the cover member also includes the first guide passage when viewed from the front. The ball clogging hole 2523 may be provided at a position that coincides with the ball clogging hole 2523 provided on the front side of the ball clogging hole 2521. Thereby, when ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be inserted from the front side of the cover member toward the second guide passage 2522 without removing the cover member.

Further, the ball clogging release hole 2523 is formed in a circular shape with a slightly larger diameter than the rod-shaped member. With this, when a rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be freely moved not only in the front-back direction but also in the vertical direction and the left-right direction. . In other words, when a ball is clogged in the second guide passage 2522, by moving the rod member not only in the front-back direction but also in the vertical and horizontal directions, the ball jam in the second guide passage 2522 can be easily removed. be able to.

In addition, a plurality of ball clogging holes 2523 are provided at predetermined intervals in a portion extending vertically of the weighted portion 2520 where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction. As a result, even if a ball jam occurs at any position in the second guide passage 2522 in the weighted part 2520, the rod-shaped member can be inserted through the ball jam clearing hole 2523 provided near the position. , the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be easily removed.

Of the guide passage group 2520, the first guide passage 2521 is curved only in the left-right direction, whereas the second guide passage 2522 is a complicated passage whose passage is curved not only in the left-right direction but also in the front-rear direction. The second guide passage 2522 is more likely to be clogged with balls than the first guide passage 2521. Moreover, the weighted part 2520 in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction has an entrance that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and an outlet that is the lower end of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. Since the rod-shaped member is far away from the entrance or exit and is located after bending from the entrance or exit, even if the rod-shaped member is inserted from the entrance or exit, the rod-shaped member will not reach that region. In this respect, it is possible to insert a rod-shaped member from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522 in the weighted part 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction. A possible ball de-clog hole 2523 is provided. As a result, by inserting the rod-shaped member, even when a ball is clogged not only in the first guide passage 2521 on the front side in the weighted part 2520a but also in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side, the rod-shaped member can be inserted. Ball jams can be easily removed.

In the above, in the weighted part 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction, a ball is formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. Although a clogging hole 2523 is provided, another example of the ball clogging hole 2523 that can remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side will be shown below.

As a first alternative example, as shown in FIG. 186(B), on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 in the weighted part 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front and rear direction, A ball clogging hole 2523 is provided in which a predetermined rod-shaped member can be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, and a ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be removed by inserting the rod-shaped member. You can. In such a case, when a ball is clogged in the second guide passage 2522, by inserting a rod-shaped member from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be inserted into the game ball B that is jammed in the second guide passage 2522. The members can come into contact with each other, and by moving the rod-shaped member in the left-right direction, the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be removed. Note that in this embodiment, a transparent plate-shaped light guide plate 3102 is provided on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 consisting of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522; It is located behind the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and allows the rod-shaped member to be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 without being obstructed by the light guide plate 3102.

As a second alternative example, as shown in FIG. 186(C), in the weighted part 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction, the front side of the first guide passage 2521 is A ball clogging hole 2523 is provided so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction toward the second guide passage 2522, but the shape of the ball clogging hole 2523 is not a circular shape but a slit shape extending in the vertical direction. may be formed. In such a case, when a rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be moved greatly in the vertical direction, and the ball in the second guide passage 2522 can be moved. Blockages can be easily removed.

Further, near the entrances that are the upper ends of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are provided side by side in the left-right direction. As a third alternative example, as shown in FIG. 186(D), at a location where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction, a predetermined rod-shaped member is inserted into the second guide passage 2522. A ball clogging hole 2523 may be provided that can be inserted from the left side of the ball and that can remove ball clogging in the first guide passage 2521 on the right side (rear side) by inserting the rod-shaped member. That is, the ball clogging release hole 2523 may be provided so as to penetrate from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 toward the first guide passage 2521 in the left-right direction. In such a case, when a ball jam occurs in the first guide passage 2521, by inserting a rod-shaped member from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, the ball jam in the first guide passage 2521 on the right side (back side) can be removed. The rod-shaped member can come into contact with the game balls B that have been rolled, and by moving the rod-shaped member in the left-right direction, the ball clogging in the first guide passage 2521 can be removed.

In addition, when the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 as in the first alternative example and the third alternative example, the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided from the left side of the second guide passage 2522. Although it is possible to remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 by inserting a rod-shaped member through the second guide passage 2523, it is possible to remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522. Therefore, when a rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball-clogging hole 2523, there is a possibility that the rod-shaped member comes into contact with the light guide plate 3102. If the light guide plate 3102 is scratched by the rod-like member, when the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated with a pattern (first pattern 3102a, second pattern 3102b), the scratched area unrelated to the pattern may also be damaged. Light is guided (light is reflected), but if the scratched area overlaps the pattern, there is a problem that the pattern becomes difficult to see. For this reason, it is preferable not to provide a light guide decoration area in which a pattern is displayed in the right area of the light guide plate 3102, which is a portion adjacent to the second guide path 2522. The light guide plate 3102 is attached to a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and the light guide plate 3102 is manually moved to the left so that the light guide plate 3102 is separated from the second guide passage 2522. When the rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball clogging hole 2523, the rod-shaped member can be moved to a position where it does not come into contact with the light guide plate 3102 as a preliminary step. You may. Further, on the left side of the second guide passage 2522, there is a movable member that can move between a position where the ball clogging release hole 2523 provided on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 is concealed and a position where it is not concealed. When inserting a rod-like member through the ball jam elimination hole 2523, the movable member may be configured to be able to move to a position where it does not hide the ball jam elimination hole 2523. In such a configuration, when there is no need to remove a ball jam in the second guide passage 2522, the movable member is located at a position that hides the ball jam clearing hole 2523, so that the player can visually recognize the ball jam clearing hole 2523. This has the advantage that the decorativeness of the entire structure including the second guide passage 2522 is not impaired.

[17-4. Regarding the ball clogging prevention structure near the exits of the parallel first and second guide passages]
As explained in FIG. 121(a), the game ball B is hit with such force that it contacts the stop portion 1006 that protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms part of the periphery of the game area 5a ( When the ball B hits the stopper 1006, the ball B enters the first guide path 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory prize opening door 2511 that closes the accessory prize opening 2006 in the middle of the first guide passage 2521, and then passes through the guide passage group. It is discharged from the outlet on the right side of the lower end of 2520 to the attacker unit 2400 side below. Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is moved to the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 by the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between it and the attacker unit 2400. The player is guided to enter either the normal winning hole 2003 or the left side of the normal winning hole 2003 with a similar probability.

On the other hand, as explained in FIG. 121(b), when the game ball B hit into the upstream space 2505 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the second guide passage 2522, it twists backward. After being lined up in the front-rear direction with the first guide passage 2521 at the weighted portion 2520a, it is twisted forward and released from the outlet on the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 toward the attacker unit 2400 side below. Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is moved to the normal winning opening 2003 or the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 by a plurality of obstacle nails N installed between it and the attacker unit 2400. In rare cases, the attacker is guided to enter the first opening 2431 of the right passage 2430 of the attacker.

In addition, the game ball B that entered the attacker right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is placed on the lower right rail 1004 from the release opening 2435 which is lower than the big winning opening 2005. It is released and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

At the lower end of the guide passage group 2520, the exits of the first guide passage 2521 are located on the right side and the exits of the second guide passage 2522 are located on the left side. In the vicinity of the exits of the passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a large amount of game balls B discharged from these exits flow in in a short period of time, and ball clogging is likely to occur below these exits. In this regard, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003; When the game ball B enters, it is guided to the out port 1008 through the attacker right passage 2430. As a result, near the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, some of the game balls B ejected from those exits are guided from the first opening 2431 to the out port 1008. The game balls B are less likely to stay near the exit of the game ball, and ball clogging can be prevented from occurring. Furthermore, even if ball clogging occurs below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the game balls B discharged from those exits are guided from the first opening 2431 to the out port 1008. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from piling up inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

In this way, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522; The outlet of the first guide passage 2521 is located closer to the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 than the first guide passage 2521. Inside the first guide passage 2521, there is provided an accessory prize opening 2006 which becomes open during a small winning game. When the game balls B are piled up to the position of the accessory prize opening 2006 provided inside the guide passage 2521, more game balls B than expected will flow into the opened accessory prize opening 2006, causing the player to cheat. You will be able to earn significant profits. In this respect, since the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided so that the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is closer to the outlet of the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is Even if ball clogging occurs below the exit of the second guide passage 2522, the game balls B near the exit of the first guide passage 2521 can be efficiently guided from the first opening 2431 to the out port 1008. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from piling up to the position of the accessory prize opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521.

In addition, in this embodiment, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, there is an attacker right side that can guide the game ball B to the out opening 1008. Although the first opening 2431 of the passage 2430 is provided, an outlet other than the outlet 1008 is provided in the attacker right passage 2430, and the game ball B entering from the first opening 2431 is It may also be discharged from the outlet to the outside of the game area 5a. Even in such a case, some of the game balls B discharged from the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be efficiently guided out of the gaming area 5a from an outlet other than the outlet 1008. This makes it difficult for the game balls B to stay near these exits, and it is possible to prevent balls from clogging.

In addition, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, there is an attacker right passage that can guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 at a position close to the exit of the first guide passage 2521. Although the first opening 2431 of 2430 is provided, there is also a passage close to the exit of the second guide passage 2522 that can guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 or to the outside of the game area 5a. An outlet other than the outlet 1008 through which the game ball B can be ejected may be provided. Even in such a case, a part of the game balls B ejected from the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be efficiently guided outside the gaming area 5a, and some of the game balls B can be efficiently guided out of the gaming area 5a. The game balls B are less likely to accumulate, and ball clogging can be prevented from occurring.

In the above, near the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 that can guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 is provided. However, near the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, there are also passages that can guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 and that can discharge the game ball B outside the gaming area 5a. An outlet other than the possible outlet 1008 may be provided. Below, another example of the case where a second out port 1013 is provided near the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, which can discharge the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a, will be described. show. FIG. 187 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second outlet 1013 is provided near the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

As shown in FIG. 187, between the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, it is possible to discharge the game ball B out of the gaming area 5a. A second outlet 1013 is provided. In such a configuration, if the game ball B is hit with such force that it enters the upstream space 2505 and contacts the stop portion 1006 (so-called right-handed hit), there is a high probability that the game ball B will enter the first guide path 2521. A part of the game ball B that has been hit enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide path 2521. Similarly, if the game ball B is hit with such force that it enters the upstream space 2505 and does not come into contact with the blocking part 1006 (a force that is somewhat weaker than when hitting right-handed), there is a high probability that it will enter the second guide path 2522. However, a part of the game ball B that has been hit enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide path 2522. In other words, a portion of the game ball B that has been hit into the upstream space 2505 enters the second out port 1013. As a result, even if the player aims at either the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 or the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, a part of the game ball B that has been hit will enter the upstream space 2505. Since the game balls B are guided outside the gaming area 5a through the second out port 1013, fewer game balls B enter the inside from those entrances, and balls become clogged inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. can be prevented from occurring.

In addition to the above, the out port 1008 is capable of ejecting the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a only when a ball jam occurs inside the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. Another outlet may be provided. Below, another example will be shown in which a second outlet 1013 is provided near the exit inside the first guide passage 2521, which allows the game ball B to be discharged out of the game area 5a. FIG. 188 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second outlet 1013 is provided near the exit inside the first guide passage 2521.

As shown in FIG. 188(A), slightly above the exit which is the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, there is a front surface of the game area 5a (game board 5) which is the same surface as the rear surface of the first guide passage 2521. A second out port 1013 is provided which can open and discharge the game ball B out of the game area 5a. In addition, inside the first guide passage 2521, there is provided an accessory prize opening 2006 that is open during the small winning game, but the second out opening 1013 is located on the downstream side of the accessory prize opening 2006. It is located in a certain position. In such a configuration, if ball clogging does not occur below the second out port 1013, such as below the exit of the first guide path 2522, when the game ball B enters the first guide path 2521, the second out The ball does not enter the opening 1013 and passes directly in front of the second out opening 1013.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 188(B), if a ball jam occurs below the second out port 1013, such as below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the game will reach the position of the second out port 1013. When the balls B are piled up, the game balls B that have passed through the first guide path 2521 will enter the second out port 1013. That is, inside the first guide passage 2521, the game balls B are not piled up to a position above the second outlet 1013. As described above, inside the first guide passage 2521, there is provided an accessory prize opening 2006 which becomes open during a small winning game. When the game balls B are piled up to the position of the accessory prize opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, more game balls B than expected flow into the accessory prize opening 2006 which is in the open state. Players will be able to obtain illegal profits. In this regard, on the downstream side of the accessory prize opening 2006 inside the first guide passage 2521, only when a ball jam occurs inside the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B can be discharged outside the game area 5a. Since the second out port 1013 is provided, even if a ball jam occurs near the exit of the first guide path 2521, the accessory prize opening 2006 provided inside the first guide path 2521 will be closed. A situation may occur in which the game balls B can be ejected from the second outlet 1013 to the outside of the gaming area 5a before the game balls B are piled up to the position where the player can gain illegal profits. can be prevented.

[18. About exit detection when an abnormality occurs]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, after the power is turned on, the ball enters the entrance holes provided on the game board 5 (first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, accessory winning opening 2006, etc.). When the game ball B enters the out port 1008, and when the game ball B enters the out port 1008, the number of entered balls is counted and predetermined calculations are performed, and the calculation results are used as information regarding the pachinko machine 1. The information is displayed on a predetermined display device (for example, the base monitor 1310h). In addition, when an abnormality occurs, whether the calculation is continued or stopped depends on whether the abnormality is mild or severe, and if a severe abnormality occurs, the calculation is stopped. I am trying to cancel (stop) it. The execution state of calculations when such an abnormality occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 189. FIG. 189 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of execution of calculations when an abnormality occurs.

First, in the main control board 1310, the ball entrances provided on the game board 5 include a general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2002, a second starting opening 2004, a special winning opening 2005, and a prize winning opening 2005. When the game ball B enters the winning hole 2006, the general winning hole sensor 3001, the normal winning hole sensor 2401, the first starting hole sensor 3002, the second starting hole sensor 2402, the big winning hole sensor 2403, and the accessory winning hole sensor are activated. The mouth sensor 2513 detects the game balls B and adds them to the corresponding ball entry counters. By using such an incoming ball counter, it is possible to grasp the number of incoming game balls B that have entered each ball entry hole among the game balls B that have been hit into the game area 5a.

In addition, in the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033 detects the game ball B. are detected and both are added to the out number counter. With this out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B that have entered the out port 1008 among the game balls B that have been hit into the game area 5a.

The main control board 1310 performs predetermined calculations using an incoming ball counter and an out number counter. As a specific example, by adding up all of the input ball counters, the total number of game balls B that have entered the ball entrance provided on the game board 5, out of the game balls B that have been hit into the game area 5a. can be calculated. Furthermore, by adding up all of the ball entry counters and the out number counter, the total number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a can be calculated.

The above calculation results are displayed on a predetermined display device as information regarding the pachinko machine 1. However, the information displayed on the predetermined display device is the number of game balls B that entered each ball entry port and out port 1008 based on the respective entry number counters and out number counters. It is also possible to output. Further, examples of the predetermined display device include a performance display device 1600 provided on the game board 5, a hall computer managed by the hall side externally, and the like. Alternatively, a monitor (base monitor 1310h) may be mounted on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the information may be displayed on the monitor (base monitor 1310h). Among these, when information is displayed on the performance display device 1600, it can be grasped from a position where both the player and the hall side can visually recognize it, whereas When information is displayed on the base monitor 1310h, it can be grasped at a position that is visible only to the hole side.

Further, as information displayed on a predetermined display device, the total number of game balls B that entered the ball entry hole provided on the game board 5 and the total number of game balls B that entered the out port 1008 were displayed. In this case, it can be determined from these ratios whether the degree to which the game ball B enters the ball entrance or exit 1008 is within a normal numerical range. When a normal game is being played, the game balls B hit into the game area 5a enter the entry hole at a predetermined rate, but for example, the ball enters the ball entry hole 1008 at a predetermined rate. If the ratio of the total number of game balls B that entered the ball opening is too high, it can be suspected that the ball is being entered into the ball entrance by an illegal act. On the other hand, if the total number of game balls B entering the out port 1008 is too large, it can be suspected that the balls are being entered into the out port 1008 by fraudulent activity.

In addition, in the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 850, the payout detection sensor 950 detects the game ball B and adds it to the payout number counter. With this payout number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B paid out to the player. Since the total number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a calculated by all of the incoming ball counters and the out number counter is the total number of game balls B used by the player, the player The net increase in the number of game balls B can be calculated by calculating the difference between the number of paid out game balls B, and the net increase in the number of game balls B can be displayed on a predetermined display device. Can be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball B that has entered the ball entrance or exit port 1008 provided on the game board 5 passes through the ball discharge port 629 provided in the main body frame 4 to the pachinko machine 1. A frame-side out-port sensor 3037 is provided that can detect the game ball B passing through the ball discharge port 629, which is discharged to the rear outside (to the island equipment side of the game hall) (see FIG. 94). There is. When this frame-side out-port sensor 3037 detects the game ball B that has passed through the ball discharge port 629, its detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, after the game balls B enter the ball entrance and exit port 1008 provided on the game board 5, when the joined game balls B are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. Then, the frame side out port sensor 3037 detects the game ball B and adds it to the frame side out number counter. With this frame-side out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 are also transferred to the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower full ball passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600. After passing through the lower ball ejection passage 610c of the path unit 610 and being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding part 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving part 628 and the ball ejection port 629. The ball is discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall), and not only the game balls B hit into the game area 5a but also the ball discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580. The game ball B is also configured to be detectable by the frame side out-port sensor 3037. Here, considering the purpose of ascertaining the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a, the number of game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 can be calculated as follows. It is strongly desired to eliminate (invalidate) and perform various calculations. In response to this, in the configuration in which the frame-side out-port sensor 3037 also detects the game ball B ejected downward from the ball-extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580, the game ball B is placed upstream of the frame-side out-port sensor 3037. is provided with another ball removal detection sensor (not shown), and this ball removal detection sensor detects the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580, and furthermore, the ball removal detection sensor It is desirable that the number of game balls detected is subtracted from the out number counter. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is detected by the ball removal detection sensor, is once subtracted from the out number counter, and is then detected by the frame side out port sensor 3037. This means that the number of game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is not reflected in the out number counter. Note that this form is applicable when the game ball B is ejected downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 when the gaming machine 1 is not energized (when the action of ejecting the ball from the payout device 580 is performed). There is no problem because neither the ball removal detection sensor nor the frame side out port sensor 3037 can perform the detection itself, but when the game machine 1 is energized and the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is moved downward. When the game ball B is ejected (when the action of ejecting the ball from the dispensing device 580 is performed) or when the gaming machine 1 is not energized, the game ball B is ejected downward from the ball ejecting passage 580b of the dispensing device 580. This is to solve the problem that occurs when the game machine 1 is energized during the ball removal even though the ball is removed from the payout device 580. In addition, the game balls B hit into the game area 5a and the game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 are routed through separate passages to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 without merging them. It may also be configured such that the frame side out port sensor 3037 can detect only the game ball B hit into the game area 5a by discharging it to the island equipment side of the game hall. With such a configuration, there is no need for a configuration that subtracts the number of game balls detected by the above-mentioned ball removal detection sensor from the out number counter.

As mentioned above, the number of incoming game balls B hit into the game area 5a can be grasped by the out number counter on the frame side, but also by adding all the incoming ball number counters and the out number counter, The total number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a can be calculated. That is, in a state where no game is being played and the game ball B is not hit into the gaming area 5a, the frame-side out number counter matches the value obtained by adding all of the incoming ball counters and the out number counter. I will do it. On the other hand, in a state where the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a, after the game ball B passes the detection sensor provided at the ball entry port and the out port 1008, a frame side out port located a predetermined distance away is detected. Since the ball passes through the sensor 3037, the value obtained by adding all of the input ball counters and the out number counter will remain slightly larger than the out number counter on the frame side.

In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs, whether the addition to the counter or calculation is continued or stopped depends on whether the abnormality is mild or severe. As shown in FIG. 189(A), when a slight abnormality occurs, addition to the counter and calculation continue without stopping (stopping). This slight abnormality may occur when the upper tray 201 is full of game balls B and the game balls B cannot be paid out from the payout device 580, or in a game state where the game balls B should be hit into the right area of the center accessory 2500. One example is when he is not hitting right-handed. In these states, an effect is executed to warn the player to guide the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and an effect to warn the player to hit the game ball B to the right. In addition, in these states, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are not released from the outer frame 2, and the ball entry and exit ports 1008 provided on the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 are not opened. Therefore, it is not possible to artificially enter the game ball B. Therefore, if a minor abnormality occurs, the incoming ball counter and out number counter will not increase due to illegal acts, and the addition to the counter and calculation will continue without stopping (stopping). There is.

On the other hand, when a severe abnormality occurs, addition to the counter and calculation are stopped (stopped). This severe abnormality includes a state in which the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. In these conditions, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened from the outer frame 2, and the ball entry and exit ports 1008 provided on the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 are artificially opened. This is a state in which the game ball B can be entered. Therefore, when a serious abnormality occurs, addition to the counters and calculations are stopped (stopped) to prevent the incoming ball counter and the out number counter from increasing due to illegal acts.

In addition, if a severe abnormality occurs, addition to the counter and calculation are stopped (stopped), but the detection sensors installed at the ball entry and exit ports 1008 do not prevent the game ball B from passing. Detected. In addition, if a serious abnormality occurs, the numerical values of the counters such as the incoming ball counter and the out number counter, and the calculation results before the occurrence are retained, and the door frame 3 and main body frame 4 are replaced by the outer frame 2. Additions to the counter and calculations are restarted after a severe abnormality, such as being closed for a period of time, is resolved. In addition, if a serious abnormality occurs and the addition to the counter or calculation is stopped (stopped), the addition to the counter or calculation can be stopped by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting audio from a speaker. A cancellation effect is being executed to notify that the event has been cancelled.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 189(B), addition to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out exit left sensor 3032 and the out exit right sensor 3033 and calculations related to the out number counter are performed when a severe abnormality occurs. Until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, addition to the out number counter and calculations related to the out number counter continue without stopping (stopping), and when the predetermined time elapses, the out number counter Addition to and calculations related to the out number counter are canceled (stopped). As a result, in the event of a severe abnormality such as the door frame 3 being released from the outer frame 2, it is possible to know the number of game balls B entering the out port 1008 until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. .

For example, if the game balls B become grape-shaped in the gaming area 5a and the balls become jammed, normal gaming cannot be performed, so the person on the hall side opens the door frame 3 and the grape-shaped game balls B However, there is a high possibility that the removed game ball B will directly flow into the outlet 1008 at the lower end. Such a grape-shaped game ball B is originally a game ball B that would have been highly likely to have been ejected from the outlet 1008 if it had not become grape-shaped. In this regard, when the door frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to remove the grape-shaped game ball B, additions to the out number counter and calculations related to the out number counter are performed until a predetermined time elapses. Since this continues without stopping (stopping), the number of grape-shaped game balls B that have flowed into the out port 1008 can be determined, and the reliability of information regarding the out port 1008 can be increased. Note that after the predetermined time has elapsed, there is a low possibility that the grape-shaped game ball B will flow into the out port 1008, and it is suspected that the ball is being entered into the out port 1008 by an illegal act, so the out number counter is The calculations related to the addition to and the out number counter are stopped (stopped).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 189(C), addition to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out exit left sensor 3032 and the out exit right sensor 3033 and calculations related to the out number counter are performed when a severe abnormality occurs. Addition to the out number counter and calculations related to the out number counter continue without stopping (stopping) until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, but the predetermined time has elapsed. Even if it is before, if the out exit left sensor 3032 or the out exit right sensor 3033 detects a large number of game balls B continuously in a short period of time, at that point, the number of outs is added to the out number counter or the out number counter is The calculation related to the error has been canceled (stopped). In such a case, when the door frame 3 is opened, there is a possibility that more than the number of entering balls that are expected to flow into the out port 1008 may have flowed into the out port 1008 by removing the grape-shaped game balls B. Since it is suspected that the ball is entered into the out port 1008 by an illegal act, addition to the out number counter and calculations related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 189(D), when the door frame 3 is opened when a severe abnormality occurs, the output number counter corresponding to the detection by the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033 is With regard to addition and calculations related to the out number counter, addition to the out number counter and calculations related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped) until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the door frame 3 was opened. On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is opened, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation regarding the out number counter are stopped (stopped) at that point. This is because when the door frame 3 is opened, it is opened for the purpose of removing the grape-shaped game balls B from the game area 5a, whereas when the main body frame 4 is opened, the game ball B is opened from the game area 5a. This is because the body frame 4 is opened, which does not need to be opened for the purpose of removing the grape-shaped game ball B. In other words, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is opened for another purpose such as removing jammed balls on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so addition to the out number counter and calculations related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped). I am planning to do so.

As described above, in this embodiment, after the game balls B enter the ball entrance or exit port 1008 provided on the game board 5, the joined game balls B are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. When the frame side out port sensor 3037 detects the game ball B, as shown in FIG. 189(E), the frame side out number counter corresponding to the detection by the frame side out port sensor 3037 Regarding the addition to the frame side out number counter and the calculations related to the frame side out number counter, when a severe abnormality occurs, the addition to the frame side out number counter and the calculation related to the frame side out number counter are stopped (stopped). For this reason, when a person on the hall side opens the door frame 3 and removes the grape-shaped game ball B, the out port corresponding to the detection by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 is detected within a predetermined period. While addition is made to the out number counter, addition to the frame side out number counter corresponding to the detection by the frame side out exit sensor 3037 is not performed. The number of grape-shaped game balls B that are removed when the door frame 3 is opened can be determined by the difference between the added value and the value of the out number counter on the frame side. Note that the number of such grape-shaped game balls B entered can be displayed on a predetermined display device as information regarding the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, as described above, when no game is being played and the game ball B has not been hit into the gaming area 5a, the frame-side out number counter matches all of the incoming ball counters and the out number counter. It will match the added value. On the other hand, in a state where the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a, after the game ball B passes the detection sensor provided at the ball entry port and the out port 1008, a frame side out port located a predetermined distance away is detected. Since the ball passes through the sensor 3037, the value obtained by adding all of the input ball counters and the out number counter will remain slightly larger than the out number counter on the frame side. In this way, as long as the game is being played normally, there is a possibility that the total number of balls entered and the number of outs will differ by a predetermined number or more compared to the number of outs on the frame side. Therefore, by monitoring whether or not a predetermined number of differences or more have occurred, it is possible to determine whether or not a normal game is being played.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, if there is a difference of more than a predetermined number in the value obtained by adding all of the incoming ball counters and the out number counter compared to the out number counter on the frame side, a special It is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the addition to the counter and calculations are canceled (stopped). In addition, if a special abnormality occurs and the addition to the counter or calculation is stopped, the addition to the counter or calculation is stopped by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting audio from the speaker. A cancellation effect is running to notify you that the event is cancelled. If there is a difference of more than a predetermined number with respect to the total value of the incoming ball counter and the out number counter compared to the out number counter on the frame side, for example, if there is a difference of more than a predetermined number on the game board 5 due to an illegal act. Objects other than the game ball B are allowed to pass only through the entrance and exit ports 1008 provided, and objects other than the game ball B are passed through the detection sensors provided at the entrance and exit 1008. It can be suspected that the ball is clogged before it passes the frame side outlet sensor 3037. As a result, the occurrence of malfunctions such as illegal acts or jammed balls can be detected at an early stage, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, a state in which the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 is illustrated as an example of a severe abnormality, but the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is not limited to this. Even if the game is not released from the outer frame 2, if it detects a situation in which it is assumed that the game is progressing due to an illegal act, additions to various counters and calculations will be stopped (stopped). You may also do so. For example, it is determined that the game is not being played normally when a level of magnetism that attracts the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a, or when a predetermined vibration (impact) is detected on the game area 5a. An example of this is to stop (stop) additions to various counters and calculations. In addition, when abnormal magnetism or vibration is detected when the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 or when the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is not released from the outer frame 2, In addition, additions and calculations to various counters are stopped (stopped), but only if illegal magnetism or vibration is detected while the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is not released from the outer frame 2, it will be considered illegal. It may be determined that the progress of the game including the firing of the game ball B is immediately stopped.

[18-1. About exit detection when multiple exits are provided]
As an embodiment different from the above, in addition to the out port 1008 provided on the downstream side of the gaming area 5a, a second out port 1013 is provided on the upstream side, and a third out port 1014 is provided on the midstream side. A case where a detection sensor capable of detecting the ejected game balls B is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 and 192. FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second outlet 1013 and a third outlet 1014 are provided separately from the outlet 1008. FIG. 192 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of execution of calculations when a second outlet 1013 and a third outlet 1014 are provided separately from the outlet 1008.

As shown in FIG. 191, between the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, it is possible to discharge the game ball B out of the gaming area 5a. A second outlet 1013 is provided. In such a configuration, if the game ball B is hit with such force that it enters the upstream space 2505 and contacts the stop portion 1006 (so-called right-handed hit), there is a high probability that the game ball B will enter the first guide path 2521. A part of the game ball B that has been hit enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide path 2521. Similarly, if the game ball B is hit with such force that it enters the upstream space 2505 and does not come into contact with the blocking part 1006 (a force that is somewhat weaker than when hitting right-handed), there is a high probability that it will enter the second guide path 2522. However, a part of the game ball B that has been hit enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide path 2522. In other words, a portion of the game ball B that has been hit into the upstream space 2505 enters the second out port 1013.

Further, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided. A third out port 1014 separate from the out port 1008 is provided, and the game ball B entering from the first opening 2431 is discharged from the third out port 1014 to the outside of the gaming area 5a.

In addition, the effect of providing the second out port 1013 around the entrance of the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522 in the guide path group 2520, and the fact that the third out port 1014 is provided around the exit. Although the details of the effects have been described above, the provision of the second outlet 1013 and the third outlet 1014 prevents balls from clogging inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. can be prevented from occurring.

In this embodiment, a second outlet sensor 3035 capable of detecting the game ball B discharged to the outside from the second outlet 1013 and a second outlet sensor 3035 capable of detecting the game ball B discharged to the outside from the third outlet 1014 are used. A third outlet sensor 3036 is provided, which is capable of detecting the condition. When the second out port sensor 3035 detects the game ball B entering the second out port 1013, its detection signal is input to the main control board 1310, whereas the third out port sensor 3036 When the game ball B entering the third out port 1014 is detected, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged from the second out port 1013, the second out port sensor 3035 detects the game ball B and adds it to the second out number counter. On the other hand, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the third out port 1014, the third out port sensor 3036 detects the game ball B and adds it to the third out number counter. The second out number counter measures the number of game balls B that entered the second out port 1013, while the third out number counter measures the number of game balls B that entered the third out port 1014. It is possible to grasp the number of balls entering the field.

Note that the main control board 1310 performs predetermined calculations using not only the incoming ball counter and the out number counter, but also a second out number counter and a third out number counter. As a specific example, by adding up the out number counter, the second out number counter, and the third out number counter, out of the game balls B hit in the game area 5a, the first number provided on the game board 5 is It is possible to calculate the number of game balls B ejected to the outside without entering the ball entry ports such as the starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Further, by adding the number of balls entered, the number of outs, the second number of outs, and the third number of outs, the total number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a can be calculated.

In this embodiment, in a state where game balls B are hit into the right side area of the game area 5a, a predetermined number or more (for example, 30 or more balls out of 100 balls that can be fired per minute) are sent to the second out hole. It is designed to prevent the ball from entering 1013. Therefore, in the time saving state or jackpot game state, the second out number counter is used to check whether the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time. It is monitored, and if the number exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, it is determined that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 192(A), if the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device. A warning effect is executed to warn that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game by audio output from a speaker. This warning effect is terminated when the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 becomes less than a predetermined number per unit time.

For example, if the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time, an inlet located downstream of the second out port 1013 in the right area of the gaming area 5a The chances of the game ball B entering the ball openings (normal winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, accessory winning opening 2006) are reduced, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. becomes. In this regard, if the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is more than a predetermined number per unit time, the game board 5 may have been tampered with. As a result, it is possible to discover at an early stage that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In the above, in the time saving state and the jackpot game state, it is monitored whether the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time. The number of game balls B that entered the second out port 1013 and the number of balls that entered the ball entry ports and out ports downstream of the second out port 1013 (out port 1008, third out port 1014) The ratio between the number of game balls B and the number of balls entered may be calculated, and whether or not the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined ratio may be monitored. Even in such a case, if the entry rate of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 per unit time is too high, it can be determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game.

Similarly, when game balls B are hit into the right side area of the game area 5a, a predetermined number or more per unit time (for example, 30 or more balls out of 100 balls that can be fired per minute) enter the third out port 1014. It is designed to prevent the ball from entering the ball. Therefore, in the time saving state or the jackpot game state, the third out number counter is used to check whether the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time. It is monitored and if the number of players exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, it is determined that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 192(B), if the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device. A warning effect is executed to warn that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game by audio output from a speaker. This warning effect is terminated when the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 becomes less than a predetermined number per unit time.

For example, if the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time, the input ball B located downstream of the third out port 1014 in the right area of the gaming area 5a is Opportunities for the game ball B to enter the ball openings (normal winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005) are reduced, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player. In this regard, if the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time, the game board 5 may have been tampered with. As a result, it is possible to discover at an early stage that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In the above, in the time saving state and the jackpot game state, it is monitored whether the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time. Ratio between the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 and the number of game balls B entering the ball entry port or out port 1008 downstream of the third out port 1014 It may be possible to calculate the ratio and monitor whether the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined ratio. Even in such a case, if the entry rate of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 per unit time is too high, it can be determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the time saving state or the jackpot game state, when the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time, Although addition to the second out number counter and third out number counter and calculations related to these out number counters are continued, as in the above embodiment, when the number reaches a predetermined number per unit time or more, , it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the addition to the second out number counter and the third out number counter and the calculations regarding these out number counters may be stopped. With such a configuration, even if the game ball B is entered into the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 by an illegal act, the second out number counter and the third out number counter will not increase. , the reliability of information regarding the second outlet 1013 and the third outlet 1014 can be increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal state, the game ball B should be hit into the left side area of the game area 5a, but when the game ball B is hit into the right side area of the game area 5a, the second ball B in the right side area A game ball B may enter the out port 1013 or the third out port 1014. Therefore, in the normal state, when the second out port sensor 3035 or the third out port sensor 3036 detects the game ball B, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device or an audio output is output from the speaker, so that the player can play from right-handed ball B. He is executing an instructional performance instructing him to switch to left-handed batting.

[19. About the light emission history after the light emission effect using the light guide plate]
In this embodiment, the effect display device 1600 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner based on the variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. During the variable display, the effect display device 1600 The light guide plate 3102 provided in front of the display area is decorated with light emitting light multiple times, and the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is changed stepwise in the multiple times, thereby emitting light that suggests the degree of jackpot expectation for the variable display. It makes the performance possible. Furthermore, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emitting light, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 provided around the display area of the presentation display device 1600 (around the opening 3010a of the back box 3100) are decorated with the same luminescent color as the light guide plate 3102. However, even after the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, a history effect is created in which a plurality of decorations 3210 continue to emit light in the color immediately before that of the light guide plate 3102 as a history of the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102. It is considered executable.

Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (starting conditions are met), a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command in the command analysis process of step S601, it determines whether to execute a light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 based on the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command. Decide whether Furthermore, when it is decided to perform a light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light emitting color pattern table is referred to based on the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command, and the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 in the light emitting effect is determined. One of a plurality of types of luminescent color patterns set multiple times is determined.

In addition, the light guide plate 3102 has a first pattern of white, green, blue, or red by changing the light emitting color of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern board 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102. It is possible to decorate the pattern 3102a (see FIG. 136) with light emitting light, but in the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated three times with the light emitting color set in the light emitting color pattern. I try to decorate it with light at the right time. In addition, the time for which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at one time is a short time (for example, less than 1 second), and after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, the light is turned off until the next time the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission. The amount of time it takes is longer. Furthermore, although the number of times the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at one timing is only one, the light guide plate 3102 may be decorated with light emission multiple times at each timing.

In addition, the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal fluctuation before the reach is formed during the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, but it is executed at the timing during the reach effect after the reach is formed. For example, one to three of the three times the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light may be performed at the timing during the reach effect after the reach is formed.

Furthermore, while it is possible to make a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first picture board 3103 disposed above the light guide plate 3102 emit light to decorate the first picture 3102a with light, Although it is possible to decorate the second pattern 3102b with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern board 3104 disposed on the left side when viewed from the front, it is possible to decorate the second pattern 3102b with light emitting light. Here, the first picture 3102a is decorated with light emission. This allows the user to clearly understand that the three light-emitting decorations of the first pattern 3102a in the light-emitting effect are a series of effects.

Next, a light emitting color pattern table in which the light emitting color pattern of the light guide plate 3102 is set will be described with reference to FIG. 193. Note that the emission color pattern table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 193 is a luminescence color pattern table in which luminescence color patterns of the light guide plate 3102 are set.

As described above, a plurality of types of emitting color patterns are set in the emitting color pattern table, and each emitting color pattern includes the emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 corresponding to the number of times the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light. It is set how it will change. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, a light emission pattern is set in the light emission color pattern table so that the light guide plate 3102 can be changed twice after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a predetermined light emission color.

Further, the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 set in the emitting color pattern is set to be decorated with one of four colors: white, green, blue, and red. When determining the emitting color pattern from the emitting color pattern table, the expectation level of jackpot is set so that the order of white → green → blue → red increases as a result of the emitted light color of the light guide plate 3102 changing to the end. has been done. In other words, when the lottery result identified from the fluctuation pattern is a jackpot, a light emitting color pattern is determined with high probability as the final light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102, which is a light emitting color (for example, red) with a high probability of winning the jackpot, When the lottery result specified from the fluctuation pattern is a loss (loss, reach loss), a light emitting color pattern with a low probability of winning the jackpot (for example, white) is selected as the final light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 with a high probability. A decision is to be made. As a result, when the final luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a luminescent color with a high expectation of a jackpot, the player's expectations for a jackpot are increased.

Note that the light emitting color pattern is such that the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 does not change in the reverse order of white → green → blue → red, and when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emitting light and then decorated with light emitting light next time. The color is set so that the emitted light color is maintained or the emitted color has a high probability of winning a jackpot. As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emitting color with a low expectation of a jackpot, there remains a possibility that the light guide plate 3102 will change to a color with a high probability of a jackpot unless the three timings of the light emission effect are completed. This makes it possible to draw attention to the emitted light color of the light guide plate 3102 with anticipation until the light emitting effect ends.

Furthermore, the light emitting color pattern does not necessarily require that the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 changes in the order of green → blue → red after being decorated with white light, but it is possible to start with a light emitting color other than white, or to It is also set to skip the above emission colors and change to the next emission color (for example, change from white to red). As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emitting color with a low probability of winning a jackpot, it is not possible to predict which light emitting color the next light emitting color will change to, and the light guide plate 3102 remains until the light emitting performance ends. It is possible to draw attention to the luminescent color of 3102 with anticipation.

Next, the plurality of decorations 3210 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 194. As described above, the back production unit 3200 has a plurality of hemispherical decorative bodies 3210 surrounding the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, that is, surrounding the display area of the production display area 1600 when viewed from the front. There is. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 194, four decorations 3210 are arranged vertically on both sides of the display area of the effect display area 1600. Further, behind these decorative bodies 3210, a decorative board is provided on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward are mounted. In addition, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 can be decorated with light in any one of white, green, blue, and red, similar to the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102.

When the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in a light emission effect, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 are arranged to emit light in the same luminescent color as the light guide plate 3102. In addition, in the light emission production using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission three times at predetermined timings, but even after the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off at each timing, multiple decorations are displayed. 3210 light emission is maintained. In this way, when performing a light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, a history effect is created in which a plurality of decorations 3210 continuously emit light in the light emission color immediately before that light guide plate 3102 as the history of the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102. Running.

Specifically, at the first or second timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in a light emission effect, a plurality of decoration bodies 3210 are emitted with the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102, and the next time after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission. The plurality of decoration bodies 3210 are kept emitting light until the timing for emitting decoration. In addition, at the third timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, a plurality of decoration bodies 3210 are emitted with the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102, and after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, the variable display of the decorative pattern ends. The plurality of decoration bodies 3210 continue to emit light until the display is completed. As a result, although the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light at one time, it is only a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light in the same color as the light guide plate 3102. By maintaining this, even if the light emitting color is missed when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light, the color of the light emitted can be grasped after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light.

Furthermore, the number of decoration bodies 3210 is provided in a number corresponding to the number of luminescent colors that can decorate the light guide plate 3102 with luminescent effects. In addition, the number of decorative bodies 3210 that emit light is made to vary depending on the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210, and the more the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210 have a high expectation of a jackpot, the more The number of decorative bodies 3210 that emit light increases in order from the bottom of the decorative bodies 3210. Specifically, when the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 that is decorated with light emitting light in the light emitting effect is white, which is the emitting color with the lowest jackpot expectation, four Among the decorative bodies 3210, one of the lower decorative bodies 3210a is set to emit white light. Further, when the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is green, the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b are set to emit green light. Further, when the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is blue, the lower three decorative bodies 3210a to 3210c are set to emit blue light. Furthermore, when the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is red, which is the emitting color with the highest probability of winning a jackpot, all four decorations 3210a to 3210d are set to emit red light. Thereby, even if the expected degree of jackpot cannot be determined from the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 and the decoration 3210, the expected degree of jackpot can be easily determined from the number of decorations 3210 that are emitting light.

Further, the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 are located behind the light guide plate 3102, and are capable of emitting light toward the front. When the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light in the light emission effect, a plurality of decoration bodies 3210 are emitted with the same luminescent color as the light guide plate 3102, but since the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 are located behind the light guide plate 3102, The light guide plate 3102 is irradiated with light not only by the plurality of LEDs for decorating the light guide plate 3102 with the first pattern 3102a, but also by the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 emitting light. As a result, the first pattern 3102a decorated with light emitting light on the light guide plate 3102 becomes more emphasized, and the effect using the light guide plate 3102 can be made more conspicuous.

In addition, the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal variation before the reach is formed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, but during the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102, Other preview effects using the effect display device 1600 are not newly started. In other words, another preview effect using the effect display device 1600 is started at a timing when the light guide plate 3102 is not decorated with light. As a result, although the light guide plate 3102 is located in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 does not obstruct the visibility of other preview effects, and other preview effects can be started. But don't miss it. In other words, it is possible for the player to clearly understand the light-emitting effect in which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light and the other preview effects.

Next, a specific example of the effect performed by the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of decorations 3210 during execution of the light emission effect will be described with reference to FIG. 195. FIG. 195 shows a specific example of the effect on the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of decorations 3210 when performing the light emission effect.

In FIG. 195, a case will be described in which a light emitting color pattern is determined in which the light emitting color for decorating the light guide plate 3102 changes from white to green to red in the light emitting effect. First, as shown in FIG. 195(A), variable display of decorative symbols is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 195(B), at the first timing to decorate the light guide plate 3102 with light emission, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a second pattern 3102b in white, and the effect display area 1600 is decorated with light emission. Among the four decorations 3210 on both the left and right sides of the display area, the lower decoration 3210a emits light in white, which is the same color as the light guide plate 3102. . As shown in FIG. 195(C), the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 goes out in a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the decoration 3210a that is already emitting white light Until the second timing, the white light emission is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 195(D), at the second timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3102b in green, and the effect display area 1600 is decorated with light emission. Among the four decorations 3210 on both the left and right sides of the display area, the lower two decorations 3210a and 3210b are increased in number to emit light, but the emitted light color is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102. It emits green light. As shown in FIG. 195(E), the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 goes out in a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the decorations 3210 and 3210b that are already emitting green light continues to emit green light until the third timing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 195(F), at the third time when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, the second pattern 3102b is illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102, and the effect display area 1600 is decorated with light emission. Of the four decorations 3210 on both the left and right sides of the display area, all four decorations 3210a to 3210d emit light, but the color of the light is red, which is the same color as the light guide plate 3102. It emits light. As shown in FIG. 195(G), the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 goes out for a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the decorations 3210 to 3210d that are already emitting red light As shown in FIG. 195(H), the red light emission is maintained until the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished.

In this embodiment, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light in the light emission effect, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light in the same luminous color as the light guide plate 3102, but at that point, the light guide plate does not emit light. From the time when the light-emitting decoration 3102 is turned off, a plurality of light-emitting bodies may be made to emit light in the light-emitting color immediately before the light guide plate 3102. Even in such a case, the color of the light emitted from the light guide plate 3102 can be determined after the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of decorative bodies 3210 that emit light is made to vary depending on the light-emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210, and the greater the number of decorative bodies 3210 that emit light, the higher the probability of a jackpot. Although it is shown that the light guide plate 3102 is already decorated with light emission, it may be made to indicate the number of times the light guide plate 3102 has already been decorated with light emission out of the three timings at which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission. For example, at the first timing to decorate the light guide plate 3102 with light emission in a light emission effect, among the four decoration bodies 3210 on each of the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display area 1600, the lower one decoration 3210a is set to emit light. Then, at the second timing, the lower two decorations 3210a and 3210b may emit light, and at the third timing, the lower three decorations 3210a to 3210c may emit light.

In addition, in this embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission three times at predetermined timing in the light emission effect, but the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at the first timing, but at the second and third timings, the light guide plate 3102 A pattern in which the light guide plate 3102 is not decorated with light emission or a pattern in which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at the first and second timings but not at the third timing may be provided. In such a case, it is not known how many times the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 will continue in the light-emitting effect, and it is also possible to draw attention to how many times the light-emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 will have a chance to change.

In addition, in this embodiment, while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, a light emitting effect is performed using the light guide plate 3102 as an effect indicating the expectation level of a jackpot for the variable display of the decorative pattern. Alternatively, light emission using the light guide plate 3102 can be performed over multiple fluctuations from the time when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 (starting conditions are met) until the decorative pattern is displayed in a varying manner due to the ball entering. It may also be possible to perform a performance. For example, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (starting conditions are met), the main control board 1310 transmits a preliminary determination command, and the peripheral control board 1510 transmits the preliminary determination command. When receiving this, it determines whether or not to perform a light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, and the color of the light emitted by the light guide plate 3102 when it is determined to perform a light emitting effect, based on the fluctuation pattern specified from the advance determination command. It may be configured so that it is determined. In addition, in a light emitting display using such a light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emitting light a plurality of times, each at a predetermined timing among multiple fluctuations, and even after the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light. The configuration may be such that the plurality of light emitters continue to emit light in the color immediately before 3102. In such a case, it is possible to draw attention with anticipation to how the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 changes over the course of multiple variations until the light emitting effect ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in a light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern board 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102 are made to emit light, and the first pattern 3102a is decorated with light. However, if a malfunction occurs and multiple LEDs stop emitting light, the light guide plate 3102 will not be decorated with light at the same time as the light guide plate 3102, and the jackpot expectation level indicated by the color of the light emitted will be understood. I can't. In this regard, after the timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 emit light in the same luminescent color as the light guide plate 3102, so even if the light guide plate 3210 cannot be decorated with light emission, the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 The expectation level of a jackpot can be grasped by the emitted light color of the decorative body 3210.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when an abnormality (error) occurs, a warning effect is executed to notify that the abnormality has occurred, giving priority to other effects. For example, it is determined that the game is not being played normally if a level of magnetism that attracts the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a, or if a predetermined vibration (impact) is detected on the game area 5a. and executes a warning effect. In this regard, if an abnormality (error) occurs at the timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light by executing the light emission effect, priority is given to the warning effect and the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light and the plurality of decorations 3210 are illuminated. However, when the abnormality is resolved after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light (before the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern ends), the plurality of decorations 3210 are made to start emitting light. There is. In this way, even if the warning effect is executed with priority over the light emission effect, it is possible to grasp the degree of jackpot expectation based on the emitted light color of the plurality of decorations 3210 after the abnormality is resolved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the expectation level of a jackpot is suggested by the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 and the emitting color of the plurality of decorations 3210 in the light emitting effect and the history effect. The configuration may be such that the set value is suggested based on the emitted light color of the light guide plate 3102 or the emitted light color of the plurality of decorations 3210. In such a configuration, for example, when determining a luminescent color pattern from a luminescent color pattern table, as a result of the luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 changing to the end, the set value is higher in the order of white → green → blue → red. You can set it to indicate that. In other words, among the setting suggestion effects, a high setting suggestion effect executes a light emission pattern in which the final emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is red, and a low setting suggestion effect executes a light emission pattern in which the final emission color of the light guide plate 3102 becomes red. What is necessary is to execute a light emission pattern that becomes white. As a result, if the light guide plate 3102 or the plural decorations 3210 are decorated with a light emitting color that suggests a high setting value, the player's response to the high setting value (setting value 6) Expectations can be raised.

[20. Regarding image production similar to light-emitting decoration of light guide plate]
In this embodiment, a light guide plate 3102 is provided in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600. By displaying a pattern in a visual recognition mode similar to the pattern decorated with light emission on the light plate 3102, it is possible to perform an imitation effect that makes it appear as if there are a plurality of light guide plates. In this imitation performance, a pattern that is decorated with light emitting light on the light guide plate 3102 and a pattern that is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and by finally displaying one of the patterns, , the reach effect executed after that is different.

Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (starting conditions are met), a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command in the command analysis process of step S601, a variation pattern is identified from the variation pattern command, but a variation pattern for executing the first reach effect is identified. In this case, the pattern to be decorated with light emitting light on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally the pattern is decorated with light on the light guide plate 3102. By executing the performance, the first reach performance is then proceeded to. On the other hand, when a variation pattern for executing the second reach effect is specified, the pattern decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. By finally executing an imitation performance in which a pattern is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, the second ready-to-reach performance is then proceeded to.

The imitation performance described above is executed during the normal variation before the reach is formed during the variation display of the decorative symbols. Moreover, the first reach effect among the reach effects is set so that the jackpot expectation level is higher than the second reach effect. As a result, in the imitation performance during normal fluctuations, when the light guide plate 3102 is finally decorated with a pattern that emits light, it will progress to the first reach performance with a high expectation of jackpot, so the pattern will eventually be displayed on the light guide plate 3102. It is possible to draw attention to whether or not the light is decorated with light.

Next, the patterns displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 during execution of the imitation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 196. FIG. 196 shows a pattern displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 196(A), the light guide plate 3102 during the execution of the imitation effect has a second pattern 3102b with the text "CHANCE!" in the center and an effect pattern around it decorated with light emitting light. . Note that the first pattern 3102a can be decorated with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern board 3103 disposed above the light guide plate 3102; Although it is possible to decorate the second pattern 3102b with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern board 3104 disposed on the left side when viewed from the front, it is possible to decorate the second pattern 3102b with light emitting light. In this case, only the luminescent decoration of the second pattern 3102b is used.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 196(B), in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the imitation effect, an effect image is displayed as an imitation image 1600a along with the words "LUCKY!" in the center. it's shown. Although it is possible to display a moving image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, during execution of the imitation effect, a still image is displayed like the imitation pattern 1600a described above.

Further, on the light guide plate 3102, the characters "CHANCE!" are decorated with light as a second pattern 3102b, while the characters "LUCKY!" are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 as the imitation pattern 1600a. However, the characters of the imitation pattern 1600a have the same line thickness, font type, and size as the characters of the second pattern 3102b. In this manner, in the imitation effects, since the characters have the same form, it can be difficult to determine which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is being used.

Furthermore, on the light guide plate 3102, an effect pattern is decorated with light as a second pattern 3102b, whereas in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an effect pattern is displayed as an imitation pattern 1600a. The effect pattern that is part of the second pattern 3102b is the same as the effect pattern that is part of the second pattern 3102b. In this way, in the imitation presentation, since the effect pattern is displayed in common as part of each pattern, it can be made difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the presentation display device 1600 is being used.

Further, on the light guide plate 3102, a second pattern 3102b is decorated with light emitting light in a single color using a plurality of LEDs, whereas an imitation pattern 1600a is similarly displayed in a single color in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, in the light guide plate 3102, when the second pattern 3102b is decorated with light, the light and shade of the second pattern 3102b varies depending on the distance from the plurality of LEDs. The pattern 1600a is displayed with shading. Further, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3102b, a black image without any information is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. When displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area, a black image is displayed as the background image. In this way, in the imitation performance, since the visual recognition mode of the pattern is the same as a whole, it can be made difficult to grasp whether the light guide plate 3102 or the performance display device 1600 is being used.

Further, the light guide plate 3102 is located in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the size of the light guide plate 3102 is configured to be larger than the display area of the effect display device 1600. The area in which the second pattern 3102b is illuminated and decorated in 3102 is approximately the same as the area in which the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In this manner, in the imitation effect, since the areas in which the patterns are displayed are approximately the same, it can be difficult to determine which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is being used.

In addition, in the imitation performance, the second pattern 3102b that is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 are alternately displayed. The time is the same for both. Furthermore, while the imitation effect is being executed, at the timing when the second pattern 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a are displayed, a predetermined sound is output from the speaker, and the surroundings of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 are displayed. Although a complex performance is performed in which the installed members are operated in a predetermined manner (for example, lighting of lamps provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, movement of movable members, etc.), Even at the timing of displaying the picture, a common effect is executed as a composite effect. However, at the timing when the second pattern 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a are displayed, the lamps provided on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are lit, but the emitted light colors are different. You can. In this way, in the imitation performance, there is no difference in performance between when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3102b and when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600. This can make it difficult to determine which of the light plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is being used.

Next, a specific example of the performance on the light guide plate 3102 and the performance display device 1600 during execution of the imitation performance will be described with reference to FIG. 197. FIG. 197 shows a specific example of the effect on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when performing the imitation effect.

In FIG. 197, a variation pattern is determined to perform either a chance reach performance as the first reach performance or a lucky reach performance as the second reach performance, and an imitation performance is performed before executing these reach performances. We will explain when to execute it. First, as shown in FIG. 197(A), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, variable display of decorative symbols is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 197(B), when the imitation effect is started, the light guide plate 3102 displays the text "CHANCE!" in the center as a second pattern 3102b, and an effect pattern is placed around it for a predetermined period of time ( For example, for less than 1 second), the display is decorated with red light. Then, as shown in FIG. 197(C), when the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the imitation pattern 1600a along with the words "LUCKY!" in the center. An effect pattern is displayed in blue around the area for a predetermined period of time (for example, less than 1 second). Note that the display time for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the same as the display time for displaying the second pattern 3102b on the light guide plate 3102 with light emission.

As described above, while the second pattern 3102b is decorated with light emitting light in red on the light guide plate 3102, the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in blue. In this manner, in the imitation performance, the light guide plate 3102 and the performance display device 1600 are Although it is difficult to determine which one is being used, it is possible to determine from the display color whether the second pattern 3102b or the imitation pattern 1600a is being displayed.

In addition, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102b decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately repeated a plurality of times (for example, five times). However, after repeating multiple times, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out and a black image that does not display any information is displayed, as shown in FIG. 197(D). There is. This makes it possible to draw attention to which of the second pattern 3102b, which is decorated with light emitting light on the light guide plate 3102, and the imitation pattern 1600a, which is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, stops as a result of the imitation effect. can.

Then, as shown in FIG. 197(E), after blacking out the display area of the effect display device 1600, if the second pattern 3102b is decorated with red light on the light guide plate 3102, the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern will lead to reach. After forming, the chance reach effect (first reach effect) will proceed as the reach effect corresponding to the second symbol 3102b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 197(F), when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600 after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern After the reach is formed, the lucky reach effect (second reach effect) will proceed as the reach effect corresponding to the imitation pattern 1600a. Furthermore, the display time for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in FIG. 197(F) is also the same as the display time for displaying the second pattern 3102b on the light guide plate 3102 in FIG. 197(E). (for example, 3 seconds).

Note that in this embodiment, characters and effect patterns are displayed using the second pattern 3102b that is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is sufficient to display patterns that are similar in visual recognition so that they match in terms of elements. For example, a pattern of a character with a similar drawing style may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, a second pattern 3102b that is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102, and an imitation pattern 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, However, after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, neither the second pattern 3102b nor the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed, and the first reach effect and the second You may set a pattern that does not proceed in any way with the reach effect. In such a case, it is possible to draw even more attention to what kind of result will be notified after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out as a result of the imitation effect.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, at the start of the imitation performance, the second pattern 3102b that is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 are selected. Although the display starts from the light emitting decoration 3102b, a pattern may be set that starts from the display of the imitation pattern 1600a. In addition, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102b is decorated with light emitting light in red on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. When the color is generated, a pattern may be set in which a different color is used. In this way, when an imitation performance is performed with a display or color different from normal, the expectation level of jackpot for the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is set to be high, so that the light emitting decoration on the light guide plate 3102 is It is possible to attract attention not only to which one of the two patterns 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 stops, but also to the contents of the effect.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the imitation performance is executed, the second pattern 3102b that is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 are alternately displayed. However, in addition to imitation effects, effects using the light guide plate 3102 are also performed. For example, as a performance other than the imitation performance using the light guide plate 3102, a performance in which a second pattern 3102b is suddenly decorated with light emitting light on the light guide plate 3102 is performed without displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the performance display device 1600. can do.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the imitation performance, the second pattern 3102b is illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the performance display device 1600. In addition to this pattern, there is a pattern in which the second pattern 3102b is decorated with light emitting light in blue on the light guide plate 3102 so as to reverse the color development, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in red in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is set. In these patterns, red is a color that indicates that the expectation of jackpot is higher than blue, and for example, when the second pattern 3102b on the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with red light, it is more likely to hit the jackpot than when it is decorated with blue light. Similarly, when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in red in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is notified that the expectation level is higher than when it is displayed in blue. In this way, in the imitation effect, since it is possible to display both the second pattern 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a in blue and red, it is possible to display both the second pattern 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a in blue and red. This can make it difficult to understand whether the user is using the

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as an imitation effect, the second pattern 3102b decorated with light emitting light on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and the final By displaying one of the symbols, it suggests the reach effect that will be executed afterwards, but by executing the imitation effect as the setting suggestion effect mentioned above and finally displaying one of the symbols, , the setting value may be suggested. In such a configuration, for example, as a high setting suggestion effect among the setting suggestion effects, an imitation effect is executed in which the second pattern 3102b is finally decorated with red light on the light guide plate 3102, and as a low setting suggestion effect, the final imitation effect is executed. What is necessary is to execute an imitation effect in which the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. As a result, when the second pattern 3102b is finally illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102 during execution of the imitation performance, the player's expectations for the high setting value (setting value 6) can be increased.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the light guide plate 3102, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern board 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102 are made to emit light, so that the first pattern 3102a can be decorated with light. On the other hand, it is possible to decorate the second pattern 3102b with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern board 3104 disposed on the left side when viewed from the front. The player can change the setting of the brightness by operating the press operation section 303. In other words, when the brightness of a plurality of LEDs is set to be weak, the second pattern 3102b decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 is displayed in a dark manner, but when the brightness of a plurality of LEDs is set to be strong. When set, the second pattern 3102b decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 becomes a bright display mode. In the imitation effect, when the second pattern 3102b decorated with light emitting light on the light guide plate 3102 is in a dark display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a dark display mode. On the other hand, when the second pattern 3102b illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 is in a bright display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a bright display mode. In this way, in the imitation effect, since the effect is executed so that the brightness corresponds to both the second pattern 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a, the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 This can make it difficult to understand whether the user is using the Note that when adjusting the brightness, when the player operates the press operation unit 303, the settings for both the brightness of the plurality of LEDs on the light guide plate 3102 and the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 are changed. Good too.

[21. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, some of the various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 to 200. FIG. 198 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIGS. 199 and 200 show continuations of the various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 198. It's a table.

[21-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands have a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. It consists of a mode that shows variations of effects and has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

In addition, various commands include, as shown in Figures 198 to 200, special figure 1 synchronized performance related, special figure 2 synchronized performance related, jackpot related, power on, general pattern synchronized performance related, ordinary electric role performance related, notification display. , status display, and others.

[21-1-1. Special figure 1 synchronized production related]
The special figure 1 synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, and as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named ``Start synchronized performance'', ``Specify special pattern 1'', ``End special pattern 1 synchronized performance'', and ``Specify state during fluctuation''. These various commands are assigned a status of "A*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 1 synchronized performance start command (variation pattern command) is to instruct the start of the special pattern synchronized performance with the performance pattern (variation pattern) specified in the mode, and the special pattern 1 designation command is used for winning, specific jackpot, The command specifies a non-specific jackpot, the special figure 1 synchronized performance end command instructs the end of the special figure 1 synchronized performance, and the fluctuation state designation command instructs the gaming state. The gaming state is composed of a time saving state indicating that the game is in a time saving state, a definite variable state indicating that the game is in a variable probability state, and a normal state indicating that it is neither the time saving state nor the variable probability state. has been done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a special figure 1 synchronized performance start command (variable pattern command) and a special figure 1 synchronized performance end command are provided for each set value of the pachinko machine 1. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends the special figure 1 synchronized production start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 1 synchronized production end command, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends the special figure 1 synchronized production start command (fluctuation pattern command) and the special figure 1 synchronized production end command to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Select and send a command according to the stored setting values. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the peripheral control board 1510 can Setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted, and the setting value information is periodically sent to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 side can grasp the setting values of the pachinko machine 1. It looks like this.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is sent when the special symbol 1 variation starts, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization production starts, and the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is sent when the special symbol 1 synchronization production starts. The performance end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning/losing information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[21-1-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production related]
The special figure 2 synchronization performance related is based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402, and as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named ``Start synchronized performance'', ``Specify special pattern 2'', and ``End special pattern 2 synchronized performance''. These various commands are assigned a status of "B*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 2 synchronized performance start command (variation pattern command) is to instruct the start of the special pattern synchronized performance with the performance pattern (variation pattern) specified in the mode, and the special pattern 2 designation command is used for winning, specific jackpot, This is to designate a non-specific jackpot, and the special figure 2 synchronized performance end command is to instruct the end of the special figure 2 synchronized performance.

In addition, similar to the special figure 1 synchronized performance start command (fluctuating pattern command) and special figure 1 synchronized performance end command, the special figure 2 synchronized performance start command (variable pattern command) and special figure 2 synchronized performance end command are applied to the pachinko machine 1. is provided for each setting value, and when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends the special figure 2 synchronized production start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 2 synchronized production end command, a specific area of the main control built-in RAM is provided. A command corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area is selected and transmitted. It should be noted that the special figure 2 synchronized performance (fluctuation performance of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2004) is mainly performed in the probability change state and the time saving state. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by changing the modes of the special figure 2 synchronized performance start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 2 synchronized performance end command that have been used conventionally, the peripheral control board 1510 can control the pachinko The setting value information of the machine 1 can be transmitted, and the setting value information is periodically transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 even in the variable probability state and the time saving state, and the peripheral control board 1510 side controls the pachinko machine 1. The setting values can be understood.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the special pattern 2 synchronization production start command is sent when the special pattern 2 variation starts, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern 2 synchronization production starts, and the special pattern 2 synchronization production start command is sent when the special pattern 2 synchronization production starts. The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variable time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[21-1-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in Figure 198, categories related to jackpots include jackpot opening, jackpot opening 1 opening Nth display, jackpot 1 closing display, jackpot opening 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, and small jack opening. , small win release display, small win count display, and small win ending commands. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, and the display command for the Nth opening of the jackpot opening in the 1st to 15th rounds (the Nth opening of the jackpot opening in 1st jackpot 2005). The grand prize opening 1 closing display command indicates when the round is opening or starting to open), and the grand prize opening 1 closing display command indicates when the first grand prize opening 2005 is closed or starting to close between rounds. ), and the grand prize opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls from count 0 to 10 has been counted (the first grand prize opening 2005 detected by the grand prize opening sensor 2403 The jackpot ending command instructs to start the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command instructs to display jackpot symbol information.

In addition, the small winning opening command instructs the opening of the small winning, and the small winning opening display command instructs the opening of the small winning. The small hit count display command is used to display the small hit medium/large prize opening winning effect (when the game ball that enters the accessory winning opening 2006 is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2513 during the small winning). The V passing command is used to instruct the V winning opening winning presentation (the game ball that has won the accessory winning opening 2006 during a small hit is detected by the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008). The small winning ending command instructs the start of the small winning ending. In addition, the V passage command corresponding to each of the first V winning hole 2007 and the second V winning hole 2008 (the first V winning hole command when a game ball is detected by the first V winning hole 2007, the second V winning hole command) A second V winning hole command) may be provided when a game ball is detected by the winning hole 2008.

Regarding the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command when the jackpot 1 is opened in rounds 1 to 15 (the first jackpot is opened). 2005), and the grand prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when the grand prize opening 1 is closed (the first grand prize opening 2005 starts to close), and the grand prize opening 1 count is displayed. The command is executed when the grand prize opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the grand prize opening 1 (when the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened, and when the game ball that enters the first grand prize opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403. The jackpot ending command is sent at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is sent when the jackpot opening is opened (when the first jackpot opening 2005 is opened).

In addition, the small winning opening command is sent when the small winning opening starts, and the small winning opening display command is sent when the small winning opens (when the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened at the time of small winning), and the small winning count is displayed. The command is sent when a small hit medium/large prize opening is won (when a game ball that enters the accessory prize opening 2006 is detected by the accessory prize opening sensor 2513 during a small winning), and the small winning ending command is , sent when the small winning ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[21-1-4. Power on]
As shown in Figure 199, the power-on classification includes names such as power-on state, main control return destination at power-on, setting key ON operation command, setting key OFF operation command, setting change command, and error display command. It consists of commands. These various commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state. The power-on status command is operated by the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633 when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs). (when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch and the press operation part of the RWM clear button is operated), information that instructs to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on). In addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage.) In which of the above-mentioned normal state, short-time state, and variable state will the system return? This information consists of information that instructs the machine, and information that indicates the model code of the pachinko machine.

In addition, when creating the model code of a pachinko machine, for example, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, it is necessary to check which work's copyright it corresponds to, and what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuation In addition to game specifications in which when a jackpot game state occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game in which probability fluctuations occur with the number of changes in the special symbol being limited (for example, 30 or 70 times). This specifies whether the pachinko machine has a plurality of setting values or only one setting value. In other words, the information on the model code of a pachinko machine includes the series code to identify the machine type among the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, and the series code to identify the copyright of the work. Copyright code and game specifications (for example, in addition to the game specifications that when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, the probability change with a limited number of changes of special symbols) It mainly consists of a game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which the following occurs, and a setting value code for determining whether the pachinko machine 1 has one or more setting values.

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412, and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414 and the accessory winning port solenoid 2512.

The setting key ON operation command instructs to check the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the control built-in RAM, and the setting key OFF operation command instructs to check the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the control built-in RAM. This indicates that confirmation of the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area has been completed.

The setting change command instructs the changed setting value and the fact that the setting value has been changed. In this example, setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 by changing the mode of the setting change command, and the peripheral control board 1510 side controls the pachinko machine according to the received setting change command. The setting values of machine 1 can be grasped. Note that the setting change command may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on, regardless of whether or not the setting value has been changed, or if the setting value has not been changed when the power is turned on, the current setting value may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Alternatively, a setting notification command may be sent to instruct. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 to know the latest setting values every time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

The error display command indicates that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM.

The transmission timing for these commands is when the main control board is powered on (in addition to when the power is turned on, it also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs). Specifically, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when the machine recovers from a power outage or instantaneous power failure, the main control built-in RAM sends the command by setting a reservation for the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side game control main processing. The command is stored in the information storage area, and the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[21-1-5. Futu synchronization related]
The normal pattern synchronization performance related is based on the detection signal from the normal winning hole sensor 2401, and as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named , common pattern designation, common pattern synchronization performance end, and state specification during fluctuation. These various commands are assigned a status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The common pattern synchronization performance start command (common pattern variation pattern command) instructs the start of the common pattern synchronization performance with the production pattern specified in the mode (common pattern fluctuation pattern), and the general pattern designation command A jackpot or a non-specific jackpot is specified, a general pattern synchronized performance end command is used to instruct the completion of a general pattern synchronized performance, and a fluctuation state specification command is used to designate a gaming state. Note that, as described above, the gaming state includes a time saving state indicating that the game is in the time saving state, and a normal state indicating that the time saving state is not present.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the common pattern synchronization effect start command is sent at the start of normal pattern fluctuation, the common pattern designation command is sent immediately after the basic pattern synchronization effect starts, and the general pattern synchronization effect end command is: Normally it is sent when the symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the fluctuation state designation command is sent immediately after the normal symbol winning/losing information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[21-1-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric role performance related is related to the second starting door 2411 that is moved forward and backward by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2412, and its classification includes, as shown in FIG. 199, ordinary electric opening, normal electric open display, It consists of a command named ``Fuzu Hitori Ending''. These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general power opening command is for instructing the start of normal power opening, and the general power release display command is for starting during normal power opening (the second starting port door 2411 is protruded forward by the activation of the starting port solenoid 2412). The ending command for normal drawings instructs the start of the ending for normal drawings.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal power opening command is sent at the start of normal power opening, and the normal power release display command is transmitted when the general power is released (when the second starting port door 2411 drives the starting port solenoid 2412). (when the robot protrudes forward), and the normal pattern ending command is sent when the normal pattern ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[21-1-10. others]
Other classifications include, as shown in Figure 200, starting opening winning, variation reduction operation end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, special symbol type pre-reading, variation pattern pre-reading 1, variation pattern pre-reading 2, variation pattern It is composed of commands named pre-read 3, variable pattern pre-read 4, variable pattern pre-read 5, variable pattern pre-read 6, normal winning opening winning, and normal symbol storage. These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The starting hole winning command instructs the start of the starting hole winning performance, and is the command to start the performance when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002. , and the start of the performance when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402. It instructs the transition from the shortening operation state to the variable shortening non-operation state, and the special symbol 1 storage command is used to store 0 to 4 special symbols 1 (functions when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002). The first special symbol display of the display unit 1400 conveys the number of unused balls (reserved number) in the variable display of special symbols, and the special symbol 2 memory command is used to display special symbols 2 reserved from 0 to 4. (When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004, the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 indicates the number of balls that have not yet been used (reserved number)), The special symbol type look-ahead command reads in advance and displays the first special symbol based on the special symbol 1 reservation before the special symbol 1 reservation is used for variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Before the display results (lost symbols, jackpot symbols) and the special symbol 2 hold on the display are used for the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, the special symbol 2 is read in advance. The results displayed by the second special symbol display based on the reservation (small winning symbol, jackpot symbol) are respectively specified.

Further, the variable pattern pre-reading command 1 to the variable pattern pre-reading command 6 pre-read the special symbol before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. The variation pattern used in the variation display of the special symbol based on the 1 hold and the special symbol 2 reserve is read in advance and the special symbol is The variable pattern used in the variable display of the special symbol based on the symbol 2 hold is specified, and the variable pattern pre-read command 1 is a command according to the setting value 1 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variable pattern pre-read command 2 is a command according to the setting value 2 of the pachinko machine 1, the variable pattern pre-reading command 3 is a command according to the setting value 3 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variable pattern pre-reading command 4 is a command according to the setting value 4 of the pachinko machine 1. The variable pattern pre-reading command 5 is a command corresponding to the setting value 5 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variable pattern pre-reading command 6 is a command corresponding to the setting value 6 of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, commands including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 described above (special figure 1 synchronized performance start command, special figure 1 synchronized performance end command, special figure 2 synchronized performance start command, special figure 2 synchronized performance end command, setting change command) ) is just an example, and other commands may also be provided for each set value.

In addition, the normal winning opening winning command is for instructing the passage of the game ball to the gate section 2003, and the normal symbol storage command is for instructing the normal symbol storage 0 to 4 (the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and functions). The normal symbol display of the display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls that have not yet been used (pending number) in the variable display of the normal symbols.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting hole winning command is transmitted at the time of starting hole winning (when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002, or when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting port sensor 2402), it is transmitted mainly by voice from the speakers 462, 464, 622 to notify that fact, reducing fluctuations. The operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the outage stop period has elapsed), and the special symbol 1 memory command is sent when the special symbol 1 operation pending ball number changes ( When a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and the number of pending items increases, or when the number of pending items is used to display a variable special symbol on the first special symbol display and the number of pending items decreases) The special symbol 2 memory command is sent when the number of reserved balls changes when the special symbol 2 is activated (when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases, or when the second special symbol is displayed based on the number of reserved balls) The special symbol type pre-read command is sent when the number of reserved balls decreases when the special symbol is used to display fluctuations in the special symbol on the device. When a game ball enters the starting hole 2004 and the number of reservations increases), the variable pattern pre-read command is sent immediately after the special symbol type pre-read command is sent. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

In addition, the normal winning opening winning command is sent when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, and the normal symbol storage command is sent when the normal symbol operation pending ball number changes (when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the number of pending balls changes). It is sent when the number of pending symbols is increased, or when the number of pending symbols is decreased by using the normal symbol display device to display the normal symbol fluctuations. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as mentioned above, the starting hole winning command is used when a starting hole is won (when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002, or when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002, or when a game ball enters the second starting hole). When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 2402), it is transmitted mainly by voice from the speakers 462, 464, 622 to notify that fact, but peripheral control How the board 1510 uses the starting opening winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the speakers 462, 464, and 622 are designed to not only provide audio notifications but also to monitor whether there is any fraudulent activity. On the other hand, other pachinko machines have specifications in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the starting opening winning command and does not notify the player by sound from the speakers 462, 464, and 622.

[22. Setting information error notification]
Next, processing is performed to notify when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal based on a command that includes setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 among the various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 described above. I will explain about it. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting information determination process executed when a command including setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310 in the received command analysis process (step S1022).

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the setting information determination process, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether a setting abnormality notification flag, which will be described later, is set (step S1500). The setting abnormality notification flag is a flag that is set when a setting value abnormality is notified. If the setting abnormality notification flag is set in step S1500, it is determined that a setting value abnormality is being notified, and the process proceeds to step S1507. If the setting abnormality notification flag is not set in step S1500, the setting value abnormality is detected. It is determined that the notification has not been made and the process advances to step S1501.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether the received command is the above setting change command (step S1501), and if the setting change command is received, the pachinko machine indicated by the setting change command is The setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is stored in the setting information storage area based on the setting value information of 1 (step S1502), and the process ends. As a result, the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 that were set when the power was turned on are stored in the setting information storage area, and the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

In addition, if the received command is not the above setting change command (in this example, special figure 1 synchronized performance start command, special figure 1 synchronized performance end command, special figure 2 synchronized performance start command, special figure 2 synchronized performance end command, variation pattern If prefetch command 1 to variable pattern prefetch command 6 are received), the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502. (step S1504), and if they do not match, it is notified that an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information (step S1504), and a setting abnormality notification flag indicating that an abnormality in the setting value information is being reported is set. is set, and the process ends (step S1505).

Further, if it is determined in step S1500 that the setting abnormality notification flag is set, that is, if the setting value information is being notified of an abnormality, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command and the setting value in step 1502 are set. It is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the information storage area matches (step S1507), and if they do not match, the abnormality notification of the setting value information is continued.

On the other hand, if the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502, the abnormality notification of the setting value information is ended (step S1508). , resets the setting abnormality notification flag and ends the process (step S1509).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by sending a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed on the peripheral control board 1510 side. If there is an abnormality in the setting value information indicated by the command containing the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 sent from the main control board 1310, specifically, if the setting value information has not gone through normal processing (setting value change processing). Regardless, if the setting value is changed, it is determined that an error or fraud has occurred, and a process is executed to notify that fact. Note that the game continues even while the setting value information abnormality is being reported, and the effect display device 1600 executes variable effects and the like. Therefore, the abnormality notification of the setting value information is performed so as not to interfere with the execution of the variable performance executed by the performance display device 1600. Specifically, there is control to display "Setting Abnormality!" etc. in an area that does not overlap with the variable effect being executed on the effect display device 1600, and a control that allows the variable effect being executed on the effect display device 1600 to be visually recognized. A control for translucently displaying a message such as "A setting error has occurred" in an area that overlaps with the fluctuating effect, a control for outputting "A setting error has occurred" from the speakers 462, 464, and 622, and is provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3. Light emission control is performed on the lamps, LEDs, etc. that are displayed in a predetermined manner (for example, flashing red), and one or more of these controls are executed in combination.

In addition, if there is an abnormality in the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the abnormality notification of the setting value information may not be executed, or the abnormality notification of the setting value information may be executed. In addition, the system prevents the performance that suggests the setting values of the pachinko machine 1, which will be described later, from being executed, and also stops the performance of the performance that suggests the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 if it is being executed. You may also do so. That is, a command including setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 may be affected by noise or the like, and the setting value information indicated by this command may change to an abnormal value, or the peripheral control board 1510 may The settings of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command sent from the main control board 1310 may be changed due to the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area changing to an abnormal value due to the influence of noise etc. When there is an abnormality in the consistency between the value information and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510, if a performance suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed, the reliability of this performance will be reduced. descend. Therefore, in such a case, it may be possible to prevent the performance that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 from being executed, and to stop the performance if it is currently being executed to suppress the decrease in reliability. .

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information, and in this case, it is possible to stop the game when an abnormality occurs in the setting value information. You may also do so. For example, when a setting value is changed in a setting value change process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 stores the setting value in a reference area different from the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Also stores the changed setting value, and stores the setting value in the setting value dedicated area at any timing (for example, the timing of sending the special figure 1 synchronized performance start command or the special figure 2 synchronized performance start command, etc.) and for reference. It may be determined whether or not the setting values stored in the area match, and if it is determined that they do not match, the game may be stopped and an abnormality notification of the setting value information may be performed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after starting the notification of an abnormality in the setting value information, when the abnormality is resolved, the notification of the abnormality in the setting value information is automatically ended without any operation by the game store clerk. Therefore, when a command including setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 sent from the main control board 1310 is changed to an abnormal value due to the influence of noise, etc., the command is stored in the setting information storage area. After starting an abnormality notification of the setting value information due to a mismatch with the setting value information, if a command containing the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received in a normal state, the setting value information is immediately set. It is possible to terminate abnormal notification of value information.

Note that in the above example, when a setting value is changed in the setting change process, a setting change command indicating the changed setting value is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting value specified by the command is transferred to the peripheral control board 1510 side. The configuration is configured to determine whether an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information depending on whether or not it matches the stored setting value. The determination method is not limited to this. For example, when a command including setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310, the setting value information indicated by the command and the setting indicated by the previously received command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 It may be determined whether or not the values match, and if they do not match, an abnormality of the setting value information may be notified. In this case, when a setting change command transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on a change in the setting value is received, an abnormality notification of the setting value information may not be performed.

In addition, in connection with the variable performance, the main control board 1310 sends commands containing setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 multiple times, and if at least some of the commands do not match, an abnormality of the setting value information is notified. You may also do so. Specifically, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the above-mentioned special figure 1 synchronized performance start command and special figure 2 synchronized performance start command and the special figure 1 synchronized performance end command and special figure 2 synchronized performance end command It may be determined whether or not the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 matches, and if the setting value information does not match, an abnormality of the setting value information may be notified.

In addition, in the above example, the special figure 1 synchronized performance start command, special figure 1 synchronized performance end command, special figure 2 synchronized performance start command, special figure 2 synchronized performance end command, and variable pattern look ahead command are set to the pachinko machine 1 setting values. However, if the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is to be notified from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 can be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. The command to notify is provided separately from the special figure 1 synchronized performance start command, special figure 1 synchronized performance end command, special figure 2 synchronized performance start command, special figure 2 synchronized performance end command, and variation pattern look ahead command, and the main control Whenever a command is sent from the board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, or when a specific command is sent, a command for notifying the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 may also be sent. For example, setting notification command 1 to setting notification command 6 that notify setting value information of pachinko machine 1 are provided, and the setting notification command (setting value 1 If so, setting notification command 1, setting value 2, setting notification command 2, setting value 6, setting notification command 6) may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510. With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the command design for each model (one with multiple setting values and one with only one setting value), and the design effort can be saved.

In this case, commands (for example, a special figure 1 synchronized performance start command, a special figure 1 synchronized performance end command, Special figure 2 synchronized performance start command, special figure 2 synchronized performance end command, variable pattern pre-reading command, etc.) are not limited to the transmission of commands that are not involved in the performance executed by the performance display device 1600 (for example, normal winning opening winning command, etc.) ), a command to notify the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is also sent, and the setting value information indicated by the command is consistent with the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510. It may be determined whether or not there is an abnormality. With this configuration, it becomes possible to frequently determine whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal, thereby avoiding problems caused by noise etc. The accuracy can be further improved.

[23. Pending notice performance]
Next, the pending notice effect will be explained. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the first pending memory number changes based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 2002, a command (first pending number Specified commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the first pending memory number is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the second When the number of reserved memories changes, a command (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 to 1)) for instructing the second reserved memory number is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the second command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The number of pending memories is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, it is determined that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, and based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402. When the special symbol type pre-read command and the variable pattern pre-read command are received from the main control board 1310 based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, based on the special symbol type pre-read command and the variable pattern pre-read command. The suggestion of the special lottery result is made by changing the display mode of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 in response to the special lottery result whose suggestion is pending. It is possible to execute a pending notice effect that indicates the degree of expectation of a jackpot when the game is executed.

In this example, the first pending memory number instructed by the first pending number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second pending memory number instructed by the second pending number storage command, the variable pattern look-ahead command, and the special Peripheral control board 1510 according to each of the advance determination information (loss, small hit, jackpot, etc., or information that can notify the type of jackpot such as probability variable jackpot or normal jackpot) instructed by the symbol type look-ahead command. is equipped with a pending notice determination table for determining the presence or absence of a pending notice and the type of pending notice pattern when executing a pending notice.

Then, when a decision is made to execute a suspension notice and the type of suspension notice pattern to be executed is determined, the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are changed from normal ones. Display in a display mode (in this example, a display color different from normal). In this example, the first pending memory 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a are normally displayed in white, which is the basic color, and when a pending notice is to be executed, they are displayed in blue, green, red, or a ladybug pattern. do. Furthermore, the display modes of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a are set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern.

In addition, when it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot as preliminary judgment information, a pending notice pattern with a high probability of a jackpot (for example, red color or a ladybug pattern) is determined as the final pending display mode with a high probability. When it is determined that the lottery result is a loss as judgment information, the final pending display pattern is determined with a high probability to have a low jackpot expectation (for example, blue). When a mode in which the jackpot expectation level is high is displayed, the player's expectation level for the jackpot gaming state increases.

In addition, in the hold notice pattern, every time a special lottery result is suggested (variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols)) while the hold notice performance is being executed (each time the hold is expired), the effect is displayed. It is set how the display mode of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a displayed on the device 1600 will change. In addition, in the suspension notice pattern, the display mode of the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is reversed from the order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern. It is set so that the order does not change (that is, the jackpot expectation level does not decrease), and each time a special lottery result is suggested (variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols)), the suspension is The display mode of the first pending memory 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change) or becomes a mode with high expectation of jackpot. It is set as follows. Therefore, even if the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a are displayed on the production display device 1600 in a display mode with low expectation of jackpot, the suggestion of the special lottery result that is the target of the pending notice starts. Until the end, there remains a possibility that the mode of the pending display will change to a mode with a high expectation of a jackpot, and it is possible to draw attention to the mode of the pending display with anticipation until the end.

In addition, the suspension notice pattern does not necessarily require displaying the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a in white (basic color) and then changing them in the order of blue → green → red → ladybug pattern. Start from an intermediate display mode (for example, display the first pending memory 1700c in red based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002) , the display mode changes to the next one without going through the intermediate display modes (for example, when the first reserved memory 1700d is displayed in white, the suggestion of the special lottery result is finished and the next special lottery result is displayed. It is also set so that when the first pending memory 1700d is moved to the first pending memory 1700c in response to the start, the color changes from white to a ladybug pattern. For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (number of reservations) for the display mode of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a to change, the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memories 1700a to 1701a are Two pending memories 1701a can be displayed. In addition, even if the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a are displayed in a display mode with low jackpot expectation, it is impossible to predict which display mode will change next, and the first It is possible to draw attention to the display modes of the pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a with anticipation until the end.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, together with the above-mentioned pending notice effect suggesting the jackpot expectation level, or independently, the display mode of the first pending memory 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a is changed to a display mode different from the above-mentioned pending notice. By changing the setting value to , it is possible to execute a setting value suspension suggestion effect that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1.

In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 determines the presence or absence of setting value retention suggestion performance and executes the setting value retention suggestion performance in accordance with the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the fluctuation pattern prereading command transmitted from the main control board 1310. A setting value suspension suggestion determination table is provided for determining the setting value suspension suggestion pattern type in the case where the setting value suspension suggestion pattern type is determined. Then, when a decision is made to execute the setting value suspension suggestion performance and the type of setting value suspension suggestion pattern to be executed is determined, the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a are displayed on the performance display device 1600. is displayed in a different display mode than usual (in this example, in a different shape from normal).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 202(A), the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a are normally displayed as circles, which are the basic shapes, and when performing the setting value pending suggestion effect, It is displayed as a square shown in the first reservation memory 1700c in FIG. 202(B), a triangle shown in 1700c in FIG. 202(C), or a star shown in 1701a in FIG. 202(D). Furthermore, the display modes of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are such that the degree of expectation for the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 (the degree of expectation for the high setting value) increases in the order of circle → square → triangle → star. It is set as follows.

In addition, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is identified as 5 or 6 based on the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command, the setting value is held in a manner with high expectations for the high setting value (for example, a star) as the final pending display mode. When the suggested pattern is determined with a high probability and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 3 or 4, the setting value is such that the final pending display mode is a mode (for example, a triangle) in which the degree of expectation for the high setting value is medium. When the hold suggestion pattern is determined with a high probability and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1 or 2, the setting value is such that the final hold display mode has the lowest expectation level for the high setting value (for example, a square) By determining the hold suggestion pattern with a high probability, when a mode with high expectations for the high set value is displayed as the final hold display mode, the player's expectation level for the high set value increases. There is.

In addition, in the set value retention suggestion pattern, each time a special lottery result suggestion (fluctuating display of decorative symbols (fluctuating display of special symbols)) is performed while the set value retention suggestion effect is being executed (each time the retention is ), it is set how the display mode of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 will change. In addition, in the set value retention suggestion pattern, the display mode of the first retention memories 1700a to 1700d and the second retention memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is in the reverse order from the order of circle → square → triangle → star. It is set so that it does not change (that is, the expectation level for the high set value does not decrease), and each time a special lottery result is suggested (variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols)), the suspension is (each time) the display mode of the first pending memory 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or the expectation level for the high setting value is It is set to be a high mode. Therefore, even if the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode in which expectations for high setting values are low, special Until the suggestion of the lottery result starts, there is a possibility that the pending display mode will change to a mode with high expectations for the high set value, and it is not possible to draw attention to the pending display mode until the end with anticipation. can.

In addition, the setting value retention suggestion pattern does not necessarily require displaying the first retention memories 1700a to 1700d and the second retention memory 1701a in a circle (basic shape) and then changing them in the order of square → triangle → star; Starting from the display mode (for example, displaying the first holding memory 1700d as a square based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002), (For example, if the first reserved memory 1700d is displayed as a square, the indication of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result starts.) Accordingly, when moving the first pending memory 1700d to the first pending memory 1700c, it is also set so that it changes from a square to a star). For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (the number of reservations) to change the display format of the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a, the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700a are displayed in a display format with high expectations for the high setting value. 1700d and second reserved memory 1701a can be displayed. Furthermore, even if the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are displayed in a display mode with low expectations for the high setting value, it is not possible to predict which display mode will change next. , it is possible to draw attention to the display modes of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a with anticipation until the end.

Furthermore, since the pending notice pattern of the above-mentioned pending notice performance and the set value pending suggestion pattern of the set value pending suggestion performance are determined separately, the number displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the pending notice pattern of the held notice performance is determined separately. The display modes of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a are changed to a mode with high expectations for the high set value, and the settings are displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the setting value pending suggestion pattern of the setting value pending suggestion effect. When changing the display mode of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a to a mode with high expectations for the high setting value, and when changing the display mode of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a to a mode with high expectation level for the high setting value, and when changing the display mode of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a, the display mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect. The effect display device 1600 changes the display mode of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a to a mode with a high degree of expectation for a high setting value, while changing the display mode of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a to a mode with a high degree of expectation for a high setting value. When maintaining the display mode of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a displayed on the screen, and the first pending memories 1700a to 1700a to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the pending notice pattern of the pending notice effect. The first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a are displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the setting value holding suggestion pattern of the setting value holding suggestion effect while maintaining the display mode of the setting value holding memory 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a. There are cases in which the display mode of the setting value is changed to a mode with high expectations for the high setting value.

For example, when the display mode of the suspension notice effect is "white" and the display mode of the set value suspension suggestion effect is "circle," the first pending memory 1700a to 1700d and the When moving the second hold memory 1701a, the display mode of the hold notice effect is changed from ``white'' to ``red'', and the display form of the set value hold suggestion effect is changed from ``circle'' to ``square'' (color and shape first suspension memory 1700a that is displayed on the performance display device 1600 after the suspension is expired when the display format of the suspension preview performance is "red" and the display format of the set value suspension suggestion performance is "circle" When moving ~1700d or the second hold memory 1701a, the display mode of the hold notice effect is maintained as "red" without changing, while the display form of the set value hold suggestion effect is changed from "circle" to "square". (Maintaining the color and changing the shape), when the display mode of the pending preview effect is "white" and the display mode of the set value pending suggestion effect is "triangle", the pending is expired and displayed on the effect display device 1600. When moving the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a, the display form of the holding notice effect is changed from ``white'' to ``blue'', while the display form of the setting value holding suggestion effect is changed to ``triangular''. Sometimes it is maintained without changing (changes color and maintains shape).

That is, in this example, the process of determining the pending notice pattern for the pending notice performance and the process of determining the setting value pending suggestion pattern of the setting value pending suggestion performance are performed separately, and the special lottery result is suggested ( The display of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 every time the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) is performed (every time the hold is exhausted) Either the display mode is maintained (the display mode is not changed), or it is changed to a mode with high expectations for the high setting value.

In addition, the final display mode of the suspension notice performance and the setting value suspension suggestion performance is determined separately, and a scenario of changing the display format of the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a according to the determination results is shown. Any one of a plurality of types of change patterns may be executed.

In addition, the start timing of the setting value retention suggestion effect (the timing of displaying the display mode in a different manner than usual) is based on the fact that the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is not limited to the timing of displaying the pending memories 1700a to 1700d or the second pending memory 1701a, but also the subsequent timing (timing after displaying in the basic shape, for example, when the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result starts. It is also started when moving the first pending memories 1700b to 1700d to the first pending memories 1700a to 1700c, etc.). Thereby, even if the setting value suspension suggestion effect is not executed, the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a can be made to pay attention to the end with anticipation.

Note that the execution frequency of the setting value suspension suggestion performance is set to be lower than the above-mentioned suspension notice performance. That is, the pending preview performance is executed based on the advance determination information, and when a special lottery result is suggested based on the winning lottery result based on the pending memory that is executing the pending preview performance, the contents of the pending preview performance are reset. On the other hand, since the contents of the setting value suspension suggestion presentation continue without being reset until the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, the execution frequency of the setting value suspension suggestion presentation is lower than that of the suspension notice presentation. This setting prevents the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 from being specified.

Further, as shown in the first suspension memory 1700c in FIGS. 202(A) and 202(B) and the second suspension memory 1701a in FIG. 202(D), the setting value suspension suggestion performance is executed at the same time as the above-mentioned suspension notice performance. In addition, as shown in the first suspension memory 1700c in FIG. 202(C), the setting value suspension suggestion effect may be executed alone. Note that the suspension notice pattern may include a change pattern in the display mode of the setting value suspension suggestion performance, and in this case, a suspension notice determination table may be provided for each setting value of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 203, the pachinko machine 1 of this example includes a plurality of types of image data that combine the display mode of the above-described hold notice performance and the display mode of the setting value hold suggestion performance, and the hold notice of the above-mentioned hold notice performance. The target pending memory is displayed based on image data corresponding to both the pattern and the set value pending suggestion pattern of the set value pending suggestion performance. That is, after determining the color as the display mode of the pending preview effect of the target pending memory and the shape as the display mode of the set value pending suggestion effect, a display mode is generated by combining these, and this combined display mode is generated. is displayed as retained memory.

Specifically, in the example of FIG. 203(A) in which a pending memory in which only a pending preview effect is executed and a setting value pending suggestion effect is not executed, the first pending memories 1700a and 1700b are displayed as "composite pattern white 1". ", and the first reserved memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "Synthetic pattern blue 1". Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 203(B) in which a pending memory in which both a pending notice performance and a setting value pending suggestion performance are displayed, the first pending memories 1700a and 1700b are used as the image data of "composite pattern white 1". The first pending memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern blue 2". In addition, in the example of FIG. 203(C) in which a holding memory in which only a holding notice effect is executed and a holding memory in which only a setting value holding suggestion effect is executed are displayed, the first holding memory 1700a is The first reserved memory 1700b is displayed based on the image data of "Blue 1", the first reserved memory 1700b is displayed based on the image data of "Composition pattern white 1", and the first reserved memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "Composition pattern white 3". is displayed.

Further, in the second hold memory 1701a, the hold preview performance and the set value hold suggestion performance are executed, and the hold memory in which both the hold preview performance and the set value hold suggestion performance are executed is displayed (FIG. 203(D)). In the example, the second pending storage 1701a is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern red 4".

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example controls the display of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a in a manner different from normal, so that the pachinko machine 1 can display the holding notice effect that suggests the expectation of a jackpot and the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to perform a setting value suspension suggestion effect that suggests a setting value. It should be noted that while the suspension preview performance is executed based on the prior determination information, the setting value suspension suggestion performance is not based on the prior determination information. That is, while the pending notice performance can be executed by obtaining the pending special lottery results in advance, the set value pending suggestion performance cannot be executed without obtaining the pending special lottery results in advance. be.

Note that this is not limited to displaying the special lottery results for which the start of suggestion is pending on the effect display device 1600 as the first pending memory 1700a to 1700d or the second pending memory 1701a; The pending memory according to the result may also be displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a pending memory during execution. In this case, the final display form of the above-mentioned suspension notice performance and setting value suspension suggestion performance may be displayed in the suspension memory during execution, and by configuring in this way, the special lottery result is suggested. Since it is possible to attract attention to the suspension notice performance and set value suspension suggestion performance until the time of execution, and create expectations for a jackpot or a high set value, it is possible to suppress a decline in game interest.

In addition, in the above example, the display color of the pending memory is changed as the display mode of the pending preview effect, and the shape of the pending memory is changed as the display mode of the set value pending suggestion effect, but the setting value pending suggestion effect is It is not limited to the above as long as it is possible to determine that it is being executed. For example, as the display mode of the pending notice effect, the display color of the pending notice effect may be changed, and as the display mode of the set value pending suggestion effect, a numerical value or pending memory according to the set value that is suggested without changing the shape of the target pending memory. Additional information such as the effect mode (sparkling effect or flame effect) around the image may be displayed in association with the reserved memory.

In addition, when displaying the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002, or when displaying the second holding memory based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004. 1701a, when updating and displaying the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a based on the fact that the pending is completed (the first pending memories 1700b to 1700d are changed to the first pending memories 1700a to 1700c). The setting value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested by outputting a sound effect when moving the first holding memory 1700a or the second holding memory 1701a to the active holding memory. For example, when suggesting that the setting value is "1", a sound effect (for example, "beep") corresponding to the setting value "1" among multiple types of sound effects is output, and when the setting value is "2", the sound effect corresponding to the setting value "1" is output. When suggesting that the setting value is ``5'', a sound effect corresponding to the setting value ``2'' among multiple types of sound effects (for example, ``pippi'') is output, and ... it is suggested that the setting value is ``5''. If the setting value is "6", output the sound effect corresponding to the setting value "5" (for example "pipipipipipi") among the multiple types of sound effects, and if the setting value is "6", output the sound effect corresponding to the setting value "5". Among the sounds, a sound effect (for example, "pan paka paan") corresponding to the setting value "6" may be output.

In addition, when a reservation notice performance or a setting value reservation suggestion performance is executed, the jackpot expectation level and the setting of the pachinko machine 1 are set according to the operation of the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300. In this case, after displaying on the effect display device 1600 an operation instruction image for instructing the operation of the rotation operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the effect operation section 301 in the effect operation unit 300. The jackpot expectation level and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested in response to the operation of the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation section 301 in the production operation unit 300. In addition, the same operation instruction image may be used when maintaining the jackpot expectation level and the suggested setting value and when further increasing the jackpot expectation level and the suggested setting value. It becomes impossible to determine whether or not the jackpot expectation level and the suggested set value are increased by the performance that is a precursor to the execution of the pending suggestion performance (the performance that displays the operation instruction image), and the rotation of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300 becomes impossible. It is possible to encourage the user to actively operate the operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303.

Further, during a demonstration (demonstration performance performed while the player is in a waiting state), it may be possible to select the presence or absence of a reservation notice performance and the presence or absence of a setting value reservation suggestion performance. This makes it possible to execute performances that match the player's preferences, and even for players who do not want suggestions about their jackpot expectation level, setting values of the pachinko machine 1, etc., a suspension notice performance and a setting value suspension suggestion performance can be executed. It is possible to prevent the jackpot expectation level or the set value of the pachinko machine 1 from being suggested.

In addition, we will provide a demonstration of the mode suggested by the setting value suspension suggestion effect (such as the fact that it is a mode that suggests the setting value of Pachinko machine 1, but not a mode that suggests the jackpot expectation level). It may also be executed when a demonstration performance is being performed) or when a special lottery result is suggested (while the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner). Thereby, when the setting value suspension suggestion performance is executed, it can be prevented from being mistaken as a jackpot expectation level and increasing the jackpot expectation.

In addition, during the execution of the time saving state or the variable probability state, advance judgment information is specified by the variable pattern pre-reading command and special symbol type pre-reading command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002. without executing the suspension notice performance based on the advance judgment information instructed by the fluctuation pattern pre-reading command and special symbol type pre-reading command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004. It may also be possible to execute only the pending notice effect based on the above. In addition, even during execution of the time saving state or the variable probability state, setting value reservation is suggested in relation to the first reservation memories 1700a to 1700d displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 2002. It may also be possible to perform a performance. Thereby, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 during the time saving state or the probability changing state, expectations for the set value retention suggestion performance can be aroused.

[24. Set value continuous suggestion performance]
Next, the continuous setting value suggestion effect will be explained. In this example, it is possible to perform a continuous setting value suggestion performance that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 over a plurality of variable displays of decorative patterns. Note that the variable display of decorative symbols is not limited to one that is executed once for one variable display of a special symbol, but is executed multiple times for one variable display of a special symbol (so-called pseudo-continuous display). (variation) is also included.

In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 continuously suggests the setting value in accordance with the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the special figure 1 synchronized performance start command and the special figure 2 synchronized performance start command transmitted from the main control board 1310. A set value continuous suggestion effect table is provided for determining the presence or absence of the effect and the type of set value continuous suggestion effect pattern when executing the set value continuous suggestion effect. Then, when the decision is made to execute the set value continuous suggestion effect and the type of set value continuous suggestion effect pattern to be executed is determined, the set value is One of a plurality of setting suggestion characters 1702 having different display modes depending on the setting is made to appear.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 204(A), when the effect display device 1600 starts displaying a decorative pattern in a variable manner, "1" is drawn on the head as a setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the setting value 1. The selected setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 204(C), when the next variable display of the decorative pattern is started on the effect display device 1600, "3" is drawn on the head as a setting suggestion character 1702 according to the setting value 3. The setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the setting value 4 is displayed, and when the next variable display of the decorative pattern is started on the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. A setting suggestion character 1702 with a "4" drawn on its head is displayed.

In addition, when the setting value of Pachinko machine 1 is specified as "6" based on the special figure 1 synchronized production start command and the special figure 2 synchronized production start command, the setting suggestion corresponding to the setting value "6" is used as the final mode. A setting value continuous suggestion performance pattern that becomes the character 1702 is determined with high probability, and when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is identified as 1, the setting becomes the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the setting value "1" as the final mode. By determining the continuous value suggestion performance pattern with high probability, when the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the high setting value is displayed as the final setting suggestion character 1702, the player's expectations regarding the high setting value are The intensity is increasing.

In addition, the setting value continuous suggestion performance pattern includes a change in the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the performance display device 1600 each time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started during the execution of the setting value continuous suggestion performance. It is set whether it changes to. In addition, in the setting value continuous suggestion performance pattern, the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the performance display device 1600 does not change in the reverse order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 ( In other words, the level of expectation for the high setting value does not decrease), and the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 each time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started is maintained. (the display mode does not change), or it is set so that the mode corresponds to the high setting value. Therefore, even if the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode corresponding to the low setting value, the mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 remains the same as the high setting value until the setting value continuous suggestion effect ends. There is still a possibility that the mode changes depending on the setting suggestion character 1702, and it is possible to draw attention to the mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 with anticipation until the end.

In addition, in the setting value continuous suggestion production pattern, it is not necessarily necessary to display the setting suggestion character 1702 in a manner corresponding to the setting value "1" and then change it in the order of 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6, but in the middle. (For example, start the setting value continuous suggestion effect and first display the setting suggestion character 1702 with the setting value "2"), and change to the next display mode without going through the intermediate display modes. (For example, when the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the setting value "2" is displayed, the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the setting value "4" is displayed in response to the start of the next variable display of the decorative pattern. It is also set to allow Therefore, even if the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed in a display mode that corresponds to the low setting value, it is not possible to predict which display mode the setting suggestion character 1702 will change to next. It is possible to keep the audience's attention with anticipation till the end.

Note that the execution frequency of the set value continuous suggestion performance is set to be lower than that of the suspension notice performance, similarly to the setting value suspension suggestion performance described above. That is, the pending preview performance is executed based on the advance determination information, and when a special lottery result is suggested based on the winning lottery result based on the pending memory that is executing the pending preview performance, the contents of the pending preview performance are reset. On the other hand, the contents of the continuous set value suggestion display continue without being reset until the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, so the execution frequency of the continuous set value suggestion display is lower than that of the pending notice display. This setting prevents the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 from being specified.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the setting value continuous suggestion effect that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed by displaying the setting suggestion character 1702 over a plurality of variable displays of the decorative pattern. I'm starting to get it. It should be noted that since the set value continuous suggestion performance is not based on prior determination information like the above-mentioned set value suspension suggestion performance, it can be executed without obtaining the special lottery result in advance.

Note that the setting value continuous suggestion effect that displays the setting suggestion character 1702 may be executed beyond the upper limit of the number of pending memories (the upper limit of the number of first pending memories is 4, and the upper limit of the number of second pending memories is 1). (for example, over five or more variations of the decorative pattern). In addition, if the number of pending memories becomes 0 during the execution of the set value continuous suggestion effect, the decorative pattern will be displayed in a variable manner based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The setting value continuous suggestion effect may be restarted to display the setting suggestion character 1702 when the setting value continuous suggestion effect is started, and in this case, the setting value suggestion character 1702 may be displayed until the setting value continuous suggestion effect is restarted. It may be configured to continue displaying on the display device 1600. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the continuous setting value suggestion performance is continuing and allow the player to continue playing the game, and even if the player quits playing, a new player can be informed that the continuous setting value suggestion performance is continuing. It is possible to arouse an interest in the game machine and induce the player to play games on the game machine.

Further, the setting value continuous suggestion performance may be executed in parallel with the setting value suspension suggestion performance. Thereby, it is possible to provide a new game in which the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is inferred from both the performance mode in the setting value suspension suggestion performance and the performance mode in the setting value continuous suggestion performance. Further, a plurality of types of setting suggestion characters 1702 may be provided, and one of the setting suggestion characters 1702 may be displayed depending on the jackpot expectation level.

[25. Use of surplus settings other than jackpot probability and small hit probability]
In this embodiment, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button in a state in which the setting value can be changed, the setting value (setting Values 1 to 6) can be changed, and the table corresponding to the determined set value can be used as a table (hit determination table, jackpot symbol determination table, small hit symbol determination table, etc.) used in special drawings, etc. I am using it. In the embodiment described above, the table corresponding to each setting value includes "Jackpot probability", "Small hit probability", "Small hit type", "Normal symbol hit probability", and "Normal hit probability" The opening/closing pattern of the second starting port is set to have different combinations, but as another example, even though the "jackpot probability" and "small hit probability" are the same setting value, the "jackpot probability" and "small As information other than "winning probability", a different fraud monitoring system may be set.

As described above, in the fraud detection process in step S112, various types of fraud are monitored. Specifically, a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, and to change the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. ) is provided, and the main control MPU determines whether or not there is any fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and monitors any fraudulent activity using the magnet. ing. In addition, by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, vibrations are applied to the pachinko machine 1, and the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined by the game board 5 is changed and the game ball B is moved to the game board 5. By installing a vibration sensor that detects fraudulent activities such as entering the various prize openings and gates (gates), the main control MPU determines whether there is any fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, We are monitoring fraud caused by vibration. In this example, the fraud monitoring system includes changing the detection sensitivity of the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detects fraud, and changing the detection sensitivity of the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detects fraud. It is possible to change the part (target area) that is determined to be fraudulent activity, and to change the conditions for canceling the error state when it is determined that fraudulent activity is occurring and the error state is entered.

As shown in Figure 205, in this example, the "big hit probability", "small win probability", and "fraudulent behavior monitoring system" are set to the respective setting values of setting values 1 to 3 and setting values 1' to 3'. are configured accordingly.

Specifically, as the jackpot probability (ratio of the jackpot judgment value indicating winning the jackpot in the hit judgment table), set value 1 and set value 1' are set to "1/319", set value 2 and set value 2' is set to "1/309", and set value 3 and set value 3' are set to "1/299". In this example, the setting values 1 to 3 and the setting values 1' to 3' are set so that the higher the setting value, the higher the jackpot probability.

In addition, as the small hit probability (ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won in the hit judgment table), the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol has a setting value of 1 to 3, a setting value of 1 While '1/100' is set for each of '~3', in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol, set values 1~3 and set values 1'~3' are set respectively. is set to "50/100". Note that each of the setting values 1 to 3 and the setting values 1' to 3' may be set so that the higher the setting value is, the higher the small hit probability becomes.

Further, as a monitoring system for fraudulent acts, "fraud monitoring A" is set for setting values 1 to 3, and "fraud monitoring B" is set to setting values 1' to 3'. In this example, the monitoring system of "Unauthorized Monitoring A" is set to be stronger than that of "Unauthorized Monitoring B."

In this example, the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are the same for setting value 1 and setting value 1', setting value 2 and setting value 2', and setting value 3 and setting value 3'. However, the fraud monitoring system is set to either "Fraud Monitoring A" or "Fraud Monitoring B." For example, if it is possible to set six setting values on the setting change board 1311 provided with the setting key switch 1311a, etc., and it is necessary to set only three types of "jackpot probability", three types In addition to the three setting values corresponding to the "jackpot probability", three surplus setting values will be generated. In this way, if the setting change board 1311 that can set six setting values is used for other gaming machines, surplus setting values may be generated. By using the values to change the fraud monitoring system, the surplus settings can be used effectively and changes to the program can be kept to a minimum.

In addition, as the display mode of the selected setting value during the operation related to setting change, for settings 1 to 3, "1", "2", and "3" are displayed on the setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display. At the same time, the 7-segment LED normally blinks, but in settings 1' to 3', the setting display 1310g displays "1", "2", and "3", and the 7-segment LED blinks. The segment LED is displayed to blink at high speed (blinking faster than settings 1 to 3). Thereby, when the operator changes the settings of the setting values, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the setting values being changed are settings 1 to 3 or settings 1' to 3'. However, when the set value is determined after changing the setting value, the display mode of the set value may be normal blinking or high-speed blinking of the 7-segment LED for both settings 1 to 3 and settings 1' to 3'. It has stopped blinking and is displayed normally. Therefore, when the operator determines the setting value after changing the settings, it is unclear whether the setting value is one of settings 1 to 3 or settings 1' to 3'.

In addition, as another example of the above, regarding the display mode of the selected setting value during the operation related to setting change, in settings 1 to 3, "1" and "2" are displayed on the setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display. ” and “3.”, whereas in settings 1’ to 3’, the setting display 1310g displays “1.”, “2.”, and “3.”, compared to settings 1 to 3. You can also add dots. In such a case, even if the 7-segment LED flashes normally during the change, it is clearly distinguishable whether the setting value being changed is setting 1 to 3 or setting 1' to 3'. be able to. In addition, when the setting value is determined after changing the setting value, even if the 7-segment LED stops blinking normally and is displayed with normal lighting, the determined setting value will be changed to the setting 1. It is possible to clearly distinguish whether the setting is 1' to 3' or the setting 1' to 3'.

Next, specific monitoring systems for "fraud monitoring A" and "fraud monitoring B" include first to fifth specific examples. In this example, any one or more of the first to fifth specific examples may be executed as "fraud monitoring A" and "fraud monitoring B." First, as a first specific example, a case will be described below in which the detection sensitivities of detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detect fraudulent acts are varied.

As a first specific example, "Fraud Monitoring A" increases the detection sensitivity of detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detect fraudulent acts, whereas "Fraud Monitoring B" detects fraudulent acts. The detection sensitivity of the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) is lowered. If the detection sensor that detects fraudulent activity detects excessive amounts of fraud due to individual differences in the pachinko machines 1 or the installation location within the hall, selecting "Fraud Monitoring B" will prevent such excessive detection. be able to. On the other hand, if the detection sensor that detects fraud is slow in detecting it, selecting "Fraud Monitoring A" can prevent the slow detection. Furthermore, if you want to strengthen the countermeasures against magnet goths and vibration goths, by selecting "Fraudulent Act A", it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of fraudulent acts caused by magnet goths and vibration goths.

In addition, in "Fraud Monitoring A", when the detection signal is input from the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detects fraud, the time for which the detection signal is input is short, or the detection signal is Even if the number of times the detection signal is input is small, it is determined that it is a fraudulent act.In contrast, "Fraud Monitoring B" detects cases where the detection signal is input for a long time or the number of times the detection signal is input. If the number of cases is large, it may be determined that the act is fraudulent. Even in such a case, the same effect as described above can be obtained when the detection sensitivities of the detection sensors for detecting fraudulent acts are made different.

Next, as a second specific example, a case will be described below in which a detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detects fraudulent activity determines a different part (target area) of fraudulent activity.

In this example, the magnetic sensor 2010 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is used as a setting operation unit that can detect the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. A magnetic sensor 2010a and a gaming area magnetic sensor 2010b capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the gaming area 5a located on the front side of the gaming board 5 are provided. Depending on the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is monitored to see if a magnet approaches it, and a person other than the person who changes the setting value or displays the confirmation We monitor fraudulent activities such as attempts to change settings or display confirmations. On the other hand, the gaming area magnetic sensor 2010b monitors whether a magnet approaches the area in front of the gaming area 5a, changes the course of the gaming ball B flowing down the gaming area 5a, and is installed on the gaming board 5. We monitor fraudulent activities such as allowing balls to enter various winning slots and gates.

Similarly, as a vibration sensor that detects fraudulent activity due to vibration, a setting operation part vibration sensor that can detect the occurrence of vibration around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. and a game area vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5. Depending on the setting operation section vibration sensor, the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided may be monitored to see if vibration is applied, and anyone other than the person who changes the setting value or displays the confirmation We monitor fraudulent activities such as attempts to change settings or display confirmations. On the other hand, depending on the game area part vibration sensor, it monitors whether vibration is applied to the third sorting device 2550, changes the course of the game ball B in the third sorting device 2550, and changes the course of the game ball B in the third sorting device 2550 to the second V prize opening 2008. We are monitoring fraudulent activities such as allowing game ball B to enter the ball.

As a second specific example, in "Fraud Monitoring A", all the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detect fraud are used to increase the number of parts that are judged to be fraudulent. "Fraud Monitoring B" uses only the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a and the setting operation section vibration sensor, which are part of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detect fraudulent acts, to determine that it is fraudulent activity. The number of parts that need to be adjusted is reduced. In other words, "fraud monitoring A" not only detects the occurrence of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, but also detects the occurrence of magnetism in the gaming area located on the front side of the game board 5. While it is possible to detect the occurrence of magnetism and vibrations in front of the game board 5a, "fraud monitoring B" detects magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. It is possible to detect only the occurrence of vibration. For example, if a malfunction occurs in the gaming area magnetic sensor 2010b or the gaming area vibration sensor, and such detection sensors frequently detect fraudulent activity even though no fraudulent activity has occurred, "Fraud Monitoring B" By selecting , you can prevent that frequent detection. In addition, if you want to strengthen the countermeasures against magnet goths and vibration goths, by selecting "Fraud Monitoring A", the area in front of the gaming area 5a will also be monitored for fraudulent acts, and fraud caused by magnet goths and vibration goths will be monitored. monitoring can be strengthened.

In this example, two magnetic sensors are provided as the magnetic sensor 2010 that detects fraudulent activities using magnets: a setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a and a gaming area section magnetic sensor 2010b. It is possible to specify the location (around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, or in front of the gaming area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5). One magnetic sensor may be provided. Similarly, two vibration sensors are provided to detect fraudulent activities caused by vibration: a vibration sensor for the setting operation section and a vibration sensor for the game area. It is possible to specify whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side, or around the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5. Alternatively, one vibration sensor may be provided. Even in such cases, "Fraud Monitoring B" detects fraud only when it is identified that magnetism or vibration has occurred around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. By determining that there is, the same effect as above can be obtained.

Next, as a third specific example, a case will be described below in which the conditions for canceling the error state when it is determined to be fraudulent activity and shifts to the error state are different.

As a third specific example, in "Fraud Monitoring A", if it is determined to be fraudulent activity and the system goes into an error state, it is possible to clear the error state by turning the power back on. , "Fraud Monitoring B" makes it possible to automatically release the error state after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 minutes) has passed when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the error state is entered. ing. In other words, in "Fraud Monitoring A", when it is determined that it is a fraudulent act and the state shifts to an error state, the hall clerk opens the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 and operates the power switch 630a. The error state cannot be canceled unless the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again. Note that if the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detects fraudulent activity detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, it will transition to an error state and will be activated by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. , an abnormality occurrence effect is executed that notifies the player of an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, making it difficult to properly understand the progress of the game. Therefore, if "Fraud Monitoring A" is selected, when it is determined that there is a fraudulent act and the situation shifts to an error state, the hall clerk will be required to perform the work, and it will be difficult for the hall clerk to understand the fraudulent act. As a result, deterrence against fraudulent activities can be increased. Furthermore, if you want to strengthen the countermeasures against magnets and vibrations, you can select "Fraud Monitoring A" to strengthen the monitoring of fraud using magnets and vibrations.

Next, as a fourth specific example, when it is determined that it is a fraudulent act and the state shifts to an error state, information regarding the error state is transmitted to a pachinko hall installed in the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. A case where whether or not to output to the computer is changed will be described below.

As a fourth specific example, in "Fraud Monitoring A", when it is determined that a fraudulent act is being committed and the game transitions to an error state, information regarding the error state is sent to the game hall via the external terminal board 558 of the Pachinko machine 1. In contrast, in "Fraud Monitoring B", even if it is determined that there is a fraudulent act and the error state occurs, information regarding the error state is output to the hall computer. I try not to. In other words, with "Fraud Monitoring A," when it is determined that a fraudulent act is occurring and the situation shifts to an error state, the hall clerk can immediately grasp the fraudulent act even if he or she is not present at the time. Deterrent power can be increased. Furthermore, if you want to strengthen the countermeasures against magnets and vibrations, you can select "Fraud Monitoring A" to strengthen the monitoring of fraud using magnets and vibrations.

Next, as a fifth specific example, when it is determined that it is a fraudulent act and the state shifts to an error state, whether or not information regarding the error state is externally notified by an image of the effect display device 1600, a lamp, or an output from a speaker. A case where the values are different will be explained below.

As a fifth specific example, in "Fraud Monitoring A", when it is determined that there is a fraudulent act and the state shifts to an error state, magnetism and vibrations are generated by the images of the performance display device 1600, the lamps, and the output from the speakers. In contrast, "Fraud Monitoring B" determines that it is a fraudulent act and displays an error state. Even if the error state is changed to , information regarding the error state is not broadcast externally. In other words, in "Fraud Monitoring A," when it is determined that a fraudulent act has occurred and the situation shifts to an error state, the fraudster is warned by external notification of information regarding the error state, which increases the deterrence against fraudulent behavior. can do. Furthermore, if you want to strengthen the countermeasures against magnets and vibrations, you can select "Fraud Monitoring A" to strengthen the monitoring of fraud using magnets and vibrations.

In this example, "Unauthorized monitoring A" is set for setting values 1 to 3, and "Unauthorized monitoring B" is set to set values 1' to 3', and the main control MPU directs the peripheral control board 1510 to By transmitting information regarding the value as a command, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine whether it should stand by in "Unauthorized Monitoring A" or "Unauthorized Monitoring B." Therefore, when the main control MPU sends information regarding the error state as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the state shifts to an error state, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, It is possible to determine whether or not to externally report information regarding the error state.

In addition, in "Fraud Monitoring B", when it is determined that it is a fraudulent act and the state shifts to an error state, information regarding the error state is externally reported. The output may be executed in a manner that is more suppressed (less conspicuous) than in "Fraud Monitoring A". For example, in "fraud monitoring B", when informing the outside of information regarding an error state, output from the lamps and speakers may be stopped and only the image of the effect display device 1600 may be displayed. Even in such a case, the same effect as described above can be obtained, which is the case where whether or not information regarding the error state is externally broadcast is varied.

In the above, a case has been described in which the setting change board 1311 capable of setting six setting values is used, only three types of "jackpot probability" need to be set, and three surplus setting values are generated. In other words, for setting values 1' to 3', even though the "jackpot probability" and "small winning probability" are the same as setting values 1 to 3, the fraud monitoring system is set to "fraud monitoring A". Although "fraud monitoring B" is set for setting values 1 to 3, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, setting values 1 to 5 corresponding to five types of "jackpot probability" may be set. , if one surplus setting value occurs, the fraud monitoring system may be set differently for that one surplus setting value. For example, with setting value 1', which is one surplus setting value, even though the "jackpot probability" and "small winning probability" are the same as setting value 1 among setting values 1 to 5, fraud monitoring is not possible. For setting values 1 to 5 where the system is set to "Fraud Monitoring A", "Fraud Monitoring B" may be set. Even in such a case, the surplus setting values can be effectively utilized.

Additionally, in the above, either "Fraud Monitoring A" or "Fraud Monitoring B" is set as the fraud monitoring system, but "Fraud Monitoring A" and "Fraud Monitoring B" have different fraud monitoring systems. ” or “Fraud Monitoring C” may be set. Additionally, monitoring of fraudulent activities is strengthened in the order of "Fraud Monitoring C," "Fraud Monitoring B," and "Fraud Monitoring A." For example, to explain the case where setting values 1 and 2 corresponding to two types of "jackpot probability" are set and four surplus setting values occur, a setting where the fraud monitoring system is set to "fraud monitoring A" For values 1 and 2, even though the "jackpot probability" and "small hit probability" are the same setting values, the setting values 1' and 2' set for "fraud monitoring B", "jackpot probability" and "small hit probability" are the same. The setting values 1'' and 2'', which are set for the ``fraud monitoring C'' even though the ``probability'' is the same setting value, may be set as the surplus setting values. Even in such a case, the surplus setting values can be effectively utilized.

Above, we explained the case where the fraud monitoring system is set to be different even though the "big hit probability" and "small win probability" are set to the same value. As other information, all or some of the plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 may be set to have different operating systems. A case in which the operation systems of some of the plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are set to be different will be described below as a sixth specific example.

As shown in FIG. 206, in the sixth specific example, the operating system of a specific accessory (specified movable object) among the plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is set. The fact that values 1 to 3 are set to ``specified official object movement'' and setting values 1' to 3' are set to ``no specified official object movement'' is the first point in time when the ``misconduct monitoring system'' is set. This is different from the specific example to the fifth specific example. In other words, in the sixth specific example, the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are set for setting value 1 and setting value 1', setting value 2 and setting value 2', and setting value 3 and setting value 3'. Although the setting values are the same, the operation system of the specific accessory object (specified movable object) is set to either "with specific accessory object movement" or "without specific accessory object movement." Note that the plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 can each be operated using a drive source such as a drive motor or a solenoid. The accessory consists of the performance operation button unit 360 in the performance operation unit 300 described above, and the performance operation unit 300 can be moved up and down by the operation mechanism described above. Since the performance operation unit 300 can be operated by direct contact with the player, it is more likely to malfunction or malfunction than other accessories. In "Specific character object movement", the specific character object is controlled to move at a predetermined timing during the execution of a movable object performance that involves the movement of the specific character object (the effect operation unit 300 moves up and down). On the other hand, in the case of "no specific character object movement", the specific character object is controlled not to move without performing a movable object performance accompanied by the movement of the specific character object. For example, if there is a problem with the movement mechanism of a specific accessory and the specific accessory no longer operates properly, you can select "No specific accessory movement" to stop the specific accessory's movement midway. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the game becomes difficult to continue due to the player's playing.

In addition, in this example, when determining a variation pattern in which execution of a movable animal effect accompanied by the movement of a specific character is set among multiple variation patterns, "with specific character movement" While a specific role object is controlled to move at a predetermined timing during the execution of a movable object performance that involves movement, in ``no specific role object movement'', a movable object performance that involves the movement of a specific role object is executed. It is controlled so that specific functional objects do not operate. On the other hand, the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern may be changed between "with specific role object movement" and "without specific role object movement." For example, for ``with specific role object movement,'' , among multiple variation patterns, it is possible to determine the variation pattern in which the execution of a movable animal effect accompanied by the movement of a specific role object is set, whereas in ``no specific role object movement'', the movement of a specific role object is Control may also be performed so as not to determine the variation pattern in which the execution of the movable object effect accompanied by the movement is set. In such a case, "No specific character object movement" can produce the same effect as above by controlling the specific character object so that it does not move without performing a movable animal production that involves the movement of the character object. can be obtained.

In addition, in this example, if the operation system of the specific accessory object (specified movable object) is set to a setting value 1 to 3 that indicates "specific accessory object movement", the specific accessory object will be activated when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed). The initial movement of the object is performed, but if you set the setting value 1' to 3', which is ``no specific role object movement'', the initial movement of the specific role object will be performed when the power is turned on (after changing the setting). I'm trying to prevent it from happening. This makes it possible to once again recognize that the specific accessory (specified movable object) among the plurality of accessory objects (movable object) is excluded from the action target. In addition, it is possible to confirm whether or not the settings are the ones intended by the operator regarding the operation of the specific function object (specified movable object), thereby preventing situations in which the operator makes a mistake with the settings that were not intended. be able to.

Different from the above, if priority is given to confirming whether or not there is a problem with the movement of a specified role object (specified movable object), in order to accurately notify the problem, it is necessary to select "specific function object movement" and "no specified function object movement". Regardless of which setting is made, the initial operation of the specific accessory may be performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed).

In addition, whether "with specific role object movement" or "without specific role object movement" is set can be confirmed by the setting value displayed on the setting display 1310g, but other than the setting display 1310g. However, it may be possible to notify. For example, when the setting change of the setting value is completed, the image, lamp, and output from the speaker of the performance display device 1600 may be used to notify that "Specific character object movement has been set/Specific character object movement has been set to not exist." Whether a specific role object (specified movable object) out of multiple role objects (movable object) is the target of the operation, or by displaying a standby screen during a period when no game is being played, and notifying the user of this fact. can recognize what

In addition, in this example, it is possible for the operator to set either "with specific role object movement" or "without specific role object movement" by changing the setting value, but such initial After setting, it may be possible for the player to change the initial setting to another setting. For example, while the standby screen is displayed during a period when no game is being played, the player may be allowed to change the mode to either "with specific accessory action" or "without specific accessory action". That is, the setting values 1 to 3 are set to "specific role object movement" and the setting values 1' to 3' are set to "no specific role object movement," and the main control MPU directs the peripheral control board 1510 to the setting. By sending information regarding the value as a command, the peripheral control board 1510 side executes one of the settings as the initial setting, but if the player changes to another setting after the initial setting, On the peripheral control board 1510 side, the settings changed by the player are given priority over the initial settings.

Further, the specific accessory (specified movable object) among the plurality of accessories (movable object) is not limited to the performance operation button unit 360 in the performance operation unit 300, but may be provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3, It may operate from outside the front of the screen of the effect display device 1600 toward the front of the screen. In addition, in this example, it is possible to change the operating system of a specific accessory (specified movable object) among multiple accessory objects (movable objects) by changing the setting value, but it is not limited to specific accessory objects. It is possible to change the movement system of multiple characters (movable objects) or all characters, and set the target character to either "with character movement" or "without character movement". You can do it like this. Furthermore, accessories (movable objects) may be provided not only on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, but also on the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and it is possible to change the operating system of such accessories as well. It can also be used as a target.

[26. Fraud monitoring]
In this embodiment, various types of fraud are monitored in the fraud detection process in step S112 described above. Specifically, a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, and to change the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. ) is provided, and the main control MPU determines whether or not there is any fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and monitors any fraudulent activity using the magnet. ing. In addition, by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, vibrations are applied to the pachinko machine 1, and the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined by the game board 5 is changed and the game ball B is moved to the game board 5. By installing a vibration sensor that detects fraudulent activities such as entering the various prize openings and gates (gates), the main control MPU determines whether there is any fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, We are monitoring fraud caused by vibration. Regarding the monitoring of these fraudulent activities, the manner in which the monitoring is performed is different depending on whether it is normal or when a setting change or confirmation display of a setting value is being performed.

[26-1. Regarding fraud monitoring during normal times]
First, the monitoring of fraudulent activities during normal times will be explained below. Here, the normal state is a state in which the main body frame 4 is closed, and the setting value is not changed or the setting value confirmation display is not performed, and symbol fluctuations, jackpot games, small win games, etc. This refers to the state in which it is possible to play games.

In this example, the magnetic sensor 2010 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is used as a setting operation unit that can detect the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. A magnetic sensor 2010a and a gaming area magnetic sensor 2010b capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the gaming area 5a located on the front side of the gaming board 5 are provided. In normal times, a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is monitored for fraudulent activity using the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a. In other words, under normal circumstances, the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a generates a magnetic field that should not originally be generated (due to unauthorized access The system monitors whether magnetism (magnetism) has occurred (i.e., whether a magnet has approached), and monitors for fraudulent activity such as attempts by a person other than the person responsible for changing or confirming settings. An example of a fraudulent act against the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using a magnet is when a metal illicit device is placed inside the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (inside the space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed). A magnet that indirectly manipulates a metal illicit device is installed, and the magnet and metal illicit device are inserted through a small gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the inside of the island equipment or an opening made by destroying a part of the pachinko machine 1. It is conceivable that the user may operate the machine to illegally access the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when a detection signal from the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a is input, fraud using a magnet is detected in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. It is determined that this is being done.

Similarly, during normal times, a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is monitored for fraudulent activity using the gaming area magnetic sensor 2010b. In other words, in normal times, the gaming area magnetic sensor 2010b monitors whether magnetism that should not have occurred (magnetism due to unauthorized access) has occurred in the area in front of the gaming area 5a (whether a magnet has approached). In addition, fraudulent acts such as changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a and causing the ball to enter various prize openings or gates provided on the game board 5 are monitored. In addition, in the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112, when a detection signal from the gaming area magnetic sensor 2010b is input, it is determined that fraudulent activity using a magnet is being carried out in the area in front of the gaming area 5a. are doing.

In this example, two magnetic sensors are provided as the magnetic sensor 2010 that detects fraudulent activities using magnets: a setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a and a gaming area section magnetic sensor 2010b. Sensors 2010a and 2010b may have the same performance. That is, these two magnetic sensors 2010a and 2010b, although not shown, are composed of a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and a first magnetic sensor having a highly sensitive directivity in a direction perpendicular to one side surface. It is possible to perform magnetic detection within the magnetic detection area and magnetic detection within a second magnetic detection area having strong directivity with strong sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to the side surface on the other side, which is the opposite side. It has become. Note that "high sensitivity in the vertical direction" means that the sensitivity is stronger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction with respect to each side, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction at all. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side is a wide area surrounded by a sphere. The gaming area magnetic sensor 2010b is arranged such that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body extend in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. , a wide area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a plurality of winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, normal winning opening 2003, big winning opening 2005, and other main parts of the ball flow path) (locations) can be monitored. On the other hand, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a is configured such that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body described above extend in the front and back direction when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. One magnetic detection area is arranged to cover the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so that the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be monitored.

Note that an embodiment may be adopted in which the two magnetic sensors 2010a and 2010b do not have the same performance. For example, instead of the magnetic sensors 2010a and 2010b, the place where magnetism is generated (around the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a located on the back side of the game board 5, or the area around the game board 5 located on the front side It is also possible to provide one magnetic sensor that can specify whether the area is in front of the area 5a. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether the magnet approaches the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and whether the magnet approaches the area in front of the gaming area 5a. .

In addition, in this example, a setting operation that can detect the occurrence of vibration around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 is used as a vibration sensor that detects fraudulent activity due to vibration. A game area vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 is provided. Under normal circumstances, a vibration sensor on the setting operation unit is used to monitor fraudulent activity. In other words, under normal conditions, the setting operation part vibration sensor monitors whether vibrations that should not have occurred (vibrations due to unauthorized access) are applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are installed. However, unauthorized acts such as attempts by a person other than the person responsible for changing or confirming setting values are monitored. In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when a detection signal from the setting operation part vibration sensor is input, it is determined that a fraud using vibration is performed in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. It is judged that

On the other hand, during normal times, only during small winning games, the gaming area vibration sensor is used to monitor fraudulent activities, and other than small winning games, the gaming area vibration sensor is not used to monitor fraudulent activities. This means that in the small winning game, the third sorting device 2550 distributes the game balls B, which have been sorted to the second V winning hole side by the second sorting device 2540, to either the second V winning hole 2008 or the losing side. However, when vibration is applied to the third sorting device 2550, the course of the game ball B in the third sorting device 2550 is changed and the game ball B is distributed to the second V prize opening 2008. This is to prevent such illegal acts from occurring. In other words, during normal small winning games, the game area vibration sensor monitors whether vibrations that should not have occurred (vibrations due to unauthorized access) are applied to the third sorting device 2550. However, fraudulent acts such as changing the course of the game ball B in the third sorting device 2550 and allowing the game ball B to enter the second V prize opening 2008 are monitored. In addition, in the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112, when the detection signal from the gaming area vibration sensor is input, it is determined that a fraudulent activity using vibration is being performed on the third sorting device 2550.

In this example, two vibration sensors, a setting operation part vibration sensor and a game area part vibration sensor, are provided as vibration sensors for detecting fraudulent activities caused by vibrations. Is it around the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the board 5, or is it around the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5? It is also possible to provide one vibration sensor capable of Even with such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether vibration is applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and whether vibration is applied to the third sorting device 2550. can.

In addition, in normal times, in the firing permission signal setting process of step S113, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to notify the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that firing of the game ball B is permitted, and the player It is possible to shoot the game ball B when the handle 182 is operated.

In addition, in normal times, when the game ball B wins in a winning hole such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the normal winning hole 2003, or the big winning hole 2005, a detection signal is generated from the detection sensor corresponding to each of the winning holes. is input by the main control MPU, and the detection of game ball B is treated as valid. Specifically, when the detection of the game ball B is disabled, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, the symbol change is not performed and the game ball B However, when the detection of game ball B is enabled, when game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, the symbol change is not performed. At the same time, the game ball B can be paid out.

In addition, during normal times, except for the period when the effect using the rotary operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 is executed during symbol fluctuation, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, etc. This makes it possible to adjust the amount of light output from the light emitting member. Specifically, after displaying an image for adjustment on the effect display device 1600 by operating the pressing operation section 303, it is possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light by rotating the rotation operation section 302. In addition, during a period in which a production using the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 is being executed during symbol variation, the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 is waited for to be operated for that production. Therefore, even if the rotary operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 is operated, the volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted during the prohibited period.

[26-2. Regarding unauthorized monitoring while changing settings]
Next, monitoring of fraudulent activity during setting change of setting values will be described with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a time chart illustrating the monitoring status of fraudulent acts during setting change of setting values.

When changing the settings, first open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 while the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off). (timing t1), then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and perform the first ON operation. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t3), the setting value becomes in a state in which it is possible to change the settings (change permission state). In such a change permission state, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button, the set value (set value 1 to 6) can be changed each time the press operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. Then, by rotating the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise and performing a second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the OK key ON, and then the setting key switch 1311a is set to the OK key ON. The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder to its original position and turning it OFF (timing t4). In other words, for the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is possible to change the setting value (change permission state), and after timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting value can be changed. It becomes impossible to change the settings (unchangeable state). Then, by removing the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), a state in which it is possible to play the game is established. Become.

In this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on process (see FIGS. 142 and 143), but turns off the setting key switch 1311a at timing t4. Until then, the setting change process in step S37 is not terminated (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S222 of the setting change process), and the subsequent The interrupt permission setting in step S52 is prohibited from being performed, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed compared to normal power-on. Since the main control side timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 144) is not started until the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, the switch input processing in step S104 and the fraud detection in step S112 in the main control side timer interrupt processing are performed. The process, such as the firing permission signal setting process in step S113, is not executed and is in a standby state. In other words, for the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is possible to change the setting value (change permission state), but monitoring for fraudulent activity is not performed, and the A special period is set in which the firing is not permitted and the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B wins in the winning hole. Note that in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, information regarding the setting value being changed is output to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. This allows hall staff to know that settings are being changed.

Specifically, the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, includes monitoring for fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a and monitoring for fraudulent activity using the gaming area magnetic sensor 2010b. I try not to run the entire monitor. This is because, in the change permission state, an authorized worker who changes the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button). This is because there is no room for fraudulent activities using magnets by anyone other than the authorized worker who changes the settings. In addition, when changing the setting values, even if the authorized worker who changes the settings has something that can generate magnetism, this will prevent it from being detected as fraudulent activity using a magnet. , it is possible to suppress interference with regular setting change work.

Similarly, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraudulent activities using the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit and overall monitoring of fraudulent activities using the vibration sensor of the gaming area are performed. I try not to. This is because, in the change permission state, an authorized worker who changes the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button). This is because there is no room for fraudulent activity using vibrations by anyone other than the authorized worker who is changing the settings. In addition, even if an authorized worker who changes the settings applies vibration when changing settings, this prevents the vibration from being detected as an unauthorized act, and prevents legitimate settings changes from being detected. inhibition can be suppressed.

Also, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the logic of the firing permission signal that informs the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that firing of the game ball B is permitted is not set. and prohibits the firing of game ball B. Thereby, even if a regular worker who changes the setting value touches the handle 182, the game ball B can be prevented from being ejected, and it is possible to suppress interference with the regular setting change work. Further, even if the player operates the handle 182 in the change permission state, the game ball B cannot be fired.

In addition, the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, includes winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, normal winning opening 2003, and big winning opening 2005, and various gate parts (gate ), when the game ball B enters the ball, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. Note that the detection of the game ball B by the detection sensor may not be performed, or the detection signal from the detection sensor may be inputted but treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is disabled, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the lottery, symbol change, and the detection of the game ball B Neither payout is performed, and as a result, even if the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 for some reason during the regular work of changing the setting value, , it is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

Although not shown in the figure, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU inputs detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to each of the winning openings, gates, etc. At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is also prevented from being input to the main control MPU, so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B ejected from the out port 1008 is disabled, for example, the above-mentioned measurement by the base monitor 1310h regarding the game ball B ejected from the game area 5a in the change permission state is performed. It is now possible to exclude it from the target (target for addition to the out number counter), and the game ball B that remained in the game area 5a due to a sling (ball jam) etc. is detected in the change permission state and is displayed on the base monitor 1310h. It is possible to avoid a situation where the output is counted (added to the out number counter).

In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, etc. The amount of light output from the light emitting member cannot be adjusted.

In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting value is set by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. A setting change notification (setting change related notification) is being executed to notify that the setting is being changed. The setting change notification includes a voice repeating "Settings are being changed", a message saying "Settings are being changed", and a lamp emitting light in a color corresponding to the setting value from 1 to 6 during the selection operation process. It is said that This setting change notification is a notification (effect) that is performed only in the change permission state, and is executed with priority over the main body frame opening notification that is performed when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. In other words, when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification is normally performed (display or voice saying "Frame is open", etc.), but in the change permission state, the main body frame open notification is not performed. The setting change notification is given top priority without the need for any changes. Note that the main frame opening notification and the setting change notification are executed in parallel, and the setting changing notification is given priority over the main body frame opening notification, and the main body frame opening notification is performed after the setting changing notification is finished. The form can also be exemplified.

In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, in addition to the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600, a notification from the function display unit 1400 is also sent as the above-mentioned setting change notification. Running. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 includes a status display, a normal symbol display, a normal reservation display, a first special symbol display, a first special reservation number display, and a second special In addition to the symbol display, the second special reservation number display, and the round display, there is a setting change indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change permitted state). A confirmation display indicator consisting of one LED is provided to indicate that the confirmation display is in progress (confirmation display state). In the change permission state, only the LED of the setting change indicator in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the other LEDs are turned off. Thereby, in the change permission state, it is possible to understand through the notification from the function display unit 1400 that the game will not proceed.

Furthermore, at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting change process in step S37 in the main control power-on process (see FIGS. 142 and 143) is finished (in step S222 of the setting change process, the setting key switch It is determined that the switch 1311a has been turned off), and the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed. Then, it becomes possible to start the main control side timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 144), which includes the switch input processing in step S104, the fraud detection processing in step S112, and the firing permission signal setting in step S113. Processing etc. will be carried out. However, in this embodiment, until the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), the shooting of the game ball B is not permitted or the game ball B is detected when it enters the prize opening. It does not allow signal input, and maintains a state in which the game cannot be started. In other words, the period from timing t4 to timing t5 is a period in which even if the game ball B is won in the winning slot due to fraudulent activity, no detection signal is input and no illegal profits can be obtained. In addition, since there is a possibility that the main body frame 4 may receive an impact from closing the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, it is necessary to monitor fraudulent activities using the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a, and use the gaming area section magnetic sensor 2010b to detect fraudulent activities. Monitoring of actions, monitoring of fraudulent actions using the vibration sensor of the setting operation section, and monitoring of fraudulent actions using the vibration sensor of the game area section are in a standby state with no execution yet performed.

In addition, from the timing t5 when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, it is possible to launch the game ball B, and it is possible to play games such as symbol variations, jackpot games, small win games, etc. state, and begin monitoring for various types of fraudulent activity as explained above in [Regarding fraud monitoring during normal times].

Further, during the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the screen of the effect display device 1600 is in a state of waiting for the start of the game. An image is displayed to notify you of this (game standby notification). Then, during a predetermined period from timing t5, after the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, games such as symbol fluctuations, jackpot games, small win games, etc. are started on the screen of the effect display device 1600. An image (gaming start notification) is displayed to notify that the game is now possible.

In addition, in this example, the game ball B is not fired during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from timing t3 to timing t4). Although the logic of the firing permission signal that conveys permission to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, in consideration of checking the firing operation using the handle 182 in the change permission state, The logic of the firing permission signal may be set during that period so that the game ball B can be fired when the operator operates the handle 182. However, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from timing t3 to timing t4), the permission is limited to the firing of game ball B. It is desirable to prevent the game from proceeding unfairly by preventing the detection signal from being input even if the game ball B enters the various prize openings or gates (gates). .

In addition, in this example, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from timing t3 to timing t4), the game ball B is not fired. The logic of the firing permission signal that conveys permission to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, and the firing of the game ball B is started from timing t5 (or timing t4). However, when the handle 182 is operated (touched on the handle 182) for the first time after the change permission state is ended and the game ball B is allowed to be fired, the setting value is changed in the change permission state. A notification is being executed after the settings have been changed. The notification after a setting change is made by making a sound saying ``Settings have been changed,'' displaying a message saying ``Settings have been changed,'' and flashing a lamp. In addition, this post-setting change notification is also provided when a person other than the authorized worker who changes the setting value changes the setting value due to fraudulent activity. 182). As a result, if a legitimate worker who changes the setting value executes a notification after changing the setting value even though the setting value has not been changed, the setting value will be changed due to fraudulent activity. This makes it possible for the outside party to know what has happened, thereby increasing deterrence against fraudulent acts.

In addition, in this example, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from timing t3 to timing t4), the game ball B is not fired. The logic of the firing permission signal that conveys permission to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, and the firing of the game ball B is started from timing t5 (or timing t4). However, if the handle 182 has been operated (contacted the handle 182) before the game ball B was allowed to be launched, the player must release the handle 182 once after the game ball B is allowed to launch. Unless the user touches (operates) the handle 182 again (by turning off the contact detection), the game ball B will not be launched. That is, even if the contact of the handle 182 has been ON before timing t5, unless the contact detection for that handle 182 detects an edge that changes from OFF to ON after timing t5, no contact will be made to the continued handle 182. The game ball B is restricted from being ejected by invalidating the contact of the game ball B. As a result, even if an authorized worker who changes the setting value touches the handle 182 when opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, When the game ball B is closed, the game ball B is not shot out carelessly, and losses to the player can be surely prevented.

In addition, different from the above, in consideration of speeding up the start of the game based on the end of the change permission state, when the handle 182 is operated from the time before the launch of the game ball B is permitted, the change to the handle 182 is While the contact is continued, the continued contact with the handle 182 may be made valid so that the game ball B can be fired from the time when the game ball B is allowed to be fired. In such a case, prepare to launch the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and immediately after closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. You can now start playing.

In addition, in this example, the game ball B can be launched from the timing t5 when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, and games such as symbol variations, jackpot games, and small win games can be played. Although it is assumed that the game can be played, it may be possible to play the game immediately at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. In other words, from timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the game ball B can be launched, and games such as symbol fluctuations, jackpot games, and small win games can be played. Monitoring of fraudulent activities may be performed in accordance with the content described in [About Monitoring of Fraudulent Acts]. In such a configuration, during the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, but on the screen of the effect display device 1600, symbol fluctuations, jackpot games, small An image (game start notification) notifying that it is now possible to start a game such as a winning game may be displayed.

As another example, after the power is turned on and before starting the setting change process in step S37, at least the switch input process in step S104, the fraud detection process in step S112, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 are performed. The configuration may be such that the corresponding processing is performed in advance. With this configuration, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value is being changed (change permission state), but fraudulent activity is not monitored, and the game balls are not monitored. In addition to not allowing the ball B to be fired, the input of the detection signal may not be made valid when the game ball B enters the prize opening.

Further, in the above-described other example, the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4 (the period that includes the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5) may include the magnetic sensor 2010, Although a vibration sensor is used to monitor fraudulent activity, when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected, the system may be configured not to notify the user of the abnormal state. In addition, under normal circumstances, when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet or vibration is being carried out, the value of the magnet goto counter or vibration goto counter is incremented by 1, but from timing t3 to timing t4. During the change permission state (which may include the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5), the magnet is The configuration may be such that the values of the goto counter and the vibration goto counter are not added. Even with this configuration, even if the authorized worker who is changing the settings brings a magnet close to the user or applies vibration, fraud due to the magnet or vibration may occur. No notification or addition is performed as an act, and it is possible to prevent monitoring of fraudulent acts from becoming an obstacle when changing the setting value.

Note that the various processes related to the above-mentioned change permission state may have various needs depending on the environment of the gaming parlor, so it may be possible to select and set them for each gaming parlor. For example, when the power is turned on with the operation of the normal RAM clear switch instead of the change permission state (the RWM clear button 633z is in a state where it operates as a RAM clear switch, while operating the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z) (when turning on the power), the operator of the game center generates a state in which he or she can select which setting to perform various processes related to the change permission state, and then when the change permission state occurs, the selected We will perform various processes related to change permission status in the settings. As a result, in the game hall A, touching the handle 182 is set to be valid even though unauthorized monitoring is not monitored in the change permitted state, and in the game hall B, unauthorized monitoring is set in the change permitted state. It can be set to non-monitoring and to disable contact with the handle 182, depending on the needs of the game center, such as whether or not you want to check the firing operation using the handle 182 while the change is permitted. You will be able to match it.

[26-3. Regarding unauthorized monitoring while displaying setting value confirmation]
In the above, we explained that we do not monitor fraudulent activities while changing setting values, but regarding monitoring fraudulent activities while displaying confirmation of setting values, The system may be configured to have either a state in which fraudulent activity is not monitored while setting value confirmation is displayed, or a state in which fraudulent activity is partially monitored. First, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 208, in which fraudulent activity is not monitored during setting value confirmation display. FIG. 208 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity when fraudulent activity is not monitored during confirmation display of setting values.

When displaying a confirmation of the currently set values, first check that the Pachinko machine 1 is powered on and that no symbol changes are being made (no holds are made). , open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 (timing t5), then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and turn the clock in the same way as when changing settings. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a by 60 degrees toward the direction and performing the first ON operation (timing t6). At this time, the setting display 1310g displays the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned ON). do. Then, by turning the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to return it to the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON, and turning it OFF (timing t7), the setting display is displayed. The setting value for 1310g is switched from being displayed to being hidden. In other words, during the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the setting value is displayed for confirmation (confirmation display state), and after timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting value is confirmed. The display is not displayed (unconfirmable state). Then, by removing the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t8), a state in which it is possible to play the game is established. Become.

In addition, at timing t6 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the current setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g unless there is no payout of game balls B such as prize balls. ing. In addition, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn the first ON operation, game balls B such as prize balls are paid out. If so, the setting key switch 1311a may not be turned on (the setting key remains OFF), or the setting key switch 1311a may be turned on after the payout of game balls B such as prize balls is completed. It may be configured such that when the setting key is turned on, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g.

In addition, as another example, when displaying a confirmation display of the currently set setting values, as in the case of changing the setting values, the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on). Insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, turn the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and perform the first ON operation. By turning the key switch 1311a to the setting key ON and operating the power switch 630a to power on the pachinko machine 1, it is configured to enter a state in which confirmation display of the set value can be performed (confirmation display state). You can. Also, when powering on the pachinko machine 1 by operating the power switch 630a, if the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch (RWM clear button 633z is in a state where it operates as a RAM clear switch, the RWM When the power is turned on while operating the press operation part of the clear button 633z), the setting value shifts to a state where it is possible to change the settings (change permission state), while when the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch, It may be configured to shift to a state (confirmation display state) in which a confirmation display of the set value can be performed. In such a configuration, by turning on the setting key switch 1311a and turning on the power without operating the RAM clear switch, a state in which the setting value confirmation display is performed (confirmation display state) is entered. , the state in which confirmation display of the set value is performed (confirmation display state) corresponds to the period from timing t6 to timing t7.

In this example, for the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the setting value is displayed for confirmation (confirmation display state), but monitoring for fraudulent activity is not performed, and the game ball B A special period is set in which the firing of the game ball B is not permitted and the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B enters the winning hole. In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, information regarding the setting value being displayed for confirmation is output to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. , so that the hall clerk can understand that the confirmation display is in progress.

Specifically, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the gaming area magnetic sensor 2010b are performed. I try not to run the entire monitor. This is because in the confirmation display state, an authorized worker who displays the setting value confirmation is operating the setting key switch 1311a, and a person other than the authorized worker who displays the setting value confirmation is committing fraud using a magnet. This is because there is no room to do so. In addition, when displaying confirmation of setting values, even if the authorized worker carrying the confirmation display has something that can generate magnetism, this will prevent it from being detected as fraudulent activity using a magnet. , it is possible to suppress interference with regular confirmation display work.

Similarly, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, monitoring of fraudulent activities using the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit and overall monitoring of fraudulent activities using the vibration sensor of the gaming area are performed. I try not to. This is because in the confirmation display state, the authorized worker who displays the confirmation display for the set value is operating the setting key switch 1311a, and there is a possibility that someone other than the authorized worker who displays the confirmation display may commit fraudulent acts using vibration. This is because there is no In addition, even if an authorized worker who performs the confirmation display applies vibration when displaying the setting value confirmation, this will prevent it from being detected as a fraudulent act due to vibration, and prevent the legitimate confirmation display work from being detected. inhibition can be suppressed.

Also, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the logic of the firing permission signal that informs the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that firing of the game ball B is permitted is not set. and prohibits the firing of game ball B. Thereby, even if a regular worker who performs confirmation and display of the set value touches the handle 182, the game ball B can be prevented from being ejected, and it is possible to suppress interference with the regular confirmation and display work. Furthermore, even if the player operates the handle 182 in the confirmation display state, the game ball B cannot be fired.

In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, there are winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, and the big winning opening 2005, and various gate parts (gates). ) When the game ball B enters the ball, even if the main control MPU inputs detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. Note that the detection of the game ball B by the detection sensor may not be performed, or the detection signal itself from the detection sensor may not be input. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is disabled, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the lottery, symbol change, and the detection of the game ball B Neither payout is performed, and as a result, even if the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 for some reason during the regular work of confirming and displaying the set value. , it is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

Although not shown, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the main control MPU inputs detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to each of the winning openings, gates, etc. At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is also prevented from being input to the main control MPU, so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is disabled, for example, the measurement by the base monitor 1310h described above regarding the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the confirmation display state is performed. It is now possible to exclude it from the target (target for addition to the number of outs counter), and the game ball B that remained in the game area 5a due to a sling (ball jam) etc. is detected in a confirmation display state and displayed on the base monitor 1310h. It is possible to avoid a situation where the output is counted (added to the out number counter).

In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, etc. The amount of light output from the light emitting member cannot be adjusted.

In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the set value is confirmed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. A confirmation display notification (confirmation display related notification) is being executed to notify that the display is in progress. The confirmation display notification includes a voice repeating "Confirmation display in progress", a message display saying "Confirmation display in progress!", and a lamp flashing in a color corresponding to the setting value from 1 to 6 during the confirmation process. There is. This notification during confirmation display is a notification (performance) that is performed only in the confirmation display state, and is executed with priority over the main body frame open notification that is performed when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. In other words, when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification is normally performed (display or voice saying "Frame is open", etc.), but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame open notification is not performed. The notification during the confirmation display is given top priority without performing the above. Note that the main body frame opening notification and the notification during confirmation display are executed in parallel, and the confirmation display notification is given priority over the main body frame opening notification, and the main body frame opening notification is performed after the confirmation display notification ends. The form can also be exemplified.

In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, in addition to the images, lamps, and outputs from the speaker of the effect display device 1600, notifications from the function display unit 1400 are also sent as the above-mentioned confirmation display notification. Running. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 includes a status display, a normal symbol display, a normal reservation display, a first special symbol display, a first special reservation number display, and a second special In addition to the symbol display, the second special reservation number display, and the round display, there is a setting change indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change permitted state). A confirmation display indicator consisting of one LED is provided to indicate that the confirmation display is in progress (confirmation display state). In the confirmation display state, only the LED of the confirmation display in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the other LEDs of the display are turned off. Thereby, in the confirmation display state, it is possible to understand through the notification from the function display unit 1400 that the game will not proceed.

In addition, the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7 (this may be a period that includes the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8) includes the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, when the game ball B wins a prize in a winning hole such as the normal winning hole 2003 or the big winning hole 2005, even if the main control MPU inputs the detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, the game ball B cannot be detected. However, if such a detection signal is input, the firing of game ball B is not permitted due to the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Even though it is a period in which no game ball B is entered into the winning slot, a warning performance C is executed to notify that the game ball B is illegally entered into the winning slot. This warning effect C is executed with priority over the confirmation display notification and the body frame opening notification. That is, when executing the warning effect C, the warning effect C is executed with the highest priority without performing confirmation display notification or body frame opening notification.

In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, it is not possible to allow the firing of the game ball B or to input a detection signal when the game ball B enters the prize opening, and the game is stopped. Although it is in a state in which it is not possible to start, this state is maintained until the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed (timing t8). In other words, the period from timing t7 to timing t8 is a period in which no detection signal is input even if the game ball B is won in the winning slot due to fraudulent activity, and no illegal profits can be obtained. In addition, since there is a possibility that the body frame 4 may receive an impact from closing the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, it is necessary to monitor fraudulent activities using the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a, and to monitor fraudulent activities using the gaming area magnetic sensor 2010b. Monitoring of actions, monitoring of fraudulent actions using the vibration sensor of the setting operation section, and monitoring of fraudulent actions using the vibration sensor of the game area section are in a standby state with no execution yet performed.

In addition, from timing t8 when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, it is possible to launch the game ball B, and it is possible to play games such as symbol variations, jackpot games, small win games, etc. state, and begin monitoring for various types of fraudulent activity as explained above in [Regarding fraud monitoring during normal times]. Furthermore, even before the timing t6 when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the game ball B can be fired, and the pattern changes and the jackpot can be prevented. The state is set in such a state that games such as games and small winning games can be played, and monitoring for various fraudulent activities is started in accordance with the content explained in the above-mentioned [Regarding fraud monitoring in normal times].

Further, during the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the screen of the effect display device 1600 is in a state of waiting for the start of the game. An image is displayed to notify you of this (game standby notification). Then, during a predetermined period from timing t8, after the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, games such as symbol fluctuations, jackpot games, small win games, etc. are started on the screen of the effect display device 1600. An image is displayed to notify that the game is now possible (gaming start notification).

In addition, under normal conditions when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a should not be in a state where the setting key is turned on, but if such a state is reached where the setting key is turned on. At this time, warning effects A and B are executed to notify that the setting key has been turned on in an unauthorized manner using images on the effect display device 1600, lamps, and outputs from the speaker. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON (timing t1) in a state where symbol fluctuation is being performed normally, the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. Until then (timing t2), warning effect A is being executed. Similarly, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (timing t3) without symbol fluctuations occurring all the time, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF until the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. During this period (timing t4), warning effect B is executed. Further, the warning effects A and B are executed with priority over the effects currently being executed. That is, when the warning performances A and B are executed, the performance in progress is stopped and the warning performances A and B are executed with the highest priority regardless of whether or not symbol variations are being performed. Note that warning performances A and B are executed in the same manner, but they may be executed in different manners so that it can be determined whether or not a symbol variation is being performed.

In addition, during the period of monitoring for fraudulent activities caused by magnets or vibrations, if the occurrence of magnetism or vibrations is detected, the images of the effect display device 1600, the lamps, and the outputs from the speakers are used to display the magnetic and vibrations for a predetermined period of time. An abnormality occurrence effect is being executed to notify the user of an abnormal state caused by the occurrence of an abnormality. In addition, in the abnormality occurrence production, the content of the abnormality (magnetic, vibration the location where the abnormality was detected (whether it is the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, the area in front of the gaming area 5a, the third sorting device 2550), etc.). Further, the abnormality occurrence performance is executed with priority over the performance currently being executed. That is, when executing the abnormality occurrence performance, the performance in progress is stopped and the abnormality occurrence performance is executed with the highest priority regardless of whether or not symbol variation is being performed.

In addition, in this example, the firing of the game ball B is not performed during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from timing t6 to timing t7). Although the logic of the firing permission signal that conveys permission to the firing control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633 is not set, in consideration of checking the firing operation using the handle 182 in the confirmation display state, The logic of the firing permission signal may be set during that period so that the game ball B can be fired when the operator operates the handle 182. However, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from timing t6 to timing t7), the permission is limited to the firing of game ball B. It is desirable to prevent the game from proceeding unfairly by preventing the detection signal from being input even if the game ball B enters the various prize openings or gates (gates). .

In addition, in this example, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from timing t6 to timing t7), the game ball B is not fired. The logic of the firing permission signal that conveys permission to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, and the game ball B is not fired from timing t8 (or timing t7). However, if the handle 182 has been operated (touched on the handle 182) before the launch of the game ball B is permitted, the contact with the handle 182 must be stopped once the launch of the game ball B is permitted. Unless the handle 182 is touched (operated) again after being released (contact detection is turned OFF), the game ball B will not be launched. That is, even if the contact of the handle 182 has been ON before timing t8, unless the contact detection for that handle 182 detects an edge that changes from OFF to ON after timing t8, the contact of the handle 182 that continues The game ball B is restricted from being ejected by invalidating the contact of the game ball B. As a result, even if a regular worker who performs confirmation display of setting values touches the handle 182 when opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, When the game ball B is closed, the game ball B is not shot out carelessly, and losses to the player can be surely prevented.

In addition, different from the above, in consideration of speeding up the start of the game based on the end of the confirmation display state, if the handle 182 is operated from the time before the launch of the game ball B is permitted, the handle 182 is While continuing the contact with the handle 182, the continued contact with the handle 182 may be made valid so that the game ball B can be launched from the time when the launch of the game ball B is permitted. In such a case, prepare to launch the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and immediately after closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. You can now start playing.

In addition, in this example, the game ball B can be launched from the timing t8 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and games such as symbol variations, jackpot games, and small win games can be played. Although it is assumed that the game can be played, it may be possible to play the game immediately at timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. In other words, from timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the game ball B can be fired, and games such as symbol fluctuations, jackpot games, and small win games can be played. Monitoring of fraudulent activities may be performed in accordance with the content explained in [Regarding fraud monitoring at times]. In such a configuration, during the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, but on the screen of the effect display device 1600, symbol fluctuations, jackpot games, small An image (game start notification) may be displayed to notify that it is now possible to start a game such as a winning game.

As another example, the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7 (this may be a period that includes the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8) includes the magnetic sensor 2010 and the vibration sensor. It may be configured such that, while monitoring for fraudulent activity using the system, when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected, the system does not notify the user of the abnormal state. Also, under normal circumstances, when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet or vibration is being carried out, the value of the magnet goto counter or vibration goto counter is incremented by 1, but from timing t6 to timing t7. During the confirmation display state that is the period of The configuration may be such that the values of the goto counter and the vibration goto counter are not added. Even with this configuration, even if the authorized worker who performs the confirmation display brings a magnet close to the user or applies vibration when displaying the setting value confirmation, fraud due to the magnet or vibration may occur. No notification or addition is performed as an act, and it is possible to prevent monitoring of fraudulent acts from becoming a hindrance when displaying confirmation of set values.

Note that the various processes related to the above-described confirmation display state may have various needs depending on the environment of the gaming parlor, so it may be possible to select and set them for each gaming parlor. For example, when the power is turned on with normal operation of the RAM clear switch instead of the confirmation display state (since the RWM clear button 633z is in a state where it operates as a RAM clear switch, while operating the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z (when the power is turned on), the operator of the game center generates a state in which he or she can select which setting to perform various processes related to the confirmation display state, and then when the confirmation display state occurs, the selected We will perform various processes related to the confirmation display state in the settings. As a result, in the game hall A, touching the handle 182 is set to be valid even though unauthorized monitoring is not monitored in the confirmation display state, and in the game hall B, unauthorized monitoring is disabled in the confirmation display state. It can be set to non-monitoring and to disable contact with the handle 182, depending on the needs of the game center, such as whether or not to check the firing operation using the handle 182 in the confirmation display state. You will be able to match it.

Next, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 209 regarding a case in which fraudulent activity is partially monitored during the setting value confirmation display. FIG. 209 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity when fraudulent activity is partially monitored during confirmation display of set values. Here, the differences from the case where fraudulent activity is not monitored during the setting value confirmation display described above will be explained below.

In this example, for the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the setting value is displayed for confirmation (confirmation display state), but the game ball B is not allowed to be fired and the game ball is placed in the winning slot. A special period is set in which the input of the detection signal is not valid when B wins a prize, and among the fraudulent acts, only fraudulent acts in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are installed are monitored. There is.

Specifically, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, while the gaming area magnetic sensor 2010b is not used to monitor fraudulent activities, the setting operation magnetic sensor 2010a is not monitored. We are monitoring fraudulent activities using the Internet. This is because in the confirmation display state, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and a regular worker who performs the setting value confirmation display is operating the setting key switch 1311a. A person other than the authorized worker who performs the confirmation display may commit a fraudulent act by bringing a magnet close to the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is installed, resulting in unauthorized changes to the setting values. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction.

On the other hand, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the game ball B is entered into the winning slot due to fraudulent activity, the detection signal will not be input, and it will not be possible to obtain fraudulent profits. Since this is a period in which fraud is not allowed, there is no need to monitor fraudulent activity using the gaming area magnetic sensor 2010b.

Note that the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a is used not only in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, but also in the period up to timing t8 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. We monitor all fraudulent activities. In other words, monitoring for fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a is performed in normal times, when the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, or when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Regardless of whether it is in the confirmation display state, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored.

Similarly, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, while the game area vibration sensor is not used to monitor fraudulent activity, the setting operation vibration sensor is used to monitor fraudulent activity. We are monitoring their behavior. This is because in the confirmation display state, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and a regular worker who performs the setting value confirmation display is operating the setting key switch 1311a. A person other than the authorized worker who performs the confirmation display may perform an unauthorized act such as applying vibration to the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is installed, resulting in unauthorized changes to the setting values. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction.

On the other hand, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the game ball B is entered into the winning slot due to fraudulent activity, the detection signal will not be input, and it will not be possible to obtain fraudulent profits. Since this is a period in which fraud is not allowed, there is no need to monitor fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor.

Note that the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit is used not only in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, but also in the period up to timing t8 when closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. We monitor for fraudulent activities. In other words, monitoring for fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor of the setting operation section can be carried out normally, when the body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, or when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored regardless of whether the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is in the confirmation display state.

In addition, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from timing t6 to timing t7), the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a is used. Fraudulent behavior is monitored using setting operation unit vibration sensors, but if these sensors detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the image on the effect display device 1600 displays the magnetic or vibration sensor. Abnormality occurrence effect A is being executed to notify that an abnormal state is caused by the occurrence of vibration. In addition, in abnormality occurrence performance A, the content of the abnormality (whether magnetism or vibration was detected) and the abnormality are determined depending on whether the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the abnormality. The detected location (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided) is notified. When abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, at timing t7 (or timing t8), which is the end of the confirmation display state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, Abnormality occurrence performance A is forcibly terminated. This is because in the confirmation display state, the authorized worker who displays the setting value confirmation is operating the setting key switch 1311a, and when the setting value confirmation display is performed, the authorized worker who displays the confirmation display is operating the setting key switch 1311a. It is not possible to exclude the possibility that the magnet was unintentionally brought close or vibration was applied. Therefore, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act is being carried out using magnets or vibrations, there is little need to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality occurrence performance A that is currently being performed is not forced. I am planning to terminate it.

As described above, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8, fraudulent activity is monitored using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, and fraudulent activity is monitored using the setting operation unit vibration sensor. However, even during normal times outside of this period, the settings operation section magnetic sensor 2010a is used to monitor fraudulent activities, the gaming area section magnetic sensor 2010b is used to monitor fraudulent activities, and the settings operation section vibration sensor is used. We are monitoring fraudulent activities using a vibration sensor in the gaming area. In addition, if the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected during such normal times, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker will indicate that an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration will occur for a predetermined period of time. An abnormality occurrence effect B is being executed to notify that something has happened. Here, in abnormality occurrence performance B, the image of the performance display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used, whereas in the abnormality occurrence performance A, only the image of the performance display device 1600 is used, and the abnormality occurrence The performance is executed in a manner that is less conspicuous than the performance B. This is because in the confirmation display state, the person displaying the confirmation display for the setting value is operating the setting key switch 1311a, and when displaying the confirmation display for the setting value, the authorized worker performing the confirmation display is not intentionally This is because we cannot exclude the possibility that the magnet may have been brought too close or that vibration may have been applied. In addition, in abnormality occurrence performance B, the content of the abnormality (magnetic, vibration ), the location where the abnormality was detected (whether it is the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is installed, or the area in front of the gaming area 5a, the third distribution) Whether the area is in the vicinity of the device 2550), etc. are notified.

Further, as described above, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 during the period from timing t5 to timing t8, the outer frame 4 is A main body frame open notification is executed to notify the user that the main body frame 4 is in an open state. In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the pattern display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the set value is confirmed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. A confirmation display notification (confirmation display related notification) is being executed to notify that the display is in progress. After opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to enter the confirmation display state, but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame opening notification is In addition, in the confirmation display state, if the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a or the setting operation section vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the main body frame is opened. Abnormality occurrence effect A is executed with priority over notification and notification during confirmation display.

[26-4. [About modification of fraud monitoring while changing setting values]
Regarding the monitoring of fraudulent activities while changing settings, we explained above that fraudulent activities are not monitored while changing settings. good. A case in which fraudulent acts are partially monitored during the setting change of such setting values will be described with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a time chart illustrating a monitoring state of fraudulent activity in a case where fraudulent activity is partially monitored during setting change of setting values. Here, differences from the case where fraudulent acts are not monitored during the setting change of the setting values described above will be explained below.

In the above, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on process (see FIGS. 142 and 143), but turns off the setting key switch 1311a at timing t4. Until then, the setting change processing in step S37 is not terminated (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S222 of the setting change processing), and the subsequent steps are not completed during the period from timing t3 to timing t4. The interrupt permission setting in step S52 is prohibited from being performed, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed compared to normal power-on. In other words, the main control side timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 144) is not started until the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so the switch input processing in step S104 and the fraudulent activity detection in step S112 in the main control side timer interrupt processing are performed. The process, such as the firing permission signal setting process in step S113, is not executed and is in a standby state. In contrast, after the power is turned on and before starting the setting change process in step S37, at least the switch input process in step S104, the fraud detection process in step S112, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 are performed. The configuration may be such that the processing (same processing) is performed in advance. With such a configuration, in this example, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value is being changed (change permission state), but the firing of game ball B is not permitted. In addition, we set a special period in which the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B enters the winning slot, and also prevents fraudulent activity from occurring in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are installed. We only monitor fraudulent activity.

Note that before starting the setting change process in step S37, a process corresponding to the fraudulent activity detection process in step S112 (same process) is performed in advance, and if any fraudulent activity is detected, the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch is detected. 1311a, when only the area in which the magnetic sensor 1311a is provided is monitored for fraudulent activity, in that process, as in the fraudulent activity detection process in step S112, when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 or the vibration sensor is input, the magnet It is determined that a fraudulent act is being carried out due to vibration or vibration, and the values of the magnetic goto counter and the vibration goto counter are incremented by 1. However, in the main control power-on process, after the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 and the setting change process in step S37 is completed (when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off in step S222 of the setting change process) After making the determination), in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. Therefore, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act is being carried out using a magnet or vibration, and the values of the magnet goto counter and vibration goto counter are added (incremented). By clearing the RAM at the end of the change permission state, the values of the magnet goto counter and vibration goto counter are set (initialized) to 0 (zero) as an initial value. In this way, when the change permission state ends, the values of the magnet goto counter and the vibration goto counter are initialized, but in the change permission state, the person who changes the setting value can press the setting key switch 1311a or the RWM clear button 633z. (The RWM clear button 633z is in a state where it operates as a setting switching button), and when changing the setting value, the person making the setting change may have unintentionally brought a magnet close to it. It is not possible to exclude the possibility that the device may have been relaxed or subjected to vibrations. Therefore, even if it is determined that fraudulent activity is being carried out using magnets or vibrations, there is little need to judge that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the values of the magnet goto counter and vibration goto counter are set to the initial values. We are planning to make it a reality.

Specifically, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, while the gaming area magnetic sensor 2010b is not used to monitor fraudulent activities, the setting operation magnetic sensor 2010a is not monitored. We are monitoring fraudulent activities using the Internet. This is because in the change permission state, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and an authorized worker who changes the setting values can press the setting key switch 1311a or the RWM clear button 633z (RWM clear button 633z is in a state where it operates as a setting change button), but anyone other than the authorized worker who changes the setting values is allowed to access the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is installed. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunctions such as unauthorized changes to setting values caused by fraudulent actions such as bringing the magnet closer to the magnet.

On the other hand, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the game ball B is entered into the winning slot due to fraudulent activity, the detection signal will not be input and it will not be possible to gain illegal profits. Since this is a period in which fraud is not allowed, there is no need to monitor fraudulent activity using the gaming area magnetic sensor 2010b.

Note that the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a is used not only in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, but also in the period up to timing t5 when closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. We monitor all fraudulent activities. In other words, monitoring for fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a is performed in normal times, when the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, or when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Regardless of whether the change is permitted or not, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored.

Similarly, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the gaming area vibration sensor is not used to monitor fraudulent activity, while the setting operation vibration sensor is used to monitor fraudulent activity. We are monitoring their behavior. This is because in the change permission state, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and an authorized worker who changes the setting values can press the setting key switch 1311a or the RWM clear button 633z (RWM clear button 633z is in a state where it operates as a setting change button), but anyone other than the authorized worker who changes the setting values is allowed to access the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is installed. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunctions such as unauthorized changes to set values caused by fraudulent actions such as applying vibration to the device.

On the other hand, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if game ball B is entered into the winning slot due to fraudulent activity, no detection signal is input, and it is possible to obtain illegal profits. Since this is a period in which fraud is not allowed, there is no need to monitor fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor.

Note that the setting operation part vibration sensor is used not only in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, but also in the period up to timing t5, when the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. We monitor for fraudulent activities. In other words, monitoring for fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor of the setting operation section can be carried out normally, when the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, or when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored regardless of whether the change is permitted or not.

In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting value is set by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. A setting change effect is running to notify you that the settings are being changed. Note that the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4 (this may be a period that includes the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5) includes the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, when the game ball B wins a prize in a winning hole such as the normal winning hole 2003 or the big winning hole 2005, even if the main control MPU inputs the detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, the game ball B cannot be detected. However, if such a detection signal is input, the firing of game ball B is not permitted due to the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Even though it is a period in which no game ball B is entered into the winning slot, a warning performance C is executed to notify that the game ball B is illegally entered into the winning slot. This warning effect C is executed with priority over the setting change notification and the body frame opening notification. That is, when executing the warning effect C, the warning effect C is executed with the highest priority without performing setting change notification or body frame opening notification.

Furthermore, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from timing t3 to timing t4), the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a is used to Fraudulent behavior is monitored using setting operation unit vibration sensors, but if these sensors detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the image on the effect display device 1600 displays the magnetic or vibration sensor. An abnormality occurrence effect A is being executed to notify that an abnormal state is caused by the occurrence of vibrations. In addition, in abnormality occurrence performance A, the content of the abnormality (whether magnetism or vibration was detected) and the abnormality are determined depending on whether the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the abnormality. The detected location (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided) is notified. Then, when abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, at timing t4 (or timing t5), which is the end of the change permission state when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, Abnormality occurrence performance A is forcibly terminated. This is because, in the change permission state, an authorized worker who changes the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button). Therefore, when changing the settings, it is impossible to exclude the possibility that the authorized worker who is changing the settings unintentionally brought the magnet close to the magnet or caused vibration. Therefore, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act is being carried out using magnets or vibrations, there is little need to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality occurrence performance A that is currently being performed is not forced. I am planning to terminate it.

As described above, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5, fraudulent activity is monitored using the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a, and fraudulent activity is monitored using the setting operation section vibration sensor. However, even during normal times outside of this period, the settings operation section magnetic sensor 2010a is used to monitor fraudulent activities, the gaming area section magnetic sensor 2010b is used to monitor fraudulent activities, and the settings operation section vibration sensor is used. We are monitoring fraudulent activities using a vibration sensor in the gaming area. In addition, if the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected during such normal times, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker will indicate that an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration will occur for a predetermined period of time. An abnormality occurrence effect B is being executed to notify that something has happened. Here, in abnormality occurrence performance B, the image of the performance display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used, whereas in the abnormality occurrence performance A, only the image of the performance display device 1600 is used, and the abnormality occurrence The performance is executed in a manner that is less conspicuous than the performance B. This is because, in the change permission state, an authorized worker who changes the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button). This is because, when changing the settings, it cannot be ruled out that the authorized worker who is changing the settings may have unintentionally brought the magnet close to the magnet or caused vibrations. In addition, in abnormality occurrence performance B, the content of the abnormality (magnetic, vibration ), the location where the abnormality was detected (whether it is the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is installed, or the area in front of the gaming area 5a, the third distribution) Whether the area is in the vicinity of the device 2550), etc. are notified.

In addition, as described above, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 during the period from timing t3 to timing t5 after the power is turned on, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker , executes a main body frame open notification to notify that the main body frame 4 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 2. In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4 after the power is turned on, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the image, lamp, and output from the speaker of the effect display device 1600 are used to A settings change notification (setting change related notification) is being executed to notify that settings are being changed. After opening the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the power is turned on to shift to the change permission state, but in the change permission state, the main body frame Setting change notification is executed with priority over release notification, and furthermore, if the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a or setting operation section vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the change permission state, the main body Abnormality occurrence effect A is executed with priority over frame opening notification and setting change notification.

[27. [Variation example of changing settings such as winning probability]
In the above example, the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state is controlled based on the result of the special lottery, and when a game ball is accepted into the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the small winning gaming state. 21 shows a method for changing the settings such as the winning probability for controlling the transition to the jackpot game state, but as shown in FIG. Settings such as winning probability may be changed for not controlling the transition to the jackpot game state even if a game ball is received in the first V winning hole 2007 or the second V winning hole 2008 during the small winning game state. Hereinafter, a modification example of changing settings such as winning probability in a pachinko machine in which the first V winning hole 2007 and the second V winning hole 2008 are not provided will be described as a second embodiment. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment has, instead of the accessory prize opening 2006 of the pachinko machine 1 of the above-described example (the first V prize opening 2007 and the second V prize opening 2008 are arranged inside), A second large winning hole 2006 (inside of which the first V winning hole 2007 and the second V winning hole 2008 are not arranged) is provided, and the other configurations are the same.

[27-1. Game content of second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot") that is advantageous to the player. , ``Small win'', ``Time saving (time saving) win'', and ``Probability change (probability change) win'') A special lottery result is drawn. Then, the selected special lottery result is suggested (derived) to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variable time). In this embodiment, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the second special lottery result corresponding to the acceptance into the second starting port 2004 is preferentially suggested (derived). do. Note that the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 without giving priority to (deriving) the special lottery result corresponding to the acceptance into the second starting port 2004 (priority variation). The special lottery results may be suggested (derived) in the same order (sequential variation), or the first special lottery results may be suggested (sequentially varied) in accordance with the acceptance into the first starting port 2002 and in response to the acceptance into the second starting port 2004. The second special lottery result may be suggested (derived) in parallel at the same time (simultaneous variation).

In addition, the special lottery results that are drawn when game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "loss", "small hit", "2R sure-change jackpot", and "15R sure-change jackpot". ”, “15R normal jackpot”, etc. In this embodiment, the second special lottery result includes a "small win", while the first special lottery result does not include a "small win". In addition, while both the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result include a "small win", the second special lottery result is a lottery where the "small win" is more likely to be won than the first special lottery result. The probability may be set high.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is a "small hit", the When a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.88 s) has elapsed after the two major prize openings 2006 are in an open state that can accept the game ball B, a "small winning" game is started in which the game ball B is closed and cannot be accepted. executed. The second big prize opening 2006 is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, so if a "small win" is drawn, you can hit "right" and enter the first guide. A game ball B is hit into the passage 2521. In addition, in the small winning game of the second embodiment, although the period during which the second big prize opening 2006 is open is shorter than that in the jackpot game, it is possible to continue hitting the game ball so that it flows down the first guide passage 2521. For example, at least one game ball B can enter the second big prize opening 2006 in one small winning game. In addition, during the small winning game, the gaming state before the start of the small winning gaming state (such as the probability change state and time saving state described below) is maintained, and after the small winning game, the gaming state before the starting of the small winning gaming state continues. .

The first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are "15R guaranteed strange jackpot" or "15R regular jackpot" In this case, after the first grand prize opening 2005 becomes open to accept the game balls B, a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined limit number ( For example, if any of the conditions for accepting 10 game balls B is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that brings the game balls B into a closed state that cannot be accepted is performed 15 times. A repeated "jackpot" game is executed. If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are "15R normal jackpot", after the jackpot game ends, the lottery is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The variation time of the special symbol to suggest the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result to the player is determined by a predetermined number of variations (for example, a suggestion that is the sum of the first special lottery suggestion and the second special lottery suggestion). Until the number of times (100 times) is reached, the time is shortened from normal and the time until the next "win" is drawn is shortened to a "time saving state". In addition, if the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are "15R guaranteed strange jackpot", after the "jackpot" game ends, go to the first starting port 2002 and second starting port 2004 until the next "jackpot". In addition to shortening the variation time of the special symbols to suggest to the player the first special lottery result and second special lottery result that were drawn by accepting the game ball B of Controlling the transition to a "probability variable state (high probability state)" that increases the probability that the special lottery result will be a "win".

When the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 are "2R guaranteed strange jackpot", the second big winning hole 2006 , after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.2 s) has passed after the game ball B is in the open state where it can be accepted, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is considered as one round) that brings the game ball B into the closed state where it cannot be accepted. A "jackpot" game is executed in which the "jackpot" is repeated twice. In addition, after the end of the "jackpot" game, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery are drawn by accepting game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 until the next "jackpot" is reached. In addition to making the fluctuation time of the special symbols shorter than usual to indicate the result to the player, a "probability variable state (high probability state)" that increases the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result will be a "win" )” to control the transition.

The second grand prize opening 2006 and the first grand prize opening 2005 are mainly on the flow path of the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500, so the game ball B is hit toward the right side of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to have the player perform the input operation. When the second big prize opening 2006 and the first big prize opening 2005 are open, when the game ball B is received in the second big winning opening 2006 or the first big winning opening 2005, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 A predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls B are put out from the payout device 580 onto the upper tray 201. Therefore, when the second grand prize opening 2006 and the first grand prize opening 2005 are capable of accepting game balls B, by making the second grand prize opening 2006 and the first grand prize opening 2005 accept the game balls B, many game balls B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

Note that in the guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it is easier to perform the driving operation on the first guide passage 2521 side than on the second guide passage 2522 side, but on the other hand, the second guide passage 2522 Since the possibility of being accepted into the first big prize opening 2005 is lower than that from the side, it is possible to let the player choose which path to perform the driving operation, and the variety of games makes it difficult for the player to get bored. This can prevent a decline in interest. In addition, only the game balls hit into the first guide path 2521 side can be accepted into the second big prize opening 2006.

In this embodiment, the first starting hole 2002 and second starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole When the game ball B is received in the starting slot 2004, it is not possible to start suggesting the special lottery result, so the start of suggesting the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. Ru. The maximum number of special lottery results to be held is 4 for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if game ball B was accepted in 2004, the special lottery result was not held and was discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

By the way, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 are used to suggest the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 by flashing a plurality of LEDs by repeatedly turning them on and off for a predetermined period of time, and then indicating the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs. Note that in the following, the flashing of the LED for a predetermined period of time to suggest the first special lottery result to the player will be referred to as "fluctuation display of the first special symbol", and the blinking of the LED for a predetermined time to indicate the second special lottery result to the player will be referred to as "fluctuation display of the first special symbol". The blinking of the LED for a predetermined period of time is sometimes referred to as the "fluctuating display of the second special symbol," and the lighting combination pattern of the LEDs that indicates the first special lottery result to the player is the "stop symbol of the first special symbol." The LED lighting combination pattern that indicates the second special lottery result to the player may be referred to as the "stop symbol of the second special symbol."

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as a effect image. The performance image that suggests the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is created by displaying three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols side by side in the left and right direction, and by varying each symbol row. are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the three pattern rows are stopped and displayed so that the symbols in the three stop-displayed pattern rows form a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "lose", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is completed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small win" game, a "big win" game, etc.) occurs depending on the special lottery result.

It should be noted that the time for suggesting the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time for suggesting the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 (the pattern row changes and the final image is changed) (time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying an effect image for suggesting a special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the special lottery result drawn. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect in which the rotation operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the section 301 are operated. In a player participation type performance, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotary operation unit 302, assist rotation operation, or inhibit rotation operation, and the operation button lift drive motor 342 367, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised to make it stand out, and the player can enjoy the participatory performance by operating the performance operation section 301.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back By appropriately using the production unit 3200, etc., it is possible to perform light emission production, display production, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player with various productions, thereby suppressing the player's interest in the game from decreasing. can do.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 allows the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation that should be performed in a player participation type performance in which the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 is operated. The player will be notified accordingly. Specifically, for example, when a pressing operation of the central pressing operation section 303a is requested, when the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation section 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Further, when the game ball B is received in the normal prize opening 2003, a lottery is performed on the main control board 1310 to determine whether or not the second start opening door 2411 is to be opened in a predetermined pattern. Then, the normal lottery results are indicated to the player on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 s to 6000 s, also referred to as normal variable time). In this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol for indicating to the player the normal lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning hole 2003 is set to "6000 seconds" in the normal state, while in the probability variable state and "0.1 s" in the time saving state.

In addition, the probability of winning a normal drawing (probability that the normal lottery result will be a "normal winning") is "10 out of 11", and if the game ball B is accepted into the normal winning slot 2003, it will be "normal" in most cases. "hit" and the second starting port door 2411 becomes open. In addition, when the normal lottery result is a "normal win", the period during which the second starting door 2411 is kept open is set to "0.1 s" in the normal state, and "2 s" in the probability variable state and time saving state. .0s”. Therefore, in the normal state, the second starting port door 2411 is only open at intervals of 6000 seconds at the shortest, and since the period in which it is open is extremely short, it is very difficult to receive game balls into the second starting port 2004. It is considered difficult. This makes it possible to suppress fraudulent acts aimed at receiving game balls into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state. On the other hand, in the variable probability state, the second starting port door 2411 is not only frequently opened but also remains open for a long period of time, making it easy to receive game balls into the second starting port 2004. It should be noted that the probability of hitting a regular figure may be different between the normal state (low probability non-time saving state), the time saving state (low probability time saving state), or the variable probability state (high probability time saving state). For example, in the normal state The probability of hitting a normal figure is set to ``1/11'', and the probability of hitting a normal figure is set to ``10/11'' during a time saving state or a variable probability state, and the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port 2004 is made extremely difficult in a normal state. On the other hand, by making it easier to receive game balls into the second starting port 2004 during a time saving state or a variable probability state, it is possible to frequently receive game balls into the second starting port 2004 during a time saving state or a variable probability state. It may also be possible to suppress fraudulent acts aimed at receiving game balls into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state while causing the above to occur. In addition, while the probability of winning a regular figure is set to zero (0/11) in the normal state (low probability non-time saving state), the probability of winning a common figure is set to "10/11" in the time saving state or the variable probability state. ” or “11/11” to further suppress fraudulent acts aimed at receiving game balls into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

In this way, in the normal state, the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port 2004 hardly occurs, and the suggestion of the first special lottery result based mainly on the acceptance of game balls into the first starting port 2002 (the first special symbol fluctuation display) is performed. On the other hand, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, since the driving operation of the game ball B is performed aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500, the reception of the game ball into the second starting port 2004 occurs frequently, and mainly the second starting A second special lottery result is suggested (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) based on acceptance of the game ball into the mouth 2004.

In addition, if game ball B is accepted into the normal winning slot 2003 between the start of the normal lottery and the normal drawing result is suggested by receiving the gaming ball B into the normal winning slot 2003, the normal lottery result will be suggested. Since it is not possible to start the suggestion of the result of the normal lottery, the suggestion of the result of the normal lottery is suspended until the suggestion of the result of the normal lottery drawn earlier is completed. The maximum number of normal lottery results to be held is 4 for the normal winning hole 2003, and for more than that, even if game ball B is accepted in the normal winning hole 2003, the normal lottery results will not be held. Instead, I try to discard it. In addition, instead of this example, the game ball B is accepted into the normal winning slot 2003 between the start of the normal lottery and the time when this normal lottery result is suggested due to the acceptance of the gaming ball B into the normal winning slot 2003. In some cases, the normal lottery results may be discarded without being suspended. As a result, it is further possible to prevent the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the normal winning hole 2003 and the second starting hole 2004 during the normal state, and the second special lottery is held during the normal state to win the small hit. This can be prevented, and fraudulent acts aimed at receiving game balls into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state can be further suppressed.

In addition, the suggestion of the normal lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning hole 2003 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 in the same way as the special lottery result. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the normal lottery results. The normal lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 by flashing an LED different from the LED indicating the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off for a predetermined period of time, and then depending on the combination of lit LEDs, the normal lottery result is indicated. Suggest results.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the normal state, the game ball B is hit aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the first special lottery is performed based on the reception of the game ball into the first starting port 2002. The result is suggested (fluctuating display of the first special symbol). In addition, when the first special lottery result becomes "15R normal jackpot" in the normal state, after the end of the jackpot game, the control shifts to the time saving state, and the game ball B is hit aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500. A second special lottery result is suggested (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004. If a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 suggestions, which is the sum of the first special lottery suggestion and the second special lottery suggestion) is reached without a jackpot occurring in the time saving state, the time saving state is ended and the state returns to the normal state. Then, the game ball B is hit again aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the first special lottery result is suggested based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002 (the first special symbol fluctuation display) is performed.

In addition, when the first special lottery result becomes "15R probability variable jackpot" or "2R probability variable jackpot" during the normal state or time saving mode, the transition to the probability variable state (high probability state) is controlled after the end of the jackpot game, and the center accessory A game ball B is hit aiming at the right side of 2500, and a second special lottery result is suggested (fluctuating display of a second special symbol) based on the reception of the game ball into the second starting port 2004. The variable probability state continues to be executed until the next jackpot occurs, and when the second special lottery result becomes "15R normal jackpot" during the variable probability state, the control shifts to the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, and a jackpot occurs in the time saving state. When a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 suggestions, which is the sum of the first special lottery suggestion and the second special lottery suggestion) is reached without doing so, the time saving state is ended and the transition to the normal state is controlled.

Further, when the second special lottery result becomes "15R probability variable jackpot" or "2R probability variable jackpot" during the probability variable state, the control is performed to shift to the probability variable state (high probability state) again after the end of the jackpot game. In this way, the variable probability state continues until the state becomes "15R normal jackpot", and when the state becomes "15R normal jackpot", the control is made to shift to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, if only the first special lottery result is pending without the second special lottery result being held, or if the game ball is not sent to the first starting port 2002 without the second special lottery result being pending. If accepted, the first special lottery result is suggested (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) even during the time saving state or the variable probability state. Then, when the first special lottery result becomes "15R normal jackpot" during the time saving state or the probability variable state, the transition to the time saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game, and the first special lottery result becomes "15R normal jackpot" during the time saving state or the probability variable state. When the game becomes a "probable variable jackpot" or a "2R probable variable jackpot," the game is controlled to shift to a variable probability state after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of a "small hit" as the second special lottery result (small hit probability) is set to be very high compared to the jackpot probability (for example, the probability of a jackpot in a variable probability state is 10%). (approximately twice as much). In addition, during the time saving state or the variable probability state, game balls are frequently accepted into the second starting opening 2004 and the second special lottery is held, so small wins frequently occur and the second big winning opening is entered. 2006 remains open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.88 seconds).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, small hits occur frequently in the second special lottery when the time is short or the probability is variable, and even if the jackpot does not occur, the number of prize balls that exceed the shot amount is gradually increased. This is possible, and the longer the time saving state or variable probability state lasts, the more prize balls can be won. Therefore, in the time saving state or the variable probability state, not only the number of game balls does not decrease, but also the number of balls held by the player can be increased by the prize balls obtained by the small hits that occur. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game in the normal state where the consumption of game balls is large, and the game in the normal state where the consumption of game balls is small and the occurrence of a small hit increases the number of balls held by the player even if the player does not win the jackpot. The game can be controlled to completely different states depending on whether the game is executed in a time-saving state or in a variable-probability state.

[27-2. Changing the settings of the winning probability, etc. of the second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, the probabilities of jackpots, small wins, etc. that are changed according to set values will be explained.

In the second embodiment, as in the above-described example, a table is selected according to the set value as a table (hit determination table, jackpot symbol determination table, small win symbol determination table, etc.) used in the special lottery etc. Note that the tables used in the special lottery etc. are provided for each set value, and each table is set so that at least some of the values are different.

As shown in FIG. 212(A), in this embodiment, "big hit probability" and "small win probability" are set corresponding to each of setting values 1 to 6.

In addition, the jackpot probability (ratio of the jackpot judgment value that indicates winning the jackpot in the hit judgment table), which is common to the first special lottery and the second special lottery, is set to a different value for each set value, and usually The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and second special lottery in the state and time saving state (low probability state) is "1/319" with setting value 1, "1/309" with setting value 2, and "1/309" with setting value 3. Setting value 4 is "1/299", setting value 4 is "1/289", setting value 5 is "1/279", and setting value 6 is "1/269". In addition, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and second special lottery in variable probability state (high probability state) is "1/30" with setting value 1, "1/40" with setting value 2, and "1/40" with setting value 3. Setting value 4 is "1/50", setting value 4 is "1/60", setting value 5 is "1/70", and setting value 6 is "1/80".

In this way, in the normal state and time saving state (low probability state), the higher the setting value, the higher the jackpot probability, but in the variable probability state, the setting value becomes higher, contrary to the normal state and time saving state. The probability of hitting the jackpot becomes lower. That is, in the normal state and the time saving state, the jackpot probability of setting value 6 is the highest, while in the variable probability state, the jackpot probability of setting value 1 is the lowest. In addition, the jackpot probability is not limited to being proportional or inversely proportional to the set value, and in some cases, the jackpot probability set to a set value lower than the set value is higher than the jackpot probability set to an arbitrary set value. It may be set to be higher.

As shown in FIG. 212(A), the small win probability (ratio of the small win judgment value indicating that the small win was won in the hit judgment table) in the first special lottery is "0" for all setting values. In the normal state and short-time state (there is no possibility of winning a small hit), it is difficult to obtain a prize ball by winning a small hit. The percentage of the small hit judgment value that indicates that you have won a prize) is the same "1/3" for all setting values, which is a very high probability compared to the jackpot probability, so in the variable probability state or short time state Hits occur frequently, making it easy to obtain prize balls.

In a variable probability state, the jackpot probability is lowest at a setting value of 6, so the occurrence of a jackpot is less likely to occur (delay) than with a low setting value, and as a result, the variable probability state will continue for a long time, so the setting value is high. Indeed, the number of small wins that occur before a jackpot increases. That is, the higher the setting value, the more prize balls can be won by small hits, and the next jackpot is also guaranteed, and the higher the setting value, the higher the degree of advantage. In other words, in a variable probability state, the next jackpot is guaranteed regardless of the setting value, but the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be won other than a jackpot is different for each setting value, and the higher the setting value is, the more likely it is to hit the jackpot. The expected value of the number of prize balls that can be won other than that is increasing.

In addition, the duration of the variable probability state is not limited to the next jackpot, but is the same as the normal state and the time-saving state, a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 suggestions, which is the sum of the suggestions of the first special lottery and the suggestions of the second special lottery). By configuring the game to end when the game reaches , the higher the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability is, and the higher the set value is, the more likely the jackpot will occur, thereby increasing the advantage. It is also good (so-called number-of-time cut-off). In this case, although the next jackpot is not guaranteed, the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained other than a jackpot is different for each setting value, and the higher the setting value, the lower the number of prize balls that can be obtained other than a jackpot. Although the expected value is increased, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player expects to win a jackpot before the end condition of the variable probability state is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the game's interest. In order to achieve this kind of gameplay, the probability of winning the jackpot in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and time-saving state is set so that there is no difference in setting (uniform at 1/319), Only the jackpot probabilities in the first special lottery and the second special lottery may be set differently as described above.

In addition, in realizing the gameplay of the second embodiment, in the case of a set value lower than a specific set value, the jackpot probability in the probability variable state is made higher than the small win probability in the second special lottery, In the case of a set value higher than a specific set value, the jackpot probability in the variable probability state may be made lower than the small win probability in the second special lottery. Specifically, for example, setting value 1 sets the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and second special lottery in the normal state and time saving state (low probability state) to "1/250" and setting value 2 to "240". Setting value 3 is "1/230", setting value 4 is "1/180", setting value 5 is "1/170", setting value 6 is "1/160", The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and second special lottery in variable probability state (high probability state) is "1/25" with setting value 1, "1/24" with setting value 2, and "1/24" with setting value 3. Setting value 4 is "1/23rd", setting value 4 is "1/18th", setting value 5 is "1/17th", setting value 6 is "1/16th", while the second special lottery For example, the winning probability (ratio of the small winning determination value indicating that the small winning has been won in the winning determination table) may be set to "1/20" which is common to all set values.

In such a configuration, with setting values 1 to 3, the probability of a small hit in the second special lottery is lower than the probability of a jackpot in a variable probability state, so the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in a variable probability state is While the number is relatively small, at setting values 4 to 6, the probability of a small win in the second special lottery is higher than the probability of a jackpot in a variable probability state, so the prize that can be obtained by a small win in a variable probability state The number of pitches will be relatively large. In particular, when the setting value is set to 4 or more, the jackpot probability becomes lower than the small hit probability in the variable probability state, making it difficult for the jackpot to occur, and the feeling of expectation that the variable probability state continues for a long time, and the possibility of winning many prizes due to small hits. It is possible to create a game experience that gives a sense of expectation that the ball can be acquired. Further, history information of the probability of a jackpot occurring in a variable probability state and the probability of a small win occurring in a variable probability state after the power is turned on is stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM, etc.) of the peripheral control unit 1511. By displaying various winning probability information based on history information on the effect display device 1600, it is possible to make the player aware that the probability of a small hit is higher than the probability of a jackpot in a variable probability state, and the game By giving the player a feeling of expectation that ``the set value may be 4 or more'', it is possible to provide new enjoyment and interest not previously available while continuing the game in a variable probability state. In addition, by allowing players to experience that the variable probability state continues for a long time and that it is possible to win many prize balls by hitting a small hit in the variable probability state, the player will be able to think, ``Maybe the set value is 4 or more.'' It can also be recognized, and in this respect, it can add new fun and interest that was not previously available. As described above, beyond a certain set value (set value 4 in this embodiment), the game becomes more interesting by transforming the game into a game where many prize balls can be won through small hits. further improvement can be achieved.

In addition, as another embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the first special lottery and the second special lottery increases as the set value becomes higher in the variable probability state, and as the set value increases, the probability of winning the jackpot in the second special lottery increases as the set value increases. The probability of a small hit may be increased. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212(B), the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and time-saving state (low probability state) is as follows: "1/319", setting value 2 is "1/309", setting value 3 is "1/299", setting value 4 is "1/289", setting value 5 is "1/279" , the setting value is 6, which is "1/269". In addition, the small hit probability in the variable probability state (high probability state) is "1 in 31.9" with setting value 1, "1 in 30.9" with setting value 2, and "29.9 minutes" with setting value 3. Setting value 4 is "1/28.9", setting value 5 is "1/27.9", and setting value 6 is "1/26.9". In this way, in the variable probability state, the jackpot probability for all set values is increased 10 times as compared to the normal state and the time saving state.

In addition, the small winning probability in the second special lottery is "1/7" with setting value 1, "1/6" with setting value 2, "1/5" with setting value 3, and "1/5" with setting value 4. 1/4'', setting value 5 is ``1/3'', and setting value 6 is ``1/2''. Therefore, with a setting value of 1, one small win will occur every seven times that the second special lottery is held, whereas with a setting value of 6, one small win will occur every two times that the second special lottery is held. The frequency of occurrence of small wins increases. In other words, with setting value 6, small hits occur more frequently than with setting value 1, making it easier to obtain prize balls due to small hits, and the higher the setting value is, the more prizes can be obtained in variable probability conditions and time saving conditions. Expectations for the number of pitches are increasing.

In addition to changing the settings of the jackpot probability and small hit probability mentioned above, or without changing the settings of the jackpot probability and small hit probability, etc., the degree of advantage can be increased by changing the determination ratio of the jackpot type for each setting value. It may be changed. As described above, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the second special lottery is mainly executed and a small win can occur, while in the normal state, the first special lottery is mainly executed and a small win cannot occur. Therefore, the degree of advantage changes depending on the duration of the variable probability state or time saving state.

In addition, even in the variable probability state, the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability of a jackpot is, as in the normal state and the time saving state. Alternatively, if the special lottery result is a "miss" during the variable probability state, a so-called fall lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to end the variable probability state. Further, in this case, the fall probability (probability of ending the variable probability state) may be the same for each set value without being different, or the fall probability may be set to be different for each set value.

For example, as shown in FIG. 212(C), the probability of falling in the high probability state may be set to "1/100", which is common to all setting values, and in this case, the falling lottery result may end the variable probability state. Although the probability of jackpot does not differ depending on the setting value, as shown in FIG. 212(B), the higher the setting value is, the higher the jackpot probability is. The degree of advantage is changed by changing the degree of advantage, and the degree of advantage increases as the set value is higher.

Furthermore, the fall probability in the high probability state may be changed for each set value. For example, as shown in FIG. 212(D), the probability of falling is "1/80" for setting values 1 and 2, "1/90" for setting values 3 and 4, and "1/90" for setting values 5 and 4. A value of 6 may be used as "1/100".

In this case, with the setting value 1, the probability of hitting the jackpot is "1 in 31.9," while the probability of falling is set to "1 in 80," making the probability of hitting the jackpot approximately 2.5 times higher than the probability of falling. On the other hand, with the setting value 6, the jackpot probability is "1/26.9", while the fall probability is "1/100", so the jackpot probability is about 3.7 of the fall probability. It is doubled. In other words, the higher the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability is, and the higher the set value is, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot is, thereby increasing the probability of winning the jackpot before the falling lottery result that ends the variable state is obtained, so that the higher the set value, the higher the advantage. There is.

In addition, if a falling lottery result that ends the definite variable state is obtained during the definite variable state, the jackpot probability will be returned from the probability of the definite variable state (high probability) to the probability of the normal state (low probability), and the second special lottery will be held. The control to shorten the variation time of special symbols to indicate the result to the player may be continued, and in this case, the number of variations after the end of the jackpot game is set to a predetermined number (for example, the first special symbol). The control may be terminated and the control may be shifted to the normal state based on the fact that the number of suggestions (100 times, which is the sum of the suggestions of the lottery and the suggestions of the second special lottery) has been reached. That is, if a fall lottery result that ends the variable probability state is obtained during the variable probability state, the variable probability state may be terminated and the transition to the time saving state may be controlled. In addition, when a falling lottery result that ends a certain variable state is obtained, the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game has already been a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times, which is the sum of the suggestions of the first special lottery and the suggestions of the second special lottery). ), the transition to the normal state may be controlled without the transition to the time saving state after the variable probability state is ended.

In addition, if a falling lottery result that ends the definite variable state is obtained during the definite variable state, the jackpot probability will be returned from the probability of the definite variable state (high probability) to the probability of the normal state (low probability), and the second special lottery result will be changed. The variation time of the special symbol for suggesting to the player may be returned to the normal variation time. That is, if a fall lottery result that ends the variable probability state is obtained during the variable probability state, the variable probability state may be terminated and the transition to the normal state may be controlled. In this case, the fall lottery may be performed even during the time saving state, and if a fall lottery result that ends the time saving state is obtained during the time saving state, the time saving state is ended and the transition is made to the normal state. It may also be controlled.

In the example shown in FIG. 212(E), after the transition to the variable probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game, the occurrence ratio of the jackpot type that causes the variable probability state to end when the special lottery result becomes "jackpot" is calculated. By changing it, the degree of advantage can be changed. Specifically, if the first special lottery result that is mainly executed in the normal state (low probability non-time saving state) is a "jackpot", the occurrence ratio of the jackpot type will be the same for all setting values, "15R Probable Variable Jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, and "2R Probable Variable Jacket" where the number of prize balls acquired is smaller than "15R Probable Variable Jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the jackpot game is finished. The occurrence ratio of "jackpot" is "40/100", and after the end of the jackpot game, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 suggestions, which is the sum of the suggestions of the first special lottery and the suggestions of the second special lottery) The occurrence rate of the "15R normal jackpot" which is controlled to shift to the time saving state until reaching the time limit is "20/100".

On the other hand, when the second special lottery result, which is mainly executed in variable probability state and time saving state, is a "jackpot", the occurrence ratio of jackpot type is different for each setting value, and for setting value 1, The occurrence rate of "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is "45/100", and the number of prize balls obtained even though it is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game. The occurrence ratio of "2R definite strange jackpot" which is smaller than "15R definite strange jackpot" is "15/100", and after the end of the jackpot game, the time saving state is controlled until a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is reached. The occurrence ratio of "15R normal jackpot" is "40/100".

With setting value 2, the occurrence ratio of "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is "46/100", and the prize of a "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is set to 46/100. The occurrence rate of a "2R fixed variable jackpot" in which the number of balls acquired is smaller than the "15R fixed variable jackpot" is ``19/100'', and after the end of the jackpot game, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence rate of the "15R normal jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a time-saving state until reaching the number of suggestions (100 times, which is the sum of the suggestions of the second special lottery) is "35/100."

With setting value 3, the occurrence ratio of "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is "47/100", and the prize of a "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is set to 47/100. The occurrence rate of a "2R fixed variable jackpot" where the number of balls acquired is smaller than the "15R fixed variable jackpot" is ``23/100'', and after the end of the jackpot game, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence rate of the "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to shift to the time-saving state until the number of suggestions (100 times (combined with the suggestions of the second special lottery)) is reached, is "30/100."

With setting value 4, the occurrence ratio of "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is "48/100", and the occurrence rate of the "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is set to 48/100. The occurrence rate of a "2R fixed variable jackpot" in which the number of balls acquired is smaller than the "15R fixed variable jackpot" is ``27/100'', and after the end of the jackpot game, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence rate of the "15R normal jackpot" which is controlled to shift to the time-saving state until the number of suggestions (100 times (combined with the suggestions of the second special lottery)) is reached is "25/100".

With the setting value 5, the occurrence ratio of "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is "49/100", and the occurrence rate of the "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is determined to be 49/100. The occurrence rate of a "2R fixed variable jackpot" in which the number of balls acquired is smaller than the "15R fixed variable jackpot" is ``31/100'', and after the end of the jackpot game, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence rate of the "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to shift to the time-saving state until the number of suggestions (100 times (combined with the suggestions of the second special lottery)) is reached, is "20/100."

With the setting value 6, the occurrence ratio of "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is "50/100", and the prize of a "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is set to 50/100. The occurrence rate of a "2R fixed variable jackpot" in which the number of balls won is smaller than the "15R fixed variable jackpot" is ``35/100'', and after the end of the jackpot game, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence rate of the "15R normal jackpot" which is controlled to shift to the time-saving state until the number of suggestions (100 times, which is the sum of the suggestions of the second special lottery) is reached is "15/100".

In this way, if the second special lottery result, which is executed mainly in the variable probability state and the time saving state, is a "jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and the second The occurrence rate of the "15R normal jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a time-saving state until it reaches 100 suggestions (total of suggestions of special lottery) is changed for each setting value, and the higher the setting value is, the more the "15R normal jackpot" occurs. By reducing the ratio, it becomes difficult to end the variable probability state. As a result, the higher the set value is, the more difficult it is for the variable probability state to end once the transition to the variable probability state is controlled, making it possible to increase the number of jackpots, and to increase the number of prize balls based on small hits that occur during the variable probability state. acquisition becomes possible. In other words, the higher the set value is, the higher the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in a variable probability state.

In addition, the higher the setting value, the lower the occurrence rate of "15R regular jackpot", while increasing the occurrence rate of "2R probability variable jackpot" than "15R probability variable jackpot" and suppressing the number of prize balls won. It is possible to prevent an excessive advantage from being given to a person.

[27-3. Setting value suggestion performance of second embodiment]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is configured such that the expected value of the prize balls that can be won in the variable probability state and the expected value of the number of small wins that can be won differ depending on the set value. Specifically, in FIG. 212(A), the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with the setting value 1 is set to "1/30", and the small hit probability is set to "1/3", so after the jackpot game ends, The expected number of small wins that can be won from when the probability variable state is controlled to when the next jackpot occurs is 9 times. In addition, in one small winning game, about one game ball B can enter the second big prize opening 2006, so the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained in one small winning game becomes "15 balls". That is, when the set value is 1, the expected value of prize balls that can be won by small hits in a variable probability state is "135 balls" (9 times x 15 balls). Similarly, when the setting value is 2, the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in a variable probability state is ``13 times x 15 balls'' = ``195 balls'', and when the setting value is 3, the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in a variable probability condition is ``195 balls''. The expected value of the possible prize balls is ``240 balls'' which is ``16 times x 15 balls'', and the expected value of the possible prize balls that can be obtained by small hits in the probability variable state when the setting value is 4 is ``19 times x 15 balls''. "285 balls", the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in a variable probability state when the setting value is 5 is "345 balls" of "23 times x 15 balls", and a small hit in a variable probability state when the setting value is 6 The expected value of prize balls that can be obtained is ``390 balls'' (26 times x 15 balls).

In addition, in Figure 212 (B), when the setting value is 1, the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by small hits in the variable probability state is ``60 balls'' of ``4 times x 15 balls'', and when the setting value is 2, the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by small hits is in the variable probability state. The expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit is "75 balls" of "5 times x 15 balls", and the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in the probability variable state when the setting value is 3 is "5 times x 15 balls". x 15 balls'', ``75 balls'', setting value 4, the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by small hit in variable probability state is ``7 times x 15 balls'', ``105 balls'', setting value 5, The expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in a variable probability state is "135 balls" of "9 times x 15 balls", and the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in a variable probability state is "135 balls" of "9 times x 15 balls". ``195 pitches'' (13 innings x 15 pitches).

In this way, depending on the setting value, the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in a variable probability state and the expected value of the number of small hits that can be won differ (in Fig. 212 (B), it is partially the same) Therefore, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game, it is possible to estimate the setting value according to the number of prize balls acquired in the small win game or the number of small win wins until the next jackpot occurs. can. Note that a performance suggesting a set value (setting value suggestion performance) may be executed in accordance with the number of prize balls obtained in the small winning game, the number of winnings of the small winning, and the like.

For example, as shown in FIG. 213, the peripheral control unit 1510 displays a gauge section having six scales 1600a from 1 to 6 to correspond to six levels of setting values on the effect display device 1600 as a setting value suggestion effect, The scale between the gauge parts is colored according to the number of prize balls won (number of payouts) by winning into the second big prize opening 2006, and as the number of prize balls won by small wins increases, the gauge part changes from the initial display mode to the next stage. Alternatively, the gauge section may be colored in different colors (increasing the number of colored displays between the scales), so that all the spaces between the scales on the gauge section are colored to indicate a high setting value. Specifically, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. It is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this initial display mode, on the premise that the number of prize balls won is "0", only the leftmost one of the six scales is displayed in color as the corresponding setting value. The character 1600b indicates to the player that the gauge section indicates the set value by displaying the message "What is the set value...?" in a speech bubble 1600c.

Then, when the peripheral control unit 1510 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small winning game after the jackpot game exceeds the expected value at setting value 1 and falls within the range of the expected value at setting value 2. , Out of the six scales on the gauge section, the second scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the first and second scales from the left side are displayed in color) to indicate that the "setting value is 2 or more". At the same time, "Maybe 2 or more?" is displayed in a speech bubble 1600c as a line for the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the set value is 2 or more (FIG. 213(B)).

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1510 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small winning game after the jackpot game exceeds the expected value at setting value 2 and falls within the range of the expected value at setting value 3, , Out of the six scales on the gauge section, the third scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the first to third scales from the left side are displayed in color) to indicate that the "setting value is 3 or more". At the same time, "Is it 3 or more?" is displayed in a speech bubble 1600c as a line for the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the set value is 3 or more (FIG. 213(C)).

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1510 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small winning game after the jackpot game exceeds the expected value at setting value 3 and falls within the range of the expected value at setting value 4, , Out of the six scales on the gauge part, the fourth scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the first to fourth scales from the left side are displayed in color) to indicate that the "setting value is 4 or more". At the same time, "4 or more!?" is displayed in a speech bubble 1600c as a line for the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the set value is 4 or more (FIG. 213(D)).

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1510 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small winning game after the jackpot game exceeds the expected value at setting value 4 and falls within the range of the expected value at setting value 5. , Out of the six scales on the gauge section, the fifth scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the first to fifth scales from the left side are displayed in color) to indicate that the "set value is 5 or more". At the same time, "Over 5?" is displayed in a speech bubble 1600c as a line for the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the set value is 5 or more (FIG. 213(E)).

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1510 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small winning game after the jackpot game exceeds the expected value at setting value 5 and falls within the range of the expected value at setting value 6. , out of the six scales on the gauge section, the sixth scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (all scales are displayed in color) to suggest that the "setting value is 6", and also to indicate the character 1600b. ``You did it! It might be 6!!!'' is displayed in a speech bubble 1600c as a line to more clearly suggest that the set value is 6 (FIG. 213(F)).

After the sixth scale from the left of the six scales on the gauge section is displayed in color (all scales are displayed in color), the final stage of display has already been reached, so it is a jackpot. The next jackpot game will start without changing the display on the gauge section depending on the number of prize balls paid out in the small winning game after the game, or if there is an ending condition of variable probability, the ending condition will be satisfied. Until then, all the scales will continue to be displayed in color.

In addition, with all six scales on the gauge section displayed in color, further setting suggestions may be made separately.For example, with all six scales on the gauge section displayed in color, a jackpot game When paying out a prize ball in a later small winning game, the highest setting is confirmed to definitively inform the player that it is the highest setting (setting value 6) based on the detection of the ball entering in the second big prize opening 2006. A special performance lottery may be conducted to execute the performance. Specifically, with all six scales on the gauge part colored and displayed, every time a ball is detected in the second grand prize opening 2006, a special lottery will be held where you can win at 1/1000. By winning, you will receive a special mode audio output (message voice saying "Congratulations on setting 6!"), various lamp lights on the door frame 3 in the special mode (lamp lights in rainbow colors using 7 colors), and a production display device 1600. For example, a maximum setting confirmation effect consisting of a special display (message display of "Congratulations on setting 6!") at the same time is performed at the same time. In this way, by executing the highest setting confirmation effect with all the scales displayed in color, it is possible to give a feeling of satisfaction with the effect related to the setting suggestion that was performed earlier, and to further improve the performance without making the player bored. It is possible to provide the player with a sense of satisfaction, and to further improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a jackpot occurs before all the scales are colored and displayed, the display mode of the gauge part is cleared after the jackpot, and as a result, a jackpot occurs and the jackpot game Later, each time the control is changed to a variable state, a setting value suggestion effect is executed to suggest the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, so the actual setting value is estimated by statistics on the setting value suggested by the setting value suggestion effect. You will be able to do it. In other words, if the variable probability state is executed only once, the number of prize balls obtained by small hits during this variable probability state may differ from the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained according to the setting value. Although it is difficult to determine, if you count the number of prize balls won by small hits for each probability change state between jackpots, the proportion around a specific number of prize balls will increase, so it is possible to calculate the number of prize balls as the expected value. By comparing, it becomes possible to infer the setting value. In this example, it can be inferred that the setting value that is most likely to be suggested in the setting value suggestion effects performed multiple times is the actual setting value.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the display mode of the gauge section may be taken over until the probability change state ends without clearing the display mode of the gauge section. In addition, in this case, the six scales on the gauge section are set as the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained in one probability change state or the number of small hits that can occur in one probability change state according to the setting value. All the scales may not be colored in the probability change state of times. As a result, it is possible to suggest a setting value based on the number of winning balls, the number of small hits, etc. obtained in a state of variable probability over a long period of time, and therefore it is possible to improve the reliability of the suggested setting value.

In addition, the above-mentioned various setting value suggestion performances are executed by the peripheral control unit 1511, and the prize balls obtained by the small winning game that is executed in a variable probability state during the period from the end of the jackpot game until the start of the next jackpot. Because it is based on numbers and not actual settings, the suggested settings may differ from the actual settings. In addition, information regarding the setting value (setting value information) may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and in this case, the prize obtained in the small winning game after the jackpot game is sent as the setting value suggestion effect. In addition to the number of pitches, the setting value may be suggested based on setting value information. Specifically, when the number of prize balls obtained in a small winning game after a jackpot game exceeds the expected value of the setting value indicated by the setting value information, the suggestion form of the setting value suggestion performance is not changed. Alternatively, if the number of prize balls obtained in a small winning game after a jackpot game is less than the expected value of the setting value indicated by the setting value information, the setting value or setting value information indicated by the setting value information by lottery etc. The suggestion mode of the setting value suggestion performance may be changed in accordance with the setting value less than or equal to the setting value indicated by . With this configuration, the reliability of the setting value suggestion performance can be increased, and the setting value suggested by the setting value suggestion performance can be drawn to attention.

Further, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1510 grasps the number of prize balls paid out in the small winning game after the jackpot game, and when the peripheral control unit 1510 determines that the total number of prize balls exceeds the expected value for each setting value, the peripheral control unit 1510 However, the setting suggestion in the variable probability state is not limited to this form, and may be as follows.

For example, when there is a six-stage gauge section as described above, each time the peripheral control section 1510 determines that the number of prize balls paid out by a small hit has reached a certain value, one scale 1600 is colored. , the final stage of coloring the scale 1600 may indicate to the player that the setting is high. In this case, it is preferable that the coloring of the scale 1600 at the final stage is achieved using the expected value of the number of prize balls paid out in the small winning game after the winning game with the setting value 6 as a guide. If the expected value of the number of prize balls paid out in a small winning game after a winning game with a value of 6 is "195 balls", the payout of "195 balls + α balls (α < 195)" is colored on the scale 1600 at the final stage. An example of this is timing the achievement.

In addition, the peripheral control unit 1510 determines that the number of times the second special lottery result has reached a certain value is not based on the prize balls paid out as a result of a small hit. By coloring the two scales 1600 and reaching the final stage of coloring the scale 1600 (for example, when the number of times the second special lottery result is a small hit reaches 80), you can set it to high. It may also be possible to suggest something to the player. In this case, the difficulty of achieving this will change depending on the relationship between the jackpot probability and the small win probability in the variable probability state at the actually set setting value. Depending on the display status of the gauge section (for example, the situation where the final stage is reached with one more scale coloring), the result of the second special lottery may be a small hit rather than a jackpot, in anticipation of the setting value suggestion. It is also possible to provide a new game experience by focusing on the game.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a new game in which the setting value is estimated according to the number of prize balls won in the small winning game after the jackpot game and the number of wins in the small winning game when the pachinko machine 1 is controlled in a variable probability state. can provide sex.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 137 has the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 of FIG. A control board 1310 is provided. This main control board 1310 has a test connector 1310k shown in FIG. 141 that can be electrically connected to a test harness as wiring for extracting an output signal from the main control MPU 1310a and transmitting it to a test device that tests the pachinko machine 1. Now you can prepare.

When the pachinko machine 1 is tested by a test device, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, whereas the test connector 1310k is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y, which is the back surface side of the main control board 1310.

In this way, since the test connector 1310k is mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific testing institution, and when the pachinko machine 1 is Even when the main control board 1310 is produced as a mass-produced machine to be shipped, the area where the test connector 1310k is mounted will not be formed as an empty area on the front side of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface of the main control board 1310 can be increased.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310' in FIG. 139(a) as a game control board that can control the progress of the game. . These multiple electronic components include a ZIP type main control MPU (denoted as part number "MIC1" in the figure) included in the lead type shown in Figure 139(a) as a lead type electronic component, and a surface mount type electronic component. The electronic components include an SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 shown in FIG. 139(a), and are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'.

The main control board 1310' includes a parts list area 1310xb' shown in FIG. 139(a) as an information area. This parts list area 1310xb' can display information corresponding to identifiers of surface-mounted electronic parts. Information written in the parts list area 1310xb' may include the name of a manufacturer of surface-mounted electronic components (including abbreviations and symbols), the product number of surface-mounted electronic components, and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 139(a), the parts list area 1310xb' contains a parts list of electronic components in which part numbers and product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) are arranged. is printed in white (or black) using silkscreen printing. The size of the part number and product number is larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the component placement area 1310xa'. is printed in white (or black). A delimiter ":" is placed between the part number and the product number (number published in the catalog), so that the part number and product number (number published in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . This delimiter allows the part number and the product number (number published in the catalog) to be distinguished and identified. In addition, the manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black) along with the product number (the number published in the catalog).

In this way, even if the display form of the identifier attached to the surface mount type electronic component mounted on the main control board 1310' is difficult to visually recognize, the information corresponding to this identifier (manufacturer name, product number, etc.) ) is displayed in a parts list area 1310xb' provided in the main control board 1310'. Therefore, the identifier of the surface-mounted electronic component can be reliably visually recognized.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310 in FIG. 137 as a game control board that can control the progress of the game, and The control board 1310 is housed in a main control board box 1320 in FIG. 141 as a sealed board box having sealing means.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z formed in the transparent cover body 1301 in FIG. It is being

As described above, since the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z having a smaller shape than the surface mount type electronic components, the surface mount type electronic components may be removed by some unauthorized means. Even if an attempt is made to remove the electronic component from the main control board 1310 and replace it with an unauthorized electronic component, the surface mount type electronic component cannot be taken out from the ventilation hole 1301z, which is a plurality of holes provided in the main control board box 1320. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a surface mount type electronic component from being replaced with an unauthorized electronic component.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, games can be played, and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. After the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 111 is provided as a setting change means that can change the setting value for setting a probability that is advantageous to the player. The RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is provided separately from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. This pachinko machine 1 further includes a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z as a guide means for guiding information regarding the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633.

In this way, since information regarding the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is guided, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 are separated. Even if it is provided on the body, the person who operates the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 does not have to be confused about the operating procedure. By separately providing the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, security can be improved. Therefore, crime prevention can be improved.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention, as shown below. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above embodiment, the guide passage group 2520 is made up of two guide passages, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are three guide passages. The guide passage may be composed of two or more guide passages.

Further, in the above embodiment, the guide passage group 2520 is twisted 90 degrees and then twisted 90 degrees in the opposite direction, so that the inlet and outlet lines are the same, but the invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be twisted so that the inlet and outlet lines are different. Alternatively, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 may be twisted multiple times so that they form a spiral.

Moreover, the present invention is of course not limited to the embodiments described above. For example, in the embodiment, a pachinko machine is exemplified as a game machine, but it is also applicable to other game machines such as a mahjong ball machine and an arranged ball machine. It is also applicable to slot machines that rotate reels. Here, the slot machine will be explained with reference to FIG. 214. FIG. 214 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

As shown in FIG. 214, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door 6002 and a main body portion 6004. The front door 6002 and the main body portion 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). The front door 6002 can be opened from the main body portion 6004 by inserting a key into a keyhole 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise around this hinge.

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door 6002, and a protrusion protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door 6002. A medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 in this protrusion. Further, a storage payment button 6022 and a decorative board 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative board 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, storage settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. has been done. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center of the gaming panel 6006, and through this display window, three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000, performance devices (not shown), etc. can be viewed. It is now possible to see through. The three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side attachment member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004. On the other hand, the performance device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door 6002.

For these variable rotating bodies, a translucent pattern band with multiple types of patterns (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) printed as pattern information is attached to each cylindrical frame. ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotary body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and each variable rotary body is connected to an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown). These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shaft of the stepping motors, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed in the display window that changes continuously from top to bottom. It looks like this.

The performance device includes a plurality of movable performance bodies (not shown), the above-mentioned performance display device 1600, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the operation of a plurality of movable presentation objects, the drawing control of the presentation display device 1600, the light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates, etc. based on various commands from the main control board 1310. The progress of the performance is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

The main control board 1310 starts displaying symbol information in a variable manner based on the operation of the start lever 6014 when a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal slot 6008 as game media, and the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6018, and the right The variable display of symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) and pays out a large amount of medals as game media to the tray 6026 on the condition that the symbol information becomes a predetermined specific display mode.

In addition, in the integrated gaming machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 controls when a predetermined number of game balls as game media are inserted into the ball slot 6008', and when the starting lever 6014 is operated. Based on this, the variable display of the symbol information is started, and the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) on the condition that the symbol information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount to the game ball receptacle 6026 as a game medium.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 2000 Table unit 2003 Normal prize opening (Benefit granting part)
2004 Second starting gate (Benefit granting department)
2005 Big prize opening 2400 Attacker unit 2500 Center accessory 2505 Upstream space 2510 Upper right peripheral wall 2510
2520 Guide passage group 2520a Emphasized section 2521 First guide passage (guidance passage)
2522 Second guide passage (guidance passage)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine where a game is played by drawing a lottery that can be executed by hitting a game ball,
a first game area where a game ball is hit; a second game area where a game ball is hit in a game state different from the game state where the game ball is hit into the first game area;
a center accessory attached from the front to the front surface of the game panel in which the first game area and the second game area are formed, and a display that visually performs a display performance according to the result of the lottery through an opening. a device;
Equipped with
The center accessory has a first partition wall portion on the upper side when viewed from the front, which prevents the game balls from entering, and has a second partition wall portion and a warp entrance capable of receiving the game balls flowing down on the left side when viewed from the front. , a sorting unit that can roll game balls at a position in front of the display device that can be seen through the opening and behind the front surface of the game panel is provided on the lower side when viewed from the front;
The game ball received from the warp entrance is configured to be discharged from the warp exit communicating with the warp entrance to a first rollable part in which the game ball can roll,
The sorting unit is capable of accepting only the game balls hit into the second game area, and also distributes the game balls from the second rollable part that can roll the received game balls and the second rollable part. and a fall prevention wall that prevents the game balls from falling, and the second transfer unit is configured such that the game balls received in the distribution unit are received into either a specific reception port or a first loss port provided on the player side. A fallable part in which the fall prevention wall of the movable part is not provided and the game ball can fall is provided on the player side of the second rollable part,
When a game ball is received into the specific receiving port, a specific detection that can give an advantageous state to the player is performed and the game ball is ejected to the rear side of the gaming machine, whereas a game ball is received into the first losing port. When the game ball is accepted into the first losing port, unlike when the game ball is received into the specific receiving port, the specific detection is not performed and the player is not given any of the advantageous conditions, and the game ball is received into the first losing port. It is discharged to the rear of the machine,
The second game area where a game ball is hit in a game state different from the game state where a game ball is hit into the first game area is located between the first game area and the center accessory attached from the front to the front surface of the game panel. Located on the opposite side of the gaming area in the left and right direction,
The second rollable part is the fallable part from which the game ball can fall from the second rollable part , and is capable of unfavorable falling so that when the game ball falls, it can be received into the first loss opening. We have multiple departments on the player side.
When the game ball hit into the second game area is received by the distribution unit and rolls on the second rollable part, the game ball that is to roll on the second rollable part is transferred to the distribution unit. A game characterized in that the ball can pass through a special cylindrical passage provided on the upstream side of the unit , and the game ball passing through the special cylindrical passage can be seen from the front. Machine.

Images